Ml320 Cdi Operators Manual

Sommer\ Corporate\ Media\ AG
Operator’s Manual
M-Class
Operator’s Manual M-Class
Ê0Mt/q!Ë
1645841581
Order No. 6515 4253 13 Part No. 164 584 15 81 USA Edition A , 2007
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

ML 320 CDI
ML 350
ML 500
ML 63 AMG
Our company and staff congratulate you 앫 Please read this manual carefully,
on the purchase of your new then return it to your vehicle where it
Mercedes-Benz. will be handy for your reference.
Your selection of our product is a demon- 앫 Please follow the recommendations
stration of your trust in our company contained in this manual. They are de-
name. Furthermore, it exemplifies your designed to acquaint you with the opera-
sire to own an automobile that will be as tion of your Mercedes-Benz.
easy as possible to operate and provide
앫 Please pay attention to the warnings
years of service.
and cautions contained in this manual.
Your Mercedes-Benz represents the ef- They are designed to help improve the
forts of many skilled engineers and crafts- safety of the vehicle operator and oc-
men. To help assure your driving pleasure, cupants.
and also the safety of you and your passen-
We extend our best wishes for many miles
gers, we ask you to make a small invest-
of safe, pleasurable driving.
ment of time:
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
A DaimlerChrysler Company

Contents
Introduction .......................................... 9 At a glance .......................................... 21 Getting started................................... 37

Product information................................ 9 Exterior view......................................... 22 Unlocking ............................................. 38
Operator’s Manual ............................... 10 Cockpit................................................. 24 Unlocking with the SmartKey ......... 38
Service and warranty information .. 10 Instrument cluster ................................ 26 Unlocking with KEYLESS-GO*......... 39
Important notice for California Instrument cluster ................................ 28 Starter switch positions.................. 39
retail buyers and lessees of Multifunction steering wheel ................ 30 Adjusting .............................................. 43
Mercedes-Benz automobiles .......... 11 Center console ..................................... 31 Seats .............................................. 43
Maintenance .................................. 12 Upper part ...................................... 31 Steering wheel................................ 46
Roadside Assistance ...................... 12 Lower part ...................................... 32 Mirrors............................................ 49
Change of address or ownership.... 13 Overhead control panel ........................ 33 Driving.................................................. 51
Operating your vehicle Storage compartments......................... 34 Fastening the seat belts ................. 51
outside the USA or Canada ............ 13 Door control panel................................ 36 Starting the engine ......................... 54
Where to find it.................................... 15 Parking brake ................................. 57
Symbols............................................... 16 Driving off ....................................... 58
Operating safety .................................. 17 Switching on headlamps................. 59
Proper use of the vehicle ............... 17 Turn signals .................................... 60
Problems with your vehicle.................. 18 Windshield wipers........................... 60
Reporting safety defects...................... 19 Rear window wiper/washer............ 62
Reporting safety defects ................ 19 Problems while driving.................... 63
Vehicle data recording......................... 20 Parking and locking.............................. 65
Information regarding electronic Parking brake ................................. 65
recording devices........................... 20 Switching off headlamps................. 66
Turning off the engine..................... 66
Releasing seat belts........................ 67
Locking ........................................... 68

Contents
Memory function* ............................. 134

Safety and Security ........................... 69 Controls in detail ............................. 107 Storing positions into memory..... 135
Occupant safety................................... 70 Locking and unlocking ....................... 108 Recalling positions from memory. 135
Air bags .......................................... 71 SmartKey ..................................... 108 Lighting ............................................. 136
Seat belts ....................................... 77 SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* ...... 112 Exterior lamp switch .................... 136
Active head restraint ...................... 80 Opening the doors Combination switch ..................... 140
Rear head restraints....................... 81 from the inside............................. 118 Corner-illuminating
Children in the vehicle.................... 82 Opening the tailgate..................... 119 front fog lamps*........................... 140
Blocking of rear door Closing the tailgate ...................... 121 Hazard warning flasher ................ 142
window operation........................... 93 Automatic central locking ............ 126 Interior lighting ............................ 142
Panic alarm .......................................... 95 Locking and unlocking Door entry lamps ......................... 144
Activating ....................................... 95 from the inside............................. 126 Cargo compartment lamp ............ 144
Deactivating ................................... 95 Seats ................................................. 128 Instrument cluster ............................. 145
Driving safety systems......................... 96 Front seat active head restraints . 128 Adjusting instrument
ABS ................................................ 96 Rear seat head restraints ............. 128 cluster illumination ...................... 145
BAS ................................................ 97 Lumbar support............................ 130 Resetting trip odometer ............... 146
ESP® ............................................... 98 Multicontour seat*....................... 130 Tachometer.................................. 146
EBP............................................... 101 Seat heating*............................... 131 Outside temperature indicator..... 146
4-ETS............................................ 102 Seat ventilation* .......................... 132
Anti-theft systems.............................. 103
Immobilizer................................... 103
Anti-theft alarm system................ 103

Contents
Control system .................................. 147 Emergency operation 3-zone automatic climate control*..... 220
Multifunction display.................... 147 (Limp-Home Mode) ....................... 198 Deactivating the
Multifunction steering wheel........ 148 Transfer case...................................... 199 automatic climate
Menus .......................................... 150 Good visibility ..................................... 200 control system.............................. 224
Standard display menu ................ 154 Headlamp cleaning system* ......... 200 Operating the automatic
AMG menu ................................... 156 Rear view mirrors.......................... 200 climate control system in
Off-road mode menu .................... 159 Power folding exterior automatic mode............................ 225
Audio menu.................................. 159 rear view mirrors*......................... 202 Setting the temperature ............... 225
Navi* menu.................................. 161 Sun visors ..................................... 203 Adjusting air distribution .............. 226
AIRMATIC*/Compass menu ........ 162 Rear window defroster.................. 205 Adjusting air volume ..................... 227
DISTRONIC* menu....................... 162 Climate control................................... 206 Front defroster ............................. 227
Vehicle status message Deactivating the Maximum cooling MAX COOL....... 228
memory menu .............................. 163 climate control system ................. 210 Air recirculation mode .................. 228
Settings menu.............................. 164 Operating the climate control Air conditioning ............................ 230
Vehicle configuration ................... 178 system in automatic mode............ 210 Using driver-side settings
Trip computer menu..................... 180 Setting the temperature................ 211 for all temperature zones.............. 231
Tel menu* .................................... 182 Adjusting air distribution............... 212 Residual heat and ventilation........ 232
Automatic transmission..................... 185 Adjusting air volume ..................... 212 Rear automatic climate control..... 232
Gear selector lever....................... 185 Front defroster.............................. 213 Power windows .................................. 236
Shifting procedure ....................... 188 Air recirculation mode .................. 214 Opening and closing ..................... 236
Transmission positions................. 189 Air conditioning............................. 216 Synchronizing the door windows .. 238
Driving tips................................... 191 Residual heat and ventilation........ 216 Summer opening feature .............. 239
Gear ranges ................................. 193 Rear climate control*.................... 217 Convenience closing feature......... 239
Steering wheel gearshift control .. 194 Power tilt/sliding sunroof* ................ 241
Shift program (ML 63 AMG only).. 195 Opening and closing ..................... 241
Synchronizing ............................... 244

Contents
Driving systems ................................. 245 Useful features .................................. 294

Cruise control............................... 245 Storage compartments ................ 294 Operation ......................................... 323
Distronic*..................................... 250 Parcel nets ................................... 297 The first 1000 miles (1500 km) ......... 324
Distance warning function*.......... 263 Cup holders.................................. 298 Driving instructions ........................... 325
Downhill Speed Regulation Ashtrays* ..................................... 300 Drive sensibly – save fuel............. 325
(DSR)............................................ 264 Cigarette lighter* ......................... 301 Drinking and driving..................... 325
Off-road driving program .............. 268 Power outlets ............................... 302 Pedals .......................................... 325
Air suspension package* ............. 269 Floormats*................................... 303 Power assistance ......................... 326
Adaptive Damping System Heated steering wheel* ............... 304 Brakes.......................................... 326
(ADS)*.......................................... 269 Telephone* .................................. 305 Driving off .................................... 329
Vehicle level control* ................... 270 Tele Aid* ...................................... 308 Parking......................................... 329
Parktronic system* ...................... 274 Garage door opener* ................... 316 Tires............................................. 329
Rear view camera*....................... 279 Compass ...................................... 321 Hydroplaning................................ 330
Loading .............................................. 281 Infrared reflecting windshield*..... 322 Tire traction ................................. 330
Carriers* ...................................... 281 Tire speed rating .......................... 331
Loading instructions..................... 281 Winter driving instructions ........... 332
Cargo tie-down rings .................... 283 Standing water............................. 333
Hooks........................................... 284 Off-road driving ............................ 333
Expanding cargo compartment .... 284 Trailer towing ............................... 342
Cargo compartment cover blind... 286 Passenger compartment.............. 348
Partition net* ............................... 287 Driving abroad ............................. 348
Cargo management system*........ 290 Control and operation
of radio transmitters .................... 348
Catalytic converter
(gasoline engine).......................... 349

Contents
Oxidation catalyst DOT, Tire Identification Number

(diesel engine).............................. 349 (TIN) .............................................. 389 Practical hints .................................. 413
Emission control .......................... 350 Maximum tire load ........................ 391 What to do if … ................................... 414
Coolant temperature.................... 350 Maximum tire inflation pressure ... 391 Lamps in instrument cluster ......... 414
At the gas station .............................. 352 Uniform Tire Quality Grading Lamp in center console ................ 426
Refueling ...................................... 352 Standards (U.S. vehicles).............. 392 Vehicle status messages in the
Check regularly and Tire ply material ............................ 394 multifunction display .................... 428
before a long trip.......................... 354 Tire and loading terminology......... 394 Where will I find ...? ............................ 469
Engine compartment ......................... 356 Rotating tires ................................ 397 First aid kit.................................... 469
Hood ............................................ 356 Winter driving ..................................... 399 Vehicle tool kit.............................. 469
Engine oil ..................................... 358 Winter tires ................................... 399 Minispare wheel
Transmission fluid level................ 362 Block heater (Canada only) ........... 400 (except ML 63 AMG)..................... 473
Coolant level ................................ 362 Snow chains.................................. 400 Collapsible tire
Windshield/rear window Maintenance....................................... 401 (ML 63 AMG only)......................... 474
washer system and Maintenance service indicator Unlocking/locking in an emergency .. 475
headlamp cleaning system* ........ 363 message ....................................... 401 Unlocking the vehicle ................... 475
Tires and wheels................................ 365 Calling up the maintenance Locking the vehicle....................... 476
Important guidelines .................... 365 service indicator display ............... 403 Unlocking and opening
Tire care and maintenance........... 366 Resetting the maintenance the tailgate ................................... 476
Direction of rotation..................... 368 service indicator ........................... 403 Fuel filler flap ................................ 477
Loading the vehicle ...................... 368 Vehicle care........................................ 404 Opening/closing in an emergency ..... 478
Recommended tire Cleaning and care of the vehicle... 404 Power tilt/sliding sunroof*........... 478
inflation pressure ......................... 374 Resetting activated head restraints.... 479
Checking tire inflation pressure ... 375 Replacing SmartKey batteries ............ 480
Tire labeling.................................. 385
Load identification ....................... 389

Contents
Replacing bulbs ................................. 482 Fuses ................................................. 522 Electrical system ............................... 540
Bulbs ............................................ 482 Fuse box in Main Dimensions............................... 541
Replacing bulbs for front lamps.... 485 engine compartment.................... 523 Weights ............................................. 542
Replacing bulbs for rear lamps..... 490 Fuse box in cargo compartment... 523 Fuels, coolants, lubricants................. 543
Adjusting headlamp aim............... 492 Fuse box in passenger Capacities .................................... 543
Replacing wiper blades ...................... 494 compartment ............................... 524 Engine oils ................................... 546
Front wiper blades ....................... 494 Emergency engine shut-down ...... 525 Engine oil additives ...................... 546
Rear wiper blade .......................... 495 Air conditioning refrigerant .......... 546
Flat tire .............................................. 497 Brake fluid.................................... 546
Preparing the vehicle.................... 497 Technical data ................................. 527 Premium unleaded gasoline
Mounting the spare wheel............ 498 Parts service...................................... 528 (gasoline engine).......................... 547
Bleeding the fuel system Warranty coverage............................. 529 Gasoline additives
(diesel engine only) ............................ 506 Loss of Service and Warranty (gasoline engine).......................... 547
Battery ............................................... 507 Information Booklet ..................... 529 Fuel requirements........................ 548
Disconnecting, removing, Identification labels ........................... 530 Coolants ...................................... 549
reinstalling and Layout of poly-V-belt drive ................. 532 Windshield washer and
reconnecting the battery.............. 509 ML 350 ........................................ 532 headlamp cleaning* system......... 551
Charging the battery .................... 514 ML 320 CDI.................................. 532
Jump starting ..................................... 515 ML 500 ........................................ 532
Towing the vehicle ............................. 518 ML 63 AMG .................................. 533 Index................................................. 553
Installing towing eye bolt.............. 520 Engine................................................ 534
Stranded vehicle .......................... 521 Rims and tires.................................... 536
Same size tires............................. 537
Spare wheel ................................. 538

Introduction
Product information
왔 Product information
Please observe the following in your own We are unable to make an assessment for Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts as well as
best interest: other products and therefore cannot be conversion parts and accessories
held responsible for them, even if in indi- approved by us are available at your
We recommend using Genuine
vidual cases an official approval or authori- authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Mercedes-Benz Parts as well as conversion
zation by governmental or other agencies Center where you will receive comprehen-
parts and accessories explicitly approved
should exist. Use of such parts and acces- sive information, also on permissible tech-
by us for your vehicle model.
sories could adversely affect the safety, nical modifications, and where proper
We have tested these parts to determine performance or reliability of your vehicle. installation will be performed.
their reliability, safety and special Please do not use them.
suitability for Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
9
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
This Operator’s Manual contains a great We continuously strive to improve our Service and warranty information
deal of useful information. We urge you to product, and ask for your understanding
read it carefully and familiarize yourself that we reserve the right to make changes The Service and Warranty Information
with the vehicle before driving. in design and equipment. Therefore, infor- Booklet contains detailed information
mation, illustrations and descriptions in about the warranties covering your
For your own safety and longer service life
this Operator’s Manual might differ from Mercedes-Benz, including:
of the vehicle, we urge you to follow the in-
your vehicle. 앫 New Light Truck Limited Warranty,
structions and warnings contained in this
manual. Ignoring them could result in dam- Optional equipment is also described in 앫 Emission System Warranty,
age to the vehicle or personal injury to you this manual, including operating instruc-
or others. Vehicle damage caused by fail- tions wherever necessary. Since they are 앫 Emission Performance Warranty,
ure to follow instructions is not covered by special-order items, the descriptions and 앫 California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. illustrations herein may vary slightly from Vermont Emission Control System
the actual equipment of your vehicle. Warranty
Your vehicle may have some or all of the
equipment described in this manual. If there are any equipment details that are (California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
Therefore, you may find explanations for not shown or described in this Operator’s Vermont only),
optional equipment not installed in your Manual, your authorized Mercedes-Benz 앫 State Warranty Enforcement Laws
vehicle. If you have any questions about Light Truck Center will be glad to inform (Lemon Laws).
the operation of any equipment, your you of correct care and operating proce-
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck dures.
Center will be glad to demonstrate the The Operator’s Manual and Maintenance
proper procedures. Booklet are important documents and
should be kept with the vehicle.
10
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Important notice for California retail (1) the same substantial defect or mal- (3) the vehicle is out of service by reason
buyers and lessees of Mercedes-Benz function results in a condition that is of repair of the same or different sub-
automobiles likely to cause death or serious bodily stantial defects or malfunctions for a
injury if the vehicle is driven, that de- cumulative total of more than
Under California law you may be entitled to fect or malfunction has been subject to 30 calendar days.
a replacement of your vehicle or a refund repair two or more times, and you have
Written notification should not be sent to a
of the purchase price or lease price, if directly notified Mercedes-Benz USA,
dealer, it should be addressed to
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its LLC in writing of the need for its repair,
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC,
authorized repair or service facilities fail to
(2) the same substantial defect or mal- Customer Assistance Center,
fix one or more substantial defects or mal-
function of a less serious nature than One Mercedes Drive, Montvale, NJ
functions in the vehicle that are covered by
category (1) has been subject to repair 07645-0350.
its express warranty after a reasonable
four or more times and you have direct-
number of repair attempts. During the pe-
ly notified us in writing of the need for
riod of 18 months from original delivery of
its repair, or
the vehicle or the accumulation of
18 000 miles (approx. 29 000 km) on the
odometer of the vehicle, whichever occurs
first, a reasonable number of repair at-
tempts is presumed for a retail buyer or
lessee if one or more of the following oc-
curs:
11
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Maintenance Roadside Assistance Additional charges may be applicable for a

breakdown location determined not to be a
The Maintenance Booklet describes all the The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance reasonably accessible roadside location as
necessary maintenance work which should Program provides factory-trained technical determined by our authorized technician
be performed at regular intervals. help in the event of a breakdown. Calls to and tow service provider.
the toll-free Roadside Assistance number
Always have the Maintenance Booklet with For additional information refer to the
you when you take the vehicle to your 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA) Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada) Program brochure in your vehicle literature
Center for service. The service advisor will portfolio.
will be answered by Mercedes-Benz Cus-
record each service in the booklet for you. tomer Assistance Representatives
24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
Roadside Assistance will be provided in ac-
cordance with standard program guide-
lines which include providing service to the
vehicle up to a reasonable distance from a
paved roadway. We will make every effort
to assist in a breakdown situation, howev-
er, the accessibility of your vehicle will be
determined by our authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center techni-
cian or the tow service provider on a
case-by-case basis and may be a factor in
our ability to respond.
12
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Change of address or ownership Operating your vehicle outside the USA

or Canada
If you change your address, be sure to
send in the “Change of Address Notice” If you plan to operate your vehicle in for-
found in the Service and Warranty Informa- eign countries, please be aware that:
tion Booklet, or simply call the
앫 service facilities or replacement parts
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
may not be readily available,
Center (in the USA) at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes, or Customer Ser- 앫 unleaded gasoline for vehicles with cat-
vice (in Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. It is in alytic converters may not be available;
your own interest that we can contact you the use of leaded fuels will damage the
should the need arise. catalysts,
If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all 앫 gasoline may have a considerably low-
literature with the vehicle to make it avail- er octane rating, and improper fuel can
able to the next operator. cause engine damage.
If you bought this vehicle used, be sure to
send in the “Notice of Purchase of Used
Truck” found in the Service and Warranty
Information Booklet, or call the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-
ter (in the USA) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes,
or Customer Service (in Canada) at
1-800-387-0100.
13
Introduction
Operator’s Manual
Warning! G
This Sport Utility Vehicle is designed for both on-road and off-road use. It can go places and perform tasks for which conventional 2-wheel drive
passenger cars are not intended. This vehicle will handle and maneuver differently from conventional passenger cars in driving conditions which
may occur on streets, highways and off-road use.
This vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center of gravity than many passenger cars. As with other vehicles of this type, if you
make sharp turns at excessive speeds or abrupt maneuvers, the vehicle may roll over or may go out of control and crash. Utility vehicles have a
significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. Failure to operate this vehicle safely may result in an accident, rollover of the vehicle,
and severe or fatal injury.
Before you start to drive this vehicle, read the Operator’s Manual. Take time to become familiar with the driving characteristics of this vehicle. Be
sure you are familiar with all vehicle controls. Learn how your vehicle handles on different road surfaces. Do not attempt sharp turns at excessive
speeds or abrupt maneuvers or other unsafe driving actions that can cause loss of vehicle control. When driving off-road or working the vehicle
hard, do not overload it. And, always wear your seat belts at all times. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than
a person wearing a seat belt.
14
Introduction
Where to find it
왔 Where to find it
This Operator’s Manual is designed to pro-
vide comprehensive support information Controls in detail Technical data
for you, the vehicle operator. Each section Here you will find detailed information All important technical data for your vehi-
has its own reference color. about the equipment installed on your ve- cle can be found in this section.
hicle. This section expands on the “Getting
started” section and also describes techni-
At a glance cal innovations. If you are already familiar Indexes
Here you will find an overview of all the with the basic functions of your vehicle, The table of contents and the index are de-
controls that can be operated from the this section will be of particular interest to signed to help you find information quickly
driver’s seat. you. and easily.
The following publications are part of your
Getting started Operation vehicle documentation:
Here you will find all the information you Here you will find all the information you 앫 this Operator’s Manual
need for your first drive. You should read need for the proper operation of your vehi- 앫 the Maintenance Booklet
this section first if this is your first cle.
Mercedes-Benz vehicle or if you are rent- Separate operating instructions will be
ing or borrowing this vehicle. provided as required depending on the
Practical hints equipment options installed in your vehi-
cle.
This section provides fast assistance for
Safety and Security dealing with problems you may encounter.
Here you will find descriptions of the safety
and security features of your vehicle.
15
Introduction
Symbols
Trademarks: 컄 Page This symbol tells you where to

앫 ®
ESP is a registered trademark of
Warning! G look for further information on a
topic.
DaimlerChrysler. Warning notices draw your attention to haz-
컄컄 This continuation symbol marks
앫 HomeLink® is a registered trademark ards that may endanger your health or life,
of Prince, a Johnson Controls or the health or life of others. a warning which is continued on
Company. the next page.
컄컄 This continuation symbol marks
The following symbols are found in this ! Highlights hazards that may result in
Operator’s Manual: damage to your vehicle. a procedure which is continued
on the next page.
* Optional equipment is identified i Helpful hints or further information you may
find useful. Display Words appearing in the multi-
with an asterisk. Since standard
function display are printed in
equipment varies between models, 왘 This symbol points to instructions for the type shown here.
the descriptions and illustrations in you to follow.
this manual may differ slightly from
the actual equipment of your vehi- 왘 A number of these symbols appearing
cle. in succession indicates a multiple-step
procedure.
16
Introduction
Operating safety
왔 Operating safety
Proper use of the vehicle
Warning! G Warning! G
Proper use of the vehicle requires that you
Work improperly carried out on electronic Heavy blows against the vehicle underbody are familiar with the following information
components and associated software could or tires/wheels, for example when running and rules:
cause them to cease functioning. Because over an obstacle, road debris or a pothole,
앫 the safety precautions in this manual
the vehicle’s electronic components are in- may cause serious damage and impair the
terconnected, any modifications made may operating safety of your vehicle. If you feel a 앫 the “Technical data” section in this
produce an undesired effect on other sys- sudden significant vibration or ride distur- manual
tems. Electronic malfunctions could bance, or you suspect that damage to your 앫 traffic rules and regulations
seriously impair the operating safety of your vehicle has occurred, you should turn on
vehicle. your hazard warning flashers, carefully slow 앫 motor vehicle laws and safety stan-
down, and drive with caution to an area dards
See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center for repairs or modifications to which is a safe distance from the road.
electronic components. Inspect the vehicle underbody and Warning! G
Other improper work or modifications on the tires/wheels for possible damage. If the ve-
hicle appears unsafe, have it towed to the Various warning labels are attached to your
vehicle could also have a negative impact on
nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Light vehicle. These warning labels are intended
the operating safety of the vehicle.
Truck Center or other qualified maintenance to make you and others aware of various
Some safety systems only function while the or repair facility for further inspection or re- risks. You should not remove any of these
engine is running. You should therefore nev- pairs. warning labels unless explicitly instructed to
er turn off the engine while driving. do so by information on the label itself. Re-
moval of any of these labels may cause you
and others to be unaware of certain risks
which may result in an accident and/or per-
sonal injury.
17
Introduction
Problems with your vehicle
If you should experience a problem with your vehicle, particularly one that you believe may affect its safe operation, we urge you to
immediately contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center to have the problem diagnosed and corrected if required. If the
matter is not handled to your satisfaction, please discuss the problem with the Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center management, or if
necessary contact us at one of the following addresses:
In the USA:
Customer Assistance Center
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada:
Customer Relations Department
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario, M4G 4C9
18
Introduction
Reporting safety defects
왔 Reporting safety defects
For the USA only:
The following text is published as required of manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the
“National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”.
Reporting safety defects
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer,
or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, D.C. 20590.
You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
19
Introduction
Vehicle data recording
Information regarding electronic

recording devices
(Including notice pursuant to California Code § 9951)

Please note that your vehicle is equipped with devices that can record vehicle systems data and, if equipped with the Tele Aid* system,
may transmit some data in certain accidents.
This information helps, for example, to diagnose vehicle systems after a collision and to continuously improve vehicle safety.
DaimlerChrysler may access the information and share it with others
앫 for safety research or vehicle diagnosis purposes
앫 with the consent of the vehicle owner or lessee
앫 in response to an official request by law enforcement or other government agency
앫 for use in dispute resolution involving DaimlerChrysler, its affiliates or sales/service organization and/or
앫 as otherwise required or permitted by law.
Please check the Tele Aid* subscription service agreement for details regarding the information that may be recorded or transmitted
via that system.
20
At a glance
Exterior view
Cockpit
Instrument cluster
Multifunction steering wheel
Center console
Overhead control panel
Storage compartments
Door control panel
21
At a glance
Exterior view
22
At a glance
Exterior view
Item Page Item Page Item Page

1 Tailgate 6 Towing eye bolt 9 Windshield wipers 60
Opening 119 Installing 520 Wiper blades, replacing 494
Closing 121 Vehicle tool kit 469 Wiper blades, cleaning 410
Power tailgate* 119, 7 Tires and wheels 365, a Windshield
124 536 Cleaning with wiper fluid 62
Cargo compartment Checking tire inflation 375 Cleaning 410
Vehicle tool kit 469 pressure
b Roof rails 281
Spare wheel 473 Run Flat Indicator 377
(Canada vehicles) Carriers* 281
2 Rear window defroster 208 c Power tilt/sliding sunroof* 241
Tire Pressure Monitoring 379
3 Rear lamps 483 System (U.S. vehicles) d Doors
4 Fuel filler flap 352 Advanced Tire Pressure 381 Locking and unlocking 108
Refueling 352 Monitoring System* Opening and closing 119
Fuel 353, (Canada vehicles)
Locking/unlocking in an 478
547 Flat tire 497 emergency
5 Exterior rear view mirrors Spare wheel 473 e Front lamps 483
Adjusting 49 8 Hood 356 f Headlamp cleaning system* 200
Auto-dimming rear view 201 Engine oil 358
mirrors* Coolant 362
Power folding* 202
23
At a glance
Cockpit
24
At a glance
Cockpit

1 Cruise control lever 246 9 Glove box release 294 k Headlamp washer switch* 200
2 Instrument cluster 26 Glove box lock 295 l Exterior lamp switch 59,
3 Multifunction steering 30 a Glove box 294 136
wheel b Center console 31 m Steering wheel adjustment, 48
4 Horn c Starter switch 40 electrical*
Heated steering wheel* 304
5 Steering wheel gearshift 194 d Steering wheel adjustment, 47
buttons manual n Combination switch 140
6 Gear selector lever for 54 e Hood lock release 356 앫 High beam 59
automatic transmission f Parking brake release 57 앫 Turn signals 60
7 Front Parktronic* warning 276 g Parking brake pedal 65 앫 Windshield wipers 60
indicators
h Power tailgate switch* 119 앫 Rear window wiper 62
8 Overhead control panel 33
j Door control panel 36
25
At a glance
Instrument cluster
26
At a glance
Instrument cluster

1 L Left turn signal 7 Speedometer with: ; Brake warning lamp, 415
indicator lamp - Antilock Brake 414 USA only
2 To dim instrument cluster 145 System (ABS) 3 Brake warning lamp, 415
illumination indicator lamp Canada only
3 Reset button for: ’ Variable speed limiter v Electronic Stability 419
indicator lamp1 Program (ESP®)
앫 Resetting trip odometer 146
l Distance warning 423 warning lamp
앫 Resetting all settings 165
lamp2 H Combination low tire 424
4 To brighten instrument 145 1 pressure/TPMS mal-
Lamp without function. It illuminates when the
cluster illumination ignition is on. It should go out when the engine is function telltale,
5 K Right turn signal running. USA only
2 Vehicles without Distronic*: Warning lamp without
indicator lamp Low tire pressure
function. It illuminates when the ignition is on.
6 Clock It should go out when the engine is running. telltale*, Canada only 424
27
At a glance
Instrument cluster
28
At a glance
Instrument cluster

8 Multifunction display with: a Fuel gauge with: 앫 Distance warning func- 179
앫 Trip odometer 146 Fuel tank reserve warning 420 tion* indicator
lamp 앫 Downhill Speed Regula- 265
앫 Main odometer 147
4 Fuel filler flap indica- 352 tion (DSR) indicator
9 Tachometer with:
tor: The fuel filler flap 앫 Off-road driving program 268
< Seat belt telltale 79, is located on the rear indicator
421 right-hand side 앫 Rear window wiper 62
1 Supplemental 70, b Multifunction display indicator
Restraint System 423 with:
(SRS) indicator lamp
앫 Outside temperature 147,
q Preglow indicator 55 display or digital speed- 168
lamp1 ometer (depending on
? Engine malfunction 417 selected setting in the
indicator lamp, control system)
USA only 앫 Transmission position 189
± Engine malfunction 417 indicator
indicator lamp, 앫 Gear range indicator 193
Canada only
앫 Selected program mode 196
A High beam headlamp 59, indicator1
indicator 140
1 Vehicles with Diesel engine only. 1 AMG vehicles only.
29
At a glance
Multifunction steering wheel
Item Page Item Page

1
1 Multifunction display 147 4 Voice Control*
Operating the control 148 5 Moving within a menu:
system Press button
2 Telephone*: j for next display
Press button k for previous display
s to take a call 6 Voice Control*1
to dial
to redial 7 Menu systems:
Press button
t to end a call
to reject an è for next menu
incoming call ÿ for previous menu
3 Selecting the submenu or
setting the volume:
Press button
æ up/to increase
ç down/to decrease
1
Vehicles without Voice Control: Button without
function.
30
At a glance
Center console
왔 Center console
Upper part Item Page Item Page
1 COMAND system, see sepa- 8 Storage compartment* 296
rate operating instructions 9 Alarm system indicator 104
2 Climate control 206 lamp
3-zone automatic climate 220 a Electronic Stability Program 100
control* (ESP®) switch
Rear window defroster 205 b Adaptive damping system 269
3 Seat heating*, 131 (ADS)* switch
front passenger side c Seat ventilation*, 132
4 Seat ventilation*, 132 driver’s side
front passenger side d Seat heating*, driver’s side 131
5 Parktronic system* 274 e Switch for Downhill Speed 265
deactivation switch Regulation (DSR)
6 Vehicle level control 271 f Hazard warning flasher 142
switch* g Switch for Off-road driving 268
7 Front passenger front air 89, program
bag off indicator lamp 426 ML 63 AMG:
Program mode selector 195
switch for automatic trans-
mission
31
At a glance
Center console
Lower part Item Page

1 Storage compartment 296
앫 Power outlet 302
앫 Ashtray with cigarette 300
lighter*
2 Cup holder 299
3 Armrest storage tray 296
release
4 Armrest storage compart- 296
ment release
5 Card, ticket holder 299
(removable)
32
At a glance
Overhead control panel
왔 Overhead control panel
Item Page Item Page
1 Left reading lamp switch 142 b Front left reading lamp 142
2 Rear interior lighting switch 142 c Garage door opener* 316
3 Automatic interior lighting 142 d Vehicles without 308
switch telephone* installed:
4 Front interior lighting switch 142 Hands-free microphone for
Tele Aid* (emergency call
5 Right reading lamp switch 142 system)
6 Front right interior lamp 142 e Vehicles with telephone* 308
7 Tilt/sliding sunroof* switch 241 installed:
8 Tele Aid* (emergency call 311 Hands-free microphone for
system) button Tele Aid* (emergency call
system) and telephone*
9 Interior rear view mirror 200
f Front left interior lamp 142
a Front right reading lamp 142
33
At a glance
34
At a glance
Item Page Item Page

1 Parcel net in front passen- 298 b Storage compartment* (de- 296
ger footwell pending on equipment con-
2 Glove box/CD changer* 294 figuration for your model)
3 Door pocket c Depending on vehicle con-

figuration:
4 Parcel net on front passen- 298 Storage compartment 296
ger seat backrest Ashtray* 300
5 Door pocket d Cup holders 298
6 Vehicle tool kit, spare wheel 469 e Storage tray with tele- 296
7 Door pocket phone* compartment
8 Parcel net on driver’s seat 298 Storage compartment with 296
backrest coin holder
9 Door pocket f Rear storage compartments 297
a Holder for gas cards 203 g Cup holder in rear armrest 299
35
At a glance
Door control panel
Item Page
1 Inside door handle 118
2 Central unlocking switch 127
Central locking switch 127
3 Exterior rear view mirror 49
adjustment
4 Selection buttons for exteri- 49
or rear view mirror adjust-
ment
Power-folding exterior rear 202
view mirrors*
5 Switches for opening/clos- 236
ing front and rear door
windows
6 Rear door window override 93
switch
7 Remote tailgate release 119,
switch, power tailgate* 121
36
Getting started
Unlocking
Adjusting
Driving
Parking and locking
37
Getting started
Unlocking
The “Getting started” section provides an Unlocking with the SmartKey

overview of the vehicle’s most basic func- Warning! G
tions. First-time Mercedes-Benz owners
should pay special attention to the infor- When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
mation given here. SmartKey from the starter switch, take it
with you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave
If you are already familiar with the basic children unattended in the vehicle, or with
functions described here, the “Controls in access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsuper-
detail” section will provide you with further vised use of vehicle equipment may cause
information. The corresponding page an accident and/or serious personal injury.
references are located at the end of each
segment.
왘 Press unlock button Œ on the
SmartKey
SmartKey.
1 ‹ Lock button
2 Š Unlock button* for tailgate All turn signal lamps flash once. The
3 Œ Unlock button vehicle unlocks. The locking knobs in
4 Â Panic button (컄 page 95) the doors move up. The anti-theft alarm
system is disarmed. The locator light-
ing comes on if the feature is enabled
in the control system (컄 page 172).
왘 Enter the vehicle and insert the
SmartKey in the starter switch.
For more information, see “Locking and
unlocking” (컄 page 108).
38
Getting started
Unlocking
Unlocking with KEYLESS-GO* 왘 Grasp an outside door handle or the Starter switch positions
tailgate handle.
With the KEYLESS-GO function, you can
lock or unlock the vehicle without using
All turn signal lamps flash once. The ve-
hicle unlocks. The locking knobs in the
Warning! G
the remote control buttons on the
doors move up. The anti-theft alarm
SmartKey and start the engine without in- When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
system is disarmed. The locator light-
serting the SmartKey into the starter SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
ing comes on if the feature is enabled
switch. from the starter switch, take it with you and
in the control system (컄 page 172).
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat-
i To unlock the vehicle, the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO must be outside the vehicle, no i If the vehicle has been parked for more than tended in the vehicle, or with access to an
further than approximately 3 feet (1 meter) away 72 hours, you must pull an outside door handle unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehi-
from the respective door. in order to activate the KEYLESS-GO function. cle equipment may cause an accident
왘 Enter the vehicle. and/or serious personal injury.
Warning! G For more information, see “SmartKey with

KEYLESS-GO*” (컄 page 112).
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you, and
tended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehi-
cle equipment may cause an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
39
Getting started
Unlocking
SmartKey mains on after starting the engine or ! If the SmartKey cannot be turned in the
comes on while driving, refer to “Lamps starter switch, the battery may not be sufficient-
in instrument cluster” (컄 page 414). ly charged.
3 Starting position 앫 Check the battery and charge it if necessary
(컄 page 507).
i When you switch on the ignition, the indica-
tor and warning lamps (except high beam head- 앫 Get a jump start (컄 page 515).
lamp indicator lamp and turn signal indicator To prevent accelerated battery discharge or a
lamps unless activated) in the instrument cluster completely discharged battery, always remove
come on. The indicator and warning lamps (ex- the SmartKey from the starter switch when the
cept high beam headlamp indicator lamp and engine is not in operation.
turn signal indicator lamps if activated) will go
Starter switch out when the engine is running. This indicates
that the respective systems are operational.
0 For removing SmartKey
1 Power supply for some electrical con- i When the SmartKey is removed from the
sumers, such as seat adjustment starter switch and the automatic transmission is
in a position other than P, the automatic trans-
2 Ignition (power supply for all electrical mission automatically shifts to P.
consumers) and driving position
All lamps (except high beam headlamp
indicator lamp and turn signal indicator
lamps unless activated) in the instru-
ment cluster come on. If a lamp in the
instrument cluster fails to come on
when the ignition is switched on, have
it checked and replaced if necessary. If
a lamp in the instrument cluster re-
40
Getting started
Unlocking
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* i The KEYLESS-GO start/stop button does

not need to be removed from the starter switch
Vehicles equipped with the KEYLESS-GO
when you leave the vehicle. However, always
feature are supplied with a SmartKey with take the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO with you
integrated KEYLESS-GO function and a when you leave the vehicle. As long as the
removable KEYLESS-GO start/stop SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is in the vehicle, the
button. vehicle’s electrical systems can be switched on
or the engine can be started using the
With the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button KEYLESS-GO start/stop button.
inserted and the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO present in the vehicle, press-
ing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
앫 without the brake pedal depressed 3 USA only
corresponds to the various starter 4 Canada only
switch positions (컄 page 42)
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be
앫 with the brake pedal firmly depressed located in the vehicle.
will start the engine (컄 page 54)
왘 Insert KEYLESS-GO start/stop
If you wish or should there be a need to button 1 into starter switch 2 (if not
insert the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO in inserted already).
the starter switch, the KEYLESS-GO 1 KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
2 Starter switch 왘 Make sure the automatic transmission
start/stop button can be easily removed
is set to P (컄 page 187).
by pulling it out of the starter switch.
왘 Do not depress the brake pedal.
41
Getting started
Unlocking
Position 0 Ignition (or Position 2) i When you switch on the ignition, the
indicator and warning lamps (except high beam
Before you press the KEYLESS-GO 왘 Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
headlamp indicator lamp and turn signal indica-
start/stop button, the vehicle’s on-board button twice. tor lamps unless activated) in the instrument
electronics have status 0 (as with cluster come on. The indicator and warning
This supplies power for all electrical
SmartKey removed). lamps (except high beam headlamp indicator
consumers.
lamp and turn signal indicator lamps if activated)
Position 1 All lamps (except high beam headlamp should go out when the engine is running. This
indicator lamp and turn signal indicator indicates that the respective systems are
왘 Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop operational.
lamps unless activated) in the instru-
button once. ment cluster come on. If a lamp in the For information on starting the engine
This supplies power for some electrical instrument cluster fails to come on using the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button,
consumers, such as seat adjustment. when the ignition is switched on, have see “Starting with KEYLESS-GO*”
it checked and replaced if necessary. If (컄 page 55).
i If you now press the KEYLESS-GO a lamp in the instrument cluster re-
start/stop button For more information on KEYLESS-GO, see
mains on after starting the engine or
앫 once more, the ignition (position 2) is “SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*”
comes on while driving, refer to “Lamps
switched on
in instrument cluster” (컄 page 414). (컄 page 112).
앫 twice more, the power supply is again
switched off i If you now press the KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button once more, the power supply
is again switched off.
42
Getting started
Adjusting
왔 Adjusting
Warning! G Your seat must be adjusted so that you can

correctly fasten your seat belt (컄 page 51).
Warning! G
All seat, head restraint, steering wheel, and Never place hands under the seat or near According to accident statistics, children
rear view mirror adjustments, as well as fas- any moving parts while a seat is being are safer when properly restrained in the
tening of seat belts, must be done before adjusted. rear seating positions than in the front seat-
the vehicle is put into motion. ing position. Thus, we strongly recommend
that children be placed in the rear seats
Seats Warning! G whenever possible. Regardless of seating
position, children 12 years old and under
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the must be seated and properly secured in an
Warning! G SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* appropriate infant, or toddler restraint, or
from the starter switch, take it with you, and booster seat recommended for the size and
Do not adjust the driver’s seat while driving. lock the vehicle. weight of the child. For additional
Adjusting the seat while driving could cause Even with the SmartKey or the SmartKey information, see “Children in the vehicle”
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. with KEYLESS-GO* removed from the (컄 page 82).
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat starter switch or the SmartKey with A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
backrest in an excessively reclined position KEYLESS-GO* removed from the vehicle, significantly increased if the child restraints
as this can be dangerous. You could slide the power seats can be operated when the are not properly secured in the vehicle
under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide respective door is open. and/or the child is not properly secured in
under it, the belt would apply force at the ab- Therefore, do not leave children unattended the child restraint.
domen or neck. That could cause serious or in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
fatal injuries. The seat backrest and seat vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equip-
belts provide the best restraint when the ment may cause an accident and/or serious
wearer is in a nearly upright position and personal injury.
belts are properly positioned on the body.
43
Getting started
Adjusting
Seat adjustment ! When the rear seats are folded forward, e.g. Vehicles without memory function*:
for cargo compartment expansion (컄 page 284),
The seat adjustment switch is located on 왘 The seat can be adjusted within
the front seats may not be moved to the rear-
the entry side of each front seat base. most position. Otherwise you could damage the 3 minutes after either front door has
front and rear seats. been opened.
! When adjusting the seat backrest tilt and Seat fore and aft adjustment
head restraint height, make sure the sun visor is
folded up (컄 page 203). If the head restraint is in 왘 Press the switch forward or backward
the uppermost position, it could hit and damage in direction of arrow 5.
the sun visor.
Adjust the seat to a comfortable seat-
i The memory function* (컄 page 134) lets ing position that still allows you to
you store the settings for the seat positions reach the accelerator/brake pedal
together with the settings for the steering wheel safely. The position should be as far to
column and the exterior rear view mirrors. the rear as possible, consistent with
1 Head restraint height (vehicles with
memory function)* 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 40). ability to properly operate controls.
2 Seat cushion tilt or
3 Seat height Seat height
4 Backrest tilt Vehicles with memory function*:
왘 Press the switch up or down in
5 Seat fore and aft adjustment 왘 Open the respective door. direction of arrow 3.
! When moving the seat, make sure there are The seat can be adjusted with the
no items in the footwell or behind the seat. respective door opened.
Otherwise you could damage the seat.
or
44
Getting started
Adjusting
Seat cushion tilt Vehicles without memory function*:

For your protection, drive only with properly
왘 Press the switch up or down in positioned and engaged head restraints.
direction of arrow 2 until your upper Adjust the head restraint so that it is as
legs are lightly supported. close to the head as possible and the center
of the head restraint supports the back of
Seat backrest tilt the head at eye level. This will reduce the po-
왘 Press the switch forward or backward tential for injury to the head and neck in the
in direction of arrow 4 until your arms event of an accident or similar situation.
are slightly angled when holding the
steering wheel. ! Do not attempt to remove front seat head
restraints. They can only be removed by qualified 1 Head restraint
Head restraint height technicians. We recommend that you have this 2 Release button
work carried out by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. Raising:
Warning! G
Vehicles with memory function*: 왘 Manually adjust the height of head
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat restraint 1 by pulling it upward.
왘 Press switch 1 (컄 page 44) up or
head restraints. Head restraints are intend- down in direction of arrow. If head restraint 1 is fully retracted,
ed to help reduce injuries during an push release button 2 in direction of
accident. arrow and pull head restraint 1 up-
With a rear seat occupied, make sure to ward.
move the respective head restraint up from Lowering:
the lowest non-use position and have the
occupant adjust the head restraint properly. 왘 To lower head restraint 1, push
release button 2 in direction of arrow
and press down on head restraint 1.
45
Getting started
Adjusting
Head restraint fore and aft adjustment Steering wheel

앫 Press one of the memory position
buttons or the memory button M*
Easy-entry/exit feature* (컄 page 135).
This feature allows for easier entry into and Do not leave children unattended in the ve-
exit from the vehicle. When entering and hicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
exiting the vehicle, the steering wheel is in Children could open the driver’s door and
its uppermost position. unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit
feature, which could result in an accident
The easy-entry/exit feature can be and/or serious personal injury.
activated or deactivated in the Comfort
submenu of the control system With the easy-entry/exit feature activated,
Manually adjust the angle of the head (컄 page 177).
restraint. the steering wheel will return to its last set
position when you:
왘 While seated, reach behind you with Warning! G 앫 close the driver’s door with the ignition
both hands and find lower edge of the
head restraint. switched on
You must make sure no one can become
왘 Adjust the head restraint to the desired trapped or injured by the moving steering or
position by pushing or pulling on the wheel when the easy-entry/exit feature is 앫 insert the SmartKey into the starter
lower edge of the head restraint cush- activated. switch or press the KEYLESS-GO*
ion. To stop steering wheel movement, do one of start/stop button (컄 page 41) once
For more information, see “Seats” the following: with the driver’s door closed
(컄 page 128). 앫 Move steering wheel adjustment stalk*
(컄 page 49).
46
Getting started
Adjusting
i The last set steering wheel position is stored

when Warning! G Driving without the steering wheel adjust-
ment locked may cause an unexpected
앫 the ignition is switched off (컄 page 39) steering wheel movement which could
Let the system complete the adjustment
앫 the position is stored in memory cause the driver to lose control of the vehi-
procedure before setting the vehicle in mo-
(컄 page 135) cle. Make sure the steering wheel is secure-
tion. All steering wheel adjustment must be
With the easy-entry/exit feature activated, completed before setting the vehicle in mo- ly locked by trying to move it up and down,
the steering wheel tilts upwards when you: tion. Driving off with the steering wheel still and in and out before driving off.
adjusting could cause the driver to lose con-
앫 remove the SmartKey from the starter
trol of the vehicle. Make sure that
switch,
앫 you can reach the steering wheel with
or
Steering wheel adjustment, manual your arms slightly bent at the elbows
앫 open the driver’s door with the
앫 you can move your legs freely
SmartKey in starter switch position 0
or 1 or the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
Warning! G 앫 all displays (including malfunction and
button in position 1 (컄 page 41) indicator lamps) on the instrument
Only adjust the steering wheel with the vehi-
cluster are clearly visible
i If the current position for the steering wheel cle at a standstill and make sure the steer-
is in the uppermost tilt position, the steering ing wheel is securely locked in place before The steering wheel adjustment release
wheel will no longer be able to move upward driving off. handle is located on the lower left of the
when the easy-entry/exit feature is activated. steering column.
The adjustment procedure is briefly interrupted,
when the engine is started.
47
Getting started
Adjusting
Steering wheel adjustment, electrical* i The memory function* (컄 page 134) lets
you store the settings for the steering wheel col-
Warning! G umn together with the settings for seat positions
and the exterior rear view mirrors.
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driv- Make sure that
ing. Adjusting the steering wheel while driv- 앫 you can reach the steering wheel with
ing could cause the driver to lose control of your arms slightly bent at the elbows
the vehicle.
앫 you can move your legs freely
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* 앫 all displays (including malfunction and
1 Release handle indicator lamps) on the instrument
from the starter switch, take it with you, and
왘 To unlock the steering column, pull lock the vehicle. cluster are clearly visible
release handle 1 out to its stop limit. The steering wheel adjustment stalk is
Even with the SmartKey or SmartKey with
왘 Move steering wheel to the desired KEYLESS-GO* removed from the starter located on the lower left of the steering
position. switch or the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* column.
왘 Push release handle 1 back to its removed from the vehicle, the steering
original position to relock the steering wheel adjustment feature can be operated
column. when the driver’s door is open. Therefore,
do not leave children unattended in the ve-
The steering column is locked into po- hicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
sition again. Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may
왘 Make sure the steering column is cause an accident and/or serious personal
securely locked by trying to move the injury.
steering wheel up and down as well as
in and out before driving off.
48
Getting started
Adjusting
Mirrors Interior rear view mirror

왘 Manually adjust the interior rear view
Adjust the interior and exterior rear view
mirror.
mirrors before driving so that you have a
good view of the road and traffic condi- For more information, see “Rear view mir-
tions. rors” (컄 page 200).
Warning! G Exterior rear view mirrors
In case of an accident, liquid electrolyte may Warning! G

1 Adjusting steering column, in or out escape the mirror housing if the mirror glass
2 Adjusting steering column, up or down breaks. Exercise care when using the
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 40). passenger-side exterior rear view mirror.
Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not
The mirror surface is convex (outwardly
or allow the liquid to come into contact with
curved surface for a wider field of view). Ob-
eyes, skin, clothing, or respiratory system.
왘 Open the driver’s door. jects in mirror are closer than they appear.
In case it does, immediately flush affected
Check your interior rear view mirror or
area with water, and seek medical help if
Adjusting steering column in or out necessary.
glance over your shoulder before changing
lanes.
왘 Move stalk forward or back in direction
of arrow 1.
! Electrolyte drops coming into contact with
the vehicle paint finish can only be completely
Adjusting steering column up or down removed while in their liquid state and by apply-
왘 Move stalk up or down in direction of ing plenty of water.
arrow 2.
49
Getting started
Adjusting
The buttons are located on the driver’s 왘 Press button 1 for the driver’s side ex- ! Vehicle with power folding exterior rear view
door. terior rear view mirror or button 3 for mirrors*:
the passenger-side exterior rear view If an exterior rear view mirror housing is forcibly
mirror. pushed forward (hit from the rear) or forcibly
pushed rearward (hit from the front), press fold
The indicator lamp on the respective button 1 (컄 page 202) to fold mirrors in, then
button comes on for press fold button 1 (컄 page 202) again to fold
approximately 15 seconds. mirrors out. Do not force mirrors by hand as this
may damage the adjustment mechanism.
i If you do not make adjustments to the The mirror housing is then properly positioned
selected exterior rear view mirror within and you can adjust the mirror in the usual man-
15 seconds, the indicator lamp goes out. You will ner.
then have to select the desired exterior rear view
mirror again before any adjustments can be i The memory function* (컄 page 134) lets
1 Driver’s side exterior rear view mirror made. Adjustments can only be made with the you store the settings for the exterior rear view
button indicator lamp for the respective exterior rear mirrors together with the setting for the steering
2 Adjustment button view mirror button illuminated. wheel column and the seat positions.
3 Passenger-side exterior rear view mir-
왘 Push adjustment button 2 up, down, At low ambient temperatures, the exterior rear
ror button view mirrors will be heated automatically.
left, or right according to the desired
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 40). setting. For more information, see “Rear view mir-
! If an exterior rear view mirror was forcibly rors” (컄 page 200).
pushed forward (hit from the rear) or forcibly
pushed rearward (hit from the front), reposition
it by applying firm pressure until it snaps into
place. The mirror housing is then properly posi-
tioned and you can adjust the mirror in the usual
manner.
50
Getting started
Driving
왔 Driving
Warning! G Failure to wear and properly fasten and po-

sition your seat belt greatly increases your
Warning! G
Make sure that absolutely no objects are ob- risk of injuries and their likely severity in an According to accident statistics, children
structing the pedal’s range of movement. accident. You and your passengers should are safer when properly restrained in the
Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all obsta- always wear seat belts. rear seating positions than in the front seat-
cles. If there are any floormats or carpets in If you are ever in an accident, your injuries ing position. Thus, we strongly recommend
the footwell, make sure that the pedals still can be considerably more severe without that children be placed in the rear seats.
have sufficient clearance. your seat belt properly buckled. Without Regardless of seating position, children
During sudden driving or braking maneu- your seat belt buckled, you are much more 12 years old and under must be seated and
vers, the objects could get caught between likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be properly secured in an appropriate infant or
the pedals. You could then no longer brake ejected from it. You can be seriously injured toddler restraint, or booster seat recom-
or accelerate. This could lead to accidents or killed. mended for the size and weight of the child.
and injury. In the same crash, the possibility of injury or For additional information, see “Children in
death is lessened if you are wearing your the vehicle” (컄 page 82).
Fastening the seat belts seat belt. The air bags can only provide the A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
protection they were designed to afford if significantly increased if the child restraints
the occupants are using their seat belts are not properly secured in the vehicle
Warning! G (컄 page 77). and/or the child is not properly secured in
the child restraint.
Always fasten your seat belt before driving
off. Always make sure your passengers are
properly restrained, even those sitting in the
rear and pregnant women.
51
Getting started
Driving
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat Never let more people ride in the vehicle
backrest in an excessively reclined position than there are seat belts available. Make
as this can be dangerous. You could slide sure everyone riding in the vehicle is cor-
under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide rectly restrained with a separate seat belt.
under it, the belt would apply force at the ab- Never use a seat belt for more than one per-
domen or neck. That could cause serious or son at a time.
even fatal injuries. The seat backrest and
seat belt provide the best restraint when the
wearer is in a nearly upright position and the Warning! G
belt is properly positioned on the body.
Read and observe the additional warning no-
tices printed in the “Safety and Security”
section (컄 page 73) and (컄 page 77).
1 Seat belt outlet

2 Latch plate
3 Buckle
4 Release button
52
Getting started
Driving
왘 With a smooth motion, pull the belt out 왘 Press release button 1 and move the 앫 Never use a seat belt for more than one
of seat belt outlet 1. seat belt height adjuster upward or person at a time.
downward.
왘 Place the shoulder portion of the belt 앫 Do not fasten a seat belt around a
across the top of your shoulder and the person and another object at the same
Proper use of seat belts
lap portion across your hips. time. When using a seat belt to secure
앫 Do not twist the belt when fastening. infant or toddler restraints or children
왘 Push latch plate 2 into buckle 3
in booster seats, always follow the
(컄 page 52) until it clicks. 앫 Adjust seat belt so that the shoulder
child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
portion is located as close as possible
왘 If necessary, tighten the lap portion to
to the middle of the shoulder (it should 앫 Check your seat belt periodically
a snug fit by pulling shoulder portion
not touch the neck). Never pass the during travel to make sure that it is
up.
shoulder portion of the belt under your properly positioned.
arm. For this purpose, you can adjust
Seat belt height adjustment 앫 Make sure the seat belt is always fitted
the height of the belt outlet
snugly. Take special care of this when
(컄 page 53).
wearing loose clothing.
앫 Position the lap belt as low as possible
on your hips (over hip joint) and not
across the abdomen.
앫 Place the seat backrest in a nearly
upright position.
1 Release button
53
Getting started
Driving
Starting the engine Automatic transmission

Warning! G
Do not pass belts over sharp edges. They Warning! G
could tear.
Do not allow the belt to get caught in the Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to
door or in the seat adjustment mechanism. your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon
This could damage the belt. monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause un-
consciousness and possible death.
Never attempt to make modifications to
seat belts. This could impair the effective- Do not run the engine in confined areas
ness of the belts. (such as a garage) which are not properly
ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas Gearshift pattern for automatic
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may transmission
fumes are entering the vehicle while driving,
severely weaken them. In a crash, they may P Park position
have the cause determined and corrected
not be able to provide adequate protection. R Reverse gear
immediately. If you must drive under these
Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly conditions, drive only with at least one win- N Neutral
stressed in an accident must be replaced. dow fully open. D Drive position
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
For more information on how to operate
Truck Center.
the gear selector lever, see “Automatic
transmission” (컄 page 185).
54
Getting started
Driving
Starting with the SmartKey Diesel engine Starting with KEYLESS-GO*

For information on turning off the engine 왘 Make sure the automatic transmission
with the SmartKey, see “Turning off the en- is set to P. Warning! G
gine” (컄 page 66).
The transmission position indicator in
As long as the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
the multifunction display should be
Gasoline engine on P (컄 page 147).
is in your vehicle, the vehicle can be started.
Therefore, never leave children unattended
왘 Make sure the automatic transmission
왘 Do not depress the accelerator. in the vehicle, as they could otherwise acci-
is set to P.
왘 Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch dentally start the engine.
The transmission position indicator in
to position 2 (컄 page 40). When leaving the vehicle, always take the
the multifunction display should be
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO with you and
on P (컄 page 147). Preglow indicator lamp q in the
instrument cluster comes on.
왘 Do not depress the accelerator. tended in the vehicle, or with access to an
왘 As soon as preglow indicator unlocked vehicle.
왘 Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch lamp q goes out, turn the SmartKey
to position 3 (컄 page 39) and hold until in the starter switch to position 3
the engine starts. You can start your vehicle without the
(컄 page 40) and release it.
SmartKey in the starter switch using the
i You can also use the “touch-start” function. The engine starts automatically. KEYLESS-GO start/stop button in the
Turn the SmartKey to position 3 and release it
starter switch.
again immediately. The engine then starts auto- i If the engine is at operating temperature,
matically. preglow indicator lamp q may not stay on The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be
and you can start the engine without preglowing. located in the vehicle.
55
Getting started
Driving
Gasoline engine Diesel engine

왘 Make sure the automatic transmission 왘 Make sure the automatic transmission
is set to P. is set to P.
The transmission position indicator in The transmission position indicator in
the multifunction display should be the multifunction display should be
on P (컄 page 147). on P.
왘 Depress the brake pedal during the 왘 Depress the brake pedal during the
starting procedure. starting procedure.
왘 Do not depress the accelerator. 왘 Do not depress the accelerator.
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
1 USA only 왘 Press KEYLESS-GO start/stop 왘 Press KEYLESS-GO start/stop
2 Canada only button 1 once. button 1 once.
왘 Make sure KEYLESS-GO start/stop The engine starts if the SmartKey with The engine preglows and starts if the
button 1 is inserted in the starter KEYLESS-GO is in the vehicle. SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is in the
switch (컄 page 41). vehicle.
i If you wish to start the engine using the i If the engine is at operating temperature,
SmartKey instead of the KEYLESS-GO feature, the time the engine needs to preglow is reduced.
remove the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button from
the starter switch (컄 page 41).
For information on turning off the engine
with KEYLESS-GO, see “Turning off with
KEYLESS-GO*” (컄 page 67).
56
Getting started
Driving
Starting difficulties 왘 Get a jump start (컄 page 515).

If the engine does not start as described, If the engine does not start after several
Warning! G
carry out the following steps: starting attempts, there could be a mal- When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
function in the engine electronics or in the
왘 If you are starting the engine with the SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
fuel supply system. from the starter switch, take it with you and
SmartKey, turn SmartKey in starter
switch to position 0 and repeat starting 왘 Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat-
procedure. Light Truck Center. tended in the vehicle, or with access to an
unlocked vehicle. Children could release the
왘 If you are starting the engine with
KEYLESS-GO*: Close any doors that Parking brake parking brake, which could result in an acci-
dent and/or serious injury.
may be open to allow for better
detection of the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO*. 왘 Release the parking brake by pulling on
release handle 2.
Or:
The warning lamp ; (USA only)
왘 Remove KEYLESS-GO* start/stop or 3 (Canada only) in the
button from starter switch (컄 page 41). instrument cluster goes out.
왘 Start the engine with the SmartKey as
radio signals from another source may
be interfering with the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO*. 1 Parking brake pedal
2 Release handle
왘 Repeat the starting procedure
(컄 page 54). Remember that extended
starting attempts can drain the battery.
57
Getting started
Driving
Driving off ! If you hear a warning signal and the

message Release parking brake appears in Warning! G
왘 Depress the brake pedal. the multifunction display when driving off, you
have forgotten to release the parking brake. On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
The gear selector lever can now be
Release the parking brake (컄 page 57). in order to obtain braking action. This could
used.
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehi-
왘 Shift automatic transmission to D or R i Once the vehicle is in motion, the automatic cle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not pre-
(컄 page 187). central locking system engages and the locking vent this type of loss of control.
knobs drop down.
i Wait for the gear selection process to com- The automatic door lock feature can be
plete before setting the vehicle in motion. deactivated (컄 page 176).
Warning! G
i Shifting from gear position P to position R, You can open a locked door from the inside.
N, or D is only possible with the brake pedal Open door only when conditions are safe to do
It is dangerous to shift the automatic trans-
depressed. Without the brake pedal depressed, so.
mission out of P or N if the engine speed is
the gear selector lever can be moved, but the
After a cold start, the automatic transmis- higher than idle speed. If your foot is not
parking pawl remains engaged, not allowing
shifting to occur. sion shifts at a higher engine revolution. firmly on the brake pedal, the vehicle could
This allows the catalytic converter (gaso- accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You
왘 Release the brake pedal. line engine) or the oxidation catalyst (die- could lose control of the vehicle and hit
왘 Carefully depress the accelerator sel engine) to reach its operating someone or something. Only shift into gear
pedal. temperature earlier. when the engine is idling normally and when
your right foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
58
Getting started
Driving
! Shift the automatic transmission to Switching on headlamps High beam

position P or R only when the vehicle is stopped
The combination switch is located on the
in order to avoid damaging the transmission.
Low beam headlamps left of the steering column.
! Do not run cold engine at high engine The exterior lamp switch is located on the
speeds. Running a cold engine at high engine
speeds may shorten the service life of the dashboard to the left of the steering wheel.
engine.
ML 63 AMG:
At engine temperatures below 68°F (20°C), the
engine’s maximum speed is restricted in order to
protect it from damage. Avoid driving your vehi-
cle at full speed when the engine is cold to pre-
vent premature engine wear and/or diminished
comfort.
Combination switch
! Simultaneously depressing the accelerator
pedal and applying the brake reduces engine 1 High beam
performance and causes premature brake and Exterior lamp switch 2 High beam flasher
drivetrain wear.
1 Off 왘 Push the combination switch in
For more information, see “Driving instruc- 2 Low beam headlamps on direction of arrow 1.
tions” (컄 page 325).
왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to The high beam headlamp indicator
For information on off-road driving, see position B. lamp A in the instrument cluster
“Off-road driving” (컄 page 333). comes on (컄 page 26).
The low beam headlamps come on.
For more information on headlamps, see
“Lighting” (컄 page 136).
59
Getting started
Driving
Turn signals The combination switch resets automati- 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 40).
cally after major steering wheel move-
The combination switch is located on the ment. ! Do not operate the windshield wipers when
the windshield is dry. Dust that accumulates on
left of the steering column.
i If the combination switch is pressed to point a windshield might scratch the glass and/or
of resistance and released, the corresponding damage the wiper blades when wiping occurs on
turn signal will flash three times. a dry windshield. If it is necessary to operate the
windshield wipers in dry weather conditions,
always operate the windshield wipers with wind-
Windshield wipers shield washer fluid (컄 page 62).
The combination switch is located on the ! If anything blocks the windshield wipers
left of the steering column. (leaves, snow, etc.), switch them off immediate-
ly.
앫 For safety reasons, stop the vehicle in a safe
location and
Combination switch 앫 remove SmartKey from starter switch
1 Turn signals, right or
2 Turn signals, left
앫 turn off the engine by pressing the
왘 Press the combination switch in KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button and
direction of arrow 1 or 2. open the driver’s door (with the driver’s
door open, starter switch is in
The corresponding turn signal indicator position 0, same as with SmartKey
lamp L or K in the instrument Combination switch removed from starter switch)
cluster flashes (컄 page 26). before attempting to remove any blockage.
1 Single wipe
Wiping with windshield washer fluid
2 Switching on windshield wipers
60
Getting started
Driving
앫 Remove blockage. Intermittent wiping After the initial wipe, pauses between
앫 Turn the windshield wipers on again. wipes are automatically controlled by the
Only switch on intermittent wiping under
If windshield wipers fail to function at all in rain sensor.
wet weather conditions or in the presence
combination switch position U or V, of precipitation. i Intermittent wiping is interrupted when the
앫 set the combination switch to the next vehicle is at a standstill and a front door is
When you select intermittent wiping, the
higher wiper speed opened. This protects persons getting into or out
rain sensor is activated. The rain sensor of the vehicle from being sprayed.
앫 have the windshield wipers checked at the automatically sets a suitable wiping
nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Intermittent wiping will be continued when
interval depending on the wetness of the
Truck Center 앫 all doors are closed
sensor surface.
Switching on windshield wipers and
! Do not leave windshield wipers in intermit-
tent setting when the vehicle is taken to an auto- 앫 the automatic transmission is set to
왘 Turn the combination switch to the
matic car wash or during windshield cleaning. position D or R
desired position depending on the
Wipers will operate in the presence of water or
intensity of the rain. sprayed on the windshield, and windshield
앫 the wiper setting is changed using the
M Windshield wipers off wipers may be damaged as a result.
combination switch
U Slow intermittent wiping ! If you have set intermittent wiping, dirt on
Rain sensor operation with low the surface of the rain sensor or optical effects Single wipe
sensitivity. may cause the windshield wipers to wipe in an
왘 Press the combination switch briefly in
undesired fashion. This could then damage the
V Fast intermittent wiping windshield wiper blades or scratch the windows. direction of arrow 1 to the resistance
Rain sensor operation with high You should therefore switch off the windshield point.
sensitivity. wipers when weather conditions are dry.
The windshield wipers wipe one time
u Slow continuous wiping 왘 Turn the combination switch to without washer fluid.
position U or V.
t Fast continuous wiping
61
Getting started
Driving
Wiping with windshield washer fluid Rear window wiper/washer

왘 Press the combination switch in direc-
The combination switch is located on the
tion of arrow 1 past the resistance
left of the steering column.
point.
The windshield wipers operate with
washer fluid.
6 Rear window wiper indicator
i To prevent smears on the windshield, wipe 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 40).
with windshield washer fluid every now and then
even when it is raining. i The rear window wiper engages automatical-
For information on filling up the washer ly when the automatic transmission is shifted to
position R with the windshield wipers switched
reservoir, see “Windshield/rear window
on.
washer system and headlamp cleaning
system*” (컄 page 363). Combination switch Activating intermittent wipe
1 Rear window wiper switch 왘 Turn rear window wiper switch 1 to
2 Wiping rear window with washer fluid position 3 (컄 page 62).
3 Intermittent wiping
4 Rear window wiper off In the lower multifunction display you
5 Wiping rear window with washer fluid will see indicator 6, indicating that
the rear window wiper is activated.
62
Getting started
Driving
Deactivating intermittent wipe Problems while driving The coolant temperature is above
248°F (120°C)
왘 Turn rear window wiper switch 1 to
position 4 (컄 page 62). The engine runs erratically and misfires The coolant is too hot and is no longer
cooling the engine.
Indicator 6 for the rear window wiper 앫 An ignition cable may be damaged
is cleared from the lower multifunction (gasoline engine only). 왘 Stop the vehicle in a safe location as
display, indicating that the rear window soon as possible and turn off the en-
앫 The engine electronics may not be
wiper is deactivated. gine. Allow engine and coolant to cool
operating properly.
off.
Wiping with windshield washer fluid 앫 Unburned gasoline may have entered
왘 Check the coolant level and add cool-
the catalytic converter and damaged it
왘 Turn and hold rear window wiper ant if necessary (컄 page 362).
(gasoline engine only).
switch 1 in position 2 or 5
(컄 page 62) until the rear window is 왘 Give very little gas.
clean. 왘 Have the problem repaired by an
The rear window wiper operates with authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
washer fluid. Center as soon as possible.
For information on filling up the washer
system*” (컄 page 363).
63
Getting started
Driving
In case of accident
If the vehicle is leaking fuel:
왘 Do not start the engine under any
circumstances.
왘 Notify local fire and/or police authori-
ties.
If the extent of the damage cannot be de-
termined:
왘 Notify an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center.
If no damage can be determined on the
앫 major assemblies
앫 fuel system
앫 engine mount:
왘 Start the engine in the usual manner.
64
Getting started
Parking and locking
왔 Parking and locking
You have now completed your first drive. Parking brake
To reduce the risk of personal injury, or
You have properly stopped and parked
damage to the vehicle drivetrain, as a result
your vehicle. End your drive as follows.
of vehicle movement, before turning off the
engine and leaving the vehicle always:
Warning! G
Warning! G 앫 Keep right foot on brake pedal. Engaging the parking brake while the vehicle
앫 Firmly depress parking brake pedal. is in motion can cause the rear wheels to
With the engine not running, there is no
lock up. You could lose control of the vehicle
power assistance for the brake and the 앫 Shift the automatic transmission to
position P. and cause an accident. In addition, the vehi-
steering system. In this case, it is important
cle’s brake lights do not light up when the
to keep in mind that a considerably higher 앫 Slowly release brake pedal.
parking brake is engaged. Make sure not to
degree of effort is necessary to brake and 앫 When parked on an incline, turn front endanger any other road users when you en-
steer the vehicle. wheel towards the road curb. gage the parking brake.
앫 Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
to position 0 and remove the SmartKey
Warning! G from the starter switch, or press the
start/stop button (vehicles with
Do not park this vehicle in areas where com- KEYLESS-GO*).
bustible materials such as grass, hay or 앫 Take the SmartKey or the SmartKey with
leaves can come into contact with the hot KEYLESS-GO* and lock vehicle when
exhaust system, as these materials could be leaving.
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
1 Parking brake pedal

2 Release handle
65
Getting started
Parking and locking
왘 Step firmly on parking brake pedal 1. Turning off the engine

When the engine is running, the
Warning! G
warning lamp ; (USA only) or 3 i If the engine cannot be turned off as de-
Getting out of your vehicle with the scribed, see “Emergency engine shut-down”
(Canada only) in the instrument cluster automatic transmission not fully engaged in (컄 page 525).
comes on. position P is dangerous. Also, when parked
왘 Shift the automatic transmission to
on an incline, position P alone may not
position P (컄 page 187).
Warning! G prevent your vehicle from moving, possibly
hitting people or objects.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Always set the parking brake in addition to
Warning! G
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* shifting to position P (컄 page 187).
from the starter switch, take it with you and Do not turn off the engine before the vehicle
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat- When parked on an incline, also turn front has come to a complete stop. With the en-
tended in the vehicle, or with access to an wheel towards the road curb. gine not running, there is no power assis-
unlocked vehicle. Children could release the tance for the brake and steering systems. In
parking brake and/or shift the automatic Switching off headlamps this case, it is important to keep in mind that
transmission out of position P, either of a considerably higher degree of effort is nec-
which could result in an accident and/or 왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to M essary to brake and steer the vehicle.
serious personal injury. (컄 page 59).
For more information, see “Lighting” 왘 Apply the parking brake (컄 page 65).
(컄 page 136).
i Always set the parking brake in addition to
shifting the automatic transmission to position P
(컄 page 187).
When parked on an incline, also turn front wheel
towards the road curb.
66
Getting started
Parking and locking
Turning off with the SmartKey Turning off with KEYLESS-GO* Releasing seat belts
왘 Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch 왘 Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
왘 Press the seat belt release button
to position 0 (컄 page 39). button (컄 page 41) to turn off the
(컄 page 52).
engine.
왘 Remove the SmartKey from the starter
Allow the retractor to completely re-
switch. With the driver’s door closed, the start-
wind the seat belt by guiding the latch
er switch is now in position 1. With the
The immobilizer is activated. plate.
driver’s door opened, the starter switch
i If you turn off the engine using the SmartKey is set to position 0, same as SmartKey ! Make sure the seat belt retracts fully so that
and remove the SmartKey from the starter removed from starter switch the seat belt and/or latch plate cannot get
switch with the transmission in a position other (컄 page 39). caught or pinched in the door or in the seat
than P, the transmission will automatically shift mechanism. This can damage the seat belt and
to P. i You can turn off the engine while driving by impair the effectiveness of the seat belt, and/or
Keep in mind that turning off the engine with the pressing and holding the KEYLESS-GO cause damage to the door and/or door trim
SmartKey alone will not automatically shift the start/stop button for approximately 3 seconds. panel. Such damage is not covered by the
transmission to P. Only when the SmartKey is Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
removed from the starter switch will the i If you turn off the engine using the Damaged seat belts must be replaced. Contact
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button and open the
transmission automatically shift to P. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
driver’s door with the transmission in a position
Center.
other than P, the transmission will automatically
shift to P.
Keep in mind that turning off the engine with the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button alone will not
automatically shift the transmission to P. Only
when the driver’s door is opened will the
transmission automatically shift to P.
67
Getting started
Parking and locking
Locking 왘 Exit the vehicle and close all doors and Locking with KEYLESS-GO*
the tailgate.
Warning! G i If you hear a warning signal you have

forgotten to switch off the headlamps before
opening the driver’s door.
To prevent possible personal injury, always
keep hands and fingers away from the door In addition the message Switch off lights
appears in the multifunction display.
openings when closing the doors. Be espe-
cially careful when small children are Switch off the headlamps.
around.
Locking with the SmartKey
Before closing doors, make sure there is no
possibility of someone getting caught in a 왘 Press lock button ‹ on the 1 Lock button on the outside door handle
door during closing. SmartKey (컄 page 38).
왘 Press lock button 1 on an outside
With the tailgate and all doors closed, door handle.
the turn signal lamps flash three times.
Warning! G The locking knobs on the doors move
With the tailgate and all doors closed,
the turn signal lamps flash three times.
down. The anti-theft alarm system is
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the The locking knobs on the doors move
armed.
SmartKey from the starter switch, take the down. The anti-theft alarm system is
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you, and
For more information, see “Locking and armed.
lock your vehicle. Do not leave children un-
unlocking” (컄 page 108).
For more information, see “Locking and
attended in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocking” (컄 page 108).
68
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Panic alarm
Driving safety systems
Anti-theft systems
69
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
In this section you will learn the most im- Air bag system components with The SRS components are in operational
portant facts about the restraint systems readiness if the 1 indicator lamp is not
앫 Front passenger front air bag off
of the vehicle. lit when the engine is running.
indicator lamp (컄 page 89)
The restraint systems are A malfunction in the system has been
앫 Front passenger seat with Occupant
detected if the 1 indicator lamp:
앫 Seat belts (컄 page 77) Classification System (OCS)
(컄 page 85) 앫 fails to go out not later than approxi-
앫 Child restraints (컄 page 92)
mately 4 seconds after the engine was
Although independent systems, their pro-
앫 Lower Anchors and Tethers for started
tective functions work in conjunction with
CHildren (LATCH) (컄 page 91)
each other. 앫 does not come on at all
Additional protection potential provide
i For information on infants and children 앫 comes on after the engine was started
앫 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) traveling with you in the vehicle and restraint or while driving
with systems for infants and children, see “Children
in the vehicle” (컄 page 82).
앫 Air bags (컄 page 71) Warning! G
The SRS system conducts a self-test when
앫 Air bag control unit (with crash
the ignition is switched on and in regular Modifications to or work improperly con-
sensors)
intervals while the engine is running. This ducted on restraint systems (such as seat
앫 Emergency Tensioning Device facilitates early detection of malfunctions. belts and anchors, emergency tensioning
(ETD) for seat belts (컄 page 80) The 1 indicator lamp in the instrument devices, seat belt force limiters or air bags)
앫 Active head restraints (컄 page 80) cluster (컄 page 26) comes on when the or their wiring, as well as tampering with in-
ignition is switched on and goes out no terconnected electronic systems, can lead
later than a few seconds after the engine to the restraint systems no longer function-
was started. ing as intended.
70
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Air bags
Air bags or emergency tensioning devices, In addition, improper work on the SRS
for example, could deploy inadvertently or creates a risk of rendering the SRS inopera-
fail to deploy in accidents although the de-
celeration threshold for air bag deployment
tive or causing unintended air bag deploy-
ment. Work on the SRS must therefore only
Warning! G
is exceeded. Therefore, never modify the re- be performed by qualified technicians.
Air bags are designed to reduce the poten-
straint systems. Do not tamper with elec- Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
tial of injury and fatality in certain frontal im-
tronic components or their software. Truck Center.
pacts (front air bags), side impacts (side
If it is necessary to modify an air bag system impact air bags* and head protection win-
to accommodate a person with disabilities, dow curtain air bags) or rollovers (head pro-
Warning! G contact a local authorized Mercedes-Benz tection window curtain air bags). However,
Light Truck Center or call our Customer no system available today can totally elimi-
In the event that the 1 indicator lamp
Assistance Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes nate injuries and fatalities.
comes on during driving or does not come
(1-800-367-6372) for details.
on at all, the SRS self-check has detected a The deployment of the air bags temporarily
malfunction. For your safety, we strongly releases a small amount of dust from the air
recommend that you visit an authorized bags. This dust, however, is neither injurious
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center immedi- to your health, nor does it indicate a fire in
ately to have the system checked; otherwise the vehicle. The dust might cause some tem-
the SRS may not deploy when needed in an porary breathing difficulty for people with
accident, which could result in serious or fa- asthma or other breathing trouble. To avoid
tal injury, or it might deploy unexpectedly this, you may wish to get out of the vehicle
and unnecessarily which could also result in as soon as it is safe to do so. If you have any
injury. breathing difficulty but cannot get out of the
vehicle after the air bag inflates, then get
fresh air by opening a window or door.
71
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning! G 앫 Adjust the driver’s seat as far as possi-

ble rearward, still permitting proper op-
앫 Always sit nearly upright, properly use
the seat belts and use an appropriately
eration of vehicle controls. The distance sized infant or toddler restraint or boost-
To reduce the risk of injury when the front
from the center of the driver’s breast- er seat recommended for the size and
air bags inflate, it is very important for the bone to the center of the air bag cover weight of the child.
driver and front passenger to always be in a on the steering wheel must be at least Failure to follow these instructions can
properly seated position and to wear their 10 inches (25 cm) or more. You should
result in severe injuries to you or other
respective seat belt. be able to accomplish this by a combina-
occupants.
For maximum protection in the event of a tion of adjustments to the seat and
steering wheel. If you have any prob- If you sell your vehicle, it is important that
collision always be in normal seated position
lems, please see an authorized you make the buyer aware of this safety
with your back against the seat backrest.
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. information. Be sure to give the buyer this
Fasten your seat belt and make sure it is
앫 Do not lean your head or chest close to Operator’s Manual.
properly positioned on your body
the steering wheel or dashboard.
(컄 page 51).
앫 Keep hands on the outside of steering
Since the air bag inflates with considerable
wheel rim. Placing hands and arms in- Warning! G
speed and force, a proper seating and hands side the rim can increase the risk and
on steering wheel position will help to keep potential severity of hand/arm injury Accident research shows that the safest
you at a safe distance from the air bag. when driver’s front air bag inflates. place for children in an automobile is in the
Occupants who are unbelted, out of position rear seat.
앫 Adjust the front passenger seat as far as
or too close to the air bag can be seriously possible rearward from the dashboard
injured or killed by an air bag as it inflates when the seat is occupied.
with great force in the blink of an eye:
앫 Sit properly belted in a nearly upright
position with your back against the seat
backrest.
72
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
i Air bags are designed to deploy only in Safety guidelines for the seat belt,
It should be noted that with respect to both,
certain frontal impacts (front air bags), and in emergency tensioning device and
front side impact air bags or the rear side
side impacts (side impact and head protection air bag
impact air bags*, there is a possibility for a window curtain air bags) which exceed preset
side impact air bag related injury if occu- thresholds, and in certain rollovers (head protec-
pants, especially children, are not properly tion window curtain air bags). Only during these Warning! G
seated or restrained when next to a side events will they provide their supplemental pro-
impact air bag which needs to deploy rapidly tection. 앫 Damaged seat belts or belts that were
in a side impact in order to do its job. The driver and passengers should always wear highly stressed in an accident must be
their seat belts. Otherwise it is not possible for replaced and their anchoring points
To help avoid the possibility of injury, please must also be checked. Only use belts in-
air bags to provide their supplemental protec-
follow these guidelines: tion. stalled or supplied by an authorized
(1) Always sit nearly upright, properly use In case of other types of impacts and impacts be- Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
the seat belts and for children 12 years low air bag deployment thresholds, air bags will 앫 Air bags and pyrotechnic emergency
old and under, use an appropriately not deploy. The driver and passenger will then be tensioning devices (ETDs) are designed
sized infant or toddler restraint or protected to the extent possible by a properly to function on a one-time-only basis. An
booster seat recommended for the size fastened seat belt. A properly fastened seat belt air bag or ETD that is deployed must be
is also needed to provide the best possible pro- replaced.
and weight of the child.
tection in a rollover.
(2) Always wear seat belts properly. 앫 Do not pass belts over sharp edges.
We caution you not to rely on the presence of the They could tear.
Please contact your local authorized air bags in order to avoid wearing your seat belt.
앫 Do not make any modification that could
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center or call It is important to your safety and that of your pas- change the effectiveness of the belts. 컄컄
our Customer Assistance Center at sengers that you replace deployed air bags and
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) repair any malfunctioning air bags to make sure
for details. the vehicle will continue to provide supplemental
crash protection for occupants.
73
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
컄컄
앫 Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this 앫 Air bag system components will be hot 앫 Given the considerable deployment
may severely weaken them. In a crash after an air bag has inflated. Do not speed, required inflation volume, and
they may not be able to provide ade- touch. the textile structure of the air bags,
quate protection. 앫 Never place your feet on the instrument there is the possibility of abrasions or
앫 No modifications of any kind may be panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always other potentially more serious injuries
made to any components or wiring of keep both feet on the floor in front of the resulting from air bag deployment.
the SRS. This includes changing or seat.
removing any component or part of the 앫
SRS, the installation of additional trim
In addition, improper repair work on the
SRS creates a risk of rendering the SRS
Warning! G
material, badges, etc. over the steering inoperative or causing unintended air
wheel hub, front passenger front air bag bag deployment. Work on the SRS must Only use seat covers which have been
cover, outboard sides of the seat back- therefore only be performed by qualified tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz for
rests, door trim panels, or door frame technicians. Contact an authorized your vehicle model. Using other seat covers
trims, and installation of additional Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. may interfere with or prevent the
electrical/electronic equipment on or deployment of the front side impact air bags
near SRS components and wiring. Keep 앫 For your protection and the protection
of others, when scrapping the air bag or the rear side impact air bags*. Contact an
area between air bags and occupants
unit or emergency tensioning device, authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
free from objects (e.g. packages, purs-
es, umbrellas, etc.). our safety instructions must be fol- Center for availability.
lowed. These instructions are available
앫 Do not hang items such as coat hangers from your authorized Mercedes-Benz
from the coat hooks or handles over the When you sell your vehicle we strongly
Light Truck Center.
door. These items may turn into projec- urge you to give notice to the subsequent
tiles and cause head and other injuries owner that it is equipped with an SRS by
when window curtain air bag is alerting them to the applicable section in
deployed. the Operator’s Manual.
74
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Front air bags i The front air bags in this vehicle have been The air bags will not deploy in impacts
designed to inflate in two stages. This allows the which do not exceed the system’s deploy-
air bag to have different rates of inflation that are ment thresholds. You will then be protec-
based on the rate of relevant vehicle decelera- ted by the fastened seat belts.
tion as assessed by the air bag control unit.
The passenger front air bag will only be
On the front passenger-side, the front air bag
deployment is additionally influenced by the deployed if:
passenger’s weight category as identified by the 앫 the system, based on OCS weight sen-
Occupant Classification System (OCS) sor readings, senses that the front
(컄 page 85).
passenger seat is occupied
The lighter the front passenger side occupant,
the higher the vehicle deceleration rate required 앫 the 59 indicator lamp in
1 Driver air bag for the second stage inflation of the air bag. the center console is not lit
2 Passenger air bag (컄 page 89)
Driver and front passenger front air bags 앫 the impact exceeds a preset deploy-
are deployed: ment threshold
앫 in the event of certain frontal impacts
앫 if impact exceeds a preset deployment
threshold
앫 independently of the side impact air
bags
75
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Side impact air bags, window curtain In addition, the window curtain air bags 2
air bags are deployed in certain vehicle rollovers.
The front passenger side impact air bag
Warning! G will not deploy if the OCS senses that the
front passenger seat is empty and the front
The pressure sensors for side impact air bag passenger seat belt is not fastened (latch
control are located in the doors. Do not plate is not inserted into the buckle). With
modify any components of the doors or door an empty front passenger seat and the
trim panels including, for example, the addi- seat belt fastened (latch plate properly in-
tion of door speakers. serted into buckle) the front passenger
1 Front side impact air bag side impact air bag will deploy indepen-
Improper repair work on the doors or the
2 Window curtain air bag dently of the empty seat.
modification or addition of components to
3 Rear side impact air bag*
the doors create a risk of rendering the The side impact air bags and window cur-
side impact air bags inoperative or causing The side impact air bags and window tain air bags are not deployed in impacts
unintended air bag deployment. Work on the curtain air bags are deployed: which do not exceed the system’s deploy-
doors must therefore only be performed by 앫 on the impacted side of the vehicle ment threshold.
qualified technicians. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. 앫 in impacts exceeding a preset deploy-
ment threshold
앫 independently of the front air bags
76
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Seat belts
Always wear your seat belt. All vehicle
occupants always need to have their seat Always fasten your seat belt before driving Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
belts fastened and wear them properly. off. Always make sure all of your passengers backrest in an excessively reclined position
are properly restrained, even those sitting in as this can be dangerous. You could slide
In addition, applicable motor vehicle safety
the rear and pregnant women. under the seat belt in a collision. If you slide
laws require you to wear seat belts. Even
Failure to wear and properly fasten and po- under it, the belt would apply force at the ab-
where this is not the case, we strongly
sition your seat belt greatly increases your domen or neck. That could cause serious or
recommend that all vehicle occupants
risk of injuries and their likely severity in an even fatal injuries. The seat backrest and
have their seat belts fastened and wear
accident. You and your passengers should seat belt provide the best restraint when the
them properly.
always wear seat belts. wearer is in a nearly upright position and the
For more information, see “Fastening the belt is properly positioned on the body.
seat belts” (컄 page 51). If you are ever in an accident, your injuries
can be considerably more severe without
i For information on infants and children
traveling with you in the vehicle and restraint
your seat belt properly buckled. Without
your seat belt buckled, you are much more
Warning! G
systems for infants and children, see “Children
likely to hit the interior of the vehicle or be
in the vehicle” (컄 page 82). Never let more people ride in the vehicle
ejected from it. You can be seriously injured
than there are seat belts available. Make
or killed.
sure everyone riding in the vehicle is cor-
In the same crash, the possibility of injury or rectly restrained with a separate seat belt.
death is lessened if you are properly wearing Never use a seat belt for more than one per-
your seat belt. Air bags can only protect as son at a time.
they are designed if the occupants are prop-
erly wearing their seat belts.
77
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Warning! G Warning! G certain rollovers (window curtain air

bags and ETD).
Damaged seat belts or belts that were highly USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY 앫 Never wear the shoulder belt under your
stressed in an accident must be replaced arm, against your neck or off your shoul-
앫 Seat belts can only work when used
and their anchoring points must also be der. In a frontal crash, your body would
properly. Never wear seat belts in any
checked. move too far forward. That would in-
other way than as described in this sec-
crease the chance of head and neck in-
Only use seat belts which have been tion, as that could result in serious inju-
juries. The belt would also apply too
approved by Mercedes-Benz. ries in case of an accident.
much force to the ribs or abdomen,
앫 Each occupant should wear their seat which could severely injure internal or-
Do not make any modifications to the seat
belt at all times, because seat belts help gans such as your liver or spleen.
belts. This can lead to unintended activation
reduce the likelihood of and potential
of the ETDs or to failure. 앫 Never wear belts over rigid or breakable
severity of injuries in accidents, includ-
objects in or on your clothing, such as
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may ing rollovers. The integrated restraint
eyeglasses, pens, SmartKeys, etc., as
severely weaken them. In a crash they may system includes SRS (driver air bag, pas-
these might cause injuries.
not be able to provide adequate protection. senger front air bag, side impact air
bags, head protection window curtain 앫 Position the lap belt as low as possible
Have all work carried out only by qualified air bags for side windows), ETD (seat on your hips and not across the abdo-
technicians. Contact an authorized belt emergency tensioning device), and men. If the belt is positioned across your
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. front seat knee bolsters. The system is abdomen, it could cause serious injuries
designed to enhance the protection of- in a crash.
fered to properly belted occupants in
certain frontal (front air bags and ETD)
and side (side impact, window curtain
air bags and ETD) impacts which exceed
preset deployment thresholds and in
78
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Enhanced seat belt reminder system intensity for a maximum of 60 seconds

앫 Never use a seat belt for more than one
person at time. Do not fasten a seat belt or until the driver’s and the front pas-
When the engine is started, the seat belt
around a person and another person or senger’s seat belt are fastened.
telltale < will always illuminate
other objects. for 6 seconds to remind you and your pas- If the driver’s or the front passenger’s
앫 Belts should not be worn twisted. In a sengers to fasten your seat belts. seat belt remains unfastened after
crash, you would not have the full width 60 seconds, the warning chime stops
If the driver’s seat belt is not fastened
of the belt to distribute impact forces. sounding, the seat belt telltale <
The twisted belt against your body could when the engine is started, an additional
stops flashing but continues to be illu-
cause injuries. warning chime will also sound for a maxi-
minated.
mum of 6 seconds or until the driver’s
앫 Pregnant women should also use a
seat belt is fastened. The seat belt telltale < will only go out
lap-shoulder belt. The lap belt portion
should be positioned as low as possible if both the driver’s and the front passen-
If after these 6 seconds the driver’s or the
on the hips to avoid any possible pres- ger’s seat belt (with the front passenger
front passenger’s seat belt (with the front
sure on the abdomen. seat occupied) are fastened, or the vehicle
passenger seat occupied) is not fastened
is standing still and a front door is opened.
앫 Never place your feet on the instrument with front doors closed,
panel, dashboard or on the seat. Always For more information, see “Practical hints”
앫 the seat belt telltale < remains illu-
keep both feet on the floor in front of the (컄 page 421).
seat. minated for as long as either the driv-
er’s or front passenger’s seat belt is not
앫 When using a seat belt to secure infant
fastened
or toddler restraints or children in
booster seats, always follow the child 앫 and if the vehicle speed once exceeds
seat manufacturer’s instructions. 15 mph (25 km/h), the seat belt
telltale < starts flashing and a
warning chime sounds with increasing
79
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Emergency Tensioning Device (ETD), In an impact, emergency tensioning Active head restraint
seat belt force limiter devices remove slack from the belts in
such a way that the seat belts fit more The active head restraints are intended to
Depending on vehicle production date, the
snugly against the body. Belt force limiters, offer the driver and front passenger
seat belts for the front and rear or rear
when activated, are employed to help increased protection from whiplash type
outer seats are equipped with emergency
reduce the peak force exerted by the seat injuries. In the event of a rear-end collision,
tensioning devices and belt force limiters.
belts on occupants during a crash. the active head restraints on the driver’s
The ETD is designed to activate in the and front passenger’s seats are designed
following cases: to move forward in the direction of travel,
Warning! G providing the head with increased support
앫 in frontal or rear-end impacts
exceeding the system deployment earlier on in the collision sequence. The
A pyrotechnic emergency tensioning device
threshold active head restraints move forward
(ETD) that was activated must be replaced.
whether the seat is occupied or not.
앫 in certain vehicle rollovers When disposing of the pyrotechnic emer-
gency tensioning device, our safety instruc-
앫 if the restraint systems are operational
tions must be followed. These are available Warning! G
and functioning correctly, see
at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
1 indicator lamp (컄 page 423) Only use seat or head restraint covers which
Truck Center.
have been tested and approved by
i The ETDs for the front seats will only acti-
vate if the respective front seat belt is fastened Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle model.
(latch plate properly inserted into buckle). Using other seat or head restraint covers
The ETDs for the rear or rear outer seats (de- may interfere with or prevent the activation
pending on vehicle production date) will activate of the active head restraint. Contact an
with or without the respective seat belt fastened. authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center for availability.
80
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
You cannot remove the active head Rear head restraints

Do not attach any objects (e.g. hangers) to
restraint on the driver’s and front
the head restraints posts. Otherwise, the
passenger’s seats.
active head restraints may not be able to
function properly or offer the intended
For removal of the active head restraints Warning! G
we recommend that you contact an
degree of protection in the event of an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
accident.
Center. head restraints installed when the rear seats
are occupied. Head restraints are intended
For information on head restraint adjust-
to help reduce injuries during an accident.
Warning! G ment, see “Seats” (컄 page 43).
With a rear seat occupied, make sure to
For information on resetting the activated move the respective head restraint up from
For your protection, drive only with properly
active head restraints, see “Resetting acti- the lowest non-use position and have the
positioned head restraints.
vated head restraints” (컄 page 479). occupant adjust the head restraint properly.
Adjust head restraint so that it is as close to
the head as possible and the center of the For your protection, drive only with properly
head restraint supports the back of the head positioned head restraints.
at eye level. This will reduce the potential for Adjust the head restraint in such a way that
injury to the head and neck in the event of it is as close to the head as possible and the
an accident or similar situation. head restraint supports the back of the head
at eye level. This will reduce the potential for
injury to the head and neck in the event of
an accident or similar situation.
81
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Children in the vehicle Infant and child restraint systems

Do not expose the child restraint system to
direct sunlight. The child restraint system’s We recommend all infants and children be
If an infant or child is traveling with you in
metal parts, for example, could become very properly restrained at all times while the
the vehicle:
hot, and the child could be turned on these vehicle is in motion.
앫 Secure the child using an infant or child parts.
All lap-shoulder belts except the driver’s
restraint appropriate to the age and
If children open a door, they could seat belt have special seat belt retractors
size of the child.
앫 injure other persons for secure fastening of child restraints.
앫 Make sure the infant or child is
앫 get out of the car and injure themselves To fasten a child restraint, follow child
properly secured at all times while the
or be injured by following traffic restraint instructions for mounting. Then
vehicle is in motion.
Do not carry heavy or hard objects in the pull the shoulder belt out completely and
passenger or cargo compartment unless let it retract. During seat belt retraction, a
Warning! G they are firmly secured in place. For more in- ratcheting sound can be heard to indicate
formation, see “Loading” (컄 page 281) and that the special seat belt retractor is acti-
Do not leave children unattended in the vated. The belt is now locked. Push down
“Useful features” (컄 page 294).
vehicle, even if they are secured in a child on child restraint to take up any slack.
restraint system. The children could Unsecured or improperly positioned cargo
increases a child’s risk of injury in the event To deactivate, release seat belt buckle and
앫 injure themselves on parts of the vehicle let seat belt retract completely. To deacti-
of
앫 be seriously or fatally injured through vate the special seat belt retractor for the
앫 strong braking maneuvers
excessive exposure to extreme heat or front passenger seat, the front passenger
cold 앫 sudden changes of direction seat must be in the most backward posi-
앫 an accident tion. The seat belt can again be used in the
usual manner.
82
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Infants and small children should be seat-

Warning! G ed in an appropriate infant or child Warning! G
restraint system properly secured in
Never release the seat belt buckle while the accordance with the manufacturer’s According to accident statistics, children
vehicle is in motion, since the special seat instructions for the child restraint, that are safer when properly restrained in the
belt retractor will be deactivated. complies with U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle rear seating positions than in the front seat-
Safety Standards 213 and 225 and ing position. Thus, we strongly recommend
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard that children be placed in the rear seats
i For information on child seats with mounting whenever possible. Regardless of seating
fittings for tether anchorages, see “Installation 213 and 210.2.
of infant and child restraint system” position, children 12 years old and under
A statement by the child restraint manu-
(컄 page 92). must be seated and properly secured in an
facturer of compliance with these appropriate infant or child restraint
For information on LATCH-type child seat standards can be found on the instruction
mounts, see “Child seat anchors – LATCH type” recommended for the size and weight of the
(컄 page 91).
label on the restraint and in the instruction child.
manual provided with the restraint.
The use of infant or child restraints is re- The infant or child restraint must be properly
When using any infant or child restraint secured with the vehicle’s seat belt, the seat
quired by law in all 50 states, the District
system, make sure to carefully read and belt and top tether strap, or lower anchors
of Columbia, the U.S. territories and all Ca-
follow all manufacturer’s instructions for and top tether strap, fully in accordance
nadian provinces.
installation and use. with the child seat manufacturer’s
Please read and observe warning labels instructions. 컄컄
affixed to the inside of the vehicle and to
infant or child restraints.
83
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
컄컄
Always sit nearly upright, properly use the 앫 A child in a rear-facing child restraint on 앫 If you must install a rear-facing child
seat belts and use an appropriately sized in- the front passenger seat will be serious- restraint on the front passenger seat be-
fant or toddler restraint or booster seat rec- ly injured or even killed if the front cause circumstances require you to do
ommended for the size and weight of the passenger front air bag inflates in a so, make sure that the
child. collision which could occur under some 59 indicator lamp is illumi-
circumstances, even with the air bag nated, indicating that the front passen-
Children can be killed or seriously injured by technology installed in your vehicle. The ger front air bag is deactivated. Should
an inflating air bag. Note the following im- only means to completely eliminate this the 59 indicator lamp not
portant information when circumstances risk is to never place a child in a rear-fac- illuminate or go out while the restraint is
require you to place a child in the front ing child restraint in the front seat. We installed, please check installation.
passenger seat: therefore strongly recommend that you Periodically check the
always place a child in a rear-facing 59 indicator lamp while
앫 Your vehicle is equipped with air bag child restraint in the back seat. driving to make sure the lamp is illumi-
technology designed to turn off the front nated. If the 59 indicator
passenger front air bag in your vehicle lamp goes out or remains out, do not
when the OCS senses the weight of a transport a child on the front passenger
typical 12-month-old child or less along seat until the system has been repaired.
with the weight of a standard A child in a rear-facing child restraint on
appropriate child restraint on the front the front passenger seat will be serious-
passenger seat. ly injured or even killed if the front pas-
senger front air bag inflates.
84
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Occupant Classification System

앫 If you have to place a child in a Children too big for a toddler restraint must
forward-facing child restraint on the ride in seats using regular seat belts. Posi- The Occupant Classification System (OCS)
front passenger seat, move the seat as tion shoulder belt across chest and shoul- automatically turns the front passenger
far back as possible, use the proper der, not face or neck. A booster seat may be front air bag on or off based on the classi-
child restraint recommended for the necessary to achieve proper belt positioning fied occupant weight category determined
age, size and weight of the child, and se-
for children from 41 lbs until they reach a by weight sensor readings from the front
cure child restraint with the vehicle’s
height where a lap/shoulder belt fits passenger seat.
seat belt according to the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions. For properly without a booster.
i The system does not deactivate the front
children larger than the typical When the child restraint is not in use, passenger side impact air bag, the window
12-month-old child, the front passenger remove it from the vehicle or secure it with curtain air bag, and the emergency tensioning
front air bag may or may not be the seat belt to prevent the child restraint device.
activated (컄 page 86). from becoming a projectile in the event of Occupants must sit properly belted in a
an accident. nearly upright position with their back
Warning! G Do not leave children unattended in the against the seat backrest and feet on the
floor to be correctly classified. If the occu-
vehicle, even if the children are secured in a
Infants and small children should never child restraint system. Unsupervised chil- pant’s weight is transferred to another
share a seat belt with another occupant. dren in a child restraint system may use object in the vehicle (e.g. by leaning on
During an accident, they could be crushed vehicle equipment and may cause an acci- armrests), the OCS may not be able to
between the occupant and seat belt. dent and/or serious personal injury. properly approximate the occupant’s
weight category.
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
are not properly secured in the vehicle
and/or the child is not properly secured in
the child restraint.
85
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Furthermore, the occupant weight may ap-

pear to increase or decrease due to Warning! G When the OCS senses that the front passen-
ger seat occupant is classified as being up
objects hanging on the seat, other passen-
If the 59 indicator lamp illumi- to or less than the weight of a typical
gers pushing on the seat, objects lodged
nates when an adult or someone larger than 12-month-old child in a standard child
underneath the seat or stuffed between
a small individual is in the front passenger restraint, the 59 indicator
seat and middle console or between seat
seat, have the front passenger re-position lamp will illuminate when the engine is start-
and door or due to objects applying pres-
himself or herself in the seat until the ed and remain illuminated, indicating that
sure on the back of the seat. Always make
59 indicator lamp goes out, or the front passenger front air bag is deacti-
sure that the seat has clearance in all
check whether objects are caught under or vated.
directions at all times.
around the seat. When the OCS senses that the front passen-
i If your seat, including your trim cover and More information about air bag display mes- ger seat is classified as being empty, the
cushion needs to be serviced in any way, take 59 indicator lamp will illumi-
the vehicle to your authorized Mercedes-Benz sages (컄 page 440).
nate when the engine is started and remain
Light Truck Center. In the event of a collision, the air bag control illuminated, indicating that the front
Only seat accessories approved by unit will not allow front passenger front air passenger front air bag is deactivated.
Mercedes-Benz may be used. bag deployment when the OCS classified
Both, driver and the front passenger the front passenger seat occupant as being
should always use the up to or less than the weight of a typical
59 indicator lamp as an indi- 12-month-old child in a standard child re-
cation of whether or not the front passen- straint or if the front passenger seat is
ger is properly positioned. sensed as being empty.
86
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
When the OCS senses that the front passen-

ger seat occupant is classified as being
If the 59 indicator lamp is illu-
minated, the front passenger front air bag is
Warning! G
heavier than the weight of a typical deactivated and will not be deployed. According to accident statistics, children
12-month-old child seated in a standard If the 59 indicator lamp is not are safer when properly restrained in the
child restraint or as being a small individual illuminated, the front passenger front air rear seating positions than in the front seat-
(such as a young teenager or a small adult), bag is activated and will be deployed: ing position. Thus, we strongly recommend
the 59 indicator lamp will illu- that children be placed in the rear seats
minate for approximately 6 seconds when 앫 in the event of certain frontal impacts
whenever possible. Regardless of seating
the engine is started and then, depending on 앫 if impact exceeds a preset deployment
position, children 12 years old and under
occupant weight sensor readings from the threshold
must be seated and properly secured in an
seat, remain illuminated or go out. With the 앫 independently of the side impact air appropriate infant or child restraint
59 indicator lamp illuminated, bags. recommended for the size and weight of the
the front passenger front air bag is deacti- If the front passenger front air bag is de- child.
vated. With the 59 indicator ployed, the rate of inflation will be influ-
lamp out, the front passenger front air bag is The infant or child restraint must be properly
enced by:
activated. secured with the vehicle’s seat belt, the seat
앫 the rate of vehicle deceleration as belt and top tether strap, or lower anchors
When the OCS senses that the front passen- assessed by the air bag control unit and top tether strap, fully in accordance
ger seat occupant is classified as an adult or
앫 the front passenger’s weight category with the child seat manufacturer’s
someone larger than a small individual, the as identified by the Occupant Classifica- instructions. 컄컄
59 indicator lamp will illumi- tion System (OCS)
nate for approximately 6 seconds when the
engine is started and then go out, indicating
that the front passenger front air bag is
activated.
87
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
컄컄
Children can be killed or seriously injured by 앫 If you must install a rear-facing child 앫 If you have to place a child in a
an inflating air bag. Note the following restraint on the front passenger seat forward-facing child restraint on the
important information when circumstances because circumstances require you to front passenger seat, move the seat as
require you to place a child in the front pas- do so, make sure that the far back as possible, use the proper
senger seat: 59 indicator lamp is illumi- child restraint recommended for the
nated, indicating that the front passen- age, size and weight of the child, and
앫 Your vehicle is equipped with air bag ger front air bag is deactivated. Should secure child restraint with the vehicle’s
technology designed to turn off the front the 59 indicator lamp not seat belt according to the child seat
passenger front air bag in your vehicle illuminate or go out while the restraint is manufacturer’s instructions. For
when the system senses the weight of a installed, please check installation. children larger than the typical
typical 12-month-old child or less along Periodically check the 12-month-old child, the front passenger
with the weight of a standard appropri- 59 indicator lamp while front air bag may or may not be
ate child restraint on the front passen- driving to make sure the activated (컄 page 87).
ger seat. 59 indicator lamp is illumi-
앫 A child in a rear-facing child restraint on nated. If the 59 indicator
the front passenger seat will be serious- lamp goes out or remains out, do not
ly injured or even killed if the front transport a child on the front passenger
passenger front air bag inflates in a seat until the system has been repaired.
collision which could occur under some A child in a rear-facing child restraint on
circumstances, even with the air bag the front passenger seat will be serious-
technology installed in your vehicle. The ly injured or even killed if the front pas-
only means to completely eliminate this senger front air bag inflates.
risk is to never place a child in a rear-fac-
ing child restraint in the front seat. We
therefore strongly recommend that you
always place a child in a rear-facing
child restraint in the back seat.
88
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
i Deployment of the driver front air bag does The 59 indicator lamp is
not mean that the front passenger front air bag located in the center console. Warning! G
also should have deployed.
The Occupant Classification System (컄 page 85) If the 1 indicator lamp and the
may have determined: 59 indicator lamp are lit at the
same time, there is a malfunction in the
앫 that the seat was empty or occupied by the
weight up to or less than that of a typical Occupant Classification System. The front
12-month-old child seated in a standard passenger front air bag will be deactivated
child restraint – both instances where the in this case. Have the system checked as
system suppresses deployment of the front soon as possible by qualified technicians.
passenger front air bag even though the im- Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
pact met the criteria and was of sufficient Truck Center.
severity to deploy the driver front air bag.
앫 that the seat was occupied by a small individ-
1 59 indicator lamp In order to ensure proper operation of the
ual (such as a young teenager or a small air bag system and OCS:
The 59 indicator lamp 1 will
adult) or a child weighing more than the be illuminated, except with the SmartKey 앫 Do not place more than 4.4 lbs (2 kg)
weight of a typical 12-month-old child in a into the parcel net on the back of the
removed from the starter switch or with
standard child restraint – instances where front passenger seat. Otherwise, the
the system may suppress deployment of the the starter switch in position 0
(컄 page 39). OCS may not be able to properly
front passenger front air bag even though approximate the occupant weight
the impact met the criteria and was of suffi-
category.
cient severity to deploy the driver front air
bag. 앫 Do not place objects under and/or
around the front passenger seat. 컄컄
89
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
컄컄 Self-test Occupant Classification

앫 Do not hang anything from or attach any
items to the seats. System Warning! G
앫 Do not stuff objects such as books be- After turning the SmartKey in the starter If the 59 indicator lamp should
tween the middle console and the front switch to position 1 or 2 or pressing the not illuminate, the system is not functioning.
passenger seat. KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button once or You must see an authorized Mercedes-Benz
앫 Do not move the front passenger seat twice, the 59 indicator lamp Light Truck Center before seating any child
backwards against stiff objects. (컄 page 89) located in the center console on the front passenger seat.
illuminates. If an adult occupant is properly
앫 Sit properly belted in a nearly upright
position with your back against the seat sitting on the front passenger seat and the
system senses the occupant as being an For more information, see the “Practical
backrest.
adult, the 59 indicator lamp hints” section (컄 page 426).
앫 Do not lean on the armrests or lift your-
will illuminate and go out after approxi-
self from the seat by using the handle
over the door as this may cause the OCS mately 6 seconds. Warning! G
to be unable to correctly approximate If the seat is not occupied and the system
the occupant weight category. Never place anything between seat cushion
senses the front passenger seat as being
and child seat (e.g. pillow), since it reduces
앫 Only have the seat repaired or replaced empty, the 59 indicator lamp
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light the effectiveness of the Occupant Classifi-
will illuminate and not go out.
Truck Center. cation System. The bottom of the child seat
must make full contact with the passenger
앫 Read and observe all warnings in this
seat cushion. An incorrectly mounted child
chapter.
seat could cause injuries to the child in case
of an accident, instead of increasing protec-
tion for the child.
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
installation of child seats.
90
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Child seat anchors – LATCH type The LATCH anchors are blended with
An incorrectly mounted child seat may come
covers.
This vehicle is equipped with two LATCH loose during an accident which could result
(Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) in serious injury or death to the child.
type anchors (at each of the outer rear Damaged or impact damaged child seats or
seats) for the installation of a LATCH child child seat mounting fittings must be re-
seat with matching mounting fittings. placed.
Do not leave children unattended in the ve-
Warning! G hicle, even if the children are secured in a
child restraint system.
Children too big for a toddler restraint must
ride in seats using regular seat belts. Posi-
tion shoulder belt across chest and shoul- 1 Anchorage ring covers
der, not face or neck.
왘 Remove anchorage ring cover 1 from
A booster seat may be necessary to achieve
the seat on which a child seat is to be
proper belt positioning for children over
installed.
41 lbs until they reach a height where a
lap/shoulder belt fits properly without a
booster.
Install child seat according to manufactu-
rer’s instructions.
The child seat must be firmly attached to the
right and left side anchors 2 (컄 page 92).
91
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
Installation of infant and child restraint 왘 Move the respective head restraint to
system its uppermost position (컄 page 129).
This vehicle is equipped with tether 왘 Guide top tether strap between head
anchorages for a top tether strap at each restraint and top of seat backrest.
of the rear seating positions.
2 Anchors
왘 Install a LATCH type child seat accord-
ing to the manufacturer’s instructions.
! Make sure the seat belt for the center seat
can operate freely with a child seat installed. 1 Anchorage ring
1 Anchorage ring 2 Hook
i Non-LATCH type child seats may also be 2 Hook
used and can be installed using the vehicle’s
seat belt system. Install child seat according to i For safety, make sure hook 2 has attached
the manufacturer’s instructions. to anchorage ring 1 beyond the safety catch, as
illustrated.
92
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
왘 Securely fasten hook 2, which is part Blocking of rear door window operation
of the tether strap, to anchorage Warning! G
ring 1. With the override switch you can disable
After installing top tether straps, make sure the rear side window switches in the rear
Make sure that the seat backrests are in an upright po- door panels.
앫 the top tether strap is not twisted sition and are properly locked. Check for
G
secure locking by pushing and pulling on the
앫 the head restraint is installed and Warning!
seat backrests. If a seat backrest is not
positioned such that the top tether
properly locked, the seat backrest could
strap can pass freely between the Activate the override switch when children
fold. The child seat would no longer be prop-
head restraint and top of seat back- are riding in the back seats of the vehicle.
erly supported or positioned to provide its
rest The children could otherwise injure them-
intended benefit.
selves, e.g. by becoming trapped in the win-
앫 top tether strap is positioned be-
dow opening.
tween the seat backrest and the
왘 Lower the head restraint if necessary
cargo compartment cover blind (if When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
(컄 page 129).
installed) SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
Make sure the top tether strap can from the starter switch, take it with you, and
앫 the top tether strap is positioned pass freely between the head restraint lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat-
between the seat backrest and the and top of seat backrest. tended in the vehicle, or with access to an
partition net* (if installed)
왘 Install the child restraint system and unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehi-
tighten the top tether strap according cle equipment may cause an accident
to the child restraint manufacturer’s in- and/or serious personal injury.
structions.
93
Safety and Security
Occupant safety
The override switch is located on the Disabling

driver’s door control panel.
왘 Press override switch 1 until it engag-
es.
The switch engages in the recessed
position.
The rear door windows can no longer
be operated using the switches located
in the rear doors.
i Operating the rear door windows using the
switches located on the door control panel of the
driver’s door is still possible.
1 Override switch
For more information on power windows, Enabling
see “Power windows” (컄 page 236).
왘 Press override switch 1 once more.
The switch disengages from its
recessed position back to its original
position.
The rear door windows can again be
operated using the switches located in
the rear doors.
94
Safety and Security
Panic alarm
왔 Panic alarm
i Canada only: Deactivating
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry
Canada. Operation is subject to the following 왘 Press button 1 again.
two conditions:
The SmartKey or SmartKey with
(1) This device may not cause interference, and KEYLESS-GO* must be within
(2) this device must accept any interference 30 ft (9 m) of the vehicle.
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation of the device. or
Any unauthorized modification to this device 왘 Insert SmartKey or the SmartKey with
could void the user’s authority to operate the KEYLESS-GO* in the starter switch.
1 Â button equipment.
or
i USA only: Activating 왘 Press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following button (컄 page 41).
왘 Press and hold button 1 for at least
two conditions: The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* must
1 second.
(1) This device may not cause harmful interfer- be in the vehicle.
ence, and The SmartKey or SmartKey with
(2) this device must accept any interference KEYLESS-GO* must be within
received, including interference that may 30 ft (9 m) of the vehicle.
cause undesired operation.
An audible alarm and flashing exterior
Any unauthorized modification to this device lamps will operate briefly.
could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment.
95
Safety and Security
In this section you will find information on i In winter operation, the maximum effective- On slippery road surfaces, the ABS will
the following driving safety systems: ness of the ABS, the BAS, the ESP®, the EBP, and respond even to light brake pressure.
the 4-ETS is only achieved with winter tires
앫 ABS (Antilock Brake System) The - indicator lamp in the instrument
(컄 page 399) or snow chains as required.
cluster (컄 page 26) comes on when you
앫 BAS (Brake Assist System)
ABS switch on the ignition. It goes out when the
앫 ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) engine is running.
앫 EBP (Electronic Brake Proportioning)
앫 4-ETS (Electronic Traction System) Warning! G Braking
At the instant one of the wheels is about to
Do not pump the brake pedal. Use firm, lock up, a slight pulsation can be felt in the
Warning! G steady brake pedal pressure instead. Pump- brake pedal, indicating that the ABS is in
ing the brake pedal defeats the purpose of the regulating mode.
The following factors increase the risk of the ABS and significantly reduces braking
accidents: 왘 Keep firm and steady pressure on the
effectiveness.
brake pedal while experiencing the pul-
앫 Excessive speed, especially in turns
sation.
앫 Wet and slippery road surfaces The Antilock Brake System (ABS) regulates
the brake pressure so that the wheels do Continuous, steady brake pedal pressure
앫 Following another vehicle too closely
not lock during braking. This allows you to yields the advantages provided by the ABS,
The ABS, BAS, ESP® and 4-ETS cannot namely braking power and ability to steer
maintain the ability to steer your vehicle.
reduce this risk. the vehicle.
The ABS is functional above a speed of ap-
Always adjust your driving style to the pre- The pulsating brake pedal can be an
proximately 5 mph (8 km/h) independent
vailing road and weather conditions. indication of hazardous road conditions
of road surface conditions.
and functions as a reminder to take extra
care while driving.
96
Safety and Security
Emergency brake maneuver BAS

excessive speed in turns, following another
왘 Keep continuous full pressure on the vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a
The Brake Assist System (BAS) operates in
brake pedal. safe, attentive, and skillful driver can pre-
emergency situations. If you apply the
vent accidents. The capabilities of an ABS
brakes very quickly, the BAS automatically
Warning! G equipped vehicle must never be exploited in
a reckless or dangerous manner which
provides full brake boost, thereby poten-
tially reducing braking distance.
When the ABS is malfunctioning, the BAS, could jeopardize the user’s safety or the
safety of others. 왘 Apply continuous full braking pressure
the ESP®, and the 4-ETS are also switched
until the emergency braking situation is
off. The basic driving and braking functions
Off-road – ABS over.
are still available.
When the ABS is malfunctioning, the wheels With the off-road driving program switched The ABS will prevent the wheels from
may lock during hard braking, reducing on (컄 page 268), the ABS designed for locking.
steering capability and extending the brak- off-road use is automatically activated. When you release the brake pedal, the
ing distance. When applying the brakes at speeds below brakes function again as normal. The BAS
approximately 18 mph (30 km/h), the is then deactivated.
front wheels are locked cyclically to short-
Warning! G en the braking distance (dig-in effect). This Warning! G
affects steering the vehicle.
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of If the BAS is malfunctioning, the brake sys-
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can For more information, see “Practical hints”
(컄 page 413). tem is still functioning, but without the addi-
it increase braking or steering efficiency be- tional brake boost available that BAS would
yond that afforded by the condition of the normally provide in an emergency braking
vehicle brakes and tires or the traction maneuver. Therefore, the braking distance
afforded. The ABS cannot prevent acci- may increase.
dents, including those resulting from
97
Safety and Security
ESP®
The Electronic Stability Program (ESP®)is
The BAS cannot prevent the natural laws of operational as soon as the engine is run- Never switch off the ESP® when you see the
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can ning. It monitors the vehicle’s traction ESP® warning lamp v flashing in the in-
it increase braking efficiency beyond that (force of adhesive friction between the strument cluster. In this case, proceed as
afforded by the condition of the vehicle tires and the road surface) and handling. follows:
brakes and tires or the traction afforded. 앫 While driving off, apply as little throttle
The ESP® recognizes when a wheel is
The BAS cannot prevent accidents, includ- as possible.
spinning or if the vehicle starts to skid. By
ing those resulting from excessive speed in
applying brakes to the appropriate wheel 앫 While driving, ease up on the accelera-
turns, following another vehicle too closely,
and by limiting engine output, the ESP® tor.
or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and
works to stabilize the vehicle. The ESP® is 앫 Adapt your speed and driving style to
skillful driver can prevent accidents. The
especially useful while driving off and on the prevailing road conditions.
capabilities of a BAS equipped vehicle must
wet or slippery road surfaces. The ESP® Failure to observe these guidelines could
never be exploited in a reckless or danger-
also helps stabilize the vehicle during cause the vehicle to skid.
ous manner which could jeopardize the
braking maneuvers.
user’s safety or the safety of others. The ESP® cannot prevent accidents result-
The ESP® warning lamp v in the instru- ing from excessive speed.
ment cluster (컄 page 26) flashes when the
ESP® is engaged.
The ESP® warning lamp v in the instru-
ment cluster come on when you switch on
the ignition. It goes out when the engine is
running.
98
Safety and Security
! Because the ESP® operates automatically, Switching off the ESP®

Warning! G the engine and ignition must be shut off
The ESP® cannot prevent the natural laws of

(SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or 1 or
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button in Warning! G
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can position 0 or 1) when testing the brakes on a
brake test dynamometer and such testing should The ESP® should not be switched off during
it increase the traction afforded. The ESP®
be no longer than 10 seconds. normal driving other than in the circum-
cannot prevent accidents, including those
Active braking action through the ESP® may stances described below. Disabling of the
resulting from excessive speed in turns, fol-
otherwise seriously damage the brake system system will reduce vehicle stability in stan-
lowing another vehicle too closely, or hydro-
which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz dard driving maneuvers.
planing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful
Limited Warranty.
driver can prevent accidents. The capabili- Do not switch off the ESP® when a spare
ties of an ESP® equipped vehicle must never i The ESP ®
will only function properly if you wheel is mounted.
be exploited in a reckless or dangerous use wheels of the recommended tire size
manner which could jeopardize the user’s (컄 page 536).
To improve the vehicle’s traction, switch
safety or the safety of others. For more information, see the “Practical off the ESP® in driving situations where it
hints” section (컄 page 419) and would be advantageous to have the drive
! Operational or performance test must only (컄 page 436). wheels spin and thus cut into surfaces for
be conducted on a two-axle dynanometer. If better grip such as:
such tests are necessary, contact an authorized
앫 when driving with snow chains
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. You could
otherwise seriously damage the brake system or 앫 in deep snow
the transfer case which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. 앫 in sand or gravel
99
Safety and Security
! Switch on the ESP® immediately if the The ESP® switch is located on the upper
aforementioned circumstances do not apply part of the center console. Warning! G
anymore.
When the ESP® warning lamp v is
When you switch off the ESP®
illuminated continuously, the ESP® is
앫 the ESP® does not stabilize the vehicle switched off or is not operational due to a
malfunction.
앫 the engine output is not limited, which
allows the drive wheels to spin and Adapt your speed and driving to the prevail-
thus cut into surfaces for better grip ing road conditions and to the non-operating
status of the ESP®.
앫 the 4-ETS will still apply the brake to a
spinning wheel
앫 the ESP® continues to operate when ! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an ex-
1 ESP® switch tended period of time with the ESP® switched
you are braking off. This may cause serious damage to the
왘 With the engine running, press ESP®
앫 you cannot activate the cruise control switch 1. drivetrain which is not covered by the
or the Distronic* system Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
The ESP® warning lamp v in the
앫 the cruise control or the Distronic* instrument cluster comes on. Switching on the ESP®
system switch off if currently activated
The ESP® is deactivated. 왘 Press ESP® switch 1.
i When the ESP® is switched off and one or
The ESP® warning lamp v in the
more drive wheels are spinning, the ESP®
warning lamp v in the instrument cluster instrument cluster goes out.
flashes. However, the ESP® will then not You are now again in normal driving
stabilize the vehicle.
mode.
100
Safety and Security
For more information, see “Practical hints” The ESP® Trailer Stabilization is functional EBP
(컄 page 413). at vehicle speeds above approximately
40 mph (65 km/h) when the ESP® is The EBP enhances braking effectiveness
Off-road – ESP® switched on. by allowing the rear brakes to supply a
greater proportion of the braking effort
With the off-road driving program switched
without a loss of vehicle stability.
on (컄 page 268), the ESP® designed for Warning G
off-road use is automatically activated. At
speeds below 27 mph (45 km/h), the The system will not be able to assist when Warning! G
ESP® assists in over-/understeering, thus the trailer jackknifes
improving vehicle traction. If the EBP is malfunctioning, the brake sys-
앫 on wet or icy roads
tem is still functioning. However, the rear
앫 on roads with slippery surface wheels may lock during hard braking, caus-
ESP® Trailer Stabilization
앫 in sand or gravel ing you to lose control over the vehicle and
If the trailer you are towing should begin to possibly causing an accident. Adjust your
Trailers with a high center of gravity may tip
sway, the rig can only be stabilized by driving style to the non-operating status of
over before the system recognizes swaying
immediately applying the brakes hard. the EBP.
of the trailer.
Steering during this maneuver will not help
to stabilize the rig.
i If the ESP® has switched off due to a mal- For more information, see the “Practical
ESP® will assist you in such situations. ® hints” section (컄 page 416) and
function, ESP cannot stabilize the rig.
ESP® recognizes when the trailer starts (컄 page 448).
swaying and will apply the brakes to re-
duce the vehicle speed to a non-critical
speed that allows the vehicle-trailer combi-
nation to stabilize.
101
Safety and Security
4-ETS ! Because the ESP® operates automatically,

Warning! G the engine and ignition must be shut off
The 4-Electronic Traction System (4-ETS) (SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or 1 or
improves the vehicle’s ability to utilize When you see ESP® warning lamp v KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button in
available traction, especially under flashing in the instrument cluster, then pro- position 0 or 1) when testing the brakes on a
slippery road conditions. The brakes are ceed as follows: brake test dynamometer and such testing should
be no longer than 10 seconds.
applied to the spinning wheel and power is 앫 While driving off, apply as little throttle
transferred to the wheel(s) with traction. Active braking action through the ESP® may
as possible.
otherwise seriously damage the brake system
The ESP® warning lamp v in the instru- 앫 While driving, ease up on the accelera- which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
ment cluster, starts to flash at any vehicle tor. Limited Warranty.
speed, as soon as a tire loses traction and 앫 Adapt your speed and driving style to
the wheel begins to spin.
i If the yellow ESP® warning lamp v
the prevailing road conditions. comes on while driving, the 4-ETS is being
i If conditions require, switch on off-road Failure to observe these guidelines could switched off temporarily to prevent overheating
driving program (컄 page 268). cause the vehicle to skid. of the drive wheel brakes. In addition, the
message ESP inoperative See Operator’s
The 4-ETS cannot prevent accidents resul- Manual appears in the multifunction display.
ting from excessive speed.
For more information, see the “Practical
hints” section (컄 page 414) and
! Operational or performance test must only (컄 page 428).
be conducted on a two-axle dynanometer. If
Off-road - 4-ETS
otherwise seriously damage the brake system or With the off-road driving program switched
the transfer case which is not covered by the on (컄 page 268), the 4-ETS designed for
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
off-road use is automatically activated.
102
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
왔 Anti-theft systems
Immobilizer Deactivating Anti-theft alarm system
The immobilizer prevents unauthorized With the SmartKey Once the alarm system has been armed, a
persons from starting your vehicle. visual and audible alarm is triggered when
왘 Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
someone opens
to position 2 (컄 page 39).
Activating
앫 a door
With KEYLESS-GO* 앫 the tailgate
With the SmartKey
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 40). 앫 the hood
switch. i Starting the engine will also deactivate the The alarm will stay on, even if the activat-
immobilizer. ing element (a door, for example) is imme-
With KEYLESS-GO* In case the engine cannot be started (yet the diately closed.
왘 Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop vehicle’s battery is charged), the system is not
operational. Contact an authorized The alarm system will also be triggered
button (컄 page 41) on the starter Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center or call when
switch once. 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA), or
앫 the vehicle is opened with the mechan-
The engine is turned off. 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
ical key, see “Unlocking the vehicle”
왘 Open the driver’s door. (컄 page 475)
앫 a door is opened from the inside, see
“Opening the doors from the inside”
(컄 page 118)
103
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
i If the alarm stays on for more than 왘 Make sure all doors and the tailgate are Disarming the alarm system
30 seconds, a call to the Response Center is closed.
왘 Unlock the vehicle (컄 page 38).
initiated automatically by the Tele Aid* system
왘 Lock the vehicle (컄 page 68).
(컄 page 308) provided that the Tele Aid* service The turn signal lamps flash once to
was subscribed to and properly activated, and The turn signal lamps flash three times indicate that the alarm system is
that necessary cellular service and GPS cover- to indicate that the vehicle is locked. disarmed. Indicator lamp 1 goes out.
age are available.
The alarm system is armed within ap- i The alarm system will rearm automatically
Arming the alarm system proximately 10 seconds. Alarm system again after approximately 40 seconds if neither a
indicator lamp 1 flashes. door nor the tailgate is opened.
The alarm system is armed after you have
locked the vehicle with the SmartKey or i If the turn signal lamps do not flash three
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*. times, one of the following elements may not be
properly closed:
The alarm system indicator lamp is located
앫 a door
to the lower left of the hazard warning
flasher. 앫 the tailgate
Close the respective element and lock the
vehicle again.
1 Alarm system indicator lamp
104
Safety and Security
Anti-theft systems
Canceling the alarm

To cancel the alarm:
With the SmartKey

왘 Insert the SmartKey in the starter
switch.
or
왘 Press the Œ or ‹ button on the
SmartKey.
With KEYLESS-GO*
왘 Grasp an outside door handle.
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must
be within 3 ft (1 m) of the vehicle.
or
왘 Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button (컄 page 41).
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must
be inside the vehicle.
105
106
Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking
Seats
Memory function*
Lighting
Instrument cluster
Control system
Automatic transmission
Transfer case
Good visibility
Climate control
3-zone automatic climate control*
Power windows
Power tilt/sliding sunroof*
Driving systems
Loading
Useful features
107
Controls in detail
In the “Controls in detail” section you will For more information on locking and un-
find detailed information on how to oper- locking, see the “Getting started” section
ate the equipment installed in your vehicle. (컄 page 38) and (컄 page 68).
If you are already familiar with the basic
functions of your vehicle, this section will SmartKey
be of particular interest to you.
Your vehicle comes supplied with two
To quickly familiarize yourself with the ba-
SmartKeys, each with remote control and
sic functions of the vehicle, refer to the
a removable mechanical key.
“Getting started” section of this manual.
The corresponding page numbers are The locking tabs for the mechanical key
SmartKey with remote control
given at the beginning of each segment. portion of the two SmartKeys are a differ-
ent color to help distinguish each 1 ‹ Lock button
SmartKey unit. 2 Š Unlock button* for tailgate
3 Locking tab for mechanical key
The SmartKey provides an extended oper-
4 Œ Unlock button
ating range. To prevent theft, however, it is
5 Battery check lamp
advisable to only unlock the vehicle when
6 Â Panic button (컄 page 95)
you are in close proximity to it.
The SmartKey centrally locks and unlocks:
앫 the doors
앫 the tailgate
앫 the fuel filler flap
108
Controls in detail
i USA only: i You can also open and close the power
Warning! G This device complies with Part 15 of the windows and tilt/sliding sunroof* using the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following SmartKey, see “Summer opening feature”
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the two conditions: (컄 page 239) and see “Convenience closing fea-
SmartKey from the starter switch, take it (1) This device may not cause harmful interfer- ture” (컄 page 239).
with you and lock the vehicle. Do not leave ence, and
children unattended in the vehicle, or with (2) this device must accept any interference
Factory setting
access to an unlocked vehicle. It is possible received, including interference that may
for children to open a locked door from the cause undesired operation. Global unlocking
inside, which could result in an accident Any unauthorized modification to this device 왘 Press button Œ.
and/or serious personal injury. could void the user’s authority to operate the
equipment. All turn signal lamps flash once. The
locking knobs in the doors move up.
! To prevent possible malfunction, avoid i Canada only: The anti-theft alarm system is
exposing the SmartKey to high levels of electro- This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry disarmed.
magnetic radiation. Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: The vehicle will lock again automatically
(1) This device may not cause interference, and and reactivate the anti-theft alarm system
within approximately 40 seconds of un-
(2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may locking if
cause undesired operation of the device. 앫 neither door nor tailgate is opened
Any unauthorized modification to this device
앫 the SmartKey is not inserted in the
equipment. starter switch
앫 the central locking switch is not
activated
109
Controls in detail
Global locking Unlocking driver’s door and fuel filler Restoring to factory setting
flap
왘 Press button ‹. 왘 Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹
왘 Press button Œ once. simultaneously for about 5 seconds
With the tailgate and all doors closed,
the turn signal lamps flash three times. until battery check lamp 5
All turn signal lamps flash once. The
The locking knobs in the doors move (컄 page 108) flashes twice.
locking knob in the driver’s door moves
down. The anti-theft alarm system is up. The anti-theft alarm system is ! If you cannot lock or unlock the vehicle with
armed. disarmed. the SmartKey, the batteries in the SmartKey are
discharged, the SmartKey is malfunctioning, or
Selective setting Global unlocking the vehicle battery is drained.
앫 Check the batteries in the SmartKey and
If you frequently travel alone, you may wish 왘 Press button Œ twice.
replace them if necessary (컄 page 480).
to reprogram the SmartKey so that
All turn signal lamps flash once. The 앫 Use the mechanical key to unlock the
pressing button Œ only unlocks the
locking knobs in the doors move up. driver’s door (컄 page 475).
driver’s door and the fuel filler flap.
The anti-theft alarm system is 앫 Lock the vehicle as described in the
왘 Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹ disarmed. “Practical hints” section (컄 page 476).
simultaneously for about 5 seconds 앫 Have the vehicle battery and the vehicle
until battery check lamp 5 Global locking battery connections checked (컄 page 507).
(컄 page 108) flashes twice.
왘 Press button ‹. If the SmartKey is malfunctioning, contact
The SmartKey will then function as Roadside Assistance or an authorized
With the tailgate and all doors closed, Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
follows: the turn signal lamps flash three times.
The locking knobs in the doors move
down. The anti-theft alarm system is
armed.
110
Controls in detail
Checking the batteries Unlocking and opening the tailgate Loss of SmartKey or mechanical key
(Vehicles with power tailgate*)
왘 Press button ‹ or Œ. If you lose a SmartKey or mechanical key,
You can unlock and open the tailgate sep- you should do the following:
Battery check lamp 5 (컄 page 108)
arately.
comes on briefly to indicate that the 왘 Have the SmartKey deactivated by an
SmartKey batteries are in order. A minimum height clearance of 7.2 ft authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
(2.20 m) is required to open the tailgate. Center.
i If battery check lamp 5 does not come on
briefly during check, the SmartKey batteries are 왘 Press and hold button Š on the 왘 Report the loss of the SmartKey or the
discharged. SmartKey until the tailgate unlocks and mechanical key immediately to your
Replace the batteries (컄 page 480). begins to open. car insurance company.
You can obtain the required batteries at any ! The tailgate swings open upwards automat- 왘 If necessary, have the mechanical lock
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. ically. Always make sure there is sufficient over- replaced.
head clearance.
i If the batteries are checked within signal Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
range of the vehicle, pressing the To stop the opening procedure, press Truck Center will be glad to supply you
button ‹ or Œ will lock or unlock the button Š on the SmartKey. The tailgate stops
with a replacement.
vehicle accordingly. moving.
i If the vehicle was previously centrally locked

with the SmartKey, the tailgate will lock automat-
ically when closed. The turn signals will flash
three times to confirm locking.
111
Controls in detail
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*

Warning! G
Vehicles equipped with KEYLESS-GO come
with two SmartKeys with KEYLESS-GO, When leaving the vehicle, always take the
each with remote control and a removable SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* with you and
mechanical key. lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat-
The locking tabs for the mechanical key
portion of the two SmartKeys with
KEYLESS-GO are a different color to help
distinguish each SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO unit. SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
The KEYLESS-GO function is integrated 1 ‹ Lock button ! To prevent possible malfunction, avoid
2 Š Unlock button* for tailgate exposing the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO to high
into the SmartKey. On these vehicles, the levels of electromagnetic radiation.
validity of the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO 3 Locking tab for mechanical key
is checked when you grasp an outside door 4 Œ Unlock button i USA only:
handle. 5 Battery check lamp This device complies with Part 15 of the
6 Â Panic button (컄 page 95) FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is valid, two conditions:
your vehicle unlocks (1) This device may not cause harmful interfer-
앫 the doors ence, and
앫 the tailgate received, including interference that may
앫 the fuel filler flap cause undesired operation.
equipment.
112
Controls in detail
i Canada only: Important notes on using KEYLESS-GO* 앫 To lock or unlock the vehicle, the
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be
앫 You can also use the SmartKey with
Canada. Operation is subject to the following located outside the vehicle within ap-
two conditions: KEYLESS-GO like a normal SmartKey
proximately 3 ft (1 m) of the respective
(컄 page 108).
(1) This device may not cause interference, and door or the tailgate.
앫 You can combine KEYLESS-GO func-
(2) this device must accept any interference 앫 In order to start the engine with the
received, including interference that may tions with normal SmartKey functions
(e.g. unlocking with KEYLESS-GO and SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO:
cause undesired operation of the device.
Any unauthorized modification to this device locking with the ‹ button). 앫 The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
could void the user’s authority to operate the must be located in the vehicle.
앫 Always carry the SmartKey with
equipment. KEYLESS-GO with you. 앫 The KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
i You can also open and close the power must be inserted in the starter
앫 Never store the SmartKey with
windows and tilt/sliding sunroof* using the switch (컄 page 41).
KEYLESS-GO together with:
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO, see “Summer
앫 The brake pedal must be firmly de-
opening feature” (컄 page 239) and see “Conve- 앫 electronic items such as a cellular
nience closing feature” (컄 page 239). phone or another SmartKey with pressed. Do not depress the accel-
erator.
KEYLESS-GO
앫 If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is
앫 metallic objects such as coins or
metal foil positioned farther away from the vehi-
cle, the system may no longer recog-
Doing so could impair the function of nize the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO.
the KEYLESS-GO system. The vehicle then cannot be locked or
the engine started via the KEYLESS-GO
system.
113
Controls in detail
앫 If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is re- 앫 If you have started the engine with the 앫 Remember that the engine can be
moved from the vehicle (e.g. if a pas- KEYLESS-GO start/stop button started by anyone with a SmartKey
senger exits the vehicle with the (컄 page 55), you can turn it off again with KEYLESS-GO that is left inside the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO) with vehicle.
Possibility 1 (One SmartKey with
앫 when pressing the KEYLESS-GO 앫 the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
KEYLESS-GO in the vehicle, one
start/stop button or trying to lock (컄 page 67)
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO outside
the vehicle with the look button on
앫 the SmartKey inserted in the starter the vehicle):
an outside door handle the mes-
switch, when the automatic trans- If you leave the SmartKey with
sage Key not detected appears in
mission is in position P KEYLESS-GO behind when exiting and
the multifunction display
locking the vehicle, no message
앫 with the engine running, the mes- appears in the multifunction display.
sage Key not detected appears in Possibility 2 (One SmartKey with
the multifunction display while KEYLESS-GO in the vehicle, no
driving off. SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO outside
Find the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO or the vehicle):
change its present location immediate- When exiting and trying to lock the
ly (e.g. place it on the front passenger vehicle, the message Key detected in
seat or insert it in shirt pocket). vehicle will appear in the multifunction
display. The vehicle will not be locked.
114
Controls in detail
Factory setting i The vehicle could be inadvertently unlocked Selective setting

if the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is within 3 ft
If you frequently travel alone, you may wish
Global unlocking (1 m) of the vehicle and
to reprogram the SmartKey with
왘 Grasp an outside door handle. 앫 an outside door handle is splashed with KEYLESS-GO so when you grasp the
water
driver’s door handle only the driver’s door
All turn signal lamps flash once. The or and the fuel filler flap unlocks.
locking knobs in the doors move up.
앫 you attempt to clean an outside door handle
The anti-theft alarm system is dis- 왘 Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹
armed. simultaneously for about 5 seconds un-
Global locking
til battery check lamp 5 (컄 page 112)
i If the vehicle has been parked for more than 왘 Press the lock button on an outside flashes twice.
72 hours, you must pull an outside door handle
in order to activate the KEYLESS-GO function. door handle (컄 page 68).
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO will
The vehicle will lock again automatically With the tailgate and all doors closed, then function as follows:
and reactivate the anti-theft alarm system the turn signal lamps flash three times.
within approximately 40 seconds of The locking knobs in the doors move Unlocking driver’s door and fuel filler
unlocking if down. The anti-theft alarm system is flap
armed.
앫 neither a door nor the tailgate is 왘 Grasp the driver’s outside door handle.
opened All turn signal lamps flash once. The
앫 the central locking switch is not locking knob in the driver’s door moves
activated up. The anti-theft alarm system is dis-
armed.
115
Controls in detail
Global unlocking Restoring to factory setting Checking the batteries

왘 Grasp any outside door handle other 왘 Press and hold buttons Œ and ‹ 왘 Press button ‹ or Œ.
than the driver’s outside door handle. simultaneously for about 5 seconds
Battery check lamp 5 (컄 page 112)
All turn signal lamps flash once. The until battery check lamp 5
comes on briefly to indicate that the
locking knobs in the doors move up. (컄 page 112) flashes twice.
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO batteries
The anti-theft alarm system is dis- ! If you can no longer lock or unlock the are in order.
armed. vehicle with the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO, the
batteries in the SmartKey are discharged, the i If battery check lamp 5 (컄 page 112) does
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is malfunctioning or not come on briefly during check, the SmartKey
Global locking with KEYLESS-GO batteries are discharged.
the vehicle battery is drained.
왘 Press the lock button on an outside Replace the batteries (컄 page 480).
앫 Check the batteries in the SmartKey with
door handle (컄 page 68). KEYLESS-GO (컄 page 116) and replace You can obtain the required batteries at any
All turn signal lamps flash three times. them if necessary (컄 page 480). authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
The locking knobs in the doors move 앫 Use the mechanical key to unlock the
driver’s door (컄 page 475).
i If the batteries are checked within signal
down. The anti-theft alarm system is range of the vehicle, pressing the
armed. 앫 Lock the vehicle as described in the “Practi- button ‹ or Œ will lock or unlock the
cal hints” section (컄 page 476). vehicle accordingly.
앫 Have the vehicle battery and the vehicle
battery connections checked (컄 page 507).
If the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is malfunc-
tioning, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center.
116
Controls in detail
Unlocking and opening the tailgate 왘 Pull on the handle Loss of the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
(Vehicles with power tailgate*)
or If you lose your SmartKey with
You can unlock and open the tailgate sep- KEYLESS-GO or mechanical key, you
왘 Press and hold button Š on the
arately. should do the following:
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO until the
A minimum height clearance of 7.2 ft tailgate unlocks and opens. 왘 Have the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
(2.20 m) is required to open the tailgate. deactivated by an authorized
! The tailgate swings open upwards automat- Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
The handle is located above the rear ically. Always make sure there is sufficient over-
license plate recess. head clearance. 왘 Report the loss of the SmartKey with
To stop the opening procedure, press KEYLESS-GO or the mechanical key
button Š on the SmartKey. The tailgate stops immediately to your car insurance
moving. company.
i If the vehicle was previously centrally locked 왘 Have the mechanical lock replaced if
with the SmartKey or SmartKey with necessary.
KEYLESS-GO*, the tailgate will lock automatical-
ly when closed (컄 page 121). The turn signals Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
will flash three times to confirm locking. Truck Center will be glad to supply you
with a replacement.
117
Controls in detail
Opening the doors from the inside i If the vehicle has previously been locked Front doors
from the outside with the SmartKey or
왘 Pull on inside door handle 2 on the
You can open a locked door from the in- KEYLESS-GO*, opening a door from the inside
will trigger the anti-theft alarm system. respective front door to open door.
side. Open door only when conditions are
safe to do so. To cancel the alarm, do one of the following: If the door was locked, locking knob 1
With the SmartKey will move up.
앫 Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch.
Rear doors
앫 Press the Œ or ‹ button on the
SmartKey. 왘 Pull up locking knob 1 on the respec-
tive rear door to unlock door.
With KEYLESS-GO*
앫 Grasp an outside door handle. 왘 Pull on inside door handle 2 on the re-
spective rear door to open door.
앫 Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
(컄 page 41).
1 Locking knob inside the vehicle.
2 Inside door handle
118
Controls in detail
Opening the tailgate i Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO*: Opening the tailgate from the inside
The vehicle must be unlocked (컄 page 38). electrically*
Opening the tailgate from the outside Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: In vehicles with power tailgate* you can
When opening the tailgate, the vehicle is globally open the tailgate from the inside if the ve-
A minimum height clearance of 7.0 ft unlocked.
hicle is stationary.
(2.13 m) is required to open the tailgate.
왘 Pull on the handle.
A minimum height clearance of 7.0 ft
Vehicles with vehicle level control*:
The tailgate opens slightly. (2.13 m) is required to open the tailgate.
Depending on the set vehicle level a mini-
mum height clearance of 7.2 ft (2.20 m) is 왘 Pull tailgate upwards to open. Vehicles with vehicle level control*:
required to open the tailgate. Depending on the set vehicle level a mini-
! The tailgate swings open upwards automat- mum height clearance of 7.2 ft (2.20 m) is
The handle is located above the rear ically. Always make sure there is sufficient over-
head clearance. required to open the tailgate.
license plate recess.
Vehicles with power tailgate*:
To stop the opening procedure, press
button Š on the SmartKey. The tailgate stops
moving.
i If the vehicle was previously centrally

locked, the tailgate will lock automatically after
closing it (컄 page 121). The turn signals will
flash three times to confirm locking.
The tailgate can also be opened using the
SmartKey (컄 page 108).
119
Controls in detail
The switch is located on the door control Limiting opening height of tailgate*
panel. Warning! G Vehicles with power tailgate*:
Maintain sight of the area around the rear of The tailgate opening height can be limited
the vehicle while operating the tailgate with when transporting goods on a roof rack*
the door-mounted remote tailgate switch or (e.g. presence of an MB roof cargo contain-
with the Š button on the SmartKey or er*). When activated, the tailgate opens to
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*. Monitor the approximately 6.6 ft (2.00 m).
opening procedure carefully to make sure
왘 Activate the limiting opening height of
no one is in danger of being injured.
tailgate using the control system
To interrupt the opening procedure, press or (컄 page 177).
pull the door-mounted remote tailgate
1 Remote tailgate switch with indicator switch or press the Š button on the
lamp SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*.
왘 Pull remote tailgate switch 1 until
tailgate begins to open. ! The tailgate swings open upwards automat-
ically. Always make sure there is sufficient over-
The tailgate opens. The indicator lamp head clearance. To stop the opening procedure,
in the remote tailgate switch comes on press or pull remote tailgate switch 1 or press
and remains lit until the tailgate is the Š button on the SmartKey or SmartKey
closed. While the tailgate is opening, an with KEYLESS-GO*. The tailgate stops moving.
acoustic signal sounds.
i The tailgate can also be opened using the
button Š on the SmartKey (컄 page 108) or
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* (컄 page 112).
120
Controls in detail
Closing the tailgate

Closing the tailgate from the inside Maintain sight of the area around the rear of Only drive with the tailgate closed as,
electrically* the vehicle while operating the tailgate with among other dangers such as blocked
In vehicles with power tailgate* you can the door mounted switch. Monitor the visibility, exhaust fumes may enter the
close the tailgate from the inside using the closing procedure carefully to make sure no vehicle interior.
remote tailgate switch. one is in danger of being injured.
왘 Press remote tailgate switch 1 To interrupt the closing procedure, press or If the tailgate comes into contact with an
(컄 page 120) until tailgate begins to pull the door mounted remote tailgate object while closing (e.g. luggage that has
close. switch. been piled too high) the closing procedure
Even with the SmartKey or the SmartKey is stopped and the tailgate reopens.
The tailgate closes. While the tailgate is
closing an acoustic signal sounds. The with KEYLESS-GO* removed from the
indicator lamp in the remote tailgate starter switch or the SmartKey with
switch goes out. KEYLESS-GO* removed from the vehicle,
the remote tailgate switch can be operated.
To interrupt the closing procedure: Therefore, do not leave children unattended
왘 Press or pull remote tailgate switch 1 in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
(컄 page 120). vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehicle equip-
ment may cause an accident and/or serious
i You can also close the tailgate manually personal injury.
(컄 page 122).
121
Controls in detail
Closing the tailgate from the outside

manually Warning! G Warning! G
To prevent possible personal injury, always Only drive with the tailgate closed as,
keep hands and fingers away from the cargo among other dangers such as blocked
compartment opening when closing the tail- visibility, exhaust fumes may enter the
gate. Be especially careful when small chil- vehicle interior.
dren are around.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the i To prevent an inadvertent lockout, do not
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* place the SmartKey in the cargo compartment.
from the starter switch, take it with you, and Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: To prevent a
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat- possible inadvertent lockout, the tailgate will
1 Handle tended in the vehicle, or with access to an open automatically if a SmartKey with
unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehi- KEYLESS-GO is recognized inside the vehicle.
왘 Lower tailgate by pulling firmly on
handle 1. i If the vehicle was previously centrally locked
and/or serious personal injury. with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO*, the tailgate
왘 Close tailgate with hands placed flat on will lock automatically after closing it. The turn
it. signals flash three times to confirm locking.
Once the tailgate touches the latch, the
tailgate will pull itself shut automatical-
ly.
122
Controls in detail
Closing the tailgate from the outside i You can also close the tailgate manually Even with the SmartKey removed from the
(vehicles without KEYLESS-GO*) (컄 page 122).
starter switch, the tailgate closing switch
In vehicles with power tailgate* you can If the tailgate comes into contact with an can be operated. Therefore, do not leave
close the tailgate from the outside using object while closing (e.g. luggage that has children unattended in the vehicle, or with
the tailgate closing switch or the been piled too high), the closing procedure access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsuper-
Š button on the SmartKey. is stopped and the tailgate reopens. vised use of vehicle equipment may cause
an accident and/or serious personal injury.
Warning! G
Monitor the closing procedure carefully to Warning! G
make sure no one is in danger of being in-
Only drive with the tailgate closed as,
jured. To prevent possible personal injury,
among other dangers such as blocked
always keep hands and fingers away from
visibility, exhaust fumes may enter the vehi-
the cargo compartment opening when clos-
cle interior.
ing the tailgate. Be especially careful when
small children are around. To stop the clos-
1 Tailgate closing switch ing procedure, do one of the following: i Do not place the SmartKey in the open
왘 Press tailgate closing switch 1 briefly. cargo compartment. You may lock yourself out.
앫 Press tailgate closing switch 1.
The tailgate closes and an acoustic 앫 Press the Š button on the SmartKey. i If the vehicle was previously centrally
warning sounds. locked, the tailgate will lock automatically after
앫 Press or pull the remote tailgate switch closing it. The turn signals will flash three times
(on the driver’s door). to confirm locking.
123
Controls in detail
Closing the tailgate from the outside

(vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*) Warning! G Warning! G
In vehicles with power tailgate* and Monitor the closing procedure carefully to Only drive with the tailgate closed as,
KEYLESS-GO*, you can close the tailgate make sure no one is in danger of being in- among other dangers such as blocked
separately from the outside using the tail- jured. To prevent possible personal injury, visibility, exhaust fumes may enter the vehi-
gate closing switch or the Š button on always keep hands and fingers away from cle interior.
the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*. the cargo compartment opening when clos-
ing the tailgate. Be especially careful when 왘 Make sure you have the SmartKey with
small children are around. To stop the clos- KEYLESS-GO* with you.
ing procedure, do one of the following:
왘 Press tailgate closing switch 1 briefly.
앫 Press tailgate closing switch 1.
The tailgate closes and an acoustic
앫 Press the Š button on the SmartKey
with KEYLESS-GO. warning sounds.
앫 Press or pull the remote tailgate switch If the tailgate comes into contact with an
(on the driver’s door). object while closing (e.g. luggage that has
Even with the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* been piled too high), the closing procedure
1 Tailgate closing switch removed from the vehicle, the tailgate is stopped and the tailgate reopens.
closing switch can be operated. Therefore, i If the vehicle was previously centrally
do not leave children unattended in the ve- locked, the tailgate will lock automatically after
hicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. closing it. The turn signals will flash three times
Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may to confirm locking.
cause an accident and/or serious personal
i You can also close the tailgate manually
injury. (컄 page 122).
124
Controls in detail
Closing the tailgate and locking the

vehicle from the outside (vehicles with Warning! G Warning! G
KEYLESS-GO*)
Monitor the closing procedure carefully to Only drive with the tailgate closed as,
In vehicles with power tailgate and make sure no one is in danger of being in- among other dangers such as blocked
KEYLESS-GO*, you can close the tailgate jured. To prevent possible personal injury, visibility, exhaust fumes may enter the vehi-
and lock the vehicle simultaneously from always keep hands and fingers away from cle interior.
the outside using the KEYLESS-GO* the cargo compartment opening when clos-
locking/closing switch or the Š button ing the tailgate. Be especially careful when 왘 Make sure you have the SmartKey with
on the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*. small children are around. To stop the clos- KEYLESS-GO* with you.
ing procedure, do one of the following:
왘 Press KEYLESS-GO* locking/closing
앫 Press KEYLESS-GO* locking/closing
switch 1 briefly.
switch 1.
앫 Press the Š button on the SmartKey The tailgate closes automatically. Once
with KEYLESS-GO*. the tailgate is closed, the vehicle locks
if doors are closed. The turn signals
앫 Press or pull the remote tailgate switch
flash three times to confirm locking.
(on the driver’s door).
The locking knobs in the doors move
Even with the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* down. The anti-theft alarm system is
removed from the vehicle, the tailgate armed. 컄컄
1 KEYLESS-GO* locking/closing switch closing switch can be operated. Therefore,
do not leave children unattended in the ve-
hicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment may
cause an accident and/or serious personal
injury.
125
Controls in detail
컄컄 If the tailgate comes into contact with an i The doors unlock automatically after an Locking and unlocking from the inside
object while closing (e.g. luggage that has accident if the force of the impact exceeds a
been piled too high), the closing procedure preset threshold. You can lock or unlock the doors and the
is stopped and the tailgate reopens. The vehicle automatically locks when the ignition tailgate from inside using the central lock-
is switched on and the wheels are turning at ing or unlocking switch. This can be useful,
i To prevent a possible inadvertent lockout, vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph for example, if you want to lock the vehicle
the tailgate will open automatically if a SmartKey (15 km/h) or more. You could therefore lock before starting to drive.
with KEYLESS-GO* is recognized inside the yourself out when the vehicle
vehicle. The fuel filler flap cannot be locked or un-
앫 is pushed or towed
locked with the central locking or unlock-
Automatic central locking 앫 is on a test stand ing switch.
For information on towing the vehicle, see
The doors and the tailgate lock automati-
cally when the ignition is switched on and
“Towing the vehicle” (컄 page 518). Warning! G
the wheels are turning at vehicle speeds of You can deactivate the automatic locking
mode using the control system When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or more.
(컄 page 176). SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
You can open a locked door from the in- from the starter switch, take it with you, and
side. Open door only when conditions are lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat-
safe to do so. tended in the vehicle, or with access to an
126
Controls in detail
The switches are located in the front-door Unlocking

control panels.
왘 Press central unlocking switch 1.
The vehicle unlocks.
i You can open a locked door from the inside.
Open door only when conditions are safe to do
so.
If the vehicle was previously centrally locked
with the SmartKey or the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO*, it will not unlock using the central
unlocking switch 1.
If the vehicle was previously locked with the
1 Central unlocking switch central locking switch 2:
2 Central locking switch 앫 While in the selective remote control mode,
only the front door opened from the inside is
Locking unlocked.
왘 Press central locking switch 2. 앫 While in the global remote control mode, the
vehicle is unlocked completely when a front
If all doors and the tailgate are closed, door is opened from the inside.
the vehicle locks.
i With the passenger-side door opened, you
cannot lock the vehicle with the central locking
switch.
127
Controls in detail
Seats
For information on seat adjustment, see You cannot remove the active head Rear seat head restraints
the “Getting started” section (컄 page 43). restraints on the driver’s and front
passenger’s seat.
For more information on seats, see “Load-
ing” (컄 page 281).
For removal of the active head restraints Warning! G
we recommend that you contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Do not drive the vehicle without the seat
Front seat active head restraints head restraints installed when the rear seats
Center.
are occupied. Head restraints are intended
For information on head restraint adjust-
Warning! G ment, see “Seats” (컄 page 43).
to help reduce injuries during an accident.
For information on active head restraints, With a rear seat occupied, make sure to
For your protection, drive only with properly see “Active head restraint” (컄 page 80). move the respective head restraint up from
positioned head restraints. the lowest non-use position and have the oc-
cupant adjust the head restraint properly.
Adjust the head restraint so that it is close
to the head as possible and the center of the For your protection, drive only with properly
head restraint supports the back of the head positioned head restraints.
at eye level. This will reduce the potential for Adjust the head restraint in such a way that
injury to the head and neck in the event of it is as close to the head as possible and the
an accident or similar situation. center of the head restraint supports the
back of the head at eye level. This will re-
duce the potential for injury to the head and
neck in the event of an accident or similar
situation.
128
Controls in detail
Seats
Head restraint height Head restraint fore and aft adjustment Head restraints, removing and install-
ing
1 Head restraint Manually adjust the angle of the head

2 Release button restraint. 1 Head restraint
왘 While seated, reach behind you with 2 Release button
Raising:
both hands and find lower edge of the
왘 Manually adjust the height of head Removing
head restraint.
restraint 1 by pulling it upward to the
왘 Pull head restraint 1 to its uppermost
desired position. 왘 Adjust the head restraint to the desired
position by pushing or pulling on the position.
Lowering:
lower edge of the head restraint cush- 왘 Press release button 2 and pull out
왘 To lower head restraint 1, press ion. head restraint.
release button 2 and push down on
head restraint 1.
129
Controls in detail
Seats
Installing Lumbar support Multicontour seat*

왘 Insert head restraint 1 into openings
The curvature of the driver’s seat can be The multicontour seat has an extendable
on the seat backrest.
adjusted to help enhance lower back sup- seat cushion and inflatable air chambers
왘 Push head restraint 1 down until it au- port and seating comfort. built into the backrest to provide additional
dibly engages. lumbar and side support.
The lever for lumbar support adjustment is
왘 Press release button 2 and adjust located on the right hand side of the The seat cushion depth, seat backrest
head restraint 1 to the desired posi- driver’s seat backrest. cushion-height and curvature can be con-
tion (컄 page 129). tinuously varied with switches on the in-
For more information on seats, see the side of each front seat base after the
“Getting started” section (컄 page 43). ignition is switched on (컄 page 39).
1 Adjustment lever
왘 Move adjustment lever 1 in direction
of arrows until you have reached a
comfortable seating position. 1 Seat cushion depth
2 Backrest side bolsters
3 Backrest center
4 Backrest bottom
130
Controls in detail
Seats
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 40). Seat heating* The switches for rear seat heating* are
located in the rear center console.
Seat cushion depth The switches for front-seat heating are lo-
cated in the center console.
왘 Adjust the seat cushion depth to the
length of your upper leg with
switch 1.
Backrest contour
왘 Adjust the contour of the seat backrest
to the desired position with
switch æ or ç.
왘 Move the backrest support to the bot- 1 Seat heating switch, rear seats
tom with button 4 or to the center 2 Indicator lamps
with button 3. 1 Seat heating switch, front seats
2 Indicator lamps
Backrest side bolsters
왘 Adjust the side bolsters so that they
provide good lateral support using
switch 2.
131
Controls in detail
Seats
The red indicator lamps in the switch come 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 40). Seat ventilation*
on to show which heating level you have
selected. Switching on The switches for the seat ventilation are
located in the center console.
왘 Press switch 1.
Level
Three red indicator lamps 2 in the
3 Three indicator lamps on
switch come on.
(highest level)
왘 Continue pressing switch 1 until
The seat heating automatically
desired seat heating level is reached.
switches to level 2 after approx-
imately 5 minutes.
Switching off
2 Two indicator lamps on
왘 Press switch 1 repeatedly until all
The seat heating automatically indicator lamps 2 go out.
switches to level 1 after approx-
imately 10 minutes. i If one or more of the indicator lamps 2 on 1 Seat ventilation switch, front seats
seat heating switch 1 (컄 page 131) are flash- 2 Indicator lamps
1 One indicator lamp on ing, there is insufficient voltage available since
(lowest level) too many electrical consumers are switched on.
The seat heating switches off automatically.
The seat heating automatically
switches off after approximately The seat heating will switch back on again
20 minutes. automatically as soon as sufficient voltage is
available.
off No indicator lamp on
132
Controls in detail
Seats
The blue indicator lamps in the switch Switching on

come on to show which ventilation level
왘 Press button 1 repeatedly until the
you have selected.
desired ventilation level is set.
Level i The seat ventilation for the driver’s seat is
automatically set to the highest level if activated
3 Three indicator lamps on
via summer opening feature (컄 page 239).
(highest level)
2 Two indicator lamps on Switching off
1 One indicator lamp on 왘 Press button 1 repeatedly until all
(lowest level) indicator lamps 2 go out.
off No indicator lamp on
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 40).
133
Controls in detail
Memory function*
Prior to operating the vehicle, the driver With the memory function you can store up
should check and adjust the seat height, to three different settings for each front Warning! G
seat position fore and aft, and seat back- seat.
rest angle if necessary, to ensure adequate Do not activate the memory function while
The following settings are saved for each driving. Activating the memory function
control, reach and comfort. The head
stored position on the entry side of the while driving could cause the driver to lose
restraint should also be adjusted for
driver’s seat: control of the vehicle.
proper height. See also the section on
air bags (컄 page 71) for proper seat posi- 앫 Driver’s seat, head restraint height and
tioning. backrest position
In addition, adjust the steering wheel to 앫 Steering wheel position
ensure adequate control, reach, operation 앫 Driver’s side exterior rear view mirror
and comfort. Both the interior and exterior position
rear view mirrors should be adjusted for
앫 Passenger-side exterior rear view
adequate rear vision.
mirror position
Fasten seat belts. Infants and small chil-
dren should be seated in a properly se- The following settings are saved for each
cured restraint system that complies with stored position on the entry side of the
U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan- front passenger seat:
dard 213 and 225 and Canadian Motor Ve- 앫 Front passenger seat, head restraint
hicle Safety Standards 213 and 210.2. height and backrest position
134
Controls in detail
Memory function*
The memory button and stored position Storing positions into memory Recalling positions from memory
buttons are located on the entry side of
each front seat base. 왘 Adjust the seats (컄 page 43). ! Do not operate the power seats using
memory button M if the seat backrest is in an
왘 On the driver’s side, additionally adjust
excessively reclined position. Doing so could
the steering wheel (컄 page 48) and ex- cause damage to front or rear seats.
terior rear view mirrors (컄 page 49) to
Move seat backrest to an upright position first.
the desired positions.
왘 Press and hold stored position
왘 Press memory button M.
button 1, 2 or 3 until the seat, steering
왘 Release memory button M and press wheel and exterior rear view mirrors
stored position 1, 2 or 3 within have fully moved to the stored posi-
3 seconds. tions.
All settings are stored to the selected i Releasing the stored position button stops
M Memory button
position. movement to the stored positions immediately.
1, 2, 3 Stored position buttons
or
왘 Open the respective door.
135
Controls in detail
Lighting
For information on how to switch on the Exterior lamp switch B Low beam headlamps or high beam
headlamps and use the turn signals, see headlamps when the combination
“Switching on headlamps” (컄 page 59) switch is pushed forward. The tail
and “Turn signals” (컄 page 60). lamps, license plate lamps, side
marker lamps, parking lamps and
i If you drive in countries where vehicles drive instrument panel lamps also come
on the other side of the road than the country in
which the vehicle is registered, you must have on.
the headlamps modified for symmetrical low ˆ Standing lamps, right
beams. Relevant information can be obtained at (turn left one stop)
any authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center. ‚ Standing lamps, left
(turn left two stops)
i Vehicles equipped with active Bi-Xenon* Exterior lamp switch
headlamps: ‡ Indicator lamp for front fog lamps
The active Bi-Xenon* headlamps monitor the
M Off
vehicles steering angle and vehicle speed, then Daytime running lamp mode † Indicator lamp for rear fog lamp
automatically shift their beams to either side to (컄 page 138)
better follow the curvature of the road ahead,
i If you hear a warning signal you have
U Automatic headlamp mode forgotten to switch off the headlamps before
increasing usable illumination over conventional opening the driver’s door.
headlamps. Daytime running lamp mode
(컄 page 137) In addition the message Switch off lights
C Parking lamps (also tail lamps,
license plate lamps, side marker Switch off the headlamps.
lamps, instrument panel lamps)
136
Controls in detail
Lighting
Manual headlamp mode

The low beam headlamps and the parking
Warning! G The automatic headlamp feature is only an
aid to the driver. The driver is responsible for
lamps can be switched on and off with the If the exterior lamp switch is set to U, the operation of the vehicle’s lights at all
exterior lamp switch. times.
앫 the headlamps may switch off unexpect-
왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to edly when the system senses bright
position B. 왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to
ambient light, for example light from
oncoming traffic position U.
Automatic headlamp mode 앫 the headlamps will not be automatically With the SmartKey in starter switch
The following lamps switch on and off au- switched on under foggy conditions position 1 or the KEYLESS-GO*
tomatically depending on the brightness of To minimize risk to you and to others, start/stop button pressed once, only
the ambient light: activate headlamps by turning exterior lamp the parking lamps and the side marker
switch to B when driving or when traffic lamps will switch on and off automati-
앫 Low beam headlamps cally.
and/or ambient lighting conditions require
앫 Tail and parking lamps you to do so. When the engine is running, the low
앫 License plate lamps In low ambient lighting conditions, only beam headlamps, the tail and parking
switch from position U to B with the lamps, the license plate lamps, and the
앫 Side marker lamps
vehicle at a standstill in a safe location. side marker lamps will switch on and
Switching from U to B will briefly off automatically.
switch off the headlamps. Doing so while
driving in low ambient lighting conditions
may result in an accident.
137
Controls in detail
Lighting
Daytime running lamp mode i With the exterior lamp switch in USA only
position M or U, you cannot switch on the
왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to By default, the daytime running lamp mode
high beam headlamps.
position M or U. is deactivated. Activate the daytime
The high beam flasher is available at all times. running lamp mode using the control
When the engine is running, the low
For nighttime driving turn the exterior lamp system, see “Setting daytime running lamp
beam headlamps are switched on. switch to position B to permit activation of mode (USA only)” (컄 page 171).
In low ambient light conditions, the the high beam headlamps.
following lamps will switch on When the engine is running, and you shift
i With the exterior lamp switch in
position M, you cannot switch on the high
additionally: from a driving position to position N or P, beam headlamps.
앫 Tail and parking lamps the low beam headlamps will switch off
The high beam flasher is available at all times.
with a 3 minute delay.
앫 License plate lamps For nighttime driving turn the exterior lamp
When the engine is running, and you switch to position B or U to permit
앫 Side marker lamps activation of the high beam headlamps.
앫 turn the exterior lamp switch to
i With the daytime running lamp mode position C, the parking lamps and When the engine is running, and you turn
activated and the engine running, you cannot
the side marker lamps switch on the exterior lamp switch to position C
switch off the low beam headlamps manually.
additionally or B, the manual headlamp mode has
priority over the daytime running lamp
Canada only 앫 turn the exterior lamp switch to
mode.
position B, the manual headlamp
The daytime running lamp mode is manda-
mode has priority over the daytime The corresponding exterior lamps switch
tory and therefore in a constant mode.
running lamp mode on (컄 page 136).
The corresponding exterior lamps
switch on (컄 page 59).
138
Controls in detail
Lighting
Locator lighting and night security i Fog lamps cannot be switched on with the 왘 Push in the exterior lamp switch.
illumination exterior lamp switch in position U.
The front fog lamps switch off.
To switch on the fog lamps, turn the exterior
The locator lighting and the night security lamp switch to position B first. The green indicator lamp ‡ in the
illumination are described in the “Control exterior lamp switch goes out.
system” section, see “Setting locator light- Front fog lamps
ing” (컄 page 172) and “Setting night secu-
왘 Switch on the low beam Rear fog lamp (driver’s side only)
rity illumination” (컄 page 172).
headlamps B (컄 page 136). 왘 Switch on the low beam
Fog lamps headlamps B (컄 page 136).
왘 Pull out the exterior lamp switch to
Warning! G second stop.
The rear fog lamp switches on.
In low ambient lighting or foggy conditions,
only switch from position U to B with The yellow indicator lamp † in the
the vehicle at a standstill in a safe location. exterior lamp switch comes on
Switching from U to B will briefly (컄 page 136).
switch off the headlamps. Doing so while 왘 Push in the exterior lamp switch to first
driving in low ambient lighting conditions stop.
왘 Pull out the exterior lamp switch to first
may result in an accident.
stop. The rear fog lamp switches off.
The front fog lamps switch on. The yellow indicator lamp † in the
i Fog lamps will operate with the parking exterior lamp switch goes out.
lamps and/or the low beam headlamps on. Fog The green indicator lamp ‡ in the
lamps should only be used in conjunction with exterior lamp switch comes on The front fog lamps remain lit.
low beam headlamps. Consult your State or (컄 page 136).
Province Motor Vehicle Regulations regarding
permissible lamp operation.
139
Controls in detail
Lighting
Combination switch 왘 Push the combination switch in Corner-illuminating front fog lamps*
direction of arrow 1 to switch on the
high beam. The corner-illuminating front fog lamps im-
prove illumination of the area in the direc-
The high beam headlamp indicator
tion into which you are turning.
lamp A in the instrument cluster
comes on (컄 page 26). The corner-illuminating front fog lamps will
operate with the engine running and with
왘 Pull the combination switch in direction
of arrow 2 to its original position to 앫 the exterior lamp switch in
switch off the high beam. position B (컄 page 136)
The high beam headlamp indicator or
1 High beam lamp A in the instrument cluster 앫 the exterior lamp switch in
2 High beam flasher goes out. position U (컄 page 136)
High beam flasher or

High beam
왘 Pull the combination switch briefly in 앫 the daytime running lamp mode
왘 Canada only: Turn the exterior lamp
direction of arrow 2. activated (컄 page 138)
switch to position B (컄 page 136).
or i The corner-illuminating front fog lamps will
only come on in low ambient lighting conditions.
왘 USA only: Turn the exterior lamp switch If you are driving faster than 25 mph (40 km/h)
to position B or U or have the front fog lamps switched on, the
(컄 page 136). corner-illuminating function is not available.
140
Controls in detail
Lighting
Driving forward i The corner-illuminating front fog lamps will Driving rearward
come on automatically depending on the steer-
Switching on corner-illuminating front ing angle and vehicle speed, even if you did not Switching on corner-illuminating front
fog lamps switch on either turn signal. If the fog lamps
corner-illuminating front fog lamps came on
왘 Switch on the left or right turn signal automatically, they will also go out automatically 왘 Shift the automatic transmission to
(컄 page 60), depending on whether depending on the steering angle and vehicle reverse gear R (컄 page 187).
you are turning left or right. speed.
The corner-illuminating front fog lamp
The respective front fog lamp comes on opposite to your steering direction
Switching off corner-illuminating front
and illuminates the area in the direc- comes on.
fog lamps
tion into which you are turning.
The combination switch for the turn signal Switching off corner-illuminating front
or
resets automatically after major steering fog lamps
왘 Turn steering wheel in desired direc- wheel movements. This will switch off the
왘 Shift the automatic transmission to a
tion. corner-illuminating front fog lamps if they
gear other than reverse gear R
The front fog lamp on the side of your were activated by switching on the left or
(컄 page 187).
steering direction comes on. right turn signal.
The respective corner-illuminating
If the turn signal should stay on after
i The corner-illuminating front fog lamps making the turn, the turn signal and the
front fog lamp goes out.
temporarily come on on both sides of the vehicle
if you turn the steering wheel in one direction corner-illuminating front fog lamps can be
and then again in the other direction shortly switched off by returning the combination
thereafter. switch to its original position.
i There may be a brief delay before the
corner-illuminating front fog lamps switch off.
141
Controls in detail
Lighting
Hazard warning flasher Switching on hazard warning flasher

왘 Press hazard warning flasher
The hazard warning flasher can be
switch 1.
switched on at all times, even with the
SmartKey removed from the starter switch All turn signals are flashing.
or with the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
removed from the vehicle.
i With the hazard warning flasher activated
and the combination switch set for either left or
The hazard warning flasher switches on right turn, only the respective turn signals will
automatically when an air bag deploys. operate when the ignition is switched on.
The hazard warning flasher switch is Switching off hazard warning flasher
located on the center console.
왘 Press hazard warning flasher switch 1
again.
i If the hazard warning flasher has been
activated automatically, press hazard warning
flasher switch 1 once to switch it off.
1 Front left reading lamp switch
Interior lighting 2 Rear interior lighting switch
3 Automatic control switch
The controls for interior lighting are locat- 4 Front interior lighting switch
ed in the overhead control panel. 5 Front right reading lamp switch
1 Hazard warning flasher switch 6 Front right interior lamp
7 Front right reading lamp
8 Front left reading lamp
9 Front left interior lamp
142
Controls in detail
Lighting
! An interior lamp switched on manually does Activating Manual control

not go out automatically.
왘 Press switch 3. i An interior lamp switched on manually does
Leaving an interior lamp switch in the ON The switch disengages from its not go out automatically.
position for extended periods of time with the recessed position back to its original
engine turned off could result in a discharged
position. Switching front interior lighting on and
battery.
The interior lighting and the locator off
Automatic control lighting (컄 page 172) come on when 왘 Press front/rear interior lighting
you switch 4 or 2 to switch on the
i The interior lighting is factory-set to respective interior light.
automatic mode. 앫 unlock the vehicle
왘 Press front/rear interior lighting
앫 open a door
Deactivating switch 4 or 2 again to switch off the
앫 open the tailgate respective interior light.
왘 Press switch 3.
The switch engages in the recessed 앫 remove the SmartKey from the
starter switch Switching front reading lamps on and off
position.
The interior lamps go out following an 왘 Press front reading lamp switch 1
The interior lighting and the locator
adjustable time delay (컄 page 173). or 5 to switch on the respective front
lighting (컄 page 172) remain switched
reading lamp.
off even when you i If a door remains open, the interior lamps
switch off automatically after approximately 왘 Press front reading lamp switch 1
앫 unlock the vehicle
5 minutes when the SmartKey is removed or in or 5 again to switch off the respective
앫 open a door starter switch position 0. front reading lamp.
앫 open the tailgate
앫 remove the SmartKey from the
starter switch
143
Controls in detail
Lighting
Switching rear interior reading lamps on Door entry lamps Cargo compartment lamp
and off
For better orientation in the dark, the The cargo compartment lamp comes on
The rear interior reading lamps are located
corresponding door entry lamps comes on when the tailgate is opened.
above the side windows.
when you open a door and the automatic
If you leave the tailgate open for an extend-
control is activated.
ed period of time, the cargo compartment
The door entry lamps will switch off when lamp will switch off automatically after ap-
the corresponding door is closed. proximately 5 minutes.
i If you turn the SmartKey in the starter
switch to position 0 or remove the SmartKey
from the starter switch, the door entry lamps will
remain lit for approximately 5 minutes.
1 Rear interior reading lamp

왘 Press on reading lamp 1 in direction
of arrow.
The reading lamp comes on.
왘 Press on reading lamp 1 in direction
of arrow again.
The reading lamp goes out.
144
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
왔 Instrument cluster
For a full view illustration of the instrument You can change the instrument cluster Adjusting instrument cluster illumina-
cluster, see “Instrument cluster” settings in the instrument cluster submenu tion
(컄 page 26). of the control system (컄 page 167).
Use button 1 or 3 to adjust the illumina-
tion brightness for the instrument cluster.
Warning! G
i The instrument cluster illumination is
No messages will be displayed if either the dimmed or brightened automatically to suit am-
instrument cluster or the multifunction bient light conditions.
display is inoperative. The instrument cluster illumination will also be
adjusted automatically when you switch on the
As a result, you will not be able to see infor-
vehicle’s exterior lamps.
mation about your driving conditions, such
as speed or outside temperature, warn-
To brighten illumination
ing/indicator lamps, malfunction/warning
1 To dim instrument cluster illumination
messages or the failure of any systems. 왘 Press and hold button 3 until the
2 Reset button
Driving characteristics may be impaired. desired level of illumination is reached.
3 To brighten instrument cluster
illumination If you must continue to drive, do so with
To dim illumination
added caution. Contact an authorized
The instrument cluster is activated when
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center as soon 왘 Press and hold button 1 until the
you
as possible. desired level of illumination is reached.
앫 open a door
앫 switch on the ignition (컄 page 40)
앫 press reset button 2
앫 switch on the exterior lamps
(컄 page 136)
145
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster
Resetting trip odometer To help protect the engine, the fuel supply The temperature sensor is located in the
is interrupted if the engine is operated front bumper area. Due to its location, the
Make sure you are viewing the trip odome- within the red marking. sensor can be affected by road or engine
ter display (컄 page 147). heat during idling or slow driving. This
왘 If it is not displayed, press button è Outside temperature indicator means that the accuracy of the displayed
or ÿ on the multifunction steering temperature can only be verified by com-
wheel (컄 page 148) repeatedly until parison to a thermometer placed next to
the trip odometer appears in the multi- Warning! G the sensor, not by comparison to external
function display. displays (e.g. bank signs etc.).
The outside temperature indicator is not de-
왘 Press and hold reset button 2 in the When moving the vehicle into colder ambi-
signed to serve as an ice-warning device and
instrument cluster (컄 page 145) until ent temperatures (e.g. when leaving your
is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.
the trip odometer is reset. garage), you will notice a delay before the
Indicated temperatures just above the freez- lower temperature is displayed.
ing point do not guarantee that the road sur-
Tachometer A delay also occurs when ambient temper-
face is free of ice. The road may still be icy,
especially in wooded areas or on bridges. atures rise. This prevents inaccurate tem-
The red marking on the tachometer perature indications caused by heat
(컄 page 26) denotes excessive engine radiated from the engine during idling or
speed. The outside temperature is displayed in slow driving.
the multifunction display (컄 page 147).
! Avoid driving at excessive engine speeds, as
it may result in serious engine damage that is not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
146
Controls in detail
Control system
왔 Control system
The control system is activated as soon as Multifunction display
the SmartKey in the starter switch is Warning! G
turned to position 1 (컄 page 40) or as
soon as the KEYLESS-GO start/stop but- A driver’s attention to the road and traffic
ton* is in position 1 (컄 page 42). The con- conditions must always be his/her primary
trol system enables you to focus when driving.
앫 call up information about your vehicle For your safety and the safety of others, se-
lecting features through the multifunction
앫 change vehicle settings steering wheel should only be done by the
For example, you can use the control sys- driver when traffic and road conditions per-
tem to find out when your vehicle is next mit it to be done safely.
due for maintenance service, to set the Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph 1 Trip odometer
language for messages in the instrument (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is 2 Main odometer
cluster display, and much more. covering a distance of 44 feet (approximate- 3 Transmission position indicator
i The displays for the audio systems (radio, ly 14 m) every second. 4 Current transmission program mode1
CD player) will appear in English, regardless of 5 Status indicator (outside temperature
the language selected. The control system relays information to or digital speedometer)
the multifunction display. For more information on menus displayed
in the multifunction display, see “Menus”
(컄 page 150).
1
AMG vehicles only.
147
Controls in detail
Control system
Multifunction steering wheel 1 Multifunction display 6 Voice Control*1

The displays in the multifunction display Operating the control system 7 Menu systems:
and the settings in the control system are 2 Telephone*: Press button
controlled by the buttons on the multifunc- Press button è for next menu
tion steering wheel.
s to take a call ÿ for previous menu
to dial
to redial Depending on the selected menu
t to end a call (컄 page 150), pressing the buttons on the
to reject an incoming call multifunction steering wheel will alter what
is shown in the multifunction display.
3 Selecting the submenu or setting
the volume: The information available in the multifunc-
Press button tion display is arranged in menus, each
containing a number of functions or sub-
æ up/to increase
menus.
ç down/to decrease
The individual functions are then found
4 Voice Control*1 within the relevant menu (radio or
5 Moving within a menu: CD operations under Audio, for example).
Press button These functions serve to call up relevant
j for next display information or to customize the settings
for your vehicle.
k for previous display
1
Vehicles without Voice Control: Button without
function.
148
Controls in detail
Control system
It is helpful to think of the menus, and the In the Settings menu, instead of The menus are described on the following
functions within each menu, as being ar- functions, you will find a number of pages.
ranged in a circular pattern. submenus for calling up and changing
settings. For instructions on using these
앫 If you press button è or ÿ
submenus, see “Settings menu”
repeatedly, you will pass through each
(컄 page 164).
menu one after the other.
The number of menus available in the sys-
앫 If you press button k or j
tem depends on which optional equipment
repeatedly, you will pass through each
is installed in your vehicle.
function display, one after the other, in
the current menu.
149
Controls in detail
Control system
Menus This is what you will see when you scroll The table on the next page provides an
through the menus 1 to 6. overview of the individual menus.
150
Controls in detail
Control system
Menus, submenus and functions
Menu 1 Menu 2 Menu 3 Menu 4 Menu 5 Menu 6

Standard display AMG1 Off-road mode1 Audio Navi* Airmatic*/Compass
(컄 page 154) (컄 page 156) (컄 page 159) (컄 page 159) (컄 page 161) (컄 page 162)
Trip- and main odometer Engine oil temper- Off-road driving Selecting radio Route guidance in- Compass
ature program on/off station structions, current
direction traveled
Checking tire inflation Vehicle supply Selecting satellite Vehicle level*
Commands/submenus
pressure voltage radio station*

(USA only)
Checking coolant tem- RACETIMER Operating CD
perature player
Calling up digital speed- Overall analysis
ometer or outside tem-
perature
Calling up maintenance Lap analysis
service indicator
Checking engine oil level
1 AMG vehicles only.
i The headings used in the menus table are system and are not necessarily identical to those function displayed in each menu will show you
designed to facilitate navigation within the shown in the control system displays. The first which part of the system you are in.
151
Controls in detail
Control system
This is what you will see when you scroll The table on the next page provides an
through the menus 7 to c. overview of the individual menus.
152
Controls in detail
Control system
Menus, submenus and functions
Menu 7 Menu 8 Menu 9 Menu a Menu b Menu c

DISTRONIC* Vehicle status Settings Vehicle configuration Trip computer Telephone*
message memory1
(컄 page 162) (컄 page 163) (컄 page 164) (컄 page 178) (컄 page 180) (컄 page 182)
Calling up settings Calling up vehicle mal- Resetting to factory Distance warning Fuel consumption Loading
function, warning and settings function* on/off statistics from start phone book
system status messages
Commands/submenus
stored in memory
Instrument cluster DSR (Downhill Speed Fuel consumption Searching for
submenu Regulation) pro- statistics since the name in
grammed default speed last reset phone book
Time/Date sub- Distance to empty
menu
Lighting submenu
Vehicle submenu
Comfort submenu*
1 The vehicle status message memory menu is only displayed if there is a message stored.
i The headings used in the menus table are system and are not necessarily identical to those function displayed in each menu will show you
designed to facilitate navigation within the shown in the control system displays. The first which part of the system you are in.
153
Controls in detail
Control system
Standard display menu The following functions are available: Checking coolant temperature
In the standard display, the main odometer Function Page

and the trip odometer appear in the multi- Checking tire inflation pressure 375
Warning! G
function display. Checking coolant temperature 154 앫 Driving when your engine is overheated
Calling up digital speedometer 155 can cause some fluids which may have
leaked into the engine compartment to
or outside temperature
catch fire. You could be seriously
Calling up maintenance service 403 burned.
indicator 앫 Steam from an overheated engine can
Checking engine oil level 358 cause serious burns which can occur
1 Trip odometer (ML 500) just by opening the hood. Stay away
from the engine if you see or hear steam
2 Main odometer
coming from it.
왘 If you see another display, press Stop the vehicle in a safe location away from
button è or ÿ repeatedly until other traffic. Turn off the engine, get out of
the standard display appears. the vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle
왘 Press button k or j to select until the engine has cooled down.
the functions in the standard display
menu.
154
Controls in detail
Control system
왘 Press button k or j repeatedly Calling up digital speedometer or i You can select whether the digital speedom-
until the coolant temperature appears outside temperature eter or the outside temperature is shown in the
in the multifunction display. multifunction display.
왘 Press button k or j repeatedly You can change the setting in the submenu
until the digital speedometer or the Instr. cluster via the function Status line
outside temperature appears in the display, see “Selecting display (digital speed-
multifunction display. ometer or outside temperature) for status
indicator” (컄 page 168).
! Excessive coolant temperature triggers a

warning message in the multifunction display
(컄 page 450).
The engine should not be operated with the Digital speedometer
coolant temperature above 248°F (120°C).
Doing so may cause serious engine damage
which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
i During severe operating conditions, e.g.

stop-and-go traffic, the coolant temperature may
rise close to 248°F (120°C).
Outside temperature
155
Controls in detail
Control system
AMG menu Use buttons k or j to select the Vehicle supply voltage

following functions in the AMG menu:
왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
i This function is only available in AMG Function Page until you see the AMG menu.
vehicles.
Vehicle supply voltage 156 왘 Press button j repeatedly until you
The main screen of the AMG menu shows
see the vehicle supply voltage.
you the gear currently engaged as well as RACETIMER 157
the engine oil temperature. Overall analysis 158
왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly Lap analysis 159
until you see the AMG menu.
i If the engine reaches the overspeed range in
the manual shift program, the menu will be
shown in red. In addition, you will see UP next to
1 Gear indicator
gear indicator 2 as a reminder to upshift.
2 Vehicle supply voltage
1 Gear indicator
2 Engine oil temperature
i The engine oil temperature symbol flashes if
the engine oil temperature has not yet reached
80°C. During this time, avoid driving at full
engine speed.
156
Controls in detail
Control system
RACETIMER 왘 Press button j repeatedly until you Starting the RACETIMER

see the RACETIMER.
왘 Press button æ.
Warning! G The timer starts.
The RACETIMER feature is only for use on
Displaying intermediate time
roads and in conditions where high speed
driving is permitted. Racing on public roads 왘 Press button ç while the timer is
is prohibited under any circumstances and running.
the driver is and must always remain re- 1 Gear indicator The intermediate time is shown for five
sponsible for following posted speed limits. 2 RACETIMER seconds.
3 Lap
The RACETIMER allows you to time and Stopping the RACETIMER
save driving stretches in hours, minutes
i You can start the RACETIMER when the
engine is running or the starter switch is in 왘 Press button æ.
and seconds. position 2 (컄 page 40).
The timer stops.
i While the RACETIMER is being displayed,
until you see the AMG menu. you cannot adjust the volume using i When you stop the vehicle and turn the
buttons æ or ç. SmartKey to position 1 (컄 page 40) or, in vehi-
cles with KEYLESS-GO*, turn off the engine and
do not open the driver’s door, the RACETIMER
stops timing. Timing is resumed when you switch
the ignition back on (컄 page 40) or restart the
engine (컄 page 54) and then press the
æ button.
157
Controls in detail
Control system
Saving lap time and starting a new lap Resetting current lap Overall analysis
i You can save up to nine laps. 왘 Press button æ while the timer is i These functions are only available if you
running. have saved at least one lap and have stopped the
왘 Press button ç while the timer is RACETIMER.
running. The timer stops.
The intermediate time will be shown for 왘 Press button ç.
until you see the AMG menu.
five seconds. The lap time is reset to “0”.
왘 Press button j repeatedly until you
왘 Press button ç within 5 seconds. see the overall analysis.
Deleting all laps
The intermediate time shown will be
saved as a lap time. i It is not possible to delete a single saved lap.
The RACETIMER begins timing the new 왘 Press button æ while the timer is
lap. The new lap begins to be timed as running.
soon as the intermediate time is called
The timer stops.
up.
왘 Press the reset button twice 1 Overall analysis of RACETIMER
(컄 page 26). 2 Overall driving time
왘 Press button æ. 3 Maximum speed
4 Overall distance driven
The timer starts. The saved laps are 5 Average speed
deleted.
1 Gear indicator i When you switch off the engine, the

RACETIMER will be reset to“0” after 30 seconds.
2 RACETIMER All laps are deleted.
3 Best lap time
4 Lap number
158
Controls in detail
Control system
Lap analysis Off-road mode menu The symbol y appears in the lower
multifunction display.
i These functions are only available if you i This function is only available in AMG
have saved at least two laps and have stopped
vehicles.
the RACETIMER.
왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly Use this function to switch the off-road
until you see the AMG menu. driving program (컄 page 268) On or Off.
왘 Press button j repeatedly until you
see the lap analysis. until you see the Off-road mode menu.
i The setting is stored when you turn off the
engine.
Audio menu
The functions in the Audio menu operate

the audio equipment which you currently
Off-road mode have turned on.
1 Lap number
2 Lap time 왘 Press button æ or ç to switch If no audio equipment is currently turned
3 Maximum speed the off-road driving program On or Off. on, the message Audio off appears in the
4 Lap length multifunction display.
5 Average speed during lap
왘 Press button j or k to see
other lap analyses.
i Each lap is shown in its own submenu. The
fastest lap is indicated by flashing symbol 1.
159
Controls in detail
Control system
The following functions are available: Selecting satellite radio station*

(USA only)
Function Page
The satellite radio is treated as a radio
Selecting radio station 160
application.
Selecting satellite radio station* 160
왘 Select satellite radio with the
(USA only)
corresponding soft key on the
Operating CD player 161 1 Waveband setting
COMAND system.
2 Station frequency
Selecting radio station 왘 Press button k or j repeatedly
왘 Turn on the COMAND system and until the desired station is found.
select radio. Refer to separate The station search depends on the se-
COMAND system operating instruc- lected setting in the Vehicle submenu
tions. of the control system (컄 page 176).
왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly Pressing button k or j will 1 SAT mode
until the currently tuned station either start a frequency scan or select 2 Channel name or number
appears in the multifunction display. the next stored radio station.
왘 Press button k or j repeatedly
i You can only store new stations using the until the desired channel is found.
corresponding feature on the radio. Refer to
separate COMAND system operating instruc-
tions.
You can also operate the radio in the usual
manner.
160
Controls in detail
Control system
i Additional optional satellite radio equipment

and a subscription to satellite radio service pro-
vider are required for satellite radio operation.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center for details and availability for your
vehicle.
For more information, refer to separate
COMAND system operating instructions. 1 Current CD (for CD changer*) 1 MP3 mode
2 Current track 2 Current track
Operating the CD player 왘 Press button k or j repeatedly 왘 Press button k or j repeatedly
until the desired track is selected. until the desired track is selected.
Selecting CD track
i Vehicles with CD changer*: To select a CD
왘 Turn on the COMAND system and from the magazine, press a number on the Navi* menu
select CD. Refer to separate COMAND COMAND system key pad located in the center
system operating instructions. console. The Navi menu contains the functions
needed to operate your navigation system.
Selecting MP3-CD track 왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
until the settings for the CD currently
being played appear in the multifunc- 왘 Turn on the COMAND system and se- until the message Navi appears in the
tion display. lect MP3. Refer to separate COMAND multifunction display.
system operating instructions.
until the settings for the MP3-CD
currently being played appear in the
161
Controls in detail
Control system
The message shown in the multifunction AIRMATIC*/Compass menu 왘 Press button k or j repeatedly
display depends on the status of the navi- until the desired setting is found.
gation system: The AIRMATIC/Compass menu displays the
For information on air suspension, see “Air
messages for air suspension* and the
앫 With the COMAND system switched suspension package*” (컄 page 269).
direction into which you are currently
off, the message Navi off appears in For information on the compass, see
driving.
the multifunction display. “Vehicle submenu” (컄 page 174) and
앫 With the COMAND system switched on “Compass” (컄 page 321).
until one of the following messages ap-
but route guidance not activated, the
pears in the multifunction display.
direction of travel and, if applicable, the DISTRONIC* menu
name of the street currently traveled Vehicles with steel suspension:
on appear in the multifunction display. Use the DISTRONIC menu (컄 page 255) to
display the current settings for your
앫 With the COMAND system switched on
Distronic system. The information shown
and route guidance activated, the di-
in the multifunction display depends on
rection of travel and maneuver instruc-
whether the Distronic system is activated
tions appear in the multifunction
or deactivated.
display.
Vehicles with air suspension* or Please refer to the “Driving systems” sec-
Please refer to the COMAND system
ML 63 AMG: tion of this manual (컄 page 250) for
manual for instructions on how to activate
instructions on how to activate Distronic.
the route guidance system.
to select the Distronic menu in the
162
Controls in detail
Control system
Vehicle status message memory menu If conditions have occurred causing status
Warning! G messages to be recorded, the number of
Use the vehicle status message memory messages appears in the multifunction
menu to scan malfunction and warning Malfunction and warning messages are only display:
messages that may be stored in the indicated for certain systems and are inten-
system. Such messages appear in the tionally not very detailed. The malfunction
multifunction display and are based on and warning messages are simply a remind-
conditions or system status the vehicle’s er with respect to the operation of certain
system has recorded. systems and do not replace the owner’s
and/or driver’s responsibility to maintain
The vehicle status message memory menu
the vehicle’s operating safety by having all
only appears if messages have been 왘 Press button k or j.
required maintenance and safety checks
stored.
performed on the vehicle and by bringing The stored messages will now be
the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz displayed in the order in which they
Light Truck Center to address the malfunc- have occurred. For malfunctions and
tion and warning messages (컄 page 428). warning messages, see “Vehicle status
messages in the multifunction display”
왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly (컄 page 428).
until the vehicle status message
i After you have scrolled through all recorded
memory appears in the multifunction status messages, the first recorded message
display. appears again.
If the vehicle status message memory
menu does not appear, no messages have
been stored.
163
Controls in detail
Control system
Should the vehicle’s system record any Settings menu The following settings and submenus are
conditions while driving, the number of available in the Settings menu:
messages will reappear in the multifunc- In the Settings menu there are two
tion display functions: Function Page
앫 when the SmartKey in the starter 앫 The function Reset to factory Resetting all settings 165
switch is turned to position 0 or settings?, with which you can reset all Submenus in the settings menu 165
removed from the starter switch. the settings to the original factory
settings. Instrument cluster submenu 167
or
Time/date submenu 169
앫 A collection of submenus with which
앫 when you turn off the engine by
you can make individual settings for Lighting submenu 171
pressing the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop
your vehicle. Vehicle submenu 174
button (컄 page 67) in the starter
switch once and open the driver’s door 왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly Comfort submenu* 177
(this puts the starter switch in until the Settings menu appears in the
position 0, same as with the SmartKey multifunction display.
removed from the starter switch)
i The vehicle status message memory will be
cleared when you turn the SmartKey in the start-
er switch to position 1 or 2, or when you press
the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button once or
twice without depressing the brake pedal. You
will then only see high priority messages in the
multifunction display (컄 page 428).
164
Controls in detail
Control system
Resetting all settings i The settings you have changed will not be
reset unless you confirm the action by pressing
You can reset the functions of all
the reset button a second time.
submenus to the factory settings.
After approximately 5 seconds, the Settings
왘 Press the reset button in the instru- menu reappears in the multifunction display
ment cluster (컄 page 145) for (컄 page 164).
approximately 3 seconds.
i For safety reasons, the function 왘 Press button ç.
The request to press the reset button Lamp circuit headlamp in the Lighting
once more to confirm appears in the submenu cannot be reset while driving. The selection marker moves to the next
multifunction display. submenu.
The following message appears in the multifunc-
tion display: The submenus are arranged by hierarchy.
Settings Scroll down with button ç, scroll up
Cannot be with the button æ.
completely reset
to factory settings With the selection marker on the desired
while driving submenu, use the j button to access
the individual functions within that sub-
왘 Press the reset button once more. Submenus in the Settings menu menu. Once within that submenu, you can
왘 Press button j. use the j button to move to the next
The functions of all the submenus will
function or the k button to move to the
reset to factory settings. The collection of the submenus previous function within that submenu.
The settings themselves are made with
button æ or ç.
165
Controls in detail
Control system
The table below shows what settings can

be changed within the various menus.
Detailed instructions on making individual
settings can be found on the following
pages.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER TIME/DATE LIGHTING VEHICLE COMFORT*

(컄 page 167) (컄 page 169) (컄 page 171) (컄 page 174) (컄 page 177)
Selecting speedometer Setting the time (hours) Setting daytime running Compass adjustment Activating
display mode lamp mode (USA only) easy-entry/exit
feature*
Selecting language Setting the time (minutes) Setting locator lighting Compass calibration Setting fold-in func-
tion* for exterior rear
view mirrors
Selecting display (digital Setting the date (month) Setting night security Audio search function
speedometer or outside illumination
temperature) for status in-
dicator
Setting the date (day) Setting interior lighting Setting automatic
delayed shut-off locking
Setting the date (year) Limiting opening
height of tailgate*
166
Controls in detail
Control system
Instrument cluster submenu Selecting speedometer display mode Selecting language

Access the Instr. cluster submenu via 왘 Move the selection marker with 왘 Move the selection marker with
the Settings menu. Use the Instr. button æ or ç to the Instr. button æ or ç to the Instr.
cluster submenu to change the instru- cluster submenu. cluster submenu.
ment cluster display settings.
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
The following functions are available: until the message Display unit until the message Language appears in
Digital speedometer appears in the the multifunction display.
Function Page multifunction display. The selection marker is on the current
Selecting speedometer display 167 The selection marker is on the current setting.
mode setting.
Selecting language 167
Selecting display (digital 168
speedometer or outside
temperature) for status indica-
tor
왘 Press button æ or ç to select
왘 Press button æ or ç to set the language to be used for the
speedometer unit to km or miles. multifunction display messages. 컄컄
167
Controls in detail
Control system
컄컄 Available languages: Selecting display (digital speedometer 왘 Press button æ or ç to select

or outside temperature) for status the desired setting.
앫 German
indicator
The selected display is then shown
앫 English
왘 Move the selection marker with continuously in the status indicator
앫 French button æ or ç to the Instr. (lower display).
앫 Italian cluster submenu.
The other display now appears in the
앫 Spanish 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly menu of the standard display
until the message Status line (컄 page 154):
앫 Dutch display appears in the multifunction
앫 Digital speedometer
앫 Swedish display.
or
앫 Danish The selection marker is on the current
setting. 앫 Outside temperature
앫 Turkish
앫 Portuguese
앫 Russian (Canada only)
168
Controls in detail
Control system
Time/Date submenu Setting the time (hours) Setting the time (minutes)
Access the Time/Date submenu via the This function is not available if your vehicle This function is not available if your vehicle
Settings menu. Use the Time/Date is equipped with the COMAND system and is equipped with the COMAND system and
submenu to change the time and date navigation module*. navigation module*.
settings.
왘 Move the selection marker with 왘 Move the selection marker with
The following functions are available: button æ or ç to the Time/Date button æ or ç to the Time/Date
submenu. submenu.
Function Page
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
Setting the time (hours) 169 until the message Clock Set hour until the message Clock Set
Setting the time (minutes) 169 appears in the multifunction display. minute(s) appears in the multifunction
display.
Setting the date (month) 170 The selection marker is on the hour
setting. The selection marker is on the minute
Setting the date (day) 170
setting.
Setting the date (year) 170
i If your vehicle is equipped with the

COMAND system and navigation module*, see
separate COMAND system operating instruc-
tions for information on how to set the date and
time. 왘 Press button æ or ç to set the
hour. 왘 Press button æ or ç to set the
minutes.
169
Controls in detail
Control system
Setting the date (month) Setting the date (day) Setting the date (year)
This function is not available if your vehicle This function is not available if your vehicle This function is not available if your vehicle
is equipped with the COMAND system and is equipped with the COMAND system and is equipped with the COMAND system and
navigation module*. navigation module*. navigation module*.
왘 Move the selection marker with 왘 Move the selection marker with 왘 Move the selection marker with
button æ or ç to the Time/Date button æ or ç to the Time/Date button æ or ç to the Time/Date
submenu. submenu. submenu.
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message Date Set month until the message Date Set day until the message Date Set year
appears in the multifunction display. appears in the multifunction display. appears in the multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the month The selection marker is on the day The selection marker is on the year
setting. setting. setting.
왘 Press button æ or ç to set the 왘 Press button æ or ç to set the 왘 Press button æ or ç to set the
month. day. year.
170
Controls in detail
Control system
Lighting submenu 왘 Move the selection marker with In low ambient light conditions the
button æ or ç to the Lighting following lamps will switch on additionally:
Access the Lighting submenu via the
submenu.
Settings menu. Use the Lighting 앫 Parking lamps
submenu to change the lamp and lighting 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly 앫 Tail lamps
settings on your vehicle. until the message Lamp circuit
headlamp appears in the multifunction 앫 License plate lamps
The following functions are available:
display. 앫 Side marker lamps
Function Page The selection marker is on the current For more information on the daytime
Setting daytime running lamp 171 setting. running lamp mode, see “Lighting”
mode (USA only) (컄 page 136).
Setting locator lighting 172 i For safety reasons, changing the setting for
Setting night security illumination 172 the daytime running lamp mode is not possible
while the vehicle is in motion. The following
Setting interior lighting delayed 173 message appears in the multifunction display:
shut-off Settings
왘 Press button æ or ç to select only possible
Setting daytime running lamp mode manual operation (Manual) or daytime at standstill
(USA only) running lamp mode (Constant). For safety reasons, resetting to factory settings
(컄 page 165) while driving will not deactivate the
i This function is not available in countries With daytime running lamp mode activated
daytime running lamp mode.
where the daytime running lamp mode is and the exterior lamp switch at
mandatory and therefore in a constant mode. position M or U, the low beam
headlamps are switched on when the
engine is running.
171
Controls in detail
Control system
Setting locator lighting 왘 Move the selection marker with Setting night security illumination
button æ or ç to the Lighting (Headlamps delayed shut-off)
With the locator lighting feature activated,
submenu.
the exterior lamp switch in position U Use this function to set whether you would
(컄 page 136) and the interior lighting in 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly like the exterior lamps to remain on for
automatic mode (컄 page 143), the follow- until the message Function Surround 15 seconds during darkness after exiting
ing lamps will switch on during darkness lighting appears in the multifunction the vehicle and closing all doors.
when the vehicle is unlocked using display. With the headlamps delayed shut-off
button Œ on the SmartKey or SmartKey
The selection marker is on the current feature activated and the exterior lamp
with KEYLESS-GO: switch in position U before the engine
setting.
앫 Parking lamps is turned off, the following lamps will
switch on when the engine is turned off:
앫 Tail lamps
앫 Parking lamps
앫 License plate lamps
앫 Tail lamps
앫 Side marker lamps
앫 License plate lamps
앫 Front fog lamps*
왘 Press button æ or ç to switch 앫 Side marker lamps
The locator lighting switches off when the the locator lighting function On or Off.
driver’s door is opened. 앫 Front fog lamps*
왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to
If you do not open a door after unlocking position U when exiting the vehicle. If after turning off the engine you do not
the vehicle with the SmartKey, the lamps open a door or do not close an opened
will switch off automatically after The locator lighting feature is door, the lamps will automatically switch
approximately 40 seconds. activated. off after 60 seconds.
172
Controls in detail
Control system
왘 Move the selection marker with 왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to Setting interior lighting delayed shut-off
button æ or ç to the Lighting position U before turning off the
Use this function to set whether you would
submenu. engine.
like the interior lighting to remain on for
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly The headlamps delayed shut-off 10 seconds during darkness after you have
until the message Headlamp delayed feature is activated. removed the SmartKey from the starter
shut-off appears in the multifunction switch.
You can temporarily deactivate the
display. headlamps delayed shut-off feature: 왘 Move the selection marker with
The selection marker is on the current button æ or ç to the Lighting
왘 Before exiting the vehicle, turn the
setting. submenu.
SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 0. 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message Int. light.
왘 Then turn it to position 2 and back
delayed shut-off appears in the
to 0.
The headlamps delayed shut-off
The selection marker is on the current
feature is deactivated. It will reactivate
setting.
왘 Press button æ or ç to switch as soon as you reinsert the SmartKey in
the headlamps delayed shut-off feature the starter switch.
On or Off. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
왘 Press KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
in the starter switch (컄 page 41).
왘 Press button æ or ç to switch

the interior lighting delayed shut-off
feature On or Off.
173
Controls in detail
Control system
Vehicle submenu Compass adjustment

Access the Vehicle submenu via the This function is not available if your vehicle
Settings menu. Use the Vehicle submenu is equipped with the COMAND system and
to make general vehicle settings. navigation module*.
The following functions are available: Determine your location on the basis of the
following zone maps.
Function Page
Compass adjustment 174
Compass calibration 175
Audio search function 176
Setting automatic locking 176
Limiting opening height of 177
tailgate* Zone map South America
왘 Press button æ or ç to move
the selection marker to the Vehicle
submenu.
Zone map North America
174
Controls in detail
Control system
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly Compass calibration 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly

until the message Compass setting until the message
Zone appears in the multifunction i Make sure you are in area where you can Compass Calibration appears in the
drive a full circle with your vehicle without dis-
display. turbing traffic in order to calibrate the compass. multifunction display.
The selection marker is on the current This function is not available if your vehicle The selection marker is on setting
setting. is equipped with the COMAND system and switched off.
navigation module*.
In order to calibrate the compass properly,
mind the following:
앫 Calibrate the compass in open terrain.
Nearby buildings, bridges, power lines
왘 Press button æ or ç to set the and large antenna masts, for example, 왘 Press button æ to set the selection
respective compass zone. could impair compass calibration. marker to Start.
For information on how to call up the 앫 Switch off electrical consumers (e.g. The following message appears in the
compass, see “Compass” (컄 page 321). climate control, windshield wipers, or multifunction display:
rear window defroster). Compass Calibration active
앫 Close all doors and the tailgate. Please drive in a full circle 컄컄
왘 Start the engine (컄 page 54).

왘 Press button æ or ç to move
the selection marker to the Vehicle
submenu.
175
Controls in detail
Control system
컄컄 왘 Drive a full circle at a vehicle speed of Audio search function Setting automatic locking
between 3 mph and 6 mph (5 km/h
Use of the Audio search function to select Use this function to activate or deactivate
and 10 km/h).
a radio station will enable you to start a the automatic central locking. With the
When calibration was successful, the frequency scan (Freq.) (컄 page 160) or automatic central locking system
following message appears in the mul- select a radio station stored in memory activated, the vehicle is centrally locked at
tifunction display: (Memory). vehicle speeds of approximately 9 mph
Compass calibration (15 km/h).
왘 Move the selection marker with
Completed successfully
button æ or ç to the Vehicle 왘 Move the selection marker with
i If the message Compass calibration submenu. button æ or ç to the Vehicle
Completed successfully does not appear in submenu.
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
the multifunction display, drive another full
until the message Audio Search 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
circle.
function appears in the multifunction until the message Automatic door
If calibration does not succeed within 3 minutes,
display. lock appears in the multifunction
the message Compass Calibration appears
in the multifunction display again. Calibrating the display.
compass has failed due to outside influences. setting. The selection marker is on the current
Repeat compass calibration in a different setting.
location.
왘 Press button æ or ç to select

Freq. or Memory. 왘 Press button æ or ç to switch
the automatic central locking On or Off.
176
Controls in detail
Control system
Limiting opening height of tailgate* Comfort submenu* Activating easy-entry/exit feature*

Use this function to activate or deactivate Access the Comfort submenu via the Use this function to activate and
the limiting opening height of the tailgate. Settings menu. Use the Comfort submenu deactivate the easy-entry/exit feature
to change the settings for a number of con- (컄 page 46).
venience features.
button æ or ç to the Vehicle
submenu. The following functions are available: Warning! G
Function Page You must make sure no one can become
until the message Opening limiter
Activating easy-entry/exit 177 trapped or injured by the moving steering
Tailgate appears in the multifunction
feature* wheel when the easy-entry/exit feature is
display.
activated.
The selection marker is on the current Setting fold-in function* for 178
exterior rear view mirrors To stop steering wheel movement, do one of
setting.
the following:
앫 Move steering wheel adjustment stalk*
(컄 page 48).
앫 Press one of the memory position
buttons or the memory button M*
(컄 page 135).
Do not leave children unattended in the ve-
왘 Press button æ or ç to switch
hicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
the limiting opening height of the
Children could open the driver’s door and
tailgate On or Off.
unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit
feature, which could result in an accident
177
Controls in detail
Control system
왘 Move the selection marker with Setting fold-in function* for exterior
button æ or ç to the Comfort rear view mirrors
submenu.
Using this function, you can set the
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly exterior rear view mirrors to be automati-
until the message Easy-entry feature cally folded in when you lock your vehicle.
i With this function set to On and the exterior 왘 Press button æ or ç to switch
The selection marker is on the current rear view mirrors folded in using the button on
setting. the door control panel (컄 page 202), the exterior function On or Off.
rear view mirrors will not fold out when you
switch on the ignition. You will then have to fold Vehicle configuration
out the exterior rear view mirrors using the
button on the door control panel (컄 page 202). The following functions are available:
Make sure both exterior rear view mirrors are
folded out completely before driving off. Function Page
Distance warning function* 179
왘 Press button æ or ç to switch on/off
button æ or ç to the Comfort
the easy-entry/exit feature On or Off. DSR set speed 179
submenu.
until the message Fold in mirrors
when locking appears in the multi-
function display.
setting.
178
Controls in detail
Control system
Distance warning function* DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation)

programmed default speed
In vehicles equipped with Distronic*, you
can determine whether the distance warn- In the Downhill Speed Regulation menu,
ing function is to be enabled or disabled. you can program the default speed the
With this function set to On, the system will DSR is set to when it is activated.
alert you when recognizing a stationary ob- You can program the default speed be-
stacle or a slower vehicle moving in your 왘 Press button æ or ç to switch tween 4-10 mph (Canada: 6-18 km/h).
vehicle’s path and the danger of a collision the distance warning function The set value is increased in 1 mph
exists, even when the Distronic* is On or Off. (Canada: 2 km/h) increments.
switched off.
왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly until the Vehicle configuration menu
until the Vehicle configuration menu appears in the multifunction display.
until the message DSR Speed appears
until the message Distance warning
1 Symbol for activated distance warning in the multifunction display.
function The selection marker is on the current
The selection marker is on the current setting.
setting. If the distance warning function is
activated you will see the : symbol in
the Standard display. When the distance
warning function is deactivated the
: symbol will not appear.
컄컄
179
Controls in detail
Control system
컄컄 왘 Press button æ or ç repeatedly Trip computer menu Fuel consumption statistics from start
until the desired speed is shown in the
왘 Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
multifunction display. Use the trip computer menu to call up
until the message From start appears
statistical data on your vehicle.
When DSR is switched on, DSR will use in the multifunction display.
the programmed default speed to regu- The following information is available:
late the vehicle’s speed.
Function Page
i Once DSR is switched on, you can adjust the
set speed using the cruise control lever Fuel consumption statistics 180
(컄 page 266). from start
Fuel consumption statistics 181
since the last reset 1 Distance driven since start
Distance to empty 181 2 Time elapsed since start
3 Average speed since start
4 Average fuel consumption since start
i When you enter the trip computer menu, you
will always see the fuel consumption statistics i All statistics stored since the last engine
from start first. start will be reset approximately 4 hours after
the SmartKey in the starter switch is turned to
position 0 or removed from the starter switch.
Resetting will not occur if you turn the SmartKey
back to position 1 or 2 within this time period.
180
Controls in detail
Control system
Resetting fuel consumption statistics i The fuel consumption statistics reset auto-
matically to 0 when either of the following values
왘 Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
is exceeded:
until the message From start appears
in the multifunction display. 앫 distance covered: 100000 miles
앫 time elapsed: 10000 hours
왘 Press and hold the reset button in the
instrument cluster (컄 page 145) until
1 Distance driven since last reset Distance to empty
the value is reset to 0.
2 Time elapsed since last reset 왘 Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
3 Average speed since last reset until the message From start appears
Fuel consumption statistics since the
4 Average fuel consumption since last in the multifunction display.
last reset
reset
왘 Press button ÿ or è repeatedly 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
until the message From start appears Resetting fuel consumption statistics until the message Range: appears in
in the multifunction display. manually the multifunction display.
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly 왘 Press button ÿ or è repeatedly The calculated remaining driving range
until the message After reset appears until the message From start appears based on the current fuel tank level
in the multifunction display. in the multifunction display. appears in the multifunction display.

until the message After reset appears
in the multifunction display.
왘 Press and hold the reset button in the
instrument cluster (컄 page 145) until
the value is reset to 0.
181
Controls in detail
Control system
Tel menu* Which messages will appear in the multi-

Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
function display depends on whether your
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
telephone is switched on or off:
Warning! G covering a distance of 44 feet
(approximately 14 m) every second. 앫 If the telephone is off, the message
Never operate radio transmitters equipped Phone off appears in the multifunction
A driver’s attention to the road must always
be his/her primary focus when driving. For with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. with- display.
your safety and the safety of others, we rec- out being connected to an external antenna) 앫 If the telephone is on:
ommend that you pull over to a safe location from inside the vehicle while the engine is
The telephone will then search for a
and stop before placing or taking a tele- running. Doing so could lead to a malfunc-
network. During this time the multi-
phone call. If you choose to use the tele- tion of the vehicle’s electronic system, pos-
function display is empty.
phone while driving, please use the sibly resulting in an accident and/or
hands-free device and only use the tele- personal injury. As soon as the telephone has found a
phone when weather, road and traffic condi- network, the message Ready appears in
tions permit. You can use the functions in the Tel menu the multifunction display.
Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from to operate your telephone, provided it is
using a cellular telephone while driving a ve- connected to a hands-free system and
hicle. switched on.
왘 Switch on the telephone and COMAND
system.
왘 Press button ÿ or è on the This standby message indicates that your
multifunction steering wheel repeated- telephone is ready for use and you can
ly until the message Tel appears in the operate it using the control system.
182
Controls in detail
Control system
Answering a call Ending a call 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly

until the desired name appears in the
When your telephone is ready to receive 왘 Press button t.
calls, you can answer a call at any time. In
You have ended the call. The standby
the multifunction display you will then see The stored names are displayed in
message appears in the multifunction
the message: ascending or descending alphabetical
display.
order.
Dialing a number from the phone book
If your telephone is ready to receive calls,
you may select and dial a number from the
phone book at any time.
왘 Press button s. 왘 Press button ÿ or è repeatedly

until the message Tel appears in the 1 Name from the phone book
You have answered the call. The multifunction display.
duration of the call appears in the i If you press and hold j or k for
multifunction display. 왘 Press button j or k. longer than 1 second, the system scrolls rapidly
The control system reads the phone through the list of names until you release the
i If you do not wish to accept a call, press button again.
button t. book which is stored in the telephone.
This may take several minutes. The Cancel the quick search mode by pressing
message Please wait appears in the button t. 컄컄
When the message Please wait
disappears, the phone book has been
loaded.
183
Controls in detail
Control system
컄컄 왘 Press button s. Redialing

The system dials the selected phone The control system stores the most
number. recently dialed phone numbers. This
eliminates the need to search through your
앫 If the connection is successful and
entire phone book.
this feature is supported by your
network provider, the name of the 왘 Press button ÿ or è repeatedly
party (if stored in your phone book) until the message Tel appears in the
you are calling and the duration of multifunction display.
the call will appear in the multifunc-
왘 Press button s.
tion display.
The first number in the redial memory
until the desired name appears in the
왘 Press button s.
앫 If no connection is made, the
control system stores the dialed The control system dials the selected
number in the redial memory. phone number.
184
Controls in detail
왔 Automatic transmission
For more information on driving with an Gear selector lever
automatic transmission, see “Automatic Warning! G
transmission” (컄 page 54). The gear selector lever is located on the
Make sure that absolutely no objects are right of the steering column.
Your vehicle’s transmission adapts its gear obstructing the pedal’s range of movement.
shifting process to your individual driving Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all obsta-
style by continually adjusting the shift cles. If there are any floormats or carpets in
points up or down. These shift point adjust- the footwell, make sure that the pedals still
ments are performed based on current have sufficient clearance.
operating and driving conditions.
During sudden driving or braking maneuvers
If the operating conditions change, the the objects could get caught between the
automatic transmission reacts by pedals. You could then no longer brake or
adjusting its shift program. accelerate. This could lead to accidents and
i During the brief warm-up, transmission injury.
upshifting is delayed. This allows the catalytic Gearshift pattern for automatic
transmission
converter (gasoline engine) or the oxidation
catalyst (diesel engine) to heat up more quickly P Park position
to operating temperature. R Reverse gear
N Neutral
D Drive position
185
Controls in detail
i The current transmission position P, R, N, Shifting from P to N Shifting from N to R or from N to D

or D appears in the multifunction display
Moving the gear selector lever up or down 왘 With the vehicle at a standstill, depress
(컄 page 189).
shifts the automatic transmission out of the brake pedal and keep it pressed.
park position P:
왘 Move gear selector lever up past the
Warning! G 왘 With the vehicle at a standstill, depress resistance point to select reverse
the brake pedal and keep it pressed. gear R.
It is dangerous to shift the automatic trans-
mission out of park position P or neutral 왘 Move gear selector lever up or down to or
position N if the engine speed is higher than resistance point to select neutral
왘 Move gear selector lever down past the
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the position N.
resistance point to select drive
brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
i The gear selector lever returns to its original position D.
quickly forward or reverse. You could lose
position.
control of the vehicle and hit someone or i The gear selector lever returns to its original
something. Only shift into gear when the position.
engine is idling normally and when your right 왘 Release the parking brake (컄 page 57).
foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
왘 Release the brake pedal.
왘 Carefully depress the accelerator pedal
to drive off when it is safe to do so.
186
Controls in detail
Shifting from P to R Shifting from P to D Shifting from D, R, or N to P

왘 With the vehicle at a standstill, depress 왘 With the vehicle at a standstill, depress If you want to select park position P with
the brake pedal and keep it pressed. the brake pedal and keep it pressed. the transmission being in drive position D,
reverse gear R or neutral position N:
왘 Move gear selector lever up past the 왘 Move gear selector lever down past the
resistance point to select reverse resistance point to select drive 왘 With the vehicle at a standstill, depress
gear R. position D. the brake pedal and keep it pressed.
i The gear selector lever returns to its original i The gear selector lever returns to its original 왘 Step firmly on parking brake pedal
position. position. (컄 page 65).
왘 Release the parking brake (컄 page 57). 왘 Release the parking brake (컄 page 57). 왘 Press button on gear selector lever in
direction of arrow (컄 page 185) to
왘 Release the brake pedal. 왘 Release the brake pedal.
select park position P.
왘 Carefully depress the accelerator pedal 왘 Carefully depress the accelerator pedal
to drive off when it is safe to do so. to drive off when it is safe to do so.
! Shift the automatic transmission directly
from drive position D to reverse gear R, from
reverse gear R to drive position D or directly to
park position P only when the vehicle is stopped.
Otherwise the automatic transmission could be
damaged.
When trying to free a vehicle stuck in mud or
snow, see “Rocking the vehicle” (컄 page 192).
187
Controls in detail
Shifting from D or R to N Shifting procedure ! Allow engine to warm up under low load use.
Do not place full load on the engine until the
If you want to select neutral position N
The automatic transmission selects indi- operating temperature has been reached.
with the transmission being in drive
vidual gears automatically, depending on: Shift into reverse gear R or park position P only
position D or reverse gear R:
앫 drive position D (컄 page 189) with gear when the vehicle is stopped.
왘 With the vehicle at a standstill, depress
ranges (컄 page 193) Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an extended
the brake pedal and keep it pressed. period when driving off on slippery road
앫 the selected program mode (M/C/S) surfaces. This may cause serious damage to the
왘 Step firmly on parking brake pedal
(ML 63 AMG only) (컄 page 195) drivetrain which is not covered by the
(컄 page 65).
앫 the position of the accelerator pedal
i When the vehicle needs to be moved with (컄 page 191) With drive position D selected, you can use
the engine switched off and the transmission set
the steering wheel gearshift control
to neutral position N (컄 page 186), e.g. in an 앫 the vehicle speed
automatic car wash, do not depress the parking buttons (컄 page 194) to influence trans-
brake pedal. mission shifting by:
왘 Move gear selector lever up to resis- 앫 limiting the gear range
tance point when in drive position D or 앫 changing gears manually
down to resistance point when in
reverse gear R to select neutral
position N.
188
Controls in detail
Transmission positions Effect ! SmartKey:

If you turn off the engine using the SmartKey and
The current transmission position appears ì Park position remove the SmartKey from the starter switch,
in the multifunction display. Shift into park position P only the transmission will shift to park position P
automatically. Keep in mind that turning off the
when vehicle is stopped. The
engine with the SmartKey alone will not auto-
park position is not intended to matically shift the transmission to park
serve as a brake when the vehi- position P. Only when the SmartKey is removed
cle is parked. Rather, the driver from the starter switch, will the transmission
should always set the parking automatically shift to park position P.
brake in addition to shifting into KEYLESS-GO*:
1 Current transmission position park position P to secure the If you turn off the engine using the KEYLESS-GO
vehicle. start/stop button and open the driver’s door, the
! If the current transmission position does not If the vehicle’s electrical system
transmission will shift to park position P auto-
appear in the multifunction display due to a matically. Keep in mind that turning off the en-
malfunction, for example, make sure that the is malfunctioning, the automatic gine using the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
automatic transmission is in the desired position transmission could remain alone will not automatically shift the transmis-
by carefully driving off with the transmission in locked in park position P. sion to park position P. Only when the driver’s
drive position D. door is opened, will the transmission automati-
왘 Have the vehicle checked as cally shift to park position P.
ML 63 AMG: soon as possible by an autho-
Select program mode C (컄 page 195). Even though this is possible, make it a practice
rized Mercedes-Benz Light to always shift into park position P before turning
Do not limit the gear range. Truck Center. off the engine and removing the SmartKey from
the starter switch, or when using KEYLESS-GO*,
before turning off the engine with the start/stop
button and opening the driver’s door.
189
Controls in detail
! If you want the gear position to remain in Effect ! Coasting the vehicle, or driving for any other
neutral position N (for example when the vehicle reason in neutral position N can result in trans-
is pulled through a car wash) ë Neutral mission damage that is not covered by the
앫 do not remove the SmartKey from the starter No power is transmitted from the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
switch engine to the drive axle. When
or, when using KEYLESS-GO* the brakes are released, the Warning! G
앫 do not turn off the engine using the vehicle can be moved freely
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button* and open (pushed or towed). Getting out of your vehicle without shifting
the driver’s door To avoid damage to the trans- into park position P is dangerous. Also, park
Otherwise, the transmission will shift to park mission, avoid shifting into position P alone is not intended to or capa-
position P and lock the wheels, preventing the neutral position N while driving, ble of preventing your vehicle from moving,
vehicle from being pulled through a car wash. except: possibly hitting people or objects.
If the ESP® is deactivated or Always set the parking brake in addition to

Effect
malfunctioning: shifting to position P (컄 page 65).
í Reverse gear Shift into neutral position N only When parked on an incline, turn the front
Shift into reverse gear R only when the vehicle is in danger of wheels towards the road curb.
when the vehicle is stopped. skidding, e.g. on icy roads. Do not park this vehicle in areas where com-
ê Drive bustible materials such as grass, hay or
leaves can come into contact with the hot
The transmission shifts
exhaust system, as these materials could be
automatically. All forward gears
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
are available.
190
Controls in detail
Driving tips Stopping

Warning! G When you stop briefly, e.g. at traffic lights:
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the Accelerator position 왘 Leave the transmission in gear.
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* Your driving style influences the 왘 Hold the vehicle with the brake.
from the starter switch, take it with you, and transmission’s shifting behavior:
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat- When you stop for a longer period of time
Less throttle Earlier upshifting with the engine idling and/or on a hill:
unlocked vehicle. Children could shift the More throttle Later upshifting 왘 Set the parking brake.
automatic transmission out of park
position P, which could result in an accident Kickdown 왘 Shift into park position P.
and/or serious personal injury. Use kickdown when you want maximum Maneuvering
acceleration.
When you maneuver in tight areas,
왘 Press the accelerator past the point of e.g. when pulling into a parking space:
resistance.
왘 Control the vehicle speed by gradually
Depending on the engine speed the releasing the brakes.
transmission shifts into a lower gear.
왘 Accelerate gently.
왘 Ease on the accelerator when you have
reached the desired speed. 왘 Never abruptly step on the accelerator.
The transmission shifts up again.
191
Controls in detail
Rocking the vehicle Hill start assist system The hill start assist system is inactive
Rocking the vehicle by shifting between 앫 when starting off on a level road or
drive position D and reverse gear R can Warning! G downhill grades
help free a vehicle stuck in mud or snow.
앫 with the transmission in neutral
The engine control system of this vehicle The hill start assist system is not designed
position N
electronically limits shifting between drive to function as a parking brake and does not
position D and reverse gear R to very low prevent the vehicle from moving when 앫 with the parking brake set
speeds, i.e. approx. 5 mph (9 km/h). To parked on an incline. 앫 if the ESP® has switched off due to a
shift between drive position D and reverse Always set the parking brake in addition to malfunction
gear R, move the gear selector lever past shifting to park position P.
the resistance point up or down. Towing a trailer
On uphill grades with a gradient angle of If you tow a trailer, note the following
Working on the vehicle
more than 5°, the hill start assist system points:
maintains the pressure in the brake sys-
Warning! G tem for approximately 1 second after you
앫 Manually shift to a lower gear range
(컄 page 193) if the transmission hunts
have released the brake pedal. Therefore,
When working on the vehicle, set the between gears on inclines.
you can start off smoothly without the
parking brake and shift to park position P. vehicle moving immediately after releasing A lower gear range and reduction of
Otherwise the vehicle could roll away. the brake pedal. speed reduces the chance to overload
or overheat the engine.
For more information on trailer towing, see
the “Operation” section (컄 page 342).
192
Controls in detail
Gear ranges Effect Effect

With the automatic transmission in drive ï The transmission shifts through ç The transmission shifts through
position D, you can select a gear range for sixth gear only. second gear only.
the automatic transmission to operate î The transmission shifts through Allows the use of engine’s
within. fifth gear only. braking power when driving:
You can limit the gear range by pressing é The transmission shifts through 앫 on steep downgrades
the left gearshift button on the steering fourth gear only.
앫 in mountainous regions
wheel gearshift control, and reverse the è The transmission shifts through
gear range limit by pressing the right gear- 앫 under extreme operating
third gear only.
shift button on the steering wheel gearshift conditions
control (컄 page 194). With this selection you can use
the braking effect of the engine. æ The transmission operates in
The selected gear range appears in the first gear only.
multifunction display. For maximum use of engine’s
braking effect on very steep or
lengthy downgrades.
1 Current gear range
193
Controls in detail
Steering wheel gearshift control Limiting gear range
With drive position D selected, you can

limit or extend the gear range. Warning! G
If your vehicle is equipped with manual On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
shift program M, you can use the steering in order to obtain braking action. This could
wheel gearshift control to manually shift result in drive wheel slip and reduced
the gears. vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not
prevent this type of loss of control.
i ML 63 AMG:
For information on using the steering wheel gear- 1 Left shift button: limiting gear range or
shift control in program mode M, see “Shift pro- 왘 Briefly press left shift button 1.
gram (ML 63 AMG only)” (컄 page 195).
downshift (in program mode M)
2 Right shift button: extending gear The transmission will shift to the next
! Allow engine to warm up under low load use. range or upshift (in program mode M) lower gear as permitted by the shift
Do not place full load on the engine until the program. This action simultaneously
operating temperature has been reached. i You cannot shift with the steering wheel limits the gear range of the transmis-
gearshift control buttons when the transmission
Shift into reverse gear R or park position P only
is in position P, N or R. sion (컄 page 193).
when the vehicle is stopped.
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an extended
i To avoid overrevving the engine when down-
shifting, the transmission will not shift to a lower
period when driving off on slippery road
gear if the engine’s max. speed would be ex-
surfaces. This may cause serious damage to the
ceeded.
drivetrain which is not covered by the
194
Controls in detail
Extending gear range Shifting into optimal gear range You can choose between automatic shift
program C or S and manual shift
왘 Briefly press right shift button 2. 왘 Press and hold left shift button 1.
program M.
The transmission will shift to the next The transmission will automatically
higher gear as permitted by the shift select the gear range suited for optimal
program. This action simultaneously acceleration and deceleration. This will
extends the gear range of the transmis- involve shifting down one or more
sion (컄 page 193). gears.
i If you press on the accelerator when the en- Shift program (ML 63 AMG only)
gine has reached its rpm limit, the transmission
will upshift beyond any gear range limit selected.
! Allow engine to warm up under low load use.
Do not place full load on the engine until the
Canceling gear range limit
operating temperature has been reached.
1 Program mode selector switch
왘 Press and hold right shift button 2 Shift into reverse gear R or park position P only
until the cipher for the current gear when the vehicle is stopped. M Manual For manual gear shifting
range disappears from the multifunc- Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an extended C Comfort For standard driving
tion display (컄 page 193). period when driving off on slippery road
surfaces. This may cause serious damage to the S Sport For sporty driving
The transmission will shift from the
drivetrain which is not covered by the
current gear range directly to gear Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
! Never change the program mode when the
range D. automatic transmission is out of park position P.
This could result in a change of driving character-
istics for which you may not be prepared.
195
Controls in detail
The selected program mode appears in the Select C for standard driving: Manual shift program
앫 The vehicle starts out in second In the manual program mode M,
gear (both forward and reverse) for system-controlled automatic gearshifting
gentler starts. This does not apply if is switched off and you need to change the
full throttle is applied or gear the gears by manually upshifting or down-
range 1 is selected. shifting using the steering wheel gearshift
control buttons to the left and right of the
앫 Traction and driving stability are
steering wheel (컄 page 194).
improved on icy roads.
1 Current program mode
앫 Upshifts occur earlier even when Activating manual shift program
Automatic shift program you give more gas. The engine then
왘 Press program mode selector switch
operates at lower rpms and the
You can choose between automatic shift wheels are less likely to spin. repeatedly until the M for the manual
program C or S. program mode M appears in the multi-
Select S for sporty driving: function display.
왘 Press program mode selector switch
repeatedly until the letter of the 앫 The vehicle starts out in first gear. The transmission switches to the
desired program mode appears in the 앫 Upshifts occur later. manual program mode M. Automatic
multifunction display. shifting is switched off. The gear range
i The last selected program mode (C or S) is is not limited.
switched on when the engine is restarted.
You can change the gears manually with
drive position D selected. You can upshift
or downshift through the gears in succes-
sion.
196
Controls in detail
i The manual program mode M will not be If you have selected the AMG menu in the Downshifting
stored. When the engine is turned off with the control system and you are driving in the
manual program mode M selected, the transmis-
sion will go to the automatic program mode
manual program mode M, upshift
indicator 2 in the multifunction display
Warning! G
(C or S) when the engine is restarted. advises you to upshift before the engine On slippery road surfaces, never downshift
reaches the overspeed range. Thus you in order to obtain braking action. This could
Upshifting can drive at the maximum engine speed for result in drive wheel slip and reduced
! In the manual program mode M, the trans- each gear without overrevving the engine. vehicle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not
mission will not upshift, even if the engine has prevent this type of loss of control.
reached its overrewing range. Shift up to the
next gear before the engine has reached its over-
rewing range. Make absolutely certain that the 왘 Briefly press left shift button 1
engine speed does not reach the red marking on (컄 page 194).
the tachometer (컄 page 28). Otherwise the en-
gine could be damaged which is not covered by The transmission shifts to the next
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. lower gear.
1 Gear indicator
왘 Briefly press right shift button 2 2 Upshift indicator i When you brake or stop, the transmission
(컄 page 194). shifts down to a gear from which you can easily
왘 Shift to the next higher gear. accelerate or drive off.
The transmission shifts to the next The fuel supply will otherwise be inter-
higher gear. rupted to prevent the engine from over-
revving.
197
Controls in detail
Kickdown Emergency operation (Limp-Home

Mode)
Using the kickdown when driving in the
manual program mode M is not possible.
If vehicle acceleration becomes less re-
sponsive or sluggish or the transmission
Deactivating manual shift program
no longer shifts, the transmission is most
왘 Press the program mode selector likely operating in limp-home (emergency
switch (컄 page 195) repeatedly until operation) mode. In this mode only second
C or S appears in the multifunction gear and reverse gear can be activated.
display.
왘 Stop the vehicle in a safe location.
or
왘 Shift to park position P.
왘 Restart the engine.
왘 Turn off the engine.
The transmission will go to the
왘 Wait at least 10 seconds before
automatic program mode (C or S).
restarting.
The manual program mode M is not
왘 Restart the engine.
stored.
왘 Shift to drive position D (for second
gear) or reverse gear R.
왘 Have the transmission checked at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center as soon as possible.
198
Controls in detail
Transfer case
왔 Transfer case
! Operational or performance test must only
otherwise seriously damage the brake system or
the transfer case which is not covered by the
! Because the ESP® operates automatically,

the engine and ignition must be shut off
(SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or 1 or
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button in
position 0 or 1) when testing the brakes on a
brake test dynamometer and such testing should
Active braking action through the ESP® may
otherwise seriously damage the brake system
which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
i The vehicle is equipped with full-time

four-wheel drive. Both the front and rear axles
are powered at all times when the vehicle is
being operated.
199
Controls in detail
Good visibility
For information on the windshield wipers, 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 40). Rear view mirrors
see “Windshield wipers” (컄 page 60).
왘 Press button 1.
For more information on setting the rear
Headlamp cleaning system* The headlamps are cleaned with a view mirrors, see “Mirrors” (컄 page 49).
high-pressure water jet.
The button is located on the left side of the Interior rear view mirror, antiglare
dashboard.
i The headlamps will automatically be position
cleaned when you have
앫 switched on the headlamps
and
앫 operated the windshield wipers with wind-
shield washer fluid fifteen times
When you switch off the ignition, the counter
resets.
For information on filling up the washer
1 Headlamp washer button system*” (컄 page 363). 1 Lever
왘 Tilt the mirror to the antiglare position
by moving lever 1 towards the wind-
shield.
The interior rear view mirror is dimmed.
200
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Auto-dimming rear view mirrors*

The reflection brightness of the exterior
Warning! G Electrolyte has an irritating effect. Do not
allow the liquid to come into contact with
rear view mirror on the driver’s side and The auto-dimming function does not react if eyes, skin, clothing, or respiratory system.
the interior rear view mirror will respond incoming light is not aimed directly at sen- In case it does, immediately flush affected
automatically to glare when sors in the interior rear view mirror. area with water, and seek medical help if
necessary.
앫 the ignition is switched on The interior rear view mirror and the exterior
and rear view mirror on the driver’s side do not
react, for example, when transporting cargo ! Electrolyte liquid coming into contact with
앫 incoming light from headlamps falls on the vehicle paint finish can be completely
which covers the rear window. removed only while in the liquid state and by
the sensor in the interior rear view
mirror Light hitting the mirror(s) at certain angles applying plenty of water.
(incident light) could blind you. As a result,
The rear view mirror will not react if you may not be able to observe traffic con-
Warning! G
앫 the automatic transmission is set to ditions and could cause an accident.
position R Exercise care when using the passen-
앫 the interior lighting is turned on ger-side exterior rear view mirror. The mirror
Warning! G surface is convex (outwardly curved surface
for a wider field of view). Objects in mirror
In case of an accident, liquid electrolyte may are closer than they appear. Check your
escape from the mirror housing if the mirror interior rear view mirror or glance over your
glass breaks. shoulder before changing lanes.
201
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Power folding exterior rear view Synchronizing exterior rear view Folding the exterior rear view mirrors
mirrors* mirrors in and out manually
The power folding rear view mirrors may i The exterior rear view mirrors can vibrate if
! Before you drive the vehicle through an have to be synchronized after the vehicle they are not folded out completely.
automatic car wash, fold the exterior rear view
mirrors in. Otherwise they may get damaged. battery has been disconnected or dis-
The button is located on the door control
charged. If the exterior rear view mirrors
panel.
Folding the exterior rear view mirrors do not fold properly upon locking or un-
in and out automatically locking the vehicle although the corre-
sponding function in the control system is
When the corresponding function in the activated (컄 page 178), do the following:
control system is activated (컄 page 178):
왘 Fold each exterior rear view mirror in
앫 The exterior rear view mirrors automat- completely (컄 page 203).
ically fold in as soon as the vehicle is
왘 Fold each exterior rear view mirror out
locked from the outside.
completely (컄 page 203).
앫 The exterior rear view mirrors automat-
ically fold out as soon as the vehicle is When the exterior rear view mirrors fold
unlocked and the driver’s or front pas- properly upon locking the vehicle, the exte- 1 Button for folding exterior rear view
senger door are subsequently opened. rior mirrors are synchronized. Otherwise mirrors in and out
repeat the above steps.
202
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Folding in Sun visors

왘 Briefly press button 1.
The sun visors protect you from sun glare
Both exterior rear view mirrors fold in. while driving.
i If you are driving at more than approximately
30 mph (47 km/h), you will not be able to fold Warning! G
the exterior mirrors in.
Do not use the vanity mirror while driving.
Folding out
Keep the mirrors in the sun visors closed
왘 Briefly press button 1 again. while vehicle is in motion. Reflected glare 1 Sun visor
can endanger you and others. 2 Additional sun visor*
Both exterior rear view mirrors fold out.
3 Mirror lamp
! If an exterior rear view mirror housing is 4 Vanity mirror cover
forcibly pushed forward (hit from the rear) or
forcibly pushed rearward (hit from the front) 5 Vanity mirror
press button 1 to fold mirrors in, then press 6 Holder for gas cards
button 1 again to fold mirrors out. Do not force 7 Mounting
mirrors by hand as this may damage the adjust-
ment mechanism.
The mirror housing is then properly positioned
and you can adjust the mirror in the usual
manner.
Please make sure both rear view mirrors are
folded out before driving off.
203
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Glare through the windshield Glare through a side window ! To avoid damage to vanity mirror cover 4
(컄 page 203), make sure it is closed before
왘 Swing sun visor 1 down.
pivoting sun visor 1 to the side.
왘 Make sure sun visor 1 is properly en-
왘 Adjust sun visor 1 by pushing or pull-
gaged in mounting 7.
ing in the direction of arrows.
왘 When you do not experience glare any-
왘 Swing down additional sun visor* 2
more, swing sun visor 1 up.
when you experience additional glare
through the windshield.
Vanity mirror
왘 Swing sun visor 1 down.
왘 Flip up cover 4 to access vanity 1 Sun visor
mirror 5. 2 Additional sun visor*
Vanity mirror lamp 3 comes on. 왘 Swing sun visor 1 down.
왘 After using vanity mirror 5, flip down 왘 Disengage sun visor 1 from
cover 4. mounting 7 (컄 page 203).
왘 Swing sun visor 1 up. 왘 Pivot sun visor 1 to the side.
204
Controls in detail
Good visibility
Rear window defroster Activating

왘 Press button 1 on the climate con-
The rear window defroster uses a large
trol panel (컄 page 208) or the automat-
amount of power. To keep battery drain to
ic climate control* panel (컄 page 222).
a minimum, switch off the defroster as
soon as the rear window is clear. The de- The indicator lamp on the button
froster is automatically deactivated after comes on.
approximately 6 to 17 minutes of
operation depending on the outside tem- Deactivating
perature. 왘 Press button 1 once more.
The indicator lamp on the button goes
Warning! G out.
Any accumulation of snow and ice should be ! If the rear window defroster switches off too
removed from the rear window before driv- soon and the indicator lamp starts flashing, too
ing. Visibility could otherwise be impaired, many electrical consumers are operating simul-
taneously and there is insufficient voltage in the
endangering you and others.
battery. The system responds automatically by
switching the rear window defroster off.
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 40). As soon as the battery has sufficient voltage, the
rear window defroster switches back on auto-
matically.
205
Controls in detail
Climate control
206
Controls in detail
Climate control
1 Driver’s door air vent, fixed i For draft-free ventilation, move the sliders
for center air vents and side air vents to the
2 Left side air vent, adjustable middle position.
3 Thumbwheel for air volume control
for left side and door air vent
for left center air vent
5 Left center air vent, adjustable
6 Right center air vent, adjustable
for right center air vent
for right side and door air vent
9 Right side air vent, adjustable
a Front passenger door air vent, fixed
b Climate control panel
207
Controls in detail
Climate control
1 Temperature control, left 8 AC cooling on/off

2 Air distribution and air volume Residual heat/ventilation
(automatic, manual) 9 Air distribution (directs air through
3 Front defroster center and side air vents)
a Air distribution (directs air through
0 USA only
the footwells and side air vents)
P Canada only
b Air volume display
4 Increasing air volume
c Decreasing air volume
5 Air distribution (directs air through
d Rear window defroster
the windshield and side air vents)
1 USA only
6 Rear climate control* on/off
Air supply for rear passenger F Canada only
compartment on/off e Air recirculation
: USA only f Interior temperature sensor
< Canada only g Climate control on/off
7 Temperature control, right
208
Controls in detail
Climate control
The climate control is operational whenev- Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and i Severe conditions (e.g. strong air pollution)
er the engine is running. You can operate odors are filtered out before outside air en- may require replacement of the filter before its
the climate control system in either the ters the passenger compartment through scheduled interval. A clogged filter will reduce
automatic or manual mode. The system the air distribution system. the air volume to the interior.
cools or heats the interior depending on If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate the interior
The air conditioning will not engage (no
the selected interior temperature and the before driving off, see “Summer opening fea-
cooling) if the A/C mode is deactivated ture” (컄 page 239). The climate control will then
current outside temperature.
(컄 page 216). adjust the interior temperature to the set value
much faster.
Warning! G Warning! G Keep the air intake grille in front of the wind-
shield free of snow and debris.
When operating the climate control, the air
Follow the recommended settings for heat-
that enters the passenger compartment
ing and cooling given on the following pag-
through the air vents can be very hot or very
es. Otherwise the windows could fog up,
cold (depending on the set temperature).
impairing visibility and endangering you and
This may cause burns or frostbite to unpro-
others.
tected skin in the immediate area of the air
vents.
Always keep sufficient distance between un-
protected parts of the body and the air
vents. If necessary, use the air distribution
controls (컄 page 208) to direct the air to air
vents in the vehicle interior that are not in
the immediate area of unprotected skin.
209
Controls in detail
Climate control
Deactivating the climate control Reactivating Activating

system
왘 Press button U (컄 page 208). 왘 Press button U (컄 page 208) while
the engine is running.
i You can also press button ´
Warning! G (컄 page 208) on the climate control panel. The indicator lamp on the button
If you press button 0 (컄 page 208) to comes on. The air volume and air distri-
When the climate control system is reactivate the climate control system, the bution are adjusted automatically.
switched off, the outside air supply and cir- defrosting mode is activated.
왘 Use temperature controls 1 and 7
culation are also switched off. Only choose
(컄 page 208) to separately adjust the
this settings for a short time. Otherwise the Operating the climate control system
air temperature on each side of the
windows could fog up, impairing visibility in automatic mode
passenger compartment.
and endangering you and others.
i When operating the climate control system The interior air temperature is adjusted
in automatic mode, you will only rarely need to automatically.
Deactivating
adjust the temperature, air volume and air distri-
왘 Press button ´ (컄 page 208). bution. i The settings for the passenger side are also
used for the rear passenger compartment.
The indicator lamp on the button In automatic mode, cooling with dehumidify is
switched on. This function can be switched off if
comes on.
necessary (컄 page 216).
210
Controls in detail
Climate control
Deactivating Setting the temperature Increasing

왘 Press button or Q 왘 Turn temperature control 1
Use temperature controls 1 and 7
(컄 page 208). and/or 7 (컄 page 208) slightly clock-
(컄 page 208) to separately adjust the air
The indicator lamp on button U wise.
temperature on each side of the passenger
goes out. The automatic operation of compartment. You should raise or lower The climate control system will corre-
air volume switches off. The selected the temperature setting in small incre- spondingly adjust the interior air tem-
blower speed is shown in the air ments, preferably starting at 72°F (22°C). perature.
volume display b (컄 page 208). The climate control will adjust to the set
temperature as fast as possible. Decreasing
or
왘 Turn temperature control 1
왘 Press air distribution button 5, 9,
and/or 7 (컄 page 208) slightly coun-
or a (컄 page 208).
terclockwise.
The indicator lamp on button U
The climate control system will corre-
goes out. The automatic operation of
spondingly adjust the interior air tem-
air distribution switches off.
perature.
211
Controls in detail
Climate control
Adjusting air distribution Adjusting air volume Closing the center air vents
왘 Turn thumbwheels 4 and 7
Press air distribution button 5, 9, or a Five blower speeds are available.
(컄 page 206) to the left.
(컄 page 208) to adjust the air distribution.
왘 Press button to decrease or
The corresponding center air vents on
The following symbols are found on the button Q to increase air volume
the left and right are closed.
controls: (컄 page 208) to the desired level.
Symbol Function The indicator lamp on button U Opening the side air vents
(컄 page 208) goes out. The automatic
a Directs air through the center 왘 Turn thumbwheels 3 and 8
operation of air volume switches off.
and side air vents (컄 page 206) to the right.
The selected blower speed is shown in
Z Directs air to the windshield the air volume display b The corresponding side air vents on the
and side air vents (컄 page 208). left and right are open.
Y Directs air to the footwells and
side air vents Adjusting air volume for the center and Closing the side air vents
side air vents 왘 Turn thumbwheels 3 and 8
왘 Press the desired air distribution (컄 page 206) to the left.
button 5, 9, or a (컄 page 208). Opening the center air vents
The corresponding side air vents on the
The indicator lamp on button U left and right are closed.
goes out. (컄 page 206) to the right.
The corresponding center air vents on
the left and right are open.
212
Controls in detail
Climate control
Front defroster 앫 the air conditioning compressor 왘 Switch the windshield wipers on
switches on at outside temperatures (컄 page 61).
You can use this setting to defrost the above approximately 41°F (5°C) for
왘 Press button 0(컄 page 208).
windshield, for example if it is iced up. You air-drying
can also use it to defog the windshield and The indicator lamp on the button
side windows. Deactivating comes on.
i Keep this setting selected only until the 왘 Press button 0 (컄 page 208) once The climate control switches automatically
windshield or the side windows are clear again. more. to the following functions:
When the defrost setting has been selected, only The indicator lamp on the button goes 앫 maximum blower speed and heating
the rear window defroster can be switched on. power
out. Defrosting is turned off.
No other settings are possible.
The previous settings are in effect 앫 air flows onto the windshield and the
Activating again. The air conditioning compressor front side windows (side air vents must
remains switched on. be open)
왘 Press button 0(컄 page 208).
앫 the air conditioning compressor
The indicator lamp on the button i To switch off, you can also press
button ´ or U (컄 page 208). switches on at outside temperatures
comes on. above approximately 41°F (5°C) for
The climate control switches to the follow- Windshield fogged on the outside air-drying
ing functions automatically: If the automatic air distribution is switched
i Keep this setting selected only until the
앫 maximum blower speed and heating windshield is clear again. off:
power 왘 Press air distribution button 9 or a
앫 air flows onto the windshield and the (컄 page 208).
front side windows (side air vents must
be open)
213
Controls in detail
Climate control
Air recirculation mode Activating Deactivating

왘 Press button : (컄 page 208). 왘 Press button :.
Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent
unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle The indicator lamp on the button The indicator lamp on the button goes
from the outside (e.g. before driving comes on. out.
through a tunnel). This setting cuts off the
intake of outside air and recirculates the
i The air recirculation mode is activated auto- i The air recirculation mode is deactivated
matically at high outside temperatures. automatically
air in the passenger compartment.
The indicator lamp on button : is not lit when 앫 after 5 minutes if the outside temperature is
the air recirculation mode is switched on auto- below approximately 41°F (5°C)
Warning! G matically. 앫 after 5 minutes if the air conditioning and
A quantity outside air is added after air-drying is turned off
Fogged windows impair visibility, approximately 30 minutes. 앫 after 30 minutes if the outside temperature
endangering you and others. If the windows If you have turned off the air conditioning is above approximately 41°F (5°C)
begin to fog on the inside, switching off the (컄 page 216) or the outside temperature is
air recirculation mode immediately should below 41°F (5°C), the air recirculation mode will
clear interior window fogging. If interior win- not switch on automatically.
dow fogging persists, make sure the air
conditioning (컄 page 208) is activated, or
i To cool the interior as fast as possible, the
climate control automatically switches to air
press button 0. recirculation. The indicator lamp on button :
is not lit when the air recirculation mode has
been switched on automatically.
214
Controls in detail
Climate control
Air recirculation mode with conve- Convenience closing Convenience opening

nience closing and opening feature
왘 Press button : for approximately 왘 Press button : for approximately
2 seconds. 2 seconds.
Warning! G The windows and/or tilt/sliding sun- The windows and/or tilt/sliding sun-
roof* will close. You can release roof* will return to their previous posi-
Never operate the windows and tilt/sliding
button : once the closing proce- tions. You can release button :
sunroof* if there is the possibility of anyone
dure has begun. The windows and once the opening procedure has be-
being harmed by the opening or closing pro-
tilt/sliding sunroof* continue closing gun. The windows and tilt/sliding sun-
cedure.
until they are fully closed. The indicator roof* continue opening until they have
In case the procedure causes potential lamp on the button comes on. The air reached their previous positions. The
danger: recirculation mode is activated. indicator lamp on the button goes out.
Vehicles with or without tilt/sliding sun- The air recirculation mode is deactivat-
roof*: The closing of the windows can be im- ed.
mediately halted by pressing or pulling the
i A window or the tilt/sliding sunroof* will
respective window switch. The closing of the only return to its previous position if it has not
tilt/sliding sunroof* can be immediately been moved to another position using the re-
halted by moving the switch for the tilt/slid- spective window switch or tilt/sliding sunroof*
ing sunroof* in any direction. switch after it was closed with button :.
The closing of the windows and the
tilt/sliding sunroof* can be reversed by
again pressing and holding the : button.
215
Controls in detail
Climate control
Air conditioning Deactivating ! If the air conditioning cannot be turned on

again, this indicates that the air conditioning is
It is possible to deactivate the air condi-
The air conditioning is operational while losing refrigerant. The compressor has turned
tioning (cooling) function of the climate off.
the engine is running and cools the interior
control system. The air in the vehicle will
air to the temperature set by the operator. Have the air conditioning checked at the nearest
then no longer be cooled or dehumidified.
In addition, the air conditioning dehumidi- authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
fies the interior air at outside temperatures 왘 Press button 9 (컄 page 208).
above 41°F (5° C) and helps prevent The indicator lamp on the button goes Residual heat and ventilation
window fogging. out.
With the engine switched off, it is possible
i Condensation may drip out from underneath to continue to heat or ventilate the interior
the vehicle. This is normal and not an indication Activating
for up to 30 minutes. This feature makes
of a malfunction.
Moist air can fog up the windows. You can use of the residual heat produced by the
dehumidify the air with the air condition- engine.
Warning! G ing.
i How long the system will provide heating
왘 Press button 9 (컄 page 208) again. depends on
If you turn off the cooling function, the
interior air is not dried. The windows can fog The indicator lamp on the button 앫 the coolant temperature
up more quickly. Window fogging may comes on. 앫 the battery voltage
impair visibility and endanger you and The air conditioning uses the refrigerant Regardless of the temperature and air volume
others. R134a. This refrigerant is free of CFCs set on the climate control panel, the interior tem-
which are harmful to the ozone layer. perature is set to 72°F (22°C) and the blower
runs on low speed to protect the vehicle battery.
216
Controls in detail
Climate control
Activating Rear climate control* 1 Left rear center air vent, adjustable
왘 Switch off the ignition (컄 page 40). 2 Right rear center air vent, adjustable
The control panel for the rear climate
왘 Press button 9 (컄 page 208). control is only available if your vehicle is 3 Rear climate control on
The indicator lamp on the button equipped with seat heating* for the rear (automatic mode)
comes on. seats.
4 Air distribution (directs air through
The control panel is located on the rear of the center air vents)
Deactivating the front center console. 5 Air distribution (directs air through
왘 Press button 9 (컄 page 208). the footwells and side air vents)
The indicator lamp on the button goes 6 Rear air conditioning off
out.
i The residual heat is automatically turned off:
앫 when the ignition is switched on
앫 after about 30 minutes
앫 if the coolant temperature is too low
앫 if the battery voltage drops
Rear climate control panel
217
Controls in detail
Climate control
Activating rear climate control Deactivating rear climate control Operating from the front
i The climate control must be switched on 왘 Press button ´.
Deactivating
(컄 page 218).
The indicator lamp on the button
왘 Press button : on the front climate
왘 Press button U. comes on.
control panel (컄 page 208).
The indicator lamp on the button The cooling function switches off after
a short delay. The indicator lamp on the button
comes on. The air volume and air distri-
comes on.
bution are adjusted automatically.
i Switch off the rear climate control for im-
i The temperature is adjusted according to proved cooling or heating output in the front pas- Reactivating
the settings for the front passenger side made senger compartment.
왘 Press button : on the front climate
on the front climate control panel (컄 page 211). You can also switch off the rear climate control
from the front passenger compartment
control panel (컄 page 208).
(컄 page 218). The indicator lamp on the button goes
out. The rear climate control is adjust-
ed automatically.
218
Controls in detail
Climate control
Adjusting air distribution Adjusting automatically

Use the air distribution controls 4 or 5 왘 Press button U (컄 page 217).
to adjust the air distribution for the rear
comes on. The air distribution is adjust-
The following symbols are found on the ed automatically.
controls:
Adjusting air volume
Symbol Function
The air volume for the rear zone corre-
Z Directs air to the center air sponds to the air volume settings for the
vents front passenger side. You can switch off
Y Directs air to the footwells and the air supply for the rear zone.
the side air vents You can switch off the supplied amount of
air volume.
Adjusting manually
왘 Press button ´ (컄 page 217).
왘 Press the desired air distribution
control 4 or 5.
comes on.
The indicator lamp in the U button
goes out.
219
Controls in detail
220
Controls in detail
1 Driver’s door air vent, fixed i For draft-free ventilation, move the sliders
for center air vents and side air vents to the
2 Left side air vent, adjustable middle position.
for left side and door air vent
for left center air vent
5 Left center air vent, adjustable
6 Right center air vent, adjustable
for right center air vent
for right side and door air vent
9 Right side air vent, adjustable
a Front passenger door air vent, fixed
b Automatic climate control panel
221
Controls in detail
1 Temperature control, left 9 Temperature control, right

2 Air distribution and air volume a Automatic climate control on/off
(automatic, manual) b Air distribution, passenger side
3 Air distribution, driver’s side c Air distribution, passenger side
4 Front defroster d AC cooling on/off
0 USA only Residual heat/ventilation
P Canada only e Display
5 Increasing air volume f Decreasing air volume
6 Rear window defroster g Air recirculation
1 USA only h Air distribution, driver’s side
F Canada only j Air distribution, driver’s side
7 Air distribution, passenger side k Interior temperature sensor
8 Rear automatic climate control l Adopting driver’s side settings for all
on/off zones
> USA only

™ Canada only
222
Controls in detail
The automatic climate control is a 3-zone With the help of a sun sensor, the automat-
Warning! G intelligent automatic climate control sys- ic climate control determines the relation
tem. Your vehicle interior is divided into of the sun to the vehicle and automatically
When operating the automatic climate con- 3 zones. adjusts the inside temperature for every
trol, the air that enters the passenger com- individual zone.
partment through the air vents can be very
hot or very cold (depending on the set tem- The automatic climate control is operation-
perature). This may cause burns or frostbite al whenever the engine is running. It cools
to unprotected skin in the immediate area of the vehicle’s interior according to the an-
the air vents. gle and intensity of the sun’s rays, the out-
side temperature and the selected
Always keep sufficient distance between un- temperature. You can operate the auto-
protected parts of the body and the air matic climate control in either the auto-
vents. If necessary, use the air distribution matic or manual mode.
controls (컄 page 222) to direct the air to air
vents in the vehicle interior that are not in Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and
the immediate area of unprotected skin. odors are filtered out before outside air en-
ters the passenger compartment through
the air distribution system.
The air conditioning will not engage (no
cooling) if the A/C mode is deactivated
(컄 page 222).
223
Controls in detail
Deactivating the automatic climate Reactivating

Warning! G control system
왘 Press button U(컄 page 222).
Follow the recommended settings for heat- i You can also press button ´
ing and cooling given on the following pag- Warning! G (컄 page 222) on the automatic climate control
es. Otherwise the windows could fog up, panel.
impairing visibility and endangering you and When the automatic climate control system If you press button 0 (컄 page 222) to reacti-
others. is switched off, the outside air supply and vate the automatic climate control system, the
circulation are also switched off. Only defrosting mode is activated.
choose this settings for a short time. Other-
i Severe conditions (e.g. strong air pollution)
may require replacement of the filter before its wise the windows could fog up, impairing
scheduled interval. A clogged filter will reduce visibility and endangering you and others.
the air volume to the interior.
If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate the interior Deactivating
before driving off, see “Summer opening fea-
ture” (컄 page 239). The automatic climate con- 왘 Press button ´ (컄 page 222) until
trol will then adjust the interior temperature to the display e (컄 page 222) is cleared.
the set value much faster.
Keep the air intake grille in front of the wind- comes on.
shield free of snow and debris.
224
Controls in detail
Operating the automatic climate 왘 Use temperature controls 1 and 9 Setting the temperature
control system in automatic mode (컄 page 222) to separately adjust the
air temperature on each side of the Use temperature control 1 and 9
You can switch the automatic climate con- passenger compartment. (컄 page 222) to separately adjust the air
trol system on and off separately for each temperature on each side of the passenger
The temperature of the interior is ad-
zone as needed. compartment. You should raise or lower
justed automatically.
the temperature setting in small incre-
i When operating the automatic climate ments, preferably starting at 72°F (22°C).
control system in automatic mode, you will only Deactivating
rarely need to adjust the temperature, air volume The automatic climate control will adjust
and air distribution. 왘 Press one button of the air distribution to the set temperature as fast as possible.
(컄 page 222) or press button
In automatic mode, cooling with dehumidify is
switched on. This function can be switched off if or Q (컄 page 222). Increasing
necessary. The indicator lamp on button U 왘 Turn temperature control 1
goes out and AUTO disappears in the and/or 9 slightly clockwise.
Activating display e (컄 page 222).
The automatic climate control system
왘 Press button U (컄 page 222) while Depending on which button you press – will correspondingly adjust the interior
the engine is running. the air distribution button or the air vol- air temperature.
The indicator lamp on the button ume button or Q – automatic
comes on. AUTO appears in the control of either the air distribution or Decreasing
display e (컄 page 222). Air volume air volume is switched off.
왘 Turn the temperature control 1
and air distribution are controlled sep- and/or 9 slightly counterclockwise.
arately for each zone.
The automatic climate control system
will correspondingly adjust the interior
air temperature.
225
Controls in detail
Adjusting air distribution 왘 Press the desired air distribution but- Opening the side air vents
ton (컄 page 222).
Use the air distribution controls 3, h,
The indicator lamp on the desired but- (컄 page 220) to the right.
or j for the driver’s side, or 7, b, or c
ton goes out.
(컄 page 222) for the passenger side to The corresponding side air vents on the
separately adjust the air distribution on left and right are open.
Adjusting the air distribution for the
each side of the passenger compartment.
center and side air vents
Closing the side air vents
The following symbols are found on the
buttons: Opening the center air vents 왘 Turn thumbwheels 3 and 8
Symbol Function
(컄 page 220) to the right. The corresponding side air vents on the
Driver’s Passen- left and right are closed.
side ger side The corresponding center air vents on
the left and right are open.
6 Z Directs air to the
windshield and side Closing the center air vents
air vents
7 a Directs air through
the center, side and
rear passenger The corresponding center air vents on
compartment air the left and right are closed.
vents
8 Y Directs air to the
footwells and side
air vents
226
Controls in detail
Adjusting air volume Front defroster The automatic climate control switches to
the following functions automatically:
Five blower speeds are available. You can use this setting to defrost the
앫 maximum blower speed and heating
windshield, such as when it is iced up. You
왘 Press button to decrease or power
can also use it to defog the windshield and
button Q to increase air volume
side windows. 앫 air flows onto the windshield and the
(컄 page 222) to the desired level.
front side windows (side air vents must
The indicator lamp on button U i Keep this setting selected only until the be open)
windshield or the side windows are clear again.
goes out.
When the defrost setting has been selected, only 앫 the air conditioning compressor
The AUTO display disappears in the the rear window defroster can be switched on. switches on at outside temperatures
display e (컄 page 222) and the auto- No other settings are possible. above approximately 41°F (5°C) for
matic mode is switched off. The select- air-drying
ed blower speed appears in the Activating
display e (컄 page 222). Deactivating
왘 Press button 0 (컄 page 222).
왘 Press button 0 (컄 page 222).
comes on. The indicator lamp on the button goes
out. Defrosting is turned off.
The previous settings are once again in
effect.
i To switch off, you can also press
button ´ or U (컄 page 222).
227
Controls in detail
Windshield fogged on the outside Maximum cooling MAX COOL Air recirculation mode
i Keep this setting selected only until the If the air distribution control as well as the Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent
windshield is clear again.
airflow volume control are set to U and unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle
왘 Switch the windshield wipers on there is a high need for cooling, the from the outside (e.g. before driving
(컄 page 61). MAX COOL function is activated. through a tunnel). This setting cuts off the
왘 Press button U (컄 page 222). “MAX COOL” appears in the front and rear intake of outside air and recirculates the
display. air in the passenger compartment.
AUTO appears in the display e
(컄 page 222). Air volume and air distri- This provides the fastest possible cooling
bution are controlled separately for of the vehicle interior (when windows and Warning! G
each zone. tilt/sliding sunroof* are closed).
Fogged windows impair visibility,
If the automatic air distribution and air vol- endangering you and others. If the windows
ume are switched off: begin to fog on the inside, switching off the
왘 Press buttons 8 and Y air recirculation mode immediately should
(컄 page 222). clear interior window fogging. If interior win-
dow fogging persists, make sure the air
conditioning (컄 page 230) is activated, or
press button 0.
228
Controls in detail
Activating Deactivating Air recirculation mode with conve-

nience closing and opening feature
왘 Press button : (컄 page 222). 왘 Press button : (컄 page 222).
The indicator lamp on the button The indicator lamp on the button
comes on. comes on. Warning! G
i The air recirculation mode is activated auto- i The air recirculation mode is deactivated Never operate the side windows and
matically at high outside temperatures. automatically tilt/sliding sunroof* if there is the possibility
The indicator lamp on button : is not lit when 앫 after 5 minutes if the outside temperature is of anyone being harmed by the opening or
the air recirculation mode is automatically below approximately 41°F (5°C) closing procedure.
switched on. 앫 after 5 minutes if the air conditioning and In case the procedure causes potential
A quantity of outside air is added after approxi- air-drying is turned off danger:
mately 30 minutes. 앫 after 30 minutes if the outside temperature
Vehicles with or without tilt/sliding sun-
If you have turned off the air conditioning is above approximately 41°F (5°C)
(컄 page 230) or the outside temperature is roof*: The closing of the windows can be im-
below 41°F (5°C), the air recirculation mode will At outside temperatures above 79°F mediately halted by pressing or pulling the
not switch on automatically. (26°C) the system will not automatically respective window switch. The closing of the
switch back to outside air. A quantity of tilt/sliding sunroof* can be immediately
i To cool the interior as fast as possible, the outside air is added after approximately halted by moving the switch for the tilt/slid-
automatic climate control automatically switch- 30 minutes. ing sunroof* in any direction.
es to air recirculation. The indicator lamp on
button : is not lit when the system switches The closing of the side windows and the
to air recirculation automatically. tilt/sliding sunroof* can be reversed by
again pressing and holding the : button.
229
Controls in detail
Convenience closing Convenience opening Air conditioning

왘 Press button : for approximately 왘 Press button : for approximately
The cooling function, only operational
2 seconds. 2 seconds.
when the engine is running, cools the vehi-
The windows and/or tilt/sliding sun- The windows and/or tilt/sliding sun- cle down to the selected interior tempera-
roof* will close. You can release roof* will return to their previous posi- ture. The cooling function also
button : once the closing proce- tions. You can release button : dehumidifies the air in the vehicle interior,
dure has begun. The windows and once the opening procedure has be- thereby preventing the windows from fog-
tilt/sliding sunroof* continue closing gun. The windows and tilt/sliding sun- ging up.
until they are fully closed. The indicator roof* continue opening until they have
lamp on the button comes on. The air reached their previous positions. The i Condensation may drip out from underneath
the vehicle. This is normal and not an indication
recirculation mode is activated. indicator lamp on the button goes out. of a malfunction.
The air recirculation mode is deactivat-
ed.
Warning! G
i A window or the tilt/sliding sunroof* will
only return to its previous position if it has not If you turn off the cooling function, the
been moved to another position using the re-
interior air is not dried. The windows can fog
spective window switch or tilt/sliding sunroof*
switch after it was closed with button :. up more quickly. Window fogging may
impair visibility and endanger you and
others.
230
Controls in detail
Deactivating ! If the air conditioning cannot be turned on Activating

again, this indicates that the air conditioning is
It is possible to deactivate the air condi- 왘 Adjust the temperature, air volume and
losing refrigerant. The compressor has turned
tioning (cooling) function of the automatic off. air distribution (컄 page 222).
climate control system. The air in the vehi-
Have the air conditioning checked at the nearest 왘 Press button ; (컄 page 222).
cle will then no longer be cooled or dehu-
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
midified. The indicator lamp on the button
comes on.
왘 Press button 9 (컄 page 222). Using driver-side settings for all tem-
perature zones The driver-side settings are used for all
temperature zones.
out. The cooling function switches off
You can use the settings of the driver’s
after a short delay.
side, such as temperature, air volume and Deactivating
air distribution, for all temperature zones. 왘 Press button ; (컄 page 222) again.
Activating
These settings only need to be made once
Moist air can fog up the windows. You can and the automatic climate control system The indicator lamp on the button goes
dehumidify the air with the air condition- will automatically regulate the settings for out.
ing. all temperature zones quickly and comfort- i If you manually set the temperature, air vol-
왘 Press button 9 again. ably. ume or air distribution for the passenger side or
the rear passenger compartment when the
The indicator lamp on the button MONO setting is active, the MONO setting will
comes on. be switched off.
The air conditioning uses the refrigerant
R-134a. This refrigerant is free of CFCs
which are harmful to the ozone layer.
231
Controls in detail
Residual heat and ventilation Activating Rear automatic climate control

왘 Switch off the ignition (컄 page 39).
With the engine switched off, it is possible The control panel is located at the rear of
to continue to heat or ventilate the interior 왘 Press button 9 (컄 page 222). the front center console.
for up to 30 minutes. This feature makes The indicator lamp on the button
use of the residual heat produced by the comes on.
engine.
i How long the system will provide heating Deactivating
depends on 왘 Press button 9.
앫 the coolant temperature
앫 the battery voltage out.
Regardless of the temperature and air volume
set on the automatic climate control panel, an i The residual heat is automatically turned off:
interior temperature is aimed at by 72°F (22°C) 앫 when the ignition is switched on
and the blower runs on low speed to protect the
앫 after about 30 minutes
vehicle battery.
앫 if the coolant temperature is too low
앫 if the battery voltage drops
232
Controls in detail
1 Left rear center air vent, adjustable Activating rear automatic climate Operating from the front
control
2 Right rear center air vent, adjustable Deactivating
3 Temperature control i The automatic climate control must be
switched on (컄 page 224). 왘 Press button > (컄 page 222).
4 Air distribution and air volume
왘 Press button U. The indicator lamp on the button goes
(automatic, manual)
out.
5 Air distribution (directs air through The indicator lamp on the button
comes on. The temperature, air vol- In display e (컄 page 222), you will see
the center air vents)
ume, and air distribution are adjusted the > symbol followed by MODE for
6 Air distribution (directs air through automatically. approximately 3 seconds.
the footwells and side air vents)
왘 Press button ´ (컄 page 222).
7 Rear automatic climate control Deactivating rear automatic climate
on/off control In display e (컄 page 222), you will see
the > symbol followed by OFF.
8 Decreasing air volume 왘 Press button ´.
The rear automatic climate control is
9 Indicator lamps for air volume The indicator lamp on the button goes switched off.
settings out.
a Increasing air volume The cooling function switches off after
a short delay.
i Switch off the rear automatic climate con-
trol for improved cooling or heating output in the
front passenger compartment.
You can also switch off the rear automatic
climate control from the front passenger com-
partment (컄 page 222).
233
Controls in detail
Reactivating Setting the temperature Adjusting air distribution

왘 Press button > (컄 page 222). 왘 Press button > (컄 page 222). Use the air distribution controls 5 or 6
to adjust the air distribution for the rear
The indicator lamp on the button The indicator lamp on the button
comes on. comes on.
The symbols on the controls represent the
In display e (컄 page 222), you will see In display e (컄 page 222), you will see
following functions:
the > symbol followed by ON and the > symbol followed by MODE.
MODE. The MODE display is cleared and
왘 Set the desired temperature for the Symbol Function
the indicator lamp on button >
rear passenger compartment using
goes out after approximately Z Directs air to the center air
temperature control 3 (컄 page 233).
3 seconds. vents
After approximately 3 seconds after Y Directs air to the footwells and
The rear automatic climate control
the last adjustment, the display switch- the side air vents
switches on.
es back to its standard display and the
indicator lamp on button > goes
Adjusting manually
out.
왘 Press the desired air distribution con-
i You can also press the > button once trol.
more to switch back to the standard display.
The indicator lamp on button U
goes out.
234
Controls in detail
Adjusting automatically Increasing the temperature Adjusting air volume

왘 Press button U while the engine is 왘 Turn temperature control 3
Adjusting manually
running. (컄 page 233) slightly clockwise.
Five blower speeds are available.
The indicator lamp on the button The rear automatic climate control will
comes on. The air distribution is adjust- correspondingly adjust the interior air 왘 Press button to decrease or
ed automatically. temperature for the rear passenger button Q to increase air volume to
compartment. the desired level.
Setting the temperature
The indicator lamp on the button U
Use temperature control 3 (컄 page 233) Decreasing the temperature
goes out. The selected blower speed is
to separately adjust the air temperature of 왘 Turn temperature control 3 shown by the indicator lamps for air
the rear passenger compartment. (컄 page 233) slightly counterclock- volume settings 9 (컄 page 233).
wise.
You should raise or lower the temperature
Adjusting automatically
setting in small increments, preferably The rear automatic climate control will
starting at 72°F (22°C). The automatic cli- correspondingly adjust the interior air 왘 Press button U.
mate control will adjust to the set temper- temperature for the rear passenger
ature as fast as possible. compartment.
comes on. The air volume is adjusted
i The rear automatic climate control will not automatically.
cool the air when the air conditioning is switched
off (컄 page 231).
235
Controls in detail
Power windows
Opening and closing

Warning! G
The door windows are opened and closed
electrically. The switches for all door win- When closing the windows, make sure that
dows are located on the driver’s door con- there is no danger of anyone being harmed
trol panel (컄 page 36). The switches for by the closing procedure.
the respective door windows are located Activate the override switch (컄 page 94)
on the control panels of the front passen- when children are riding in the back seats of
ger door and the rear doors. the vehicle. The children could otherwise in-
jure themselves, e.g. by becoming trapped
1 Left rear door window in the window opening.
2 Left front door window
The closing of a door window can be imme-
3 Right front door window
diately halted by releasing the switch or, if
4 Right rear door window
switch was pulled past the resistance point
5 Override switch (컄 page 93)
and released, by either pressing or pulling
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 40). the respective switch.
If a door window encounters an obstruction
that blocks its path in a circumstance where
you pulled the switch past the resistance
point and released it to close the door win-
dow, the automatic reversal function will
stop the window and open it slightly.
236
Controls in detail
Power windows
i You can also open or close the windows Opening the door windows
If a door window encounters an obstruction
using the SmartKey, see “Summer opening fea-
that blocks its path in a circumstance where 왘 Press switch 1, 2, 3, or 4
ture” (컄 page 239) and see “Convenience clos-
you are closing a door window by pulling and ing feature” (컄 page 239). (컄 page 236) to the resistance point.
holding the switch, or by pressing and hold-
Depending on the current position, the power The corresponding door window moves
ing button ‹ on the SmartKey, by press-
windows may also open or close when the air downwards until you release the
ing and holding the lock button (vehicles recirculation button : on the control panel of switch.
with KEYLESS-GO*) on a door handle, the the climate control (컄 page 208) or automatic
automatic reversal function will not operate. climate control* (컄 page 222) is pressed and Closing the door windows
held.
When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
왘 Pull switch 1, 2, 3, or 4
SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* i With the SmartKey in starter switch (컄 page 236) to the resistance point.
from the starter switch, take it with you, and position 0 or removed from the starter switch,
lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat- the windows can be operated The corresponding door window moves
tended in the vehicle, or with access to an 앫 until you open the driver’s or front passenger upwards until you release the switch.
unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehi- door
cle equipment can cause an accident 앫 for at least 5 minutes Warning! G
If you pull and hold the switch up when clos-
ing the door window, and upward movement
of the door window is blocked by some ob-
struction including but not limited to arms,
hands, fingers, etc., the automatic reversal
will not operate.
237
Controls in detail
Power windows
Fully opening the door windows If the upward movement of a door window Synchronizing the door windows
(Express-open) is blocked during the closing procedure,
the door window will stop and open slight- The door windows must be resynchronized
왘 Press switch 1, 2, 3, or 4
ly. 앫 after the battery was disconnected
(컄 page 236) past the resistance point
and release. 왘 Remove the obstruction. 앫 if the door windows cannot be fully
The corresponding door window opens 왘 Pull the respective power window opened (Express-open) or closed
completely. switch past the resistance point again (Express-close)
and release.
Fully closing the door windows
i Each door window must be resynchronized
i If the door window still does not close when separately.
(Express-close)
there is no obstruction, pull and hold the respec- 왘 Close all doors.
왘 Pull switch 1, 2, 3, or 4 tive power window switch. The door window will
(컄 page 236) past the resistance point then close without the obstruction sensor 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 40).
and release. function.
왘 Pull and hold power window switch 1,
The corresponding door window closes 2, 3, or 4 (컄 page 236).
Stopping door windows during
completely. Express-operation Once a door window is closed com-
pletely, hold the respective switch for
왘 Press or pull respective power window
Warning! G switch again.
approximately 3 seconds.
The door window is synchronized.
Driver’s door only:
If within 5 seconds switch is again pulled
past the resistance point and released, the
automatic reversal will not function.
238
Controls in detail
Power windows
Summer opening feature 왘 Aim transmitter eye of the SmartKey or Convenience closing feature
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* at the
If the weather is warm, you can ventilate driver’s outside door handle. When locking the vehicle, you can close
the vehicle before driving off by simulta- the windows and the tilt/sliding sunroof*
neously: simultaneously.
KEYLESS-GO* must be in close proxim-
앫 opening the door windows ity to the driver’s outside door handle.
앫 opening the tilt/sliding sunroof* 왘 Press and hold button Œ on the
Warning! G
앫 switching on the seat ventilation* for SmartKey or SmartKey with
When closing the windows and the
the driver’s seat KEYLESS-GO* until the windows and
tilt/sliding sunroof*, make sure that there is
the tilt/sliding sunroof* have reached no danger of anyone being harmed by the
the desired position. closing procedure.
왘 Release button Œ on the SmartKey If potential danger exists, proceed as fol-
or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* to lows:
interrupt the opening procedure.
앫 Release button ‹ to stop the closing
procedure. To open, press and hold
button Œ. To continue the closing
procedure after making sure that there
is no danger of anyone being harmed by
the closing procedure, press and hold
button ‹. 컄컄
239
Controls in detail
Power windows
컄컄 왘 Press and hold button ‹ on the

Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
SmartKey or SmartKey with
앫 Release the lock button (컄 page 68) on KEYLESS-GO* until the windows and
the driver’s outside door handle to stop the tilt/sliding sunroof* are completely
the closing procedure.
closed.
앫 Immediately pull on the same outside
왘 Release button ‹ on the SmartKey
door handle and hold firmly. The win-
dows and the tilt/sliding sunroof* will or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* to
open for as long as the door handle is interrupt the closing procedure.
held but the door is not opened. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
왘 Press and hold the lock button on an
왘 Aim transmitter eye of the SmartKey or
outside door handle (컄 page 68) until
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* at the
the windows and the tilt/sliding sun-
driver’s outside door handle
roof* are completely closed.
(컄 page 239).
왘 Release the lock button on the outside
KEYLESS-GO* must be in close proxim- door handle to interrupt the closing
ity to the driver’s outside door handle. procedure.
240
Controls in detail
왔 Power tilt/sliding sunroof*
Opening and closing With the sunroof closed or tilted open, a
screen can be slid into the roof opening to
The tilt/sliding sunroof is opened and guard against sun rays. When sliding the
closed electrically. The switch for the sunroof open, the screen will also retract.
tilt/sliding sunroof is located on the
overhead control panel.
Sunroof switch
1 Push back to slide sunroof open
2 Push forward to slide sunroof closed
3 Push up to raise sunroof at rear
4 Pull down to lower sunroof at rear
241
Controls in detail
Do not open the tilt/sliding sunroof if there is

Warning! G The tilt/sliding sunroof is made out of glass.
In the event of an accident, the glass may
snow or ice on the roof, as this could result in
malfunctions.
When closing the tilt/sliding sunroof, make shatter. This may result in an opening in the
The tilt/sliding sunroof can be opened or closed
sure that there is no danger of anyone being roof. manually should an electrical malfunction occur
harmed by the closing procedure. In a vehicle rollover, occupants not wearing (컄 page 478).
If the tilt/sliding sunroof encounters an ob- their seat belts or not wearing them properly i When the tilt/sliding sunroof is open, reso-
struction that blocks its path in a circum- may be thrown out of the opening. Such an nance noises may result in addition to the usual
stance where you are closing the tilt/sliding opening also presents a potential for injury wind noises. They are caused by minimal pres-
for occupants wearing their seat belts prop- sure changes in the passenger compartment. To
sunroof by moving the tilt/sliding sunroof
erly as entire body parts or portions of them reduce or eliminate these noises, change the po-
switch past the resistance point, or by sition of the tilt/sliding sunroof or open a side
pressing and holding button ‹ on the may protrude from the passenger compart-
window slightly.
SmartKey, by pressing and holding the lock ment.
button (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*) on the When leaving the vehicle, always remove the i You can also open or close the tilt/sliding
door handle, the automatic reversal function SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* sunroof using the SmartKey or the
KEYLESS-GO* function, see “Summer opening
will not operate. from the starter switch, take it with you, and
feature” (컄 page 239) and see “Convenience
The opening/closing procedure of the lock your vehicle. Do not leave children un- closing feature” (컄 page 239).
tilt/sliding sunroof can be immediately halt- attended in the vehicle, or with access to an
ed by releasing the switch or, if the switch unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of vehi- i Depending on the current position, the
cle equipment can cause an accident tilt/sliding sunroof may also open or close when
was moved past the resistance point and re- the air recirculation button : on the control
leased, by moving the switch in any direc- and/or serious personal injury.
panel of the climate control (컄 page 208) or
tion. automatic climate control* (컄 page 222) is
! To avoid damaging the seals, do not trans- pressed and held.
port any objects with sharp edges which can
stick out of the tilt/sliding sunroof.
242
Controls in detail
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 40). Fully opening (Express-open) and

closing (Express-close) Warning! G
Opening and closing
왘 To fully open or close the tilt/sliding If the tilt/sliding sunroof encounters an ob-
왘 To open, close, raise, or lower the sunroof, move the sunroof switch past struction that blocks its path in a circum-
tilt/sliding sunroof, move the sunroof the resistance point in the required stance where you are closing the tilt/sliding
switch to the resistance point in the direction of arrows 1 to 2 sunroof by moving the tilt/sliding sunroof
required direction of arrows 1 to 4 (컄 page 241) and release. switch past the resistance point, or by
(컄 page 241). pressing and holding button ‹ on the
The tilt/sliding sunroof opens or closes
왘 Release the sunroof switch when the completely. SmartKey, by pressing and holding the lock
tilt/sliding sunroof has reached the de- button (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*) on the
sired position. Stopping the power tilt/sliding sunroof door handle, the automatic reversal function
during Express-open will not operate.
왘 Move the sunroof switch in any direc- The opening/closing procedure of the
tion. tilt/sliding sunroof can be immediately halt-
ed by releasing the switch or, if the switch
The movement of the tilt/sliding sun-
was moved past the resistance point and re-
roof stops.
leased, by moving the switch in any direc-
i If the movement of the tilt/sliding sunroof is tion.
blocked during the closing procedure, the
tilt/sliding sunroof will stop and reopen slightly.
243
Controls in detail
Synchronizing 왘 Reinsert the fuse in the main box.

The tilt/sliding sunroof must be
synchronized 왘 Press and hold the sunroof switch in
the direction of arrow 3 (컄 page 241)
앫 after the battery has been
until the tilt/sliding sunroof is fully
disconnected or discharged
raised at the rear.
앫 after the tilt/sliding sunroof has been
왘 Hold the sunroof switch in the direction
closed manually (컄 page 478)
of arrow 3 for approximately
앫 after a malfunction 1 second.
앫 if the tilt/sliding sunroof does not open 왘 Open the tilt/sliding sunroof using the
smoothly Express-open feature (컄 page 243).
왘 Remove the fuse for the tilt/sliding If the tilt/sliding sunroof opens
sunroof from the fuse box completely, it is synchronized.
(컄 page 522).
If the tilt/sliding sunroof does not open
i For information on which fuse box contains completely:
the fuse for the power tilt/sliding sunroof, see
왘 Repeat the above steps.
the fuse chart provided with the vehicle tool kit
(컄 page 469).
244
Controls in detail
Driving systems
왔 Driving systems
The driving systems of your vehicle are 앫 Air suspension package* Cruise control
described on the following pages: The system consists of two compo-
nents. The cruise control automatically maintains
앫 Cruise control (컄 page 245) and
the speed you set for your vehicle.
Distronic* (컄 page 250), with which 앫 Adaptive Damping System (ADS)*
the vehicle can maintain a preset (컄 page 269), which adjusts the The use of cruise control is recommended
speed. vehicle suspension characteristics. for driving at a constant speed for extend-
ed periods of time. You can set or resume
앫 Distance warning function* 앫 Vehicle level control*
cruise control at any speed above
(컄 page 263) is only available with (컄 page 270), which controls the
20 mph (30 km/h).
Distronic*, which warns of stationary vehicle level.
obstacle or slower moving vehicles that The cruise control function is operated by
앫 Parktronic* (컄 page 274) and rear view
you are closing in on too quickly. means of the cruise control lever.
camera* (컄 page 279), which serve as
앫 Downhill Speed Regulation (DSR) a parking aid. The cruise control lever is the uppermost
(컄 page 264), which supports you lever on the left-hand side of the steering
For information on the ABS, BAS, EBP,
when you are driving downhill. column (컄 page 24).
ESP®, and 4-ETS, see “Driving safety sys-
앫 Off-road driving program (컄 page 268), tems” (컄 page 96). i The cruise control should not be activated
which supports you when you are driv- during off-road driving.
ing off-road.
245
Controls in detail
Driving systems
The cruise control is a convenience system The cruise control brakes automatically so
designed to assist the driver during vehicle that the set speed is not exceeded. The
operation. The driver is and must always brake pedal depresses when the cruise con-
remain responsible for the vehicle’s speed trol engages the brakes.
and for safe brake operation. Keep driver’s foot area clear at all times,
Only use the cruise control if the road, traffic including the area under the brake pedal.
and weather conditions make it advisable to Objects stored in this area may impair pedal
travel at a constant speed. movement which could interfere with the 1 Setting current or higher speed
앫 The use of the cruise control can be braking ability of the cruise control system. Adjustment in 1 mph increments (to
dangerous on winding roads or in heavy Do not place your foot under the brake pedal the resistance point) or 5 mph
traffic because conditions do not allow – your foot could become caught. increments (past the resistance point)
safe driving at a constant speed. (Canada: 1 km/h or 10 km/h)
Keep in mind that the cruise control is a 2 Setting current or lower speed
앫 The use of the cruise control can be convenience system designed to assist the Adjustment in 1 mph increments (to
dangerous on slippery roads. Rapid
driver during vehicle operation. The driver is the resistance point) or 5 mph
changes in tire traction can result in
and must always remain responsible for the increments (past the resistance point)
wheel spin and loss of control.
vehicle’s speed and for safe brake (Canada: 1 km/h or 10 km/h)
앫 Deactivate the cruise control when operation. 3 Canceling cruise control
driving in fog.
4 Resume to last set speed
The “Resume” function should only be
operated if the driver is fully aware of the
previously set speed and wishes to resume
this particular preset speed.
246
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Activating cruise control Setting current speed Canceling cruise control

You can activate the cruise control when 왘 Accelerate or decelerate to the desired There are several ways to cancel the cruise
the vehicle speed is above speed. control:
20 mph (30 km/h).
왘 Briefly lift the cruise control lever in 왘 Step on the brake pedal.
In the following cases you cannot activate direction of arrow 1 or depress in The cruise control is canceled. The last
the cruise control: direction of arrow 2.
speed set is stored for later use.
앫 when you brake The current speed is set.
or
앫 when you have set the parking brake 왘 Remove your foot from the accelerator
왘 Briefly push the cruise control lever in
pedal.
앫 when the automatic transmission is set direction of arrow 3 (컄 page 246).
to position P, R, or N The cruise control is activated.
The cruise control is canceled. The last
앫 if the ESP® is switched off The current set speed appears in the speed set is stored for later use.
multifunction display for approximately
앫 if the ESP® has switched off due to a i The last stored set speed is canceled when
5 seconds.
malfunction the engine is turned off.
i The vehicle speed displayed in the speedom- i On uphill grades, the cruise control may not
be able to maintain the set speed. Once the
eter can briefly vary from the speed setting for
grade eases, the set speed will be resumed.
the cruise control system.
On downhill grades, the cruise control maintains
the set speed by braking with the vehicle’s
braking system. In addition, on longer downhill
grades the automatic transmission will down-
shift automatically.
247
Controls in detail
Driving systems
i The cruise control switches off i Depressing the accelerator pedal does not Adjustment in 5 mph
automatically when deactivate the cruise control. After a brief accel- (Canada: 10 km/h) increments
앫 you step on the brake pedal eration (e.g. for passing), the cruise control will
resume the last set speed.
앫 you depress the parking brake pedal Warning! G
The cruise control switches off automatically and Setting a higher speed
an acoustic warning will sound when You can increase the vehicle speed in
You can increase the speed in two ways. 5 mph (Canada 10 km/h) increments.
앫 the vehicle speed is below 20 mph
(30 km/h) When using this feature, keep in mind that it
Adjustment in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h) may take a brief moment until the vehicle
앫 the ESP® is in operation
increments has reached the set speed.
앫 the ESP® is switched off with the ESP®
switch (컄 page 99) i The set value is increased in 1 mph Increase the vehicle speed to a value that
(Canada: 1 km/h) increments each time you lift the prevailing road conditions permit. Other-
앫 ®
the ESP has switched off due to a
the cruise control lever up to the resistance wise, sudden and unexpected acceleration
malfunction (컄 page 419)
point. of the vehicle could cause an accident
앫 you set the automatic transmission to N
while driving 왘 Briefly lift the cruise control lever up to and/or serious injury to you and others.
the resistance point in direction of
Observe additional messages in the
multifunction display that may appear. arrow 1 (컄 page 246). i The set value is increased in
왘 Release the cruise control lever. 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h) increments each time
! Setting the automatic transmission to N you lift the cruise control lever past the
while driving cancels the cruise control. The vehicle speed increases in incre- resistance point.
However, the automatic transmission should not ments of 1 mph (Canada: 1km/h).
be set to N while driving except to coast when
the vehicle is in danger of skidding (e.g. on icy
roads).
248
Controls in detail
Driving systems
왘 Briefly lift the cruise control lever up Adjustment in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h) Adjustment in 5 mph
past the resistance point in direction of increments (Canada: 10 km/h) increments
arrow 1 (컄 page 246).
i The set value is decreased in 1 mph
왘 Release the cruise control lever. (Canada: 1 km/h) increments each time you Warning! G
press the cruise control lever down to the resis-
The vehicle speed increases in incre- tance point. You can decrease the vehicle speed in
ments of 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h).
왘 Briefly press the cruise control lever 5 mph (Canada 10 km/h) increments. When
i The new speed is set and the vehicle will down to the resistance point in direc- using this feature, keep in mind that it may
accelerate. Keep in mind that it may take a brief tion of arrow 2 (컄 page 246). take a brief moment until the vehicle has
moment until the vehicle has reached the set reached the set speed.
speed. 왘 Release the cruise control lever.
Decelerate the vehicle speed to a value that
The vehicle speed decreases in incre- the prevailing road conditions permit. Other-
Setting a lower speed
ments of 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h). wise, sudden and unexpected deceleration
You can reduce the speed in two ways. of the vehicle could cause an accident
and/or serious injury to you and others.
i When you use the cruise control lever to
decelerate, the brake system will automatically
brake the vehicle if the engine’s braking power
does not brake the vehicle sufficiently.
i The set value is decreased in 5 mph
(Canada: 10 km/h) increments each time you
press the cruise control lever down past the
resistance point.
249
Controls in detail
Driving systems
왘 Briefly press the cruise control lever Setting to last stored speed Distronic*
down past the resistance point in direc- (“Resume” function)
tion of arrow 2 (컄 page 246). When activated, the Distronic adaptive
cruise control system increases the driving
왘 Release the cruise control lever. Warning! G convenience afforded by the cruise control
The vehicle speed decreases in incre- while traveling on expressways and other
The set speed stored in memory should only
ments of 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h). major roadways.
be set again if prevailing road conditions
i The new speed is set and the vehicle will permit. Possible acceleration or decelera- 앫 If the Distronic distance sensor detects
decelerate. Keep in mind that it may take a brief tion differences arising from returning to the a slower moving vehicle directly ahead,
moment until the vehicle has reached the set preset speed could cause an accident your vehicle speed will be reduced so
speed. and/or serious injury to you and others. that you follow that vehicle at your
preset following distance.
왘 Briefly pull the cruise control lever in di- 앫 If there is no vehicle directly ahead of
rection of arrow 4 (컄 page 246). you, Distronic will function in the same
The cruise control resumes to the last way as standard cruise control
set speed, or if no speed is stored, it (컄 page 245).
will set and store the current speed.
왘 Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
The last set speed appears in the multi-
function display for approximately
5 seconds.
250
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Warning! G Warning! G Warning! G

Distronic is a convenience system. Its speed Distronic adaptive cruise control is no Distronic requires familiarity with its opera-
adjustment reduction capability is intended substitute for active driving involvement. It tional characteristics. We strongly recom-
to make cruise control more effective and does not react to pedestrians or on station- mend that you review the following
usable when traffic speeds vary. It is not ary objects, nor does it recognize or predict information carefully before operating the
however, intended to, nor does it, replace the lane curvature or the movement of system.
the need for extreme care. The responsibili- preceding vehicles.
ty for the vehicle’s speed, distance to the Distronic can only apply a maximum of 20%
preceding vehicle and, most importantly, of the vehicle’s braking power. Warning! G
brake operation to ensure a safe stopping
distance, always rests with the driver. It is the driver’s responsibility at all times to
Distronic cannot take road and traffic condi-
be attentive to the road, weather and traffic
Distronic cannot take road and traffic conditions into account. Only use Distronic if the
conditions. Additionally, the driver must
tions into account. road, weather and traffic conditions make it
provide the steering, braking and other
advisable to travel at a constant speed.
Complex driving situations are not always driving inputs necessary to remain in control
fully recognized by Distronic. This could of the vehicle.
result in wrong or missing distance
warnings.
High-frequency sources such as toll Warning! G
stations, speed measuring systems etc. can
cause the Distronic system to malfunction. Use of Distronic can be dangerous on slip-
pery roads. Rapid changes in tire traction
can result in wheel spin and loss of control. 컄컄
251
Controls in detail
Driving systems
컄컄
Distronic does not act upon adverse sight
and distance conditions. Do not use
Warning! G Switch off Distronic:
앫 when changing from the left to the right
Distronic during conditions of fog, heavy The “Resume” function should only be lane if vehicles are moving more slowly
rain, snow or sleet. operated if the driver is fully aware of the in the left lane
previously set speed and wishes to resume 앫 when entering a turn lane or highway off
this particular preset speed. ramp
Warning! G 앫 in complex driving situations, such as in
highway construction zones
Distronic cannot take weather conditions
into account. Switch off Distronic or do not
Warning! G In these situations, Distronic will continue to
switch it on if: maintain the set speed unless deactivated.
Close attention to road and traffic condi-
앫 roads are slippery or covered with snow tions is imperative at all times, regardless of Distronic is designed and intended only to
or ice. The wheels could lose traction whether or not Distronic is activated. maintain a set speed and keep a set dis-
while braking or accelerating, and the tance from moving objects in front of it.
vehicle could skid. Use of Distronic can be dangerous on
winding roads or in heavy traffic because
앫 the sensor is dirty or visibility is
conditions do not allow safe driving at a
diminished due to snow, rain or fog, for
example. The distance control system continuous speed.
functionality could be impaired. Distronic will not react to stationary objects
Always pay attention to surrounding traffic in the roadway (e.g. a stopped vehicle in a
conditions even while Distronic is switched traffic jam or a disabled vehicle). Distronic
on. Otherwise, you may not be able to recog- will also not respond to oncoming vehicles.
nize dangerous situations until it is too late.
This could cause an accident in which you
and others could be injured.
252
Controls in detail
Driving systems
i USA only: This device has been approved by Distronic displays in the speedometer
the FCC as a “Vehicular Radar System”. The radial
dar sensor is intended for use in an automotive
radar system only. Removal, tampering, or alter-
ing of the device will void any warranties, and is
not permitted by the FCC. Do not tamper with,
alter, or use in any non-approved way.
equipment.
i Canada only: 1 Set speed

This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry 2 Cruise control speed segments
Canada. Operation is subject to the following
1 Set speed 3 Speed of the vehicle ahead
two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference, and If Distronic is activated, one or two cruise If Distronic detects a vehicle directly
control speed segments come on around ahead, the cruise control speed
received, including interference that may the set speed. segments 2, which represents the differ-
cause undesired operation of the device. ence from the speed of the preceding
i The vehicle speed displayed on the speed- vehicle 3 to the driver’s selected set
Removal, tampering, or altering of the device will ometer can briefly vary from the speed setting
void any warranties, and is not permitted. Do not on the Distronic system. speed 1, appear in the speedometer.
tamper with, alter, or use in any non-approved
way.
equipment.
253
Controls in detail
Driving systems
If Distronic calculates that there is a dan-

ger of collision: Warning! G Warning! G
앫 The distance warning lamp l in the An intermittent warning sounds and the Distronic brakes your vehicle with a maxi-
instrument cluster comes on distance warning lamp l in the instru- mum deceleration of 6.5 ft/s2 (2 m/s2). This
(컄 page 27). ment cluster is illuminated if the Distronic corresponds to about 20% of the maximum
앫 An intermittent warning sounds. system calculates that the distance to the deceleration of your vehicle.
vehicle ahead and your vehicle’s current Distronic brakes the vehicle in an effort to
왘 Immediately apply the brake to avoid a
speed indicate that Distronic will not be ca- restore the preset distance or to maintain
collision.
pable of slowing the vehicle sufficiently to the set speed.
Under no circumstances should the maintain the preset following distance,
driver await the intermittent warning which creates a danger of a collision. Keep driver’s foot area clear at all times, in-
sound before braking. See the follow- cluding the area under the brake pedal. Ob-
Immediately brake the vehicle to increase jects stored in this area may impair pedal
ing warning note.
your distance to the preceding vehicle. The movement which could interfere with the
The intermittent warning sound ceases warning sound is intended as a final caution braking ability of the Distronic system.
and the distance warning lamp l in which you should intercede with your own
goes out when the necessary distance braking inputs to avoid a potentially danger- Do not place your foot under the brake pedal
to the vehicle ahead is again estab- ous situation. Do not wait for the operation – your foot could become caught.
lished. of the warning signal to intercede with your
own braking. This will result in potentially
dangerous emergency braking which will
not always result in an impact being avoid-
ed.
Tailgating increases the risk of an accident.
254
Controls in detail
Driving systems
DISTRONIC menu in the control system Distronic activated Distronic deactivated

Use the DISTRONIC menu to display the When you turn Distronic on, you will see When Distronic is deactivated, you will see
current settings for your Distronic system. the set speed in the multifunction display the standard Distronic display in the multi-
The information shown in the multifunction for about 5 seconds. When Distronic is function display.
display depends on whether the Distronic activated, the following display appears in
system is activated or deactivated. the multifunction display.
i For activating or deactivating the Distronic
system, see “Activating Distronic” (컄 page 256)
or, see “Deactivating Distronic” (컄 page 259).
For activating or deactivating the Distance warn-
ing function, see “Distance warning function*” 1 Preceding vehicle, if detected
(컄 page 179). 2 Actual distance to the preceding vehi-
왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly 1 Distronic activated cle
until you see one of the following two 2 Set vehicle speed 3 Preset distance threshold to the pre-
displays in the multifunction display. ceding vehicle
4 Your vehicle
Cruise control lever

The Distronic system is operated by means
of the cruise control lever.
The cruise control lever is the uppermost
lever on the left-hand side of the steering
column.
255
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Activating Distronic Setting the current speed

You can activate Distronic when the vehi- 왘 Accelerate or decelerate to the desired
cle speed is between 20 mph (30 km/h) speed.
and 110 mph (180 km/h).
왘 Briefly lift the cruise control lever in
When Distronic is activated the multifunc- direction of arrow 1 or depress in
tion display will show a message such as direction of arrow 2 (컄 page 255).
DISTRONIC 55 mph.
Distronic is activated and the current
If Distronic has not been activated after speed is set.
pressing the cruise control lever, you will
왘 Remove your foot from the accelerator
1 Setting current or higher speed see the message DISTRONIC Off in the
pedal.
Adjustment in 1 mph increments (to multifunction display.
the resistance point) or 5 mph
In the following cases you cannot activate i If you do not take your foot off of the accel-
increments (past the resistance point) erator pedal and continue to accelerate past the
Distronic: set speed, the following message will appear in
(Canada: 1 km/h or 10 km/h)
2 Setting current or lower speed 앫 up to 2 minutes after starting the the multifunction display:
Adjustment in 1 mph increments (to engine DISTRONIC Override
the resistance point) or 5 mph 앫 when you brake The distance to a slower moving vehicle in front
increments (past the resistance point) of you will not be set. Your vehicle speed will
(Canada: 1 km/h or 10 km/h) 앫 when you have set the parking brake then be determined only by the accelerator
3 Deactivating Distronic pedal position.
앫 when the automatic transmission is set
4 Activating Distronic or resuming to last to position P, R, or N
set speed
앫 if the ESP® is switched off
앫 if the ESP® has switched off due to a
malfunction
256
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Setting a higher speed Adjustment in 5 mph 왘 Briefly lift the cruise control lever up
(Canada: 10 km/h) increments past the resistance point in direction of
You can increase the set speed in two
ways.
Warning! G 왘 Release the cruise control lever.
Adjustment in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h)
The vehicle speed increases in incre-
increments You can increase the vehicle speed in 5 mph
(Canada 10 km/h) increments. When using
i The set value is increased in 1 mph this feature, keep in mind that it may take a i The new speed is set and the vehicle will
(Canada: 1 km/h) increments each time you lift
brief moment until the vehicle has reached accelerate. Keep in mind that it may take a brief
the cruise control lever up to the resistance
the set speed. moment until the vehicle has reached the set
point.
speed.
왘 Briefly lift the cruise control lever up to Increase the vehicle speed to a value that
the resistance point in direction of the prevailing road conditions permit. Other-
arrow 1 (컄 page 255). wise, sudden and unexpected acceleration
of the vehicle could cause an accident
왘 Release the cruise control lever. and/or serious injury to you and others.
ments of 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h). i The set value is increased in 5 mph
(Canada: 10 km/h) increments each time you lift
the cruise control lever up past the resistance
point.
257
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Setting a lower speed Adjustment in 5 mph 왘 Briefly press the cruise control lever
(Canada: 10 km/h) increments down past the resistance point in direc-
You can reduce the set speed in two ways.
tion of arrow 2 (컄 page 255).
i When you use the cruise control lever to Warning! G 왘 Release the cruise control lever.
decelerate, the brake system will automatically
brake the vehicle if the engine’s braking power The vehicle set speed decreases in
does not brake the vehicle sufficiently. You can decrease the vehicle speed in
increments of 5 mph
5 mph (Canada 10 km/h) increments. When
(Canada: 10 km/h).
Adjustment in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h) using this feature, keep in mind that it may
increments take a brief moment until the vehicle has i The new speed is set and the vehicle will
reached the set speed. decelerate. Keep in mind that it may take a brief
i The set value is decreased in 1 mph Decelerate the vehicle speed to a value that
moment until the vehicle has reached the set
(Canada: 1 km/h) increments each time you speed.
press the cruise control lever down to the resis- the prevailing road conditions permit. Other-
tance point. wise, sudden and unexpected deceleration
of the vehicle could cause an accident
왘 Briefly press the cruise control lever
down to the resistance point in direc-
왘 Release the cruise control lever.
i The set speed value is decreased in 5 mph
(Canada: 10 km/h) increments each time you
The vehicle speed decreases in incre- press the cruise control lever down past the
ments of 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h). resistance point.
258
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Setting to last stored speed Deactivating Distronic i The Distronic switches off automatically
(“Resume” function) when
There are several ways to deactivate the
Distronic system: 앫 you step on the brake pedal
Warning! G 왘 Step on the brake pedal. 앫 you depress the parking brake pedal
In this case, the Distronic speed segments in the
The set speed stored in memory should only or speedometer (컄 page 253) will go out.
be set again if prevailing road conditions 왘 Briefly tip the cruise control lever in 앫 the vehicle speed falls below 20 mph
permit. Possible acceleration or decelera- direction of arrow 3 (컄 page 256). (30 km/h)
tion differences arising from returning to the
Distronic will be deactivated. The last set 앫 the ESP® is in operation
preset speed could cause an accident
speed will be stored in memory. 앫 the ESP® is switched off with the ESP®
switch (컄 page 99)
i The following message appears in the multi- 앫 the ESP® has switched off due to a
왘 Briefly pull the cruise control lever in function display for approximately 5 seconds:
malfunction (컄 page 419)
direction of arrow 4 (컄 page 255). DISTRONIC Off.
앫 you set the automatic transmission to N
The last stored set speed is deleted when the
The Distronic resumes to the last set engine is turned off.
while driving
speed. The Distronic speed segments in the
왘 Remove your foot from the accelerator speedometer (컄 page 253) will go out and an
acoustic warning will sound.
pedal.
The last set speed or, if no speed is stored,
the current set speed appears in the
5 seconds.
259
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Setting the following distance in

Warning! G Distronic
Distronic switches off and releases the You can set the specified following
brakes when the vehicle decelerates below distance for Distronic by varying the time
the minimum speed of 20 mph (30 km/h) setting between 1.0 and 2.0 seconds. Us-
by operation of the system. At that time the ing this time setting and the current speed
driver must apply the brakes in order to of your vehicle, Distronic calculates and
reduce vehicle speed further or bring it to a sets the required following distance to the
stop. preceding vehicle. The set distance will be
shown in the multifunction display
(컄 page 255). 1 Distance setting switch
! Setting the automatic transmission to N 2 To decrease distance
while driving cancels the Distronic. However, the The distance setting switch for the time 3 To increase distance
automatic transmission should not be set to N setting is located on the cruise control le-
while driving except to coast when the vehicle is ver on the left-hand side of the steering Increasing distance
in danger of skidding (e.g. on icy roads). column.
Increasing the distance setting tells
i Depressing the accelerator pedal does not Distronic to maintain a greater following
deactivate the Distronic. After a brief accelera- Warning! G distance to the preceding vehicle.
tion (e.g. for passing), the Distronic will resume
the last set speed. It is up to the driver to exercise discretion to 왘 Turn distance setting switch 1 in
select the appropriate setting given road direction of arrow 3.
conditions, traffic, driver’s preferred driving
style and applicable laws and driving recom-
mendations for safe following distance.
260
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Decreasing distance The most likely cause for a malfunctioning

This means that:
system is a dirty sensor (located behind
Decreasing the distance setting tells 앫 Your vehicle can pass another vehicle the hood grille), especially at times of snow
Distronic to maintain a smaller following after you have changed lanes. and ice or heavy rain. In such a case,
distance to the preceding vehicle.
앫 While in a sharp turn or if the preceding Distronic will switch off, and the message
왘 Turn distance setting switch 1 in vehicle is in a sharp turn, Distronic could DISTRONIC currently unavailable – See
direction of arrow 2. lose sight of the preceding vehicle. Your Operator’s Manual appears in the multi-
vehicle could then accelerate to the function display.
Driving with Distronic previously selected speed.
For cleaning and care of the Distronic sen-
Distronic regulates only the distance be-
This section describes a number of driving sor, see “Cleaning the Distronic* system
tween your vehicle and those directly ahead
situations where special precaution is re- sensor cover” (컄 page 408).
of it, but does not register stationary objects
quired on the part of the driver. Be pre-
pared to brake in such situations. Braking in the road, e.g.: i If the message DISTRONIC available
앫 a stopped vehicle in a traffic jam again appears during driving the dirt (e.g.
will deactivate the Distronic system.
slush) has dissolved; Distronic works again, if
앫 a disabled vehicle you reactivate it (컄 page 256).
Warning! G 앫 an oncoming vehicle
The driver must always be alert, observe all
Distronic works to maintain the speed se- traffic and intercede as required by means
lected by the driver unless a moving obsta- of steering or braking the vehicle.
cle proceeding directly ahead of it in the
same travel direction is detected (e.g. fol-
lowing another vehicle ahead of you at your Warning! G
set distance).
Distronic should not be used in snowy or icy
road conditions.
261
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Turns and bends Offset driving Lane changing
In turns or bends, Distronic may not detect A vehicle traveling in your lane but offset Distronic has not yet detected the vehicle
a moving vehicle in front, or it may detect from your direct line of travel may not be changing lanes. There will be insufficient
one too soon. This may cause your vehicle detected by Distronic. There will be insuffi- distance to the lane-changing vehicle.
to brake late or unexpectedly. cient distance to the vehicle ahead.
262
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Narrow vehicles Distance warning function*

Warning! G
When Distronic* is deactivated, this
function will continue to warn you when If the distance warning lamp l in the in-
recognizing a stationary obstacle or a strument cluster comes on while driving
slower vehicle moving in your vehicle’s and/or an intermittent warning sounds,
path and the danger of a collision exists: immediate attention on the part of the driver
is required. As required by the traffic
앫 The distance warning lamp l in the
situation, apply the brakes and navigate
instrument cluster comes on.
around a possible obstacle. However, do not
앫 An intermittent warning will sound if drive by relying on the distance warning
Because of their narrow profile, the vehi- necessary. function, as this will result in an emergency
cles traveling near the outer edges of the If these warnings are issued, you must braking application. This will not always
lane have not yet been detected by brake manually to maintain a safe distance enable you to avoid a collision, especially
Distronic. There will be insufficient and avoid a collision with the preceding when traveling on varying road surface
distance to the vehicles ahead. vehicle. conditions and with varying driver reaction.
Complex driving situations are not always
When pressing the brake pedal, the warn-
fully recognized by the distance warning
ing sound ceases. The warning sound will
function. This could result in wrong or miss-
also cease when the distance to the
ing distance warnings.
preceding vehicle is sufficient again with-
out applying the brakes. In this case, the
distance warning lamp will also go out. 왘 Switch on the distance warning
function in the control system
(컄 page 179).
263
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Downhill Speed Regulation (DSR) For more information, see “Off-road driv- i Whenever DSR is switched on, DSR will use
ing” (컄 page 333). the programmed default speed to regulate the
vehicle’s speed. The default speed programmed
Warning! G The DSR is an aid for driving downhill. DSR
regulates your vehicle’s speed when driv-
at the factory is 4 mph (Canada: 6 km/h). The
default speed can be reprogrammed using the
ing downhill to the value set in the control control system (컄 page 179). The next time DSR
Downhill Speed Regulation is a convenience
system (컄 page 179). The steeper the is switched on, DSR will use the newly pro-
system designed to assist the driver during
downhill gradient is, the greater the brake grammed default speed to regulate the vehicle’s
vehicle operation. The system must be set speed.
to be appropriate for the topographical and
application. On flat road surfaces, DSR
brakes only slightly or not at all. Once DSR is switched on, you can adjust the set
weather conditions encountered which can
speed using the cruise control lever
change quickly. The driver is and must DSR regulates the vehicle’s speed in auto- (컄 page 255). Keep in mind that adjusting the
remain at all times responsible for the vehi- matic transmission positions D, or R. set speed using the cruise control lever with DSR
cle speed and for safe brake operation. switched on will not change the programmed
i In addition, make use of the engine’s braking default speed. If DSR is switched off and then
Depending on the programmed speed effect by shifting the automatic transmission switched on again, DSR will use the programmed
(컄 page 179), actual vehicle speed and gra- into a lower gear. default speed.
dient, switching on the DSR while driving
You can drive slower or faster than the set Depending on the road surface and level of
can cause the vehicle to slow down rapidly
speed at any time by braking the vehicle or downhill grade, the DSR may not be able to
and you may hear a sound which is caused maintain the set speed. To maintain the set
depressing the accelerator pedal.
by the activation of the vehicle’s brake sys- speed, apply the brakes if necessary.
tem through the DSR. Sudden and unex-
pected deceleration can result in loss of
vehicle control, causing an accident and/or
serious personal injury to you and others.
Do not switch on the DSR in a circumstance
where rapid deceleration could result in a
loss of vehicle control.
264
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Switching the Downhill Speed Switching Downhill Speed Regulation on

Regulation on/off Warning! G
i The DSR can only be switched on if the vehi-
The switch is located in the lower part of If the accelerator pedal is depressed while cle speed is below 18 mph (Canada: 30 km/h).
the center console. the Downhill Speed Regulation is activated, 왘 Press DSR switch 1 (컄 page 265).
the vehicle can drive faster than the pro-
The indicator lamp 2 comes on.
grammed set speed. You should therefore
drive downhill with particular caution as it The message DSR and the set speed ap-
could otherwise lead to an accident and/or pear in the multifunction display.
serious injury to you or others. Keep in mind
that as soon as you remove the foot from
the accelerator pedal with the DSR switched
on, the DSR will start regulating the vehicle’s
speed including use of brakes if required.
Depending on the programmed set speed,
1 DSR on/off actual vehicle speed and gradient, the DSR
2 Indicator lamp can cause the vehicle to slow down rapidly.
i If the DSR is switched on at a speed above
18 mph (Canada: 30 km/h), the message DSR
Sudden and unexpected deceleration can Max. speed 18 mph (Canada: 30 km/h) ap-
result in loss of vehicle control, causing an pears in the multifunction display.
accident and/or serious personal injury to
you and others.
For information on how to program the set
speed while driving, see “Adjusting Down-
hill Speed Regulation speed with DSR
switched on” (컄 page 266).
265
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Switching Downhill Speed Regulation off Adjusting Downhill Speed Regulation You can increase or reduce the set speed
speed with DSR switched on in two ways.
왘 Press DSR switch 1 (컄 page 265).
With the DSR switched on (컄 page 265),
The indicator lamp 2 goes out. Adjustment in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h)
the speed setting can be changed using
The message DSR Off appears in the increments
the cruise control lever.
multifunction display. i The set value is increased or decreased in
The cruise control lever is the uppermost
1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h) increments each time
i At a speed above approximately 21 mph lever on the left-hand side of the steering
you lift or depress the cruise control lever to the
(Canada approx.: 35 km/h), the DSR is automat- column.
ically switched off. The message DSR Off resistance point.
appears in the multifunction display and an Increase set speed:
acoustic signal sounds. For information on how
to switch DSR on again, see “Switching Downhill 왘 Briefly lift the cruise control lever up to
Speed Regulation on” (컄 page 265). the resistance point in direction of
왘 Release the cruise control lever.
Cruise control lever

1 Increase set speed
2 Reduce set speed
You can change the set speed between
3-10 mph (Canada: 4-18 km/h).
266
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Reduce set speed: Adjustment in 5 mph 왘 Release the cruise control lever.
(Canada: 10 km/h) increments
왘 Briefly press the cruise control lever The vehicle speed decreases in incre-
down to the resistance point in direc- i The set value is increased or decreased in ments of 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h).
tion of arrow 2 (컄 page 266). 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h) increments each time
Each time the set speed is changed,
you lift or depress the cruise control lever past
왘 Release the cruise control lever. DSR will appear in the multifunction dis-
the resistance point.
play and the newly set speed is shown.
The vehicle speed decreases in incre- Increase set speed:
ments of 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h). i The new speed is set and the vehicle will
왘 Briefly lift the cruise control lever up accelerate or decelerate. Keep in mind that it
Each time the set speed is changed, past the resistance point in direction of may take a brief moment until the vehicle has
DSR will appear in the multifunction dis- arrow 1 (컄 page 266). reached the new set speed.
play and the changed set speed is
shown. 왘 Release the cruise control lever. i The set speed is canceled when DSR is
switched off. If DSR is switched on again, DSR
i The set speed is canceled when DSR is will use the programmed default speed
switched off. If DSR is switched on again, DSR ments of 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h). (컄 page 179).
will use the programmed default speed Reduce set speed:
(컄 page 179).
왘 Briefly press the cruise control lever
down past the resistance point in direc-
267
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Off-road driving program The switch is located on the lower part of Switching Off-road driving program on
the center console.
왘 Press switch 1 (컄 page 268).
The off-road driving program is designed to
assist the driver when driving off-road in i In the ML 63 AMG, the off-road driving Indicator lamp 2 comes on. The
program is switched on and off via the control
terrain and crossing water. The off-road symbol y appears in the lower
system (컄 page 159).
driving program adjusts the engine power multifunction display.
and shifting of the automatic transmission
to be more suitable for the off-road use of
the vehicle. In addition, the ABS, ESP®, and
4-ETS designed for off-road use are
automatically activated.
In the following situations you should
switch to the off-road driving program:
Switching Off-road driving program off
앫 during off-road driving
왘 Press switch 1 again.
앫 when crossing water (컄 page 338)
1 Switch for off-road driving program Indicator lamp 2 goes out. The
앫 when towing up or down on steep 2 Indicator lamp symbol y disappears.
gradients
268
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Air suspension package* i From the Highway/High-speed level, the Adaptive Damping System (ADS)*
vehicle is lowered to the ADS Sport level approx.
The system consists of two components. 20 seconds after it is locked. The fine tuning of the damping and suspen-
The vehicle level control* regulates the From the raised level, the vehicle is not lowered sion is dependent on:
ride height of the vehicle. The Adaptive after it is locked. 앫 your driving style
Damping System (ADS)* optimizes your When the engine is started, the previously se-
vehicle’s suspension tuning. 앫 road surface conditions
lected setting, e.g. ADS COMF, is selected again.
앫 Suspension tuning: Adaptive Damping 앫 your personal ADS settings
! Be sure to observe this vehicle’s differing
System (ADS)* (컄 page 269) values for ground clearance and vehicle height in 앫 your personal vehicle level settings
앫 Vehicle level control* (컄 page 270) comparison to standard vehicles. You could oth-
erwise damage the vehicle. The values for The ADS switch is located on the upper
part of the center console.
ML 63 AMG 앫 opening the tailgate (컄 page 119)
앫 driving off-road (컄 page 333)
i The Air suspension package is part of the
standard equipment range. Due to the vehicle’s 앫 the vehicle’s main dimensions can be found
sportier suspension tuning, in comparison with in the “Technical data” section (컄 page 541)
standard vehicles, the level positions in the ADS
settings as well as the speed thresholds for rais-
ing and lowering the vehicle have been modified.
1 ADS switch
2 Indicator lamp for SPORT setting
3 Indicator lamp for COMF setting
269
Controls in detail
Driving systems
The following settings are available: Vehicle level control* The parked vehicle begins adjusting to the
set vehicle level as soon the doors and tail-
앫 AUTO (for normal driving situations)
The vehicle level control automatically gate are
Indicator lamps 2 and 3 are off.
regulates the ride height to
앫 unlocked
앫 SPORT (for sporty driving)
앫 reduce fuel consumption
Indicator lamp 2 comes on. or
With the ADS SPORT setting, the vehi- 앫 improve driving stability by lowering
앫 opened or closed with the vehicle
cle is lowered approximately 0.6 in the center of gravity
unlocked
(15 mm). The vehicle automatically regulates its ride
ML 63 AMG: In order to operate the vehicle level control
height based on the set vehicle height and
The vehicle is lowered approximately switch (컄 page 271), however, the engine
the current speed:
0.3 in (8 mm). must be running.
앫 As your driving speed increases, the ve-
앫 COMF (for comfort driving) hicle is lowered by increments until it
Indicator lamp 3 comes on. reaches high-speed level.
Warning! G
ML 63 AMG:
The vehicle is raised approximately 앫 If you are driving with the ADS setting Make sure that no one is near the wheel
0.28 in (7 mm). COMF or AUTO, the vehicle is raised housing or under the vehicle when you lower
back to highway level as your driving the vehicle while it is standing still. Limbs
왘 Start the engine (컄 page 39). speed decreases. could become wedged into or under the ve-
왘 Press ADS switch 1 repeatedly until 앫 You can select the high-speed level via hicle.
the desired suspension tuning is the ADS setting SPORT. In ADS Sport, For safety reasons, the vehicle can only be
reached. the vehicle is lowered directly to lowered with all doors and the tailgate
i The setting is stored when you turn off the high-speed level as your driving speed closed. Lowering is interrupted if a door or
engine. increases. the tailgate is opened and will continue after
the door is closed again.
270
Controls in detail
Driving systems
! Keep in mind that in rough or uneven ter- Setting the vehicle level
Warning! G rain, adjusting the vehicle to a lower level may
The switch is located on the lower part of
cause the vehicle underbody to come in contact
Please be aware that by raising the vehicle with the ground and result in damage to the vehi- the center console.
level, the center of gravity also rises. There- cle underbody. Always make sure the vehicle has
fore, always ensure that the vehicle level is sufficient ground clearance before adjusting it to
a lower level.
as low as possible. With higher ride height
the ESP® may activate earlier in certain ! Before jacking up the vehicle with equip-
situations. ment that lifts one or more of the wheels com-
pletely off of the ground, remove the SmartKey
Adapt your speed and driving to possible
from the starter switch.
changed driving behavior of the vehicle after
changing the vehicle level. The ESP® cannot ! Please also note the information in the
prevent accidents, including those resulting section on towing (컄 page 518).
from excessive speed. The ESP® cannot pre- For information on off-road driving, see 1 Vehicle level switch
vent the natural laws of physics from acting “Off-road driving” (컄 page 333). 2 Indicator lamp
on the vehicle.
271
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Basic settings (all models, except The following is the approximate change in Basic settings (ML 63 AMG only)
ML 63 AMG) ride height for each of the level settings:
The following vehicle chassis ride heights
The following vehicle chassis ride heights can be selected using the vehicle level
Level Ride height
can be selected using the vehicle level switch in the center console:
switch in the center console: Raised + 3.1 in (80 mm)
Highway +/- 0 in (0 mm) Level Driving situation
Level Driving situation Raised For off-road driving or driv-
High-speed - 0.6 in (-15 mm)
Raised For off-road driving or driving in rough terrain. The in-
ing in rough terrain. The indicator lamp is on.
dicator lamp is on. i Depending on the ADS setting
(컄 page 269), the vehicle will be lowered to the Highway For driving on paved roads
Highway For driving on paved roads high-speed level when traveling at higher in fair or better condition.
in fair or better condition. speeds. At speeds below 40 mph (64 km/h) at The indicator lamp is off.
The indicator lamp is off. the latest, it will be returned to the highway level.
i The high-speed level is not available if tow- i The third available level is the high-speed
i The third available level is the high-speed ing a trailer. For more information on towing a level that is set automatically.
level that is set automatically. trailer, see “Trailer towing” (컄 page 342).
How much the vehicle is lowered or raised
depends on the ADS setting selected. At
the raised level, the vehicle is 2.9 in
(73 mm) higher than at the Highway level
with ADS AUTO.
272
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Raised level The following message appears in the mul- Highway level
tifunction display while the level is being
Only select the raised level if appropriate
set: ! Keep in mind that in rough or uneven roads,
for the driving situation encountered. adjusting the vehicle to a lower level may cause
Otherwise: the vehicle underbody to come in contact with
the road and result in damage to the vehicle un-
앫 Fuel consumption may increase. derbody. Always make sure the vehicle has suffi-
앫 Handling characteristics of the vehicle cient ground clearance before adjusting it to a
lower level.
may be unfavorable.
i You can select the raised level at speeds up
to 40 mph (64 km/h). At higher speeds, the i The message can be cleared by pressing If indicator lamp 2 (컄 page 271) is on.
message n Level selection not the è ÿ k or button j on the
왘 Press switch 1 (컄 page 271).
permitted appears in the multifunction dis- multifunction steering wheel.
play. Indicator lamp 2 flashes. The vehicle
When the raised level is reached, indicator
왘 Start the engine (컄 page 40). lamp 2 (컄 page 271) comes on continu- adjusts to the highway level.
If indicator lamp 2 (컄 page 271) is off. ously and the following message appears The following message appears in the
in the multifunction display for 5 seconds: multifunction display while the level is
왘 Press switch 1 (컄 page 271). being set:
Indicator lamp 2 flashes. The vehicle
adjusts to the raised level.
컄컄
273
Controls in detail
Driving systems
컄컄 i The message can be cleared by pressing Parktronic system*

The operational function of the Parktronic
the è ÿ k or button j on the
system can be affected by dirty sensors,
multifunction steering wheel.
When the highway level is reached, indica- Warning! G especially at times of snow and ice. See
“Cleaning the Parktronic system sensors”
tor lamp 2 (컄 page 271) goes out. and (컄 page 408).
Parktronic is a supplemental system. It is
the following message appears in the mul-
not intended to, nor does it replace, the Interference caused by other ultrasonic
tifunction display for 5 seconds:
need for extreme care. The responsibility signals (e.g. working jackhammers, car
during parking and other critical maneuvers wash, or the air brakes of trucks) can cause
always rests with the driver. the system to send erratic indications, and
should be taken into consideration.
Special attention must be paid to objects
with smooth surfaces or low silhouettes
(e.g. trailer couplings, painted posts, or road
curbs). Such objects may not be detected by Warning! G
i The vehicle is lowered automatically to the the system and can damage the vehicle.
highway level if: Make sure no persons or animals are in the
앫 the vehicle speed is above 55 mph area in which you are maneuvering. You
(88 km/h) could otherwise injure them.
앫 the speed stays between 40 mph (64 km/h)
and 55 mph (88 km/h) for approximately
20 seconds
274
Controls in detail
Driving systems
The Parktronic system is an electronic The Parktronic system also deactivates Range of the sensors
parking aid and designed to assist the when you set the automatic transmission
To function properly, the sensors must be
driver during parking maneuvers. It visually to position P or depress the parking brake
free of dirt, ice, snow and slush. Clean the
and audibly indicates the relative distance pedal.
sensors regularly, being careful not to
between the vehicle and an obstacle.
The Parktronic system monitors the sur- scratch or damaging the sensors, see
The Parktronic system is automatically roundings of your vehicle with six sensors “Cleaning the Parktronic* system sensors”
activated when you in the front bumper and four sensors in the (컄 page 408).
rear bumper.
앫 switch on the ignition or start the ! During parking maneuvers, pay special
engine attention to objects located above or below the
height of the sensors (e.g. planters or trailer
and hitches). The Parktronic system will not detect
앫 release the parking brake such objects at close range and damage to your
vehicle or the object may result.
and
Ultrasonic signals from outside sources (e.g.
앫 set the automatic transmission to working jackhammers, car wash or the air brakes
position D, R, or N of trucks) may impair the operation of the
Parktronic system.
The Parktronic system deactivates at
vehicle speeds exceeding approximately
11 mph (18 km/h). At lower vehicle 1 Sensors in the front bumper
speeds the Parktronic system turns on
again.
275
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Front sensors Warning indicators

Visual signals indicate to the driver the rel-
Center approx. 40 in (100 cm)
ative distance between the sensors and an
Corners approx. 24 in (60 cm) obstacle. The warning indicator for the
front area is located above the center air
Rear sensors vents in the dashboard. The warning indi-
cator for the rear area is located in the rear
Center approx. 48 in (120 cm) passenger compartment under the roof.
Corners approx. 32 in (80 cm)
Minimum distance
Center approx. 8 in (20 cm)

Corners approx. 6 in (15 cm)
If the system detects an obstacle in this

range, all the distance warning segments
illuminate and you hear a warning signal. If Front area warning indicator
the obstacle is closer than the minimum
1 Left side of the vehicle
distance, the actual distance may no
2 Right side of the vehicle
longer be indicated by the system.
3 Readiness indicators
276
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Each warning indicator is divided into five As your vehicle approaches an object, one Switching the Parktronic system*
yellow and two red distance segments for or more distance segments will illuminate, on/off
either side of the vehicle. The Parktronic depending on the distance. When the red
You can switch off the Parktronic system
system is operational when the readiness distance segment illuminates, you have
manually.
indicators 3 are illuminated. reached the minimum distance.
The Parktronic switch is located in the
The current transmission position deter- 앫 Front area: An intermittent acoustic upper part of the center console.
mines which warning indicator will be acti- warning lasting a maximum of
vated. 2 seconds will sound as the first red
distance segment illuminates and a
Transmission Warning indicator constant acoustic warning lasting a
position maximum of 2 seconds will sound for
D Front area activated the second red distance segment. The
signal is canceled when the automatic
R or N Front and rear area
transmission is set to position P, or the
activated
parking brake is set.
P Neither activated
앫 Rear area: An intermittent acoustic
warning lasting a maximum of 1 Parktronic switch
2 seconds will sound as the first red 2 Indicator lamp
distance segment illuminates and a
constant acoustic warning lasting a
maximum of 2 seconds will sound for
the second red distance segment. The
signal is canceled when the automatic
transmission is set to position D, P, or
the parking brake is set.
277
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Switching off Parktronic system* malfunction 왘 Switch off the ignition (컄 page 40).
왘 Press Parktronic switch 1. If only the red distance segments illumi- 왘 Clean the Parktronic system sensors
nate and an acoustic warning sounds, (컄 page 408).
Indicator lamp 2 comes on.
there is a malfunction in the Parktronic
system. The Parktronic system will auto-
Switching on
matically switch off after 20 seconds and or
왘 Press Parktronic switch 1 once more. the indicator lamp in the Parktronic switch 왘 Check the Parktronic system operation
Indicator lamp 2 goes out. comes on. at another location to rule out interfer-
왘 Have the Parktronic system checked ence from outside radio or ultrasonic
i The Parktronic system switches on signals.
automatically when you switch on the ignition by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
(컄 page 40). Truck Center as soon as possible.
Vehicles with original equipment Mercedes-Benz If only the red distance segments illumi-
Trailer Hitch Kit: nate and no acoustic warning sounds, the
The rear Parktronic sensor will automatically Parktronic system sensors are dirty (e.g.
disengage when towing a trailer.
slush, snow or ice) or there is an interfer-
ence from other radio or ultrasonic signals
(e.g. working jackhammers, car wash or
the air brakes of trucks). The Parktronic
system will automatically switch off after
20 seconds and the indicator lamp in the
Parktronic switch comes on.
278
Controls in detail
Driving systems
Rear view camera*

Warning! G 앫 there is a sudden change in tempera-
ture, e.g. if you drive into a heated ga-
rage from the cold (lens condensation)
Warning! G Make sure that no persons or animals are in
or near the area in which you are 앫 the camera lens is dirty or covered
The rear view camera is only an aid and may parking/maneuvering. Otherwise, they 앫 the rear of your vehicle is damaged
display obstacles from a distorted perspec- could be injured. In this case, have the position and set-
tive or inaccurately, or may not display ob- ting of the camera checked by a quali-
stacles at all. The rear view camera does not fied specialist workshop.
relieve you of the responsibility to be cau- Warning! G Mercedes-Benz recommends that you
tious, take care and pay careful attention. visit a Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
The rear view camera may not show objects The rear view camera either will not function Center for this purpose.
which are: or will not function to its full capability if: Do not use the rear view camera in these sit-
앫 very close to the rear bumper 앫 the tailgate is open uations. Otherwise you could injure yourself
or others and/or damage property including
앫 under the rear bumper 앫 it is raining very hard, snowing or foggy
your vehicle while parking/maneuvering.
앫 above the tailgate handle 앫 it is night or you are parking/maneuver-
You are responsible for safety at all times ing your vehicle in an area where it is
very dark
and must continue to pay attention to the
immediate surroundings when parking and 앫 the camera is exposed to a very bright
maneuvering. This includes the area behind, white light
in front of and beside the vehicle. Otherwise 앫 the immediate surroundings are illumi-
you could endanger yourself or others. nated with fluorescent light (the display
may flicker)
279
Controls in detail
Driving systems
The rear view camera is an optical parking Switching the rear view camera on and
aid. It shows you the area behind the vehi- off
cle in the COMAND system display when
reverse gear R is engaged, for example
during parallel parking. 왘 Shift the automatic transmission in
position R (컄 page 187).
The rear view camera is located near the
tailgate handle. The area behind the vehicle appears in
the COMAND system display.
i The area behind the vehicle is shown in the
COMAND system display as a mirror image, like
in the rear view mirror.
i The image from the rear view camera will no

longer be displayed if you select another
function on the COMAND system while reverse
gear R is engaged. To display the image again,
disengage and reengage reverse gear R.
왘 Shift the automatic transmission
1 Rear view camera
into P, N or D to switch off the rear
view camera.
280
Controls in detail
Loading
왔 Loading
Carriers* ! Load the carriers* in such a way that the Loading instructions
vehicle cannot be damaged while driving.
Make sure
Warning! G 앫 the tailgate can be completely opened
Warning! G
Only use carriers* when the basic carrier 앫 the tilt/sliding sunroof can be completely Always fasten items being carried as secure-
bars* have been completely mounted. The raised at the rear ly as possible using cargo tie-down rings and
left and right roof rails are only stabilized by fastening materials appropriate for the
means of the basic carrier bars* mounted. weight and size of the load.
Follow the manufacturer’s installation In an accident, during hard braking or sud-
instructions. Otherwise, an improperly at- den maneuvers, loose items will be thrown
tached carrier system or its load could be- around inside the vehicle, and can cause in-
come detached from the vehicle. jury to vehicle occupants unless the items
Do not exceed the maximum roof load of are securely fastened in the vehicle.
220 lb (100 kg). To help avoid personal injury during a colli-
Take into consideration that when the roof is sion or sudden maneuver, always use tie
loaded, the handling characteristics are dif- down rings, and if so equipped, always use
Roof rails
ferent from those when operating the vehi- partition net* when transporting cargo.
For further information, contact your
cles without a roof loaded. Never drive vehicle with the tailgate open.
Deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may
Center.
enter vehicle interior resulting in uncon-
sciousness and death.
281
Controls in detail
Loading
cated on the certification label which can For additional safety when transporting
be found on the driver’s door B-pillar cargo while the rear seats are unoccupied,
(컄 page 530). fasten the outer seat belts crosswise into
the opposite side buckles.
For more information, see “Tire and Load-
ing Information” (컄 page 369).
The handling characteristics of a fully load-
ed vehicle depend greatly on the load dis-
tribution. It is therefore recommended to
load the vehicle according to the illustra-
Load distribution tions shown, with the heaviest items being
placed towards the front of the vehicle.
The gross vehicle weight which is the
weight of the vehicle including fuel, tools, Please pay attention to and comply with
spare wheel, installed accessories, pas- the following instructions when loading the
sengers and luggage/cargo must never vehicle and transporting cargo: i The cargo compartment is the preferred
exceed the load limit and Gross Vehicle place to carry objects. The expanded cargo com-
앫 Always place items being carried partment (컄 page 284) should only be used for
Weight Rating (GVWR) for your vehicle as against front or rear seat backrests, items which do not fit in the cargo compartment
specified on the placard located on the and fasten them as securely as possi- alone.
driver’s door B-pillar (컄 page 530). In addi- ble.
tion, the load must be distributed in such a
way so that the weight on each axle never 앫 The heaviest portion of the cargo
exceeds the Gross Axle Weight Rating should always be kept as low as possi-
(GAWR) for the front and rear axle. The ble against front or rear seat backrests.
GVWR and GAWR for your vehicle are indi-
282
Controls in detail
Loading
Cargo tie-down rings Cargo compartment Behind front seats

Four cargo tie-down rings are located in Two cargo tie-down rings are located in the
Your vehicle is equipped with six cargo
the cargo compartment. footwell behind the driver’s and passenger
tie-down rings.
seat.
Carefully secure cargo by applying even
load on all rings with rope of sufficient
strength to hold down the cargo.
i While the partition net* (컄 page 287) will
help protect you from smaller objects, it cannot
prevent the movement of large, heavier objects
into the passenger compartment in an accident,
during hard braking or sudden maneuvers. Such
items must be properly secured using the cargo
tie-down rings in the cargo compartment floor.
1 Cargo tie-down ring
1 Cargo tie-down ring
283
Controls in detail
Loading
Hooks Expanding cargo compartment

Warning! G
Four hooks are located on the rear com- You can separately fold the left and right
partment trim panels, two on each side. rear seat backrests to expand the cargo Never drive the vehicle with the tailgate
compartment. open. Deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases
may enter vehicle interior resulting in un-
G
consciousness and death.
Warning!
When expanding the cargo compartment, Folding the rear seat backrest forward
always fully fold the corresponding seats
! Always release the seat cushion and fold it
and, if so equipped, always use the partition up before folding the seat backrest forward. The
net* (컄 page 287) when transporting cargo. covering on the seat backrest may otherwise be
Unless you are transporting cargo, the back- damaged.
rests must remain properly locked in the up- When the seat backrest are folded forward, the
1 Hook front seats may not be moved to the rearmost
right position.
Use the hooks to secure light weight items position. Otherwise you could damage the front
In an accident, during hard braking or sud- and second-row seats.
only. The maximum permissible weight per
den maneuvers, loose items will be thrown
hook is 9 lbs (4 kg).
around inside the vehicle, and can cause
injury to vehicle occupants unless the items
are securely fastened in the vehicle.
Always use the cargo tie down rings
(컄 page 283).
284
Controls in detail
Loading
A red indicator 5 will be visible and the

seat backrest 4 is released.
1 Release handle 3 Release handle

2 Seat cushion 4 Seat backrest
왘 Make sure the rear seat head restraints 5 Indicator
왘 Pull release handle 1.
are in the lowermost position 왘 Fold seat backrest 4 forward.
왘 Fold seat cushion 2 forward.
(컄 page 128).
왘 Pull release handle 3.
285
Controls in detail
Loading
Returning the rear seat backrest to

original position Warning! G
If a red indicator is visible with the backrest
up, then the backrest is not properly locked
into position.
Always lock backrest in its upright position
when the rear seats are occupied, or the ex-
tended cargo compartment is not in use.
Check for secure locking by pushing and
pulling on the backrest. 1 Handle
2 Mount
1 Seat backrest Cargo compartment cover blind
2 Seat cushion Rolling out blind
왘 Fold seat backrest 1 rearward until it The cargo compartment cover blind can be 왘 Pull blind on handle 1 across the car-
engages. installed behind the rear seats. go compartment.
The red indicator 5 (컄 page 285) ! With the cargo compartment cover blind in- 왘 Guide blind into mounts 2 and re-
should no longer be visible. stalled, do not pile luggage higher than the lower lease.
edges of the rear side windows.
왘 Fold seat cushion 2 rearward until it
Rolling up blind
locks into position.
왘 Disengage blind and guide retraction
왘 Check for secure locking by pushing
by its handle 1.
and pulling on the seat backrest.
286
Controls in detail
Loading
Removing blind 왘 Pull blind 2 to the left against the Partition net*
spring pressure until the spring in the
cover audibly engages.
왘 Remove the blind.
Warning! G
Make sure the partition net is properly en-
Installing blind
gaged at top and bottom position and the
i Before installing cargo compartment cover tightening belts are securely fastened.
blind behind the front seats, fold the rear seats Never use a damaged partition net.
forward.
To help avoid personal injury from smaller
왘 Place left side of blind 2 in left mount. objects being thrown around in the occu-
1 Release button
왘 Position right side of blind 2 over right pant compartment during a collision or sud-
2 Blind den maneuver, always use partition net
mount.
왘 Roll the blind up (컄 page 286). when transporting cargo.
왘 Press release button 1 and guide
i Before removing cargo compartment cover cover 2 into mount. The partition net cannot prevent the move-
blind behind the rear seats, fold the left or right ment of large, heavier objects into the pas-
왘 Make sure the cargo compartment
rear seat forward. Afterwards, return the left or senger compartment in an accident. Such
right rear seat into its original position. cover blind is securely fastened.
items must be properly secured using the
왘 Push release button 1. cargo tie-down rings (컄 page 283) in the
cargo compartment floor.
Passenger use of seats behind installed par-
tition net is restricted because of the foot-
well being taken up by the net.
287
Controls in detail
Loading
Use of the partition net is a particularly im- 앫 Without the cargo compartment ex- Installing the partition net
portant safety factor when the vehicle is panded (컄 page 284), use holders
loaded higher than the top of the seat above C-pillars 2 and the cargo
backrests with smaller objects. For your tie-down rings in the cargo compart-
safety, always use the partition net when ment (컄 page 283).
transporting cargo.
앫 With the cargo compartment expanded
The partition net can be installed in two (컄 page 284), use holders above
locations: B-pillars 1 and the cargo tie-down
rings behind the front seats
(컄 page 283).
왘 Open the zipper on the partition net Partition net bar hung up behind the C-pillar
package.
1 Holder
왘 Roll out the partition net. 2 Partition net bar
왘 Unfold the partition net. 왘 Hang partition net bar 2 on holder 1
The partition net bars must audibly as indicated by the arrow.
engage. 왘 Push partition net bar 2 forward into
1 Holder in B-pillar holder 1 in direction of arrow.
2 Holder in C-pillar
288
Controls in detail
Loading
Pulling the partition net tight Loosening the partition net Removing and storing the partition net
왘 Take partition net bar 2 out of
holder 1, see “Installing the partition
net” (컄 page 288).
왘 Press the red button on the upper and
lower partition net bar.
왘 Fold the partition net.
왘 Roll up the partition net.
왘 Close the zipper on the partition net
Belt hook attached behind the front seats Belt hook attached behind the front seats package.
1 Belt hook 1 Buckle
2 Cargo tie-down ring 2 Belt hook
3 Tightening belt 3 Cargo tie-down ring
왘 Hook belt hook 1 into cargo tie-down 왘 Loosen the tightening belt by pulling
ring 2 in direction of arrow. buckle 1 upward in direction of arrow.
왘 Pull tightening belt 3 by the loose end 왘 Remove belt hook 2 from cargo
in direction of arrow until the partition tie-down ring 3.
net is pulled tight.
왘 After driving a short distance, make
sure the partition net is still tight and, if
necessary, pull it tight again.
289
Controls in detail
Loading
Cargo management system* Inserting the mounting elements into i You can turn the mounting element in the
the cargo rails cargo rail to four positions:
Your vehicle may be equipped with a cargo ‹ To lock the mounting element.
management system and accompanying
N To insert or remove the cargo tie-down
accessories which enables you to utilize
ring, the belt reel or the telescoping rod.
your cargo compartment in a variety of
ways. You can store the cargo manage- L To insert or remove the mounting ele-
ment.
ment system in the pouch that comes with
the vehicle. S To move the mounting element to the
next engaging point.
i The pouch and the telescoping rod are locat- 왘 Turn mounting element 2 to L.
ed under the cargo compartment floor.
왘 Insert mounting element 2 in cargo
1 Cargo rail rail 1.
2 Mounting element
왘 Turn mounting element 2 until it en-
You can move the mounting element 2 to gages in the ‹ position.
various engaging points on the
cargo rail 1 and fix it in place. You should be able to feel the mounting
element engage in the cargo rail.
These engaging points are located
2 inches apart from one another on the
cargo rail and are indicated by markings.
1 Cargo rails
290
Controls in detail
Loading
Inserting the cargo tie-down ring in the 왘 Insert cargo tie-down ring 1 into i The belt reel can be used to tighten
mounting element mounting element 2. light-weight loads against the side wall of the
cargo compartment, thus securing them from
왘 Turn mounting element 2 until it en- slipping.
gages in the ‹ position.
왘 Insert two mounting elements 2 into a
You should be able to feel the mounting cargo rail.
왘 Turn mounting element 2 in the cargo
Belt reel rail to N.
왘 Insert belt reel 1 into mounting
element 2.
1 Cargo tie-down ring rail until it engages in the ‹ posi-
2 Mounting element tion.
You should be able to feel the mounting
Warning! G element engage in the cargo rail.
The cargo tie-down rings should be subject 왘 Press locking button 3 on the belt
to equal loads. Make sure to comply with reel 1 and pull cargo net out in direc-
1 Belt reel tion of arrow. 컄컄
the information provided in the loading in-
2 Mounting element
structions (컄 page 281).
3 Locking button

rail to N.
291
Controls in detail
Loading
컄컄 왘 Place load between the cargo net and i The telescoping rod can be used to tighten Removing rear seat cushions
the side wall of the cargo compart- the load against the rear seats so as to secure it
If your vehicle is equipped with the cargo
ment. from slipping.
management system* you can remove the
왘 Press locking button 3 on belt 왘 Insert one mounting element 2 into rear seat cushions.
reel 1. With the other hand, slowly each cargo rail.
Removing the rear seat cushions will pro-
pull net over load until it is taut. 왘 Turn mounting element 2 in cargo rail vide you with a larger cargo compartment.
to N.
Telescoping rod 왘 Fold the seat cushions forward
왘 Insert telescoping rod 1 into mount- (컄 page 285).
ing element 2.
왘 Turn mounting element 2 in cargo rail
until it engages in the ‹ position.
You should be able to feel the mounting
1 Telescoping rod
2 Mounting element 1 Release lever
왘 Pull seat cushion release lever 1 and
remove the seat cushion by pulling it
upward.
왘 Remove the head restraints
(컄 page 129).
292
Controls in detail
Loading
! Leave the seat cushion hinge in this posi-

tion. The upholstery could be damaged if you fold
the hinge back.
왘 Fold the seat backrest forward

(컄 page 285).
293
Controls in detail
Useful features
Storage compartments Glove box/CD changer* Releasing CD changer*

i Depending on vehicle equipment, a
Warning! G CD changer* and an AUX-socket are located in
the glove box.
To help avoid personal injury during a colli-

sion or sudden maneuver, exercise care
when storing objects in the vehicle. Put lug-
gage or cargo in the cargo compartment if
possible. Do not pile luggage or cargo higher
than the seat backs.
Always use partition net* when transporting 1 Release button
cargo. Partition net* cannot secure hard or 2 AUX-socket (Vehicles without Rear
heavy objects. Seat Entertainment System*)
Parcel nets cannot secure hard or heavy ob-
3 CD changer
1 Glove box lid release
jects. 2 Glove box lid 왘 Open the glove box (컄 page 294).
Keep compartment lids closed. This will help 왘 Press release button 1.
to prevent stored objects from being thrown Opening the glove box
CD changer 3 is released and swings
about and injuring vehicle occupants during
왘 Pull lid release 1 in direction of arrow. down automatically.
앫 braking
Glove box lid 2 opens downward. For information on CD changer operation,
앫 vehicle maneuvers see separate COMAND system operating
앫 an accident Closing the glove box instructions.
왘 Push glove box lid 2 up to close.
294
Controls in detail
Useful features
Closing CD changer* Locking and unlocking the glove box 왘 Insert mechanical key into glove box
separately lock.
You can lock the glove box separately, e.g. 왘 Turn mechanical key to position 2 to
when the vehicle is in the shop for service. lock the glove box.
왘 Take the mechanical key out of the 왘 Turn mechanical key to position 1 to
SmartKey or SmartKey with unlock the glove box.
KEYLESS-GO* (컄 page 475).
i The glove box can only be locked or
unlocked with the mechanical key.
1 CD changer
왘 Gently push CD changer 1 up in direc-
tion of arrow until it engages.
For information on CD changer operation,
see separate COMAND system operating
instructions.
1 Unlocking glove box
2 Locking glove box
295
Controls in detail
Useful features
Storage compartment in front center Storage compartment* (depending on Front armrest storage compartments
console vehicle configuration)
A flat storage tray with a deeper storage
compartment underneath is located below
Vehicles without ashtray*
the armrest. Both can be opened
separately.
왘 Briefly press the front of the cover.

The cover opens automatically.
왘 Briefly press the front of the cover.
The cover opens automatically. 1 Button to open storage tray/tele-
phone* compartment
2 Button to open storage compartment
i The Roadside Assistance button •
(컄 page 312) and the information button ¡
(컄 page 313) are located in the storage tray.
296
Controls in detail
Useful features
Rear storage compartments Parcel nets

Depending on the vehicle configuration,
your vehicle may be equipped with two
storage compartments in the front of the
Warning! G
rear seats.
Do not place objects with a combined
weight of more than 4.4 lbs (2 kg) into the
parcel net on the back of the front passen-
ger seat. Otherwise, the Occupant Classifi-
cation System OCS (컄 page 85) may not be
3 Storage compartment able to properly approximate the occupant
4 Coin holder weight category.
Parcel nets are intended for storing
Opening the storage tray light-weight items only.
왘 Pull button 1 and lift up armrest. Heavy objects, objects with sharp edges or
왘 Briefly press the front of the cover. fragile objects may not be transported in the
Opening the storage compartment The storage compartment opens parcel nets. In an accident, during hard
automatically. braking, or sudden maneuvers, they could
왘 Pull button 2 and lift up armrest.
be thrown around inside the vehicle and
The coin holders 4 are located in front i If your vehicle is equipped with a smoking cause injury to vehicle occupants.
of storage compartment 3. package*, the storage compartment contains an
ashtray (컄 page 300). Parcel nets cannot protect transported
goods in the event of an accident.
297
Controls in detail
Useful features
Parcel net in front passenger footwell Parcel nets on front seat backrests Cup holders
A small convenience parcel net is located A small convenience parcel net is located
in the front passenger footwell. It is intend-
ed for small and light items, such as road
on each of the front seat backrests. It is in-
tended for small and light items, such as
Warning! G
maps, mail, etc. road maps, mail, etc.
In order to help prevent spilling liquids on
vehicle occupants and/or vehicle equip-
ment, only use containers that fit into the
cup holder. Use lids on open containers and
do not fill containers to a height where the
contents, especially hot liquids, could spill
during braking, vehicle maneuvers, or an
accident. Liquids spilled on vehicle occu-
pants may cause serious personal injury.
Liquids spilled on vehicle equipment may
cause damage not covered by the
1 Parcel net 1 Parcel net Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
When not in use, keep rear cup holder
closed. An open cup holder may cause injury
to you or others when contacted during
braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an acci-
dent.
298
Controls in detail
Useful features
Cup holder in rear armrest Removing and reinstalling cup holder

Keep in mind that objects placed in a cup
holder may come loose during braking, The front cup holder can be removed for
vehicle maneuvers, or an accident and be cleaning purposes.
thrown around in the vehicle interior.
Objects thrown around in the vehicle interi-
or may cause an accident and/or serious
personal injury.
Cup holder in front of armrest

A cup holder and a card/ticket holder are
located in the front center console. 1 Cup holder
왘 Pull the armrest down by its top.
1 Cup holder
! Close the cup holder before folding the arm- 2 Bridge with card, ticket holder
rest upwards.
왘 Hold cup holder at its bridge 2 and
pull out bridge in direction of arrow.
왘 Pull cup holder 1 out in direction of
arrow.
왘 First, insert the cup holder 1 and then
1 Cup holder insert bridge 2.
i The front cup holder can be removed for

cleaning purposes (컄 page 299).
299
Controls in detail
Useful features
Ashtrays* Opening the ashtray Rear center console ashtray (front of

rear seats)
왘 Briefly touch cover plate 2.
Your vehicle is equipped with an ashtray
and a cigarette lighter (컄 page 301) locat- The ashtray opens automatically. ! Close the ashtray when not in use and be-
fore folding the rear seats
ed in the front center console and an ash-
tray located in front of the rear seats Removing ashtray insert
(컄 page 300).
i If your vehicle is not equipped with a smok- Warning! G
ing package*, it has a storage compartment
(컄 page 296) with a power outlet (컄 page 302) Remove ashtray only with vehicle standing
instead. still. Set the parking brake to secure vehicle
from movement. Set automatic transmis-
Ashtray in the center console sion to P. With the automatic transmission
set to P, turn off the engine.
1 Ashtray
왘 Grip the ashtray insert 1 on the sides
2 Ashtray cover
and pull it out upwards.
Reinstalling ashtray insert

왘 Install ashtray insert 1.
왘 Close ashtray cover plate 2.
1 Ashtray insert
2 Cover plate
300
Controls in detail
Useful features
Opening rear ashtray Cigarette lighter*

왘 Briefly press ashtray cover 2.
The ashtray 1 opens automatically. Warning! G
Removing rear ashtray insert Never touch the heating element or sides of
the cigarette lighter; they are extremely hot.
왘 Grip the insert on the sides and pull it
Hold the knob only.
out upwards.
Make sure that any children traveling with
Reinstalling rear ashtray insert you do not injure themselves or start a fire
with the hot cigarette lighter. 1 Cigarette lighter
왘 Install ashtray insert.
When leaving the vehicle always remove the 왘 Open the ashtray (컄 page 300).
왘 Close the ashtray. SmartKey or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
왘 Push in cigarette lighter 1.
from the starter switch, take it with you, and
Cigarette lighter lock the vehicle. Do not leave children unat- The cigarette lighter will pop out auto-
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 40). tended in the vehicle, or with access to an matically when hot.
왘 Push in cigarette lighter.
The cigarette lighter will pop out auto- and/or serious personal injury.
matically when hot.
301
Controls in detail
Useful features
! The lighter socket can accommodate Power outlets Power outlets are located
12V DC electrical accessories (up to a maximum
앫 in the front center console
of 180 W) designed for use with the standard ! If you use all power outlets in the vehicle, (컄 page 302)
“cigarette lighter” plug type. Keep in mind, how- make sure that the maximum current drawn
ever, that connecting accessories to the lighter does not exceed 55 A. 앫 in the rear center console (컄 page 303)
socket (for example extensive connecting and
disconnecting, or using plugs that do not fit prop- i The power outlets can be used to 앫 on the right-hand side of the cargo
erly) can damage the lighter socket. With the accommodate 12V DC electrical accessories compartment (컄 page 303)
socket damaged, the lighter may no longer be (e.g. air pump, auxiliary lamps) up to a maximum
able to be placed in the heating (pushed-in) posi- of 240 W. Power outlet in front center console
tion, or the lighter may pop out too early with the If the engine is off, the battery may become dis-
lighter not hot enough. charged if used for long periods of time.
To help avoid damaging the cigarette lighter
socket, we recommend connecting 12V DC elec- i You can use the power outlet in the cargo
trical accessories designed for use with the stan- compartment or in the front of the rear seats
dard “cigarette lighter” plug type to the 12V even if the ignition is switched off.
power outlets (컄 page 302) in your vehicle An emergency shut-off feature ensures that the
whenever possible. vehicle’s electrical voltage does not fall below a
minimum level. If the voltage drops to this mini-
i If the engine is off, and the cigarette lighter mum level, the power outlets are automatically
is being used extensively, the vehicle battery switched off. This ensures that enough power re-
may become discharged. mains to start the engine.
1 Power outlet cover
왘 Open cover plate (컄 page 296).
왘 Pull out cover 1 and insert electrical
plug (cigarette lighter type).
302
Controls in detail
Useful features
i If your vehicle is equipped with a smoking Power outlet in cargo compartment Floormats*
package*, the storage compartment contains an
ashtray with cigarette lighter (컄 page 301) in-
stead. Warning! G
Power outlet in rear center console Whenever you are using floormats, make
sure there is enough clearance and that the
floormats are securely fastened.
Floormats should always be securely fas-
tened using eyelets 2 and retainer pins 1
(컄 page 304).
Before driving off, check that the floormats
왘 Flip up cover and insert electrical plug are securely in place and adjust them if nec-
(cigarette lighter type). essary. A loose floormat could slip and
hinder proper functioning of the pedals.
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 40). Do not place several floormats on top of
each other as this may impair pedal move-
왘 Flip up cover and insert electrical plug
ment.
(cigarette lighter type).
i To install or remove the floormat more easi-

ly, move the driver’s seat or front passenger seat
as far to the rear as possible (컄 page 44).
303
Controls in detail
Useful features
Heated steering wheel* Switching on

The steering wheel heating warms up the
leather area of the steering wheel. 왘 Turn switch at the tip of stalk in the
direction of arrow 1.
The stalk is on the lower left-hand side of
the steering wheel. The steering wheel is heated. Indicator
lamp 2 comes on.
i The steering wheel heating is turned off tem-
porarily and the indicator lamp 2 remains on
when
1 Retainer pin
앫 the temperature of the vehicle interior is
2 Eyelet
above 86°F (30°C)
Removing 앫 the temperature of the steering wheel is
above 95°F (35°C)
왘 Pull floormat off of retainer pins 1. When these conditions do not apply anymore,
왘 Remove the floormat. steering wheel heating continues.
1 Switching on
2 Indicator lamp
Installing
3 Switching off
왘 Lay down the floormat in the respective
footwell.
왘 Press the floormat eyelets 2 onto re-
tainer pins 1.
304
Controls in detail
Useful features
Switching off Telephone*

왘 Turn switch at the tip of stalk in the
Warning! G
Warning! G Please do not forget that your primary re-
The heated steering wheel is switched sponsibility is to drive the vehicle. A driver’s
off. Indicator lamp 2 goes out. Never operate radio transmitters equipped attention to the road must always be
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. with- his/her primary focus when driving. For
i Indicator lamp 2 flashes or goes out out being connected to an external antenna) your safety and the safety of others, we rec-
앫 in case of power surge or undervoltage from inside the vehicle while the engine is ommend that you pull over to a safe location
앫 in case of a steering wheel heating malfunc- running. Doing so could lead to a malfunc- and stop before placing or taking a tele-
tion tion of the vehicle’s electronic system, pos- phone call.
sibly resulting in an accident and/or serious If you choose to use the telephone1 while
i The steering wheel heating switches off
automatically when you remove the SmartKey personal injury. driving, please use the hands-free device
from the starter switch or, on vehicles with and only use the telephone when road,
KEYLESS-GO*, when you switch off the ignition Radio transmitters, such as a portable tele- weather and traffic conditions permit. Some
(컄 page 39) and open the driver’s door. phone or a citizens band unit, should only jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a
For information on the steering wheel, see be used inside the vehicle if they are con- cellular telephone while driving a vehicle.
“Multifunction steering wheel” nected to an antenna that is installed on Only operate the COMAND system1 if road,
(컄 page 148). the outside of the vehicle. weather and traffic conditions permit.
The external antenna must be approved by Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
Mercedes-Benz. Please contact an autho- (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
rized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center covering a distance of 44 feet (approximate-
for information on the installation of an ap- ly 14 m) every second.
proved external antenna. Refer to the radio
1 Observe all legal requirements
transmitter operation instructions regard-
ing use of an external antenna.
305
Controls in detail
Useful features
i Various mobile phone cradles can be in- rized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center
stalled in the front center armrest, see separate for information on features available for
installation instructions for the mobile phone your mobile phone of choice.
cradle. These mobile phone cradles can be ob-
tained from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light The cradle is located in the front center
Truck Center. armrest.
The functions and services available to you while 왘 Open telephone compartment
using the mobile phone depend on your service (컄 page 296).
provider and the type of mobile phone you are
using. See also separate operating manual for in-
structions on how to use your mobile phone.
Inserting mobile phone in mobile phone
cradle Example illustration
When the mobile phone is inserted in the
Once the mobile phone has been inserted 1 Insert the mobile phone
cradle, you can operate the telephone us-
in the mobile phone cradle, you have to 2 Connector contact
ing the following devices:
use the hands-free device to respond dur- 3 Mobile phone cradle
앫 mobile phone keypad ing phone calls.
왘 Slide the lower end of the mobile phone
앫 COMAND system (see separate operat- ! Do not try to remove the mobile phone along into connector contact 2 on
ing instructions) with the cradle. You could otherwise damage the cradle 3.
앫 buttons s and t on the steering mobile phone cradle.
왘 Push the top of the mobile phone in di-
wheel (컄 page 148) 왘 If applicable, remove the cover for the rection of arrow 1, until the lug on the
앫 Voice Control* (see separate operating external antenna connection from the mobile phone release button engages.
instructions) back of the mobile phone and store it in
a safe place. Be sure to comply with the The mobile phone is connected to the
Please note that these functions are only mobile phone’s operating instructions network via the external antenna.
available with Mercedes-Benz approved as well.
mobile phones. Please contact an autho-
306
Controls in detail
Useful features
The mobile phone is linked to the Removing mobile phone from mobile Changing mobile phone cradle
hands-free device and the multifunc- phone cradle
If you require a different cradle for your
tion steering wheel.
mobile phone, remove the present cradle
The battery is charged depending on its before installing a new one.
charge status and the position of the
SmartKey in the starter switch. The Removing an existing mobile phone
charge procedure will be indicated in cradle
the mobile phone’s display.
You can place or receive phone calls. You
can control other functions of the mobile
phone via the control system (컄 page 182)
or COMAND system or Voice Contro*, see Example illustration
separate operating instructions.
1 Release catch for mobile phone
i When you take the SmartKey or SmartKey 2 Mobile phone cradle
with KEYLESS-GO* out of the starter switch, the
mobile phone remains switched on for approx. i When using a flip-style mobile phone, open
10 minutes. If you place or receive a call during flip top before removing from the cradle while a
call is connected. Otherwise, the call will be dis- Example illustration
this time, the mobile phone switches off
10 minutes after the call has been completed. connected. 1 To release the mobile phone cradle
왘 Press release catch in direction of 2 To remove the mobile phone cradle
arrow 1 and take mobile phone out of 3 Mobile phone cradle 컄컄
mobile phone cradle 2.
307
Controls in detail
Useful features
컄컄 왘 Press release button in direction of Tele Aid* The Tele Aid system
arrow 1 and take mobile phone
(Telematic Alarm Identification on
cradle 3 out in direction of arrow 2. ! The initial activation of the Tele Aid system Demand)
may only be performed by completing the sub-
Installing a different mobile phone cra- scriber agreement and placing an acquaintance The Tele Aid system consists of three
dle call using the ¡ button. Failure to complete types of response:
either of these steps will result in a system that
is not activated. 앫 automatic and manual emergency
If you have any questions regarding activation, 앫 roadside assistance
please call the Response Center at
1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or 앫 information
1-888-923-8367 (in Canada). The Tele Aid system is operational provid-
Shortly after the completion of your ing that the vehicle’s battery is charged,
Tele Aid acquaintance call, you will receive properly connected, not damaged and cel-
a user ID and password. By visiting lular and GPS coverage is available.
www.mbusa.com and selecting “Tele Aid” The speaker volume of a Tele Aid call can
Example illustration
(USA only), you will have access to account be adjusted by using the volume control on
information, remote door unlock and the COMAND system or on the multifunc-
1 Contact plate more. tion steering wheel. To raise, turn the rota-
2 Recesses
ry volume control on COMAND system
3 Mobile phone cradle
clockwise or press button æ on the
왘 Insert mobile phone cradle 3 into multifunction steering wheel. To lower,
recesses 2 of contact plate 1. turn the rotary volume control on
왘 Push mobile phone cradle 3 forward COMAND system control counterclock-
until it engages. wise or press button ç on the multi-
function steering wheel.
308
Controls in detail
Useful features
왘 To activate, press the SOS button, the i When a Tele Aid call has been initiated, the System self-check
Roadside Assistance button • or COMAND system audio is muted and the select-
Initially, after switching on the ignition,
the Information button ¡, depend- ed mode (radio, CD etc.) pauses. The optional
cellular phone (if installed) inserted in cradle malfunctions are detected and indicated
ing on the type of response required.
switches off. If you must use this phone, we rec- (the indicator lamps in the SOS button, the
i The SOS button is located in the overhead ommend that you use it only with the vehicle at a Roadside Assistance button • and the
control panel (컄 page 33). standstill in a safe location. Remove the phone Information button ¡ stay on longer
The Roadside Assistance button • from the cradle and place the call. The naviga- than 10 seconds or do not come on).
(컄 page 312) and the Information button ¡ tion* system (if engaged) will continue to run.
The display in the instrument cluster is available The message Tele Aid – inoperative
(컄 page 313) are located below the center arm-
for use, and spoken commands are only avail- appears in the multifunction display.
rest cover.
able by pressing the RPT button on the COMAND
! The Tele Aid system utilizes the cellular system. A pop-up window will appear in the
network for communication and the GPS (Global COMAND system display to indicate that a Tele
Positioning System) satellites for vehicle loca- Aid call is in progress. After the TeleAid call has
tion. If either of these signals are unavailable, the ended, the optional cellular phone inserted in the
Tele Aid system may not function and if this cradle switches on again. A PIN entry might be
occurs, assistance must be summoned by other necessary.
means.
309
Controls in detail
Useful features
Emergency calls Once the emergency call is in progress, the

Warning! G An emergency call is initiated automatical-
indicator lamp on the SOS button will
begin to flash. The message
If the indicator lamps on the SOS button, on ly following an accident in which the emer-
Connecting call appears in the multifunc-
the Roadside Assistance button, and/or on gency tensioning devices (ETDs) or
tion display. When the connection is estab-
the Information button remain illuminated air bags deploy.
lished, the message Call connected
continuously in red and/or the message An emergency call can also be initiated appears in the multifunction display. All in-
Tele Aid – inoperative is displayed in manually by opening the cover next to the formation relevant to the emergency, such
the multifunction display after the system interior rear view mirror labeled SOS, then as the location of the vehicle (determined
self-check, a malfunction in the system has briefly pressing the button located under by the GPS satellite location system), vehi-
been detected. the cover. See (컄 page 311) for cle model, identification number and color
If a malfunction is indicated as outlined instructions on initiating an emergency call are generated.
above, the system may not operate as manually.
A voice connection between the Response
expected. Have the system checked at the Center and the occupants of the vehicle
nearest Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center will be established automatically soon af-
as soon as possible. ter the emergency call has been initiated.
The Response Center will attempt to
determine more precisely the nature of the
accident provided they can speak to an
occupant of the vehicle.
310
Controls in detail
Useful features
The Tele Aid system is available if Initiating an emergency call manually

앫 it has been activated and is operation-
Warning! G
al. Activation requires a subscription If the indicator lamp in the SOS button is
for monitoring services, connection flashing continuously and there was no
and cellular air time voice connection to the Response Center
앫 vehicle battery power is available established, then the Tele Aid system could
not initiate an emergency call (e.g. the rele-
앫 the relevant cellular phone network
vant cellular phone network is not available).
and GPS signals are available and pass
The message Call failed appears in the
the information on to the Response
Center
10 seconds. 1 Cover
i Location of the vehicle on a map is only pos- Should this occur, assistance must be sum- 2 SOS button
sible if the vehicle is able to receive signals from
moned by other means.
the GPS satellite network and pass the informa- 왘 Briefly press on cover 1.
tion on to the Response Center.
The cover opens.
왘 Press SOS button 2 briefly.
The indicator lamp in SOS button 2
will flash until the emergency call is
concluded.
왘 Wait for a voice connection to the
Response Center.
왘 Close cover 1 after the emergency
call is concluded.
311
Controls in detail
Useful features
Roadside Assistance button • When the connection is established, the

Warning! G The Roadside Assistance button • is
message Call connected appears in the
multifunction display. The Tele Aid system
If you feel at any way in jeopardy when in the located below the center armrest cover.
will transmit data generating the vehicle
vehicle (e.g. smoke or fire in the vehicle, identification number, model, color and
vehicle in a dangerous road location), please location (subject to availability of cellular
do not wait for voice contact after you have and GPS signals).
pressed the emergency button. Carefully
leave the vehicle and move to a safe loca- i While the call is connected you can change
tion. The Response Center will automatically to the navigation menu by pressing the NAV
button on the COMAND system unit.
contact local emergency officials with the
vehicle’s approximate location if they re- A voice connection between the Roadside
ceive an automatic SOS signal and cannot Assistance dispatcher and the occupants
make voice contact with the vehicle occu- of the vehicle will be established.
pants. 1 Roadside Assistance button •
왘 Describe the nature of the need for as-
왘 Open the storage tray (컄 page 297). sistance.
왘 Press and hold button 1 (for longer
than 2 seconds).
A call to a Mercedes-Benz Roadside
Assistance dispatcher will be initiated.
The button will flash while the call is in
progress. The message
Connecting call will appear in the
312
Controls in detail
Useful features
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance i The indicator lamp on the Roadside Information button ¡
dispatcher will either dispatch a qualified Assistance button • remains illuminated in
The Information button ¡ is located
Mercedes-Benz technician or arrange to red for approximately 10 seconds during the
system self-check after switching on the ignition below the center armrest cover.
tow your vehicle to the nearest
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. For (together with the SOS button and the Informa-
tion button ¡).
services such as labor and/or towing,
charges may apply. Refer to the Roadside See system self-check (컄 page 309) if the indi-
cator lamp does not come on in red or stays on
Assistance Manual for more information.
longer than approximately 10 seconds.
The following is only available in the USA: If the indicator lamp on the Roadside Assistance
앫 Sign and Drive services: Services such button • is flashing continuously and there
was no voice connection to the Response Center
as jump start, a few gallons of fuel or
established, then the Tele Aid system could not
the replacement of a flat tire with the initiate a Roadside Assistance call (e.g. the rele-
vehicle spare tire are obtainable. vant cellular phone network was not available).
The message Call failed appears in the mul-
1 Information button ¡
tifunction display. 왘 Open the storage tray (컄 page 296).
Roadside Assistance calls can be terminated us- 왘 Press and hold button 1 (for longer
ing the t button on the multifunction steer-
ing wheel or the END Button on the COMAND
than 2 seconds).
system. A call to the Customer Assistance
Center will be initiated. The button will
flash while the call is in progress. The
message Connecting call will appear
in the multifunction display.
313
Controls in detail
Useful features
When the connection is established, the i The indicator lamp in the Information ! If the indicator lamps do not start flashing
message Call connected appears in the button ¡ remains illuminated in red for after pressing one of the buttons or remain illu-
multifunction display. The Tele Aid system approximately 10 seconds during the system minated (in red) at any time, the Tele Aid system
will transmit data generating the vehicle self-check after switching on the ignition (togeth- has detected a malfunction or the service is not
identification number, model, color and lo- er with the SOS button and the Roadside currently active, and may not initiate a call. Visit
Assistance button •). your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
cation (subject to availability of cellular Center and have the system checked or contact
and GPS signals). See system self-check (컄 page 309) if the indi-
cator lamp does not come on in red or stays on the Response Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the
USA) or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada) as soon as
i While the call is connected, you can change longer than approximately 10 seconds.
possible.
to the navigation menu by pressing the NAV If the indicator lamp in the Information
button on the COMAND system. button ¡ is flashing continuously and there
was no voice connection to the Response Center
Call priority
A voice connection between the Customer
established, then the Tele Aid system could not If other service calls such as a Roadside
Assistance Center representative and the
initiate an Information call (e.g. the relevant cel- Assistance call or Information call are
occupants of the vehicle will be estab- lular phone network is not available). The mes-
lished. Information regarding the operation active, an Emergency call is still possible.
sage Call failed appears in the multifunction
of your vehicle, the nearest display. In this case, the Emergency call will take
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center or priority and override all other active calls.
Information calls can be terminated using
Mercedes-Benz USA products and servic- the t button on the multifunction steering i The indicator lamp in the respective button
es is available to you. wheel or the END button on the COMAND sys- flashes until the call is concluded. Emergency
tem. calls can only be terminated by a Response
For more details concerning the Tele Aid
Center or Customer Assistance Center repre-
system, please visit www.mbusa.com and sentative, whereas Roadside Assistance and
use your ID and password (sent to you sep- Information calls can also be terminated by
arately) to learn more (USA only). pressing button t on the multifunction
steering wheel or using the END button on the
COMAND system.
314
Controls in detail
Useful features
! If the indicator lamp continues to flash or As an alternative, you may unlock the vehi- Stolen Vehicle Recovery services
the system does not reset, contact the Response cle via Internet using the ID and password
In the event your vehicle was stolen:
Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) or sent to you shortly after the completion of
1-888-923-8367 (in Canada), or Mercedes-Benz your acquaintance call. 왘 Report the incident to the police.
Customer Assistance at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) in the USA or Customer The Response Center will then unlock your The police will issue a numbered
Service at 1-800-387-0100 in Canada. vehicle with the remote door unlocking incident report.
feature. 왘 Pass this number on to the
Remote door unlock Mercedes-Benz Response Center along
i The remote door unlock feature is available
In case you have locked your vehicle unin- if the relevant cellular phone network is avail- with your password issued to you when
tentionally (e.g. SmartKey inside vehicle), able. you subscribed to the service.
and the reserve SmartKey is not handy: The SOS button will flash and the message The Response Center will then attempt
Connecting call will appear in the multifunc- to covertly contact the vehicle’s
왘 Contact the Mercedes-Benz Response
tion display to indicate receipt of the door unlock
Center at 1-800-756-9018 (in the USA) Tele Aid system. Once the vehicle is
command.
or 1-888-923-8367 (in Canada). located, the Response Center will
Once the vehicle is unlocked, a Response Center contact the local law enforcement and
You will be asked to provide your pass- specialist may attempt to establish voice contact
you. The vehicle’s location will only be
word which you provided when you with the vehicle occupants.
provided to law enforcement.
completed the subscriber agreement. If the tailgate recessed handle was pulled for
more than 20 seconds before door unlock autho-
왘 Then return to your vehicle and pull the rization was received by the Response Center,
tailgate recessed handle for minimum you must wait 15 minutes before pulling the tail-
of 20 seconds until the SOS button is gate recessed handle again.
flashing.
The message Connecting call ap-
pears in the multifunction display.
315
Controls in detail
Useful features
i When the anti-theft alarm stays on for more

than 30 seconds, a call is initiated automatically Warning! G
to the Response Center. See anti-theft alarm
system (컄 page 103). Before programming the integrated remote
control to a garage door opener or gate
Garage door opener* operator, make sure people and objects are
out of the way of the device to prevent po-
The integrated remote control is capable of tential harm or damage. When programming
operating up to three separately controlled a garage door opener, the door moves up or
devices. It provides a convenient way to re- down. When programming a gate operator,
place up to three hand-held remote con- Interior rear view mirror with integrated the gate opens or closes.
trols used to operate devices such as remote control
Do not use the integrated remote control
garage door openers, gate openers, or oth- 1 Indicator lamp with any garage door opener that lacks
er devices compatible with HomeLink® or
2 3 4 Signal transmitter button safety stop and reverse features as required
some other systems.
by U.S. federal safety standards (this
Before the integrated remote control can Needed for programming (not part of vehi- includes any garage door opener model
be used, it must be programmed to the ga- cle equipment): manufactured before April 1, 1982).
rage door opener, gate operator or other 5 Hand-held remote control of ga- A garage door that cannot detect an object
device you wish to operate. See the follow- rage door opener, gate operator – signaling the door to stop and reverse –
ing instructions for programming informa- or other device does not meet current U.S. federal safety
tion. standards.
6 Hand-held remote control but-
ton
316
Controls in detail
Useful features
Step 2: Step 3:
When programming a garage door opener,
park the vehicle outside the garage. 왘 If you have previously programmed a 왘 Hold end of the hand-held remote
Do not run the engine while programming signal transmitter button and wish to control 5 of the device you wish to
the integrated remote control. Inhalation of retain its programming, proceed to train approximately 2 to 5 in
exhaust gas is hazardous to your health. step 3. (5 to 12 cm) away from the signal
All exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide If you are programming the integrated transmitter button (2, 3 or 4) to be
(CO), and inhaling it can cause unconscious- programmed, while keeping the indica-
remote control for the first time, press
ness and possible death. tor lamp 1 in view.
and hold the two outer signal transmit-
ter buttons 2 and 4 and release Step 4:
Programming the integrated remote them only when indicator lamp 1
왘 Using both hands, simultaneously
control begins to flash after approximately
press hand-held remote control
20 seconds (do not hold the button for
Step 1: button 6 and the desired signal trans-
longer than 30 seconds). This proce-
mitter button (2, 3 or 4). Do not
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 40). dure erases any previous settings for
release the buttons until step 5 is com-
all three channels and initializes the
pleted.
memory.
Indicator lamp 1 will flash, first slowly
If you later wish to program a second
and then rapidly.
and/or third hand-held transmitter to
the remaining two signal transmitter i Indicator lamp 1 flashes immediately the
buttons, do not repeat this step and be- first time the signal transmitter button is
gin directly with step 3. programmed. If this button has already been
programmed, the indicator lamp will only start
flashing after 20 seconds. 컄컄
317
Controls in detail
Useful features
컄컄 Step 5: Step 7: Step 9:

왘 After indicator lamp 1 changes from a 왘 To program the remaining two signal 왘 Press the “training” button on the ga-
slow to a rapidly flashing light, release transmitter buttons, repeat the steps rage door opener motor head unit.
the hand-held remote control button above starting with step 3. The “training light” is activated.
and the signal transmitter button.
Rolling code programming You have 30 seconds to initiate the follow-
Step 6:
ing two steps.
To train a garage door opener (or other
왘 Press and hold the just-trained signal
rolling code devices) with the rolling code Step 10:
transmitter button (2, 3 or 4) and
feature, follow these instructions after 왘 Return to the vehicle and firmly press,
observe indicator lamp 1.
completing the “Programming” portion hold for 2 seconds and release the pro-
If indicator lamp 1 stays on (steps 1 through 6) of this text. (A second grammed signal transmitter button
constantly, programming is complete person may make the following training (2, 3 or 4).
and your device should activate when procedures quicker and easier.)
the respective signal transmitter Step 11:
Step 8:
button (2, 3 or 4) is pressed and re- 왘 Press, hold for 2 seconds and release
leased. 왘 Locate “training” button on the garage same signal transmitter button a sec-
door opener motor head unit. ond time to complete the training pro-
i If indicator lamp 1 flashes rapidly for about
2 seconds and then turns to a constant light, Exact location and color of the button cess.
continue with programming steps 8 through 12 may vary by garage door opener brand.
as your garage door opener may be equipped i Some garage door openers (or other rolling
Depending on manufacturer, the code equipped devices) may require you to
with the “rolling code” feature. “training” button may also be referred press, hold for 2 seconds and release the same
to as “learn” or “smart” button. If there signal transmitter button a third time to
is difficulty locating the transmitting complete the training process.
button, refer to the garage door opener
Operator’s Manual.
318
Controls in detail
Useful features
Step 12: Step 4: i Upon completion of programming the inte-

grated remote control, make sure you retain the
왘 Confirm the garage door operation by 왘 Press and hold the signal transmitter
hand-held remote control that came with the ga-
pressing the programmed signal trans- button (2, 3 or 4). Do not release rage door opener, gate operator or other device.
mitter button (2, 3 or 4). this button until it has been successful- You may need it for use in other vehicles, for fu-
Step 13: ly trained. ture programming of an integrated remote con-
trol, or simply for continued use as a hand-held
왘 While still holding down the signal
왘 To program the remaining two signal remote control to operate the respective device
transmitter button (2, 3 or 4), in other situations.
transmitter buttons, repeat the steps
“cycle” your hand-held remote control
above starting with step 3.
button 6 as follows: Press and hold Reprogramming a single signal trans-
button 6 for 2 seconds, then release mitter button
Gate operator/Canadian programming
it for 2 seconds, and again press and
Canadian radio-frequency laws require hold it for 2 seconds. Repeat this se- To program a device using a signal trans-
transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) quence on the hand-held remote con- mitter button previously trained, follow
after several seconds of transmission trol until the frequency signal has been these steps:
which may not be long enough for the learned. Upon successful training, 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 40).
integrated signal transmitter to pick up the indicator lamp 1 will flash slowly and
signal during programming. Similar to this 왘 Press and hold the desired signal
then rapidly after several seconds.
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators transmitter button (2, 3 or 4).
왘 Proceed with programming step 5 and Do not release the button.
are designed to “time-out” in the same
step 6 to complete.
manner. 왘 Indicator lamp 1 will begin to flash af-
If you live in Canada or if you are having ter 20 seconds. Without releasing the
difficulties programming a gate operator signal transmitter button, proceed with
(regardless of where you live) by using the programming starting with step 3.
programming procedures, replace step 4
with the following:
319
Controls in detail
Useful features
Operation of integrated remote control Programming tips 앫 If another hand-held remote control is
available for the same device, try the
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 40). If you are having difficulty programming
programming steps again using that
the integrated remote control, here are
왘 Select and press the appropriate inte- other hand-held remote control. Make
some helpful tips:
grated signal transmitter button (2, sure new batteries are in the hand-held
3 or 4) to activate the remote con- 앫 Check the frequency of hand-held remote control before beginning the
trolled device. remote control 5 (typically located on procedure.
The integrated remote control trans- the reverse side of the remote). The in-
앫 Straighten the antenna wire from the
mitter continues to send the signal as tegrated remote control is compatible
with radio-frequency devices operating garage door opener assembly. This
long as the button is pressed – up to may help improve transmitting and/or
20 seconds. between 280-390 MHz.
receiving signals.
앫 Put a new battery in hand-held remote
Erasing the integrated remote control control 5. This will increase the likeli- i Certain types of garage door openers are in-
compatible with the integrated remote control. If
memory hood of the hand-held remote control
you should experience further difficulties with
sending a faster and more accurate sig-
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 40). programming the integrated remote control,
nal to the integrated remote control. contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, or
왘 Simultaneously press and hold outer call Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
앫 While performing step 3, hold
signal transmitter buttons 2 and 4, Center (in the USA only) at 1-800-FOR-MER-
for approximately 20 seconds, until hand-held remote control 5 at differ-
Cedes, or Customer Service (in Canada) at
indicator lamp 1 flashes rapidly. Do ent lengths and angles from the signal 1-800-387-0100.
not hold for longer than 30 seconds. transmitter button (2, 3 or 4) you
are programming. Attempt varying an-
The codes of all three channels are gles at the distance of 2 to 5 inches
erased. (5 to 12 cm) away or the same angle at
varying distances.
i If you sell your vehicle, erase the codes of all
three channels.
320
Controls in detail
Useful features
i USA only: Compass i The presence of buildings, bridges, power

This device complies with Part 15 of the lines and large antenna masts can influence the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following displayed values. Metallic or magnetic objects in
two conditions: Calling up the compass or on the vehicle can influence the accuracy of
(1) This device may not cause harmful interfer- 왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly the compass.
ence, and until the AIRMATIC/Compass menu To make sure the display is correct, the
(2) this device must accept any interference appears in the multifunction display. compass must be set to the proper geo-
received, including interference that may The compass displays the direction graphic zone (컄 page 174). It may also be
cause undesired operation. necessary to calibrate the compass
into which the vehicle is currently trav-
Any unauthorized modification to this device eling: N, NE, E, SE, S, SW, W, or NW. (컄 page 175).
equipment. i If the compass is not calibrated or its
function is impaired by outside influences, the
i Canada only: message Compass - - - appears in the
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry multifunction display.
Canada. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause interference, and
i If your vehicle is not equipped with the air
suspension package*, the multifunction display
received, including interference that may
will show the compass only.
cause undesired operation of the device.
equipment.
321
Controls in detail
Useful features
Infrared reflecting windshield*
1 Infrared transparent areas

Your vehicle is equipped with infrared re-
flecting glass, which reduces the amount
of radiated heat entering the vehicle interi-
or through the windows.
The infrared reflecting glass also prevents
the transmission of signals through the
glass by in-vehicle electronic devices, e.g.
electronic toll collection devices.
To allow the use of these devices in the
vehicle, three infrared transparent
areas 1 are placed in the windshield.
322
Operation
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
Driving instructions
At the gas station
Engine compartment
Tires and wheels
Winter driving
Maintenance
Vehicle care
323
Operation
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
In the “Operation” section you will find The more cautiously you treat your vehicle After 1000 miles (1500 km) you may
detailed information on operating, main- during the break-in period, the more satis- gradually increase vehicle and engine
taining and caring for your vehicle. fied you will be with its performance later speeds to the permissible maximum.
on.
! Additional instructions for ML 63 AMG:
앫 Drive your vehicle during the first 앫 During the first 1000 miles (1500 km), do
1000 miles (1500 km) at varying but not exceed a speed of 85 mph (140 km/h).
moderate vehicle and engine speeds.
앫 During this period, avoid engine speeds
앫 During this period, avoid heavy loads above 4500 rpm in each gear.
(full throttle driving) and excessive 앫 Shift gears at the correct time.
engine speeds (no more than 2/3 of 앫 Select C as the preferred shift program
maximum rpm in each gear). (컄 page 195) for the first 1000 miles
앫 Shift gears in a timely manner. (1500 km).
앫 Avoid accelerating by kick-down. All of the above instructions, as may apply

to your vehicle type, also apply when driv-
앫 Do not attempt to slow the vehicle ing the first 1000 miles (1500 km) after
down by shifting to a lower gear using the engine, the transfer case, the front dif-
the gear selector lever. ferential or the rear differential has been
앫 Select gear ranges 3, 2 or 1 replaced.
(컄 page 193) only when driving at
i Always obey applicable speed limits.
moderate speeds (for hill driving).
324
Operation
왔 Driving instructions
Drive sensibly – save fuel Fuel consumption is also increased by Pedals
driving in cold weather, in stop-and-go traf-
Fuel consumption, to a great extent, fic, on short trips and in hilly areas.
depends on driving habits and operating Warning! G
conditions. Drinking and driving
Make sure that absolutely no objects are ob-
To save fuel you should:
structing the pedal’s range of movement.
앫 Keep tires at the recommended infla- Warning! G Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all obsta-
tion pressures. cles. If there are any floormats or carpets in
앫 Remove unnecessary loads. Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs the footwell, make sure that the pedals still
and driving are a very dangerous combina- have sufficient clearance.
앫 Remove carriers* when not in use. tion. Even a small amount of alcohol or During sudden driving or braking maneu-
앫 Allow engine to warm up under low drugs can affect your reflexes, perceptions vers, the objects could get caught between
load use. and judgment. the pedals. You could then no longer brake
앫 Avoid frequent acceleration and decel- The possibility of a serious or even fatal or accelerate. This could lead to accidents
eration. accident are greatly increased when you and injury.
drink or take drugs and drive.
앫 Have all maintenance work performed
at the intervals specified in the Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow
Maintenance Booklet and as required anyone to drive who has been drinking or
by the Maintenance System (U.S. vehi- taking drugs.
cles) or FSS PLUS (Canada vehicles).
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center.
325
Operation
Power assistance Brakes ! Operational or performance test must only

Warning! G Warning! G Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. You could
otherwise seriously damage the brake system or
With the engine not running, there is no After driving in heavy rain for some time the transfer case which is not covered by the
power assistance for the brake and steering without applying the brakes or through wa-
systems. In this case, it is important to keep ter deep enough to wet brake components, ! Because the ESP® operates automatically,
in mind that a considerably higher degree of the first braking action may be somewhat the engine and ignition must be shut off
effort is necessary to brake and steer the ve- reduced and increased pedal pressure may (SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or 1 or
hicle. be necessary to obtain expected braking ef- KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button in
fect. Maintain a safe distance from vehicles position 0 or 1) when testing the brakes on a
brake test dynamometer and such testing should
in front.
Resting your foot on the brake pedal will Active braking action through the ESP® may
cause excessive and premature wear of the otherwise seriously damage the brake system
brake pads. which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
It can also result in the brakes overheating,
thereby significantly reducing their effec-
tiveness. It may not be possible to stop the
vehicle in sufficient time to avoid an acci-
dent.
326
Operation
To help prevent brake disk corrosion after Brake pad wear or a leak in the system may
driving on wet road surfaces (particularly be the reason for low brake fluid in the Warning! G
salted roads), it is advisable to brake the reservoir.
vehicle with considerable force prior to If other than recommended brake pads are
The brake fluid level in the reservoir may installed, or other than recommended brake
parking. The heat generated serves to dry
be too low if the brake warning lamp in the fluid is used, the braking properties of the
the brakes.
instrument cluster comes on and an vehicle can be degraded to an extent that
If your brake system is normally only sub- acoustic warning sounds although the safe braking is substantially impaired. This
jected to moderate loads, you should occa- parking brake is released (컄 page 415). could result in an accident.
sionally test the effectiveness of the Observe additional messages in the multi-
brakes by applying above-normal braking function display that may appear
pressure at higher speeds. This will also (컄 page 449). ! When driving down long and steep grades,
enhance the grip of the brake pads. relieve the load on the brakes by shifting into a
Have the brake system inspected lower gear to use the engine’s braking power.
immediately. Contact an authorized This helps prevent overheating of the brakes and
Warning! G Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. reduces brake pad wear.
All checks and service work on the brake When using the engine’s braking power, a drive
Make sure not to endanger any other road wheel may not spin for an extended period of
system should be carried out by qualified
users when carrying out these braking time, e.g. on slippery road surfaces. This may
technicians only. Contact an authorized cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is
maneuvers.
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Only install brake pads and brake fluid Warranty.
Refer to the description of the Brake Assist
System (BAS) (컄 page 97). recommended by Mercedes-Benz. After hard braking, it is advisable to drive
on for some time, rather than immediately
park, so that the air stream will cool down
the brakes faster.
327
Operation
High-performance brake system Parking brake

(ML 63 AMG only) Warning! G When driving on wet roads or dirt covered
The high-performance brake system is de- New vehicle brake pads and discs, and surfaces, road salt and/or dirt can get into
signed to operate under the extremely high replacement brake pads and discs may take the parking brake. To prevent corrosion
operating demands required to accommo- several hundred miles of driving until they and a reduction in the braking power of the
date the performance capabilities of the provide optimum braking efficiency. Until parking brake, observe the following:
vehicle. The brakes may produce a squeak- that time, you may need to use increased 왘 From time to time, lightly engage the
ing-type noise depending on the brake pedal pressure while braking. Please parking brake before driving off.
앫 vehicle speed be aware of this and adjust your driving and
왘 Drive a distance of approximately
braking accordingly during this break-in
앫 brake force applied 110 yds (100 m) at a maximum speed
period.
of 12 mph (20 km/h).
앫 ambient conditions, e.g. temperature
Excessive high demand braking will cause
and humidity
correspondingly high brake wear. Please be
As with any brake system, the wear of indi- attentive to the brake warning lamp in the
Warning! G
vidual brake system components such as instrument cluster and brake condition mes-
While performing this procedure please
brake pads or disks strongly depends on sages in the multifunction display. Especial-
assure that the vehicle is stopped before
your driving style and the conditions under ly for high performance driving, it is
applying the parking brake. Otherwise the
which you operate the vehicle. Thus, a driv- important to maintain and have the brake
rear wheels could lock up. You could lose
ing style calling for high demand braking system checked regularly.
control of the vehicle and cause an accident.
will cause your vehicle’s brakes to wear
In addition, the vehicle’s brake lights do not
more quickly.
light up when the parking brake is engaged.
Make sure not to endanger any other road
users when you engage the parking brake.
328
Operation
Driving off Parking

앫 Turn the SmartKey to starter switch
position 0 and remove, or press
Apply the brakes to test them briefly after KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button (vehi-
driving off. Perform this procedure only Warning! G cles with KEYLESS-GO*).
when the road is clear of other traffic.
앫 Take the SmartKey or the SmartKey with
Do not park this vehicle in areas where com-
Warm up the engine smoothly. Do not KEYLESS-GO* with you and lock vehicle
bustible materials such as grass, hay or
place full load on the engine until the oper- when leaving.
leaves can come into contact with the hot
ating temperature has been reached.
exhaust system, as these materials could be
Tires
! When driving off on a slippery surface, do ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
not allow a drive wheel to spin for an extended
To reduce the risk of personal injury, or
period with the ESP® switched off. Doing so may
cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is damage to the vehicle drivetrain, as a result Warning! G
not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited of vehicle movement, before turning off the
Warranty. engine and leaving the vehicle always: If you feel a sudden significant vibration or
앫 Keep right foot on brake pedal. ride disturbance, or you suspect that possi-
! Simultaneously depressing the accelerator ble damage to your vehicle has occurred,
pedal and applying the brake reduces engine 앫 Firmly depress parking brake pedal.
performance and causes premature brake and you should turn on the hazard warning flash-
앫 Set the automatic transmission to ers, carefully slow down, and drive with cau-
drivetrain wear.
position P. tion to an area which is a safe distance from
앫 Slowly release brake pedal. the road.
앫 When parked on an incline, turn front Inspect the tires and the vehicle underbody
wheel towards the road curb. for possible damage. If the vehicle or tires
appear unsafe, have the vehicle towed to
the nearest Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center or tire dealer for repairs.
329
Operation
Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by Specified tire inflation pressures must be Hydroplaning
law. These indicators are located in six maintained. This applies particularly if the
places on the tread circumference and tires are subjected to high loads (e.g. high Depending on the depth of the water layer
become visible at a tread depth of speeds, heavy loads, high ambient temper- on the road, hydroplaning may occur, even
approximately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), at which atures). at low speeds and with new tires. Reduce
point the tire is considered worn and vehicle speed, avoid track grooves in the
road and apply brakes cautiously in the
should be replaced.
Warning! G rain.
The treadwear indicator appears as a solid
band across the tread. Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
Tire traction
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
Warning! G may lose control of the vehicle. Continued

driving with a flat tire or driving at high
The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or
icy road is always lower than on a dry road.
speed with a flat tire will cause excessive
Although the applicable federal motor
heat build-up and possibly a fire. You should pay particular attention to the
vehicle safety laws consider a tire to be
condition of the road whenever the outside
worn when the treadwear indicators (TWI)
temperatures are close to the freezing
become visible at approximately 1/16 in For more information, see “Tires and
point.
(1.6 mm), we recommend that you do not wheels” (컄 page 365).
allow your tires to wear down to that level.
As tread depth approaches 1/8 in (3 mm), Warning! G
the adhesion properties on a wet road are
sharply reduced. If ice has formed on the road, tire traction
will be substantially reduced. Under such
Depending upon the weather and/or road
weather conditions, drive, steer and brake
surface (conditions), the tire traction varies
with extreme caution.
widely.
330
Operation
Mercedes-Benz recommends winter tires Tire speed rating ML 320 CDI

(컄 page 399) with a minimum tread depth ML 350
of approximately 1/6 in (4 mm) on all four Regardless of the tire speed rating, local ML 500
wheels for the winter season to make sure speed limits should be obeyed. Use
Your vehicle is factory equipped with
normal balanced handling characteristics. prudent driving speeds appropriate to pre-
“H”-rated tires, which have a speed rating
On packed snow, they can reduce your vailing conditions.
of 130 mph (210 km/h).
stopping distance compared to summer
tires. Warning! G An electronic speed limiter prevents your
vehicle from exceeding a speed of
Stopping distance, however, is still consid- 130 mph (210 km/h).
erably greater than when the road is not Even when permitted by law, never operate
covered with snow or ice. Exercise appro- a vehicle at speeds greater than the maxi-
ML 320 CDI (with Sport Package*)
priate caution. mum speed rating of the tires.
ML 350 (with Sport Package*)
Exceeding the maximum speed for which
! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel. This may ML 500 (with Sport Package*)
cause serious damage to the drivetrain which is tires are rated can lead to sudden tire
failure, causing loss of vehicle control and Your vehicle is factory equipped with:
not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty. possibly resulting in an accident and/or 앫 “H”-rated tires, which have a speed rat-
serious injury and possible death, for you ing of 130 mph (210 km/h), vehicles
and for others. with same size tires (컄 page 537)
앫 “W”-rated tires, which have a speed
rating of 168 mph (270 km/h)
An electronic speed limiter prevents your
vehicle from exceeding a speed of
130 mph (210 km/h).
331
Operation
ML 63 AMG Winter driving instructions Road salts and chemicals can adversely af-
fect braking efficiency. Increased pedal
Your vehicle is factory equipped with
The most important rule for slippery or icy force may become necessary to produce
“Y”-rated tires, which have a speed rating
roads is to drive sensibly and to avoid the normal brake effect.
of 186 mph (300 km/h).
abrupt acceleration, braking and steering
Depressing the brake pedal periodically
An electronic speed limiter prevents your maneuvers. Do not use the cruise control
when traveling at length on salt-strewn
vehicle from exceeding a speed of system under such conditions.
roads can bring road-salt-impaired braking
155 mph (250 km/h).
When the vehicle is in danger of skidding, efficiency back to normal.
shift the automatic transmission to
ML 63 AMG with increased top speed* If the vehicle is parked after being driven
position N. Try to keep the vehicle under
on salt-treated roads, the braking efficien-
Your vehicle is factory equipped with control by corrective steering action.
cy should be tested as soon as possible af-
“Y”-rated tires, which have a speed rating
of 186 mph (300 km/h). i For information on driving with snow chains, ter driving is resumed.
see “Snow chains” (컄 page 400).
An electronic speed limiter prevents your
vehicle from exceeding a speed of Warning! G
171 mph (275 km/h).
Warning! G
Make sure not to endanger any other road
i For information on speed ratings for winter On slippery road surfaces, never downshift users when carrying out these braking
tires, see “Winter tires” (컄 page 399). in order to obtain braking action. This could maneuvers.
For additional general information on tire speed result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehi-
markings on the tire sidewall, see “Tire speed cle control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not pre-
rating” (컄 page 397). vent this type of control loss.
332
Operation
Standing water For more information, see “Driving through

Warning! G water” (컄 page 338).
! Do not drive through flooded areas or water
If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, make of unknown depth. Before driving through water, Off-road driving
sure that snow is kept clear of the exhaust determine its depth. Never accelerate before
pipe and from around the vehicle with the driving into water. The bow wave could force wa-
engine running. Otherwise, deadly carbon ter into the engine and auxiliary equipment, thus
damaging them.
Warning! G
monoxide (CO) gases may enter vehicle in-
terior resulting in unconsciousness and If you must drive through standing water, drive Do not load items on the basic carrier bars*.
death. slowly to prevent water from entering the pas- It may cause instability during some maneu-
senger compartment or the engine compart-
To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation, vers which could result in an accident.
ment.
open a window slightly on the side of the ve- Water in these areas could cause Drive slowly in unknown terrain. This will
hicle not facing the wind. 앫 damage to electrical components make it easier to recognize unexpected ob-
앫 wiring of the engine or transmission stacles and avoid damage to the vehicle.
To help avoid the vehicle rolling over, never
Warning! G or could result
turn it around on steep inclines. If the vehi-
앫 in water being ingested by the engine
through the air intake, causing severe inter- cle cannot complete the attempted climb,
The outside temperature indicator is not de- back it down in reverse gear.
nal engine damage.
signed to serve as an ice-warning device and
is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. In- Any such damage is not covered by the Do not drive along the side of a slope. The
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. vehicle might otherwise rollover. If in doing
dicated temperatures just above the freez-
so the vehicle begins to show a tendency to
ing point do not guarantee that the road i Vehicles with air suspension package*: roll, immediately steer into a line of gravity
surface is free of ice.
Select the raised level (컄 page 270) before (straight up or downhill). 컄컄
driving through standing water.
For more information, see “Winter driving”
(컄 page 399).
333
Operation
컄컄 Special driving features for off-road

Never let the vehicle roll backwards in idle.
You may lose control of the vehicle if you
Warning! G driving
use only the service brake. For information Vehicles with air suspension package*: The following driving features are available
on driving downhill, see “Driving downhill” for specific kind of operation:
(컄 page 338). Please be aware that by raising the vehicle
level, the center of gravity also rises. There- 앫 Off-road – ABS (컄 page 97)
fore, always ensure that the vehicle level is 앫 Off-road – ESP® (컄 page 101)
Warning! G as low as possible. With higher ride height
앫 Off-road – 4-ETS (컄 page 102)
the ESP® may activate earlier in certain
Sand, dirt, mud and other material having situations. 앫 Hill start assist system (컄 page 192)
friction property can cause exceptional wear 앫 Downhill Speed Regulation (DSR)
and tear as well as brake failure. Read this chapter carefully before you be- (컄 page 264)
Have the brakes checked for dirt build-up gin off-road travel.
앫 Off-road driving program (컄 page 268)
and cleaned. There is otherwise a risk that Familiarize yourself with the vehicle char-
앫 Air suspension* (컄 page 269)
full braking power may not be available in an acteristics and gear changing before you
emergency. attempt any difficult terrain off-road driv-
ing. We recommend that you start out with
easy off-road travel.
334
Operation
Off-road driving rules ! Observe the following during off-road 앫 In sandy soil, drive at a steady speed as al-
driving: lowed by conditions. This helps overcome
앫 Engage the off-road driving program the vehicle rolling resistance and reduces
(컄 page 268) before driving under 앫 Keep doors, tailgate, windows, and the likelihood of the vehicle sinking into the
off-road conditions. tilt/sliding sunroof* closed whenever driving ground.
off-road.
앫 Vehicles with air suspension package*: 앫 Do not initiate jumps with the vehicle. It
앫 Adjust vehicle speed to condition of terrain.
Make sure you select a vehicle level interrupts the forward momentum of the
The more uneven, rutty and steeper the ter- vehicle.
(컄 page 270) appropriate to the topo- rain, the lower the speed should be. Drive
graphical conditions. Always make through water slowly at an even speed, 앫 Always drive onto slopes with the engine
sure the vehicle has enough ground avoiding a bow wave. running and the vehicle in gear.
clearance. 앫 Be especially careful when driving in un- 앫 Do not shift automatic transmission to
known territory. It may be necessary to get position N.
앫 Fasten items being carried as securely out of the vehicle and scout the path you in-
as possible (컄 page 281). tend to take. Warning! G
앫 Always navigate gradients with the en- 앫 Watch out for obstacles, such as rocks,
gine on and with the transmission en- holes, tree stumps and ruts. Do not reduce the tire inflation pressure
gaged in a gear. Switch on the DSR 앫 Before driving through water, determine its before driving through sand. However, if you
(컄 page 265) to help maintain a preset depth. do so, remember to correct the tire inflation
speed. 앫 Do not stop vehicle while immersed in water, pressure (컄 page 375) before continuing
and do not shut off the engine. your trip. Driving with reduced tire inflation
pressure increases the risk of losing control
of the vehicle and rolling over.
335
Operation
Checklist before off-road driving Tires Driving in steep terrain

앫 Check the tread depth and maintain
Engine oil level
specified tire inflation pressure
앫 Check the engine oil level with the (a placard with the recommended tire
control system (ML 500 only) inflation pressures is located on the
(컄 page 358), or with the oil dipstick driver’s door B-pillar (컄 page 369)).
(except ML 500) (컄 page 360).
앫 Check tires for possible damage and
Only with a proper oil level can the remove foreign objects.
vehicle obtain a trouble-free oil supply,
앫 Replace missing valve caps.
even on steep gradients.
! If the engine oil level warning lamp Rims Slope angle
(컄 page 453) comes on while driving, stop the 1 Overhang angle, front
앫 Dented or bent rims can cause tire in-
vehicle in a safe location or as soon at is safe to 2 Overhang angle, rear
do so. Check the engine oil level (컄 page 360). flation pressure loss and damage the
tire beads. For this reason, check and,
The engine oil level warnings should not be
if necessary, change rims before driv- Vehicles with 1 11 2
ignored. Extended driving with the symbol steel suspen-
displayed could result in serious engine damage ing off-road.
sion
that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty. Vehicle tool kit 31° 22° 29°
1
앫 Check if the vehicle jack (컄 page 471) Vehicles with AMG Sport-Package*
is functional.
앫 In all cases take the vehicle tool kit, a
strong tow rope, a shovel and a small
plank (to put under the vehicle jack on
sandy soil) with you.
336
Operation
앫 Shift automatic transmission to i The hill start assist system supports you
Vehicles with air 1 11 2
suspension position 1 (컄 page 193). when driving uphill.
package* 앫 Drive slowly. For more information, see “Hill start assist sys-
tem” (컄 page 192).
Raised level 34° 29° 31° 앫 Avoid excessive engine speeds – drive
Highway 29° 22° 27° with moderate engine speeds Traction in steep terrain
1 (max. 3000 rpm).
Vehicles with AMG Sport-Package* The maximum vehicle climbing ability is a
앫 Utilize the engine’s braking power 100% grade which is equivalent to a slope
when descending a slope, observe the angle of 45 degrees. Keep in mind that the
ML 63 AMG 1 2
engine speed (do not overrev the en- climbing ability of the vehicle depends on
Raised level 28° 29° gine). Apply the service brake as need- terrain conditions.
Highway 23° 24° ed.
Be easy on the accelerator and watch for
i For maximum engine speed, see “Instru- continuous wheel traction when driving in
앫 Comply with the warnings ment cluster” (컄 page 26) and see “Engine” steep terrain.
(컄 page 333) and rules for off-road (컄 page 534).
driving (컄 page 335). 앫 Check the brakes after a lengthy down-
i The 4-ETS helps greatly when starting out on
a steep incline when the front wheels have then
앫 Driving on embankments, slopes and grade drive. the tendency to slip due to the weight shifting
other steep inclines should only be towards the rear axle.
done straight up or downhill, i.e. in the Warning! G The 4-ETS recognizes the situation and limits the
torque for the front wheels by braking them.
line of gravity. Maximum vehicle climb-
ing ability is a 100% grade which is Simultaneously the torque for the rear wheels is
To help avoid the vehicle rolling over, never increased.
equivalent to a slope angle of turn it around on steep inclines. If the vehi-
45 degrees. Keep in mind that the cle cannot complete the attempted climb,
climbing ability of the vehicle depends back it down in reverse gear.
on terrain conditions.
337
Operation
Driving across a hilltop 앫 Shift automatic transmission to Driving through water

position 1 (컄 page 193).
Decelerate just ahead of a hilltop (do not
shift automatic transmission to 앫 On steep inclines, use the Downhill
position N), to prevent the vehicle from Speed Regulation (컄 page 264).
speeding up too much after climbing a hill.
앫 Utilize the engine’s braking power to
Use the momentum of the vehicle to drive reduce vehicle speed.
across the hilltop.
If this is insufficient, apply the brakes
After climbing a hill, driving in this manner gently. Make sure the vehicle is moving
prevents the vehicle from: in the line of gravity.
앫 losing ground contact when cresting 앫 Check the brakes after a lengthy down-
1 Fording depth
hills grade drive.
앫 losing its forward momentum i The special Off-road – ABS (컄 page 97) set- Vehicles with steel 1
ting allows for precise and brief (cyclical) block- suspension
앫 speeding up too much after climbing
ing of the front wheels, permitting them to dig
the hill 20.00 in (50 cm)
into loose ground.
Remember that, when stopped, the front wheels
Driving downhill Vehicles with air 1
slide across a surface and thus lose their ability
앫 Drive slowly. to steer the vehicle. suspension
package* or
앫 Do not drive at an angle to the incline.
ML 63 AMG
Steer into the line of gravity and drive
with the front wheels pointing straight Raised level 20.00 in (50 cm)
downhill. Otherwise, the vehicle may
slide sideways off the path and roll
over.
338
Operation
앫 Before driving through water, deter- 앫 Drive through the water slowly and at a Crossing obstacles
mine its depth. constant speed.
! The water depth must not exceed the 앫 Do not stop vehicle while immersed in
respective value listed in the table. The ground water, and do not shut off the engine.
under the water might not be firm which could
result the water being deeper than expected ! Do not open any of the vehicle’s doors while
when driving the vehicle through it. Please note driving through water. Water could otherwise en-
that the water level is correspondingly lower for ter the vehicle interior and damage the vehicle’s
flowing water. electronics, as well as the interior equipment.
앫 Vehicles with air suspension package*: 앫 There is a very high level of driving re-
Select the highest vehicle level sistance in water. The surface is slip-
possible (컄 page 270). pery and may not be firm, making ! Obstacles can damage the vehicle
pulling away in water difficult and dan- underbody or suspension components. If possi-
앫 Switch to off-road driving program ble use the assistance of a second person out-
gerous.
(컄 page 268) before driving through side the vehicle to scout the path you intend to
water. 앫 Make sure that only small bow waves take and check for adequate ground clearance
are formed when driving the vehicle when you cross obstacles with your vehicle. The
앫 Shift automatic transmission to through water. person assisting you outside the vehicle should
position 1 or 2 (컄 page 193). always be a safe distance away from the vehicle
앫 Clean mud off the tire tread after driv- and positioned so that he or she cannot get hurt
앫 Avoid high engine speeds. ing through water. in case of any unexpected vehicle movement.
앫 Enter and leave the water only at a 앫 To dry the brakes, apply pressure to the After off-road driving or crossing obstacles, in-
shallow spot, driving at walking speed. brake pedal several times while driving spect vehicle for any damage, especially vehicle
after leaving the water. underbody and suspension components. Failure
! Never accelerate before driving into the to do so can adversely affect the vehicle’s future
water. The bow wave could force water into the
performance, including increased chance of an
engine and auxiliary equipment, thus damaging
accident.
them.
339
Operation
When driving over tree stumps, big rocks Driving on sand 앫 In sandy soil, drive at a steady speed as
and other obstacles, observe the following allowed by conditions. This helps over-
rules:
Warning! G come the vehicle rolling resistance and
reduce the likelihood of the vehicle
앫 Make sure the off-road driving program
sinking into the ground.
(컄 page 268) is switched on. Do not reduce the tire inflation pressure
before driving through sand. However, if you 앫 Drive in tracks of other vehicles if they
앫 Avoid high engine speeds.
do so, remember to correct the tire inflation are not too deep and if you have suffi-
앫 Shift automatic transmission to pressure (컄 page 375) before continuing cient clearance.
position 1 (컄 page 193). your trip. Driving with reduced tire inflation
앫 Check the vehicle clearance before pressure increases the risk of losing control Ruts
crossing obstacles. of the vehicle and rolling over.
A number of off-road tracks or other by-
앫 Cross obstacles (e.g. tree stumps or ways have deep ruts which can cause the
big rocks) very slowly by aiming one of When driving on sand, observe the follow- underbody to come in contact with the
ing rules: ground.
the front wheels at the center of the ob-
stacle, and repeat same with the rear 앫 Vehicles with air suspension package*: 앫 Make sure the off-road driving program
wheel. Set the raised level (컄 page 270). (컄 page 268) is switched on.
! Special attention is needed when you cross 앫 Avoid high engine speeds. 앫 Vehicles with air suspension package*:
obstacles on a steep incline. Set the raised level (컄 page 270).
앫 Shift automatic transmission into a
The vehicle could slide sideways as a result of its gear range that is appropriate for the
possible slanted position which in turn may terrain.
result in the vehicle tipping or rolling over.
340
Operation
! Check that the ruts are not too deep and Returning from off-road driving Off-road driving increases strain on the
your vehicle’s clearance is sufficient. Otherwise: vehicle.
앫 your vehicle may be damaged Warning! G We recommend that you inspect the vehi-
앫 the underbody of the vehicle may come in cle for possible damage after each off-road
contact with the ground and you may get If you feel a sudden significant vibration or trip. Recognizing any damage and a subse-
stuck ride disturbance, or you suspect that possi- quent timely repair reduces the chance of
앫 Avoid high engine speeds. ble damage to your vehicle has occurred, a possible breakdown or accident later on.
you should turn on the hazard warning flash-
앫 Shift automatic transmission to Proceed as follows:
ers, carefully slow down, and drive with cau-
position 1 (컄 page 193). tion to an area which is a safe distance from 앫 Switch off the off-road driving program
앫 Drive next to the ruts rather than the roadway. (컄 page 268).
through them if at all possible. Inspect the tires and under the vehicle for 앫 Switch off the DSR (컄 page 265).
앫 If the ruts are too deep to drive in, drive possible damage. If the vehicle or tires ap-
앫 Vehicles with air suspension package*:
with one side of the vehicle on the pear unsafe, have it towed to the nearest
Lower the vehicle back to a level
grassy center strip if the route permits. Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center or tire
suitable for road conditions, e.g. High-
dealer for repairs.
way/High-speed level (컄 page 270).
Damage to the vehicle may influence driving
앫 Clean all exterior lamps and check for
comfort and pose the risk of accident to you
possible damage.
and other drivers.
앫 Clean the front and rear license plate.
341
Operation
앫 Remove excessive dirt from tires, Trailer towing Trailer hitch*

wheels, wheel housings, and under-
앫 Only install a trailer hitch receiver ap-
body.
For instance, after driving in mud, clean
Warning! G proved for your vehicle.
For information on availability and in-
the radiator, chassis, engine, brakes,
Failure to use proper equipment and driving stallation, see an authorized
and wheels from extreme dirt using a
technique can result in a loss of vehicle con- Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
strong jet of water.
trol when towing a trailer.
앫 The bumpers on your vehicle are not
앫 Check tires for possible damage. Improper towing or failure to follow the in- designed for use with clamp-type hitch-
앫 Inspect vehicle underbody, oil pan, structions in this manual can result in vehi- es.
brake hoses, etc., as well as vehicle un- cle damage and/or serious personal injury.
Do not attach rental hitches or other
derbody for possible damage. Follow the guidelines below carefully to as-
bumper-type hitches to them.
sure safe trailer operation.
앫 Check for brush or branches caught in
앫 To reduce the possibility of damage, re-
the underbody. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center should you require an explana-
move the hitch ball adaptor from the
! Brush or branches could increase the possi- tion of information contained in this manual.
receiver when not in use.
bility of a fire, as well as cut fuel and/or brake
lines, puncture rubber bellows of the axles or
drive shafts.
앫 After continued operation in mud,
sand, water or other dirty conditions
clean the brake discs, wheels, brake
pads and check and clean axle joints.
앫 Conduct a brake test.
342
Operation
Electrical connections Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) is the Loading a trailer
maximum permissible axle weight:
The vehicle is prewired to accept the 앫 When loading a trailer, you should ob-
seven-wire harness included in the serve that neither the permissible GTW,
ML 350, ML 500 ML 63
Mercedes-Benz approved trailer hitch nor the GVWR are exceeded.
ML 320 AMG
receiver kit.
CDI Maximum permissible values are listed
i A four-pole conversion plug is available from on the safety compliance certification
Front 2943 lbs 2987 lbs 3175 lbs
your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck labels for the vehicle and for the trailer
(1335 kg) (1355 kg) (1440 kg)
Center as a spare part. to be towed.
Rear 3296 lbs 3252 lbs 3527 lbs The lowest value listed must be select-
For further information, see an authorized
(1495 kg) (1475 kg) (1600 kg) ed when determining how the vehicle
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
and trailer are loaded.
The Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) is the
Vehicle and trailer weights and ratings 앫 The tongue weight at the hitch ball
weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) is the must be added to the GVW to prevent
cargo, equipment, luggage etc. loaded on
maximum permissible vehicle weight: exceeding your Mercedes-Benz tow
the trailer. The maximum permissible
vehicle’s rear GAWR.
ML 350, ML 500, ML 320 CDI: gross trailer weight to be towed:
6239 lbs (2830 kg) 4982 lbs (2260 kg) i We recommend loading the trailer in such a
manner that it has a Tongue Weight (TW)
ML 63 AMG: Trailer Tongue Weight Rating (TWR) is the between 10% and 15% of the Gross Trailer
6393 lbs (2900 kg) maximum permissible weight on the trailer Weight (GTW).
tongue:
Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW): 496 lbs (225 kg) limit for Mercedes-Benz i Maximum trailer ratings are calculated as-
Comprises weight of vehicle including fuel, approved hitch receiver. suming a base vehicle, plus any options neces-
tools, spare wheel, installed accessories, sary to achieve the rating, plus driver. The weight
passengers, cargo and trailer tongue. It of other equipment, passengers and cargo will
must never exceed the GVWR. reduce the maximum trailer weight your vehicle
can tow.
343
Operation
Checking weights of vehicle and trailer Attaching a trailer Observe maximum permitted trailer
dimensions (width and length).
앫 To assure that the tow vehicle and trail-
er are in compliance with the maximum Warning! G Most states and all Canadian provinces
permissible weight limits have the load- require
ed rig (tow vehicle including driver, pas- While you are coupling or decoupling a trail-
앫 safety chains between your tow vehicle
sengers and cargo, trailer fully loaded) er, make sure that you do not
and the trailer.
weighed on a commercial scale. 앫 lock or unlock
The chains should be criss-crossed
앫 Check the vehicle’s front and rear 앫 open or close under the trailer tongue. They must be
Gross Axle Weight (GAW), the Gross a vehicle door or the tailgate. attached to the hitch receiver, and not
Trailer Weight (GTW) and Tongue The vehicle’s level could change and you to the vehicle’s bumper or axle.
Weight (TW). could endanger yourself and/or others as a
Make sure to leave enough slack in the
The values as measures must not result.
chains to permit turning corners.
exceed the weight limits listed under Make sure that you do not operate the ADS
“Vehicle and trailer weight and ratings” 앫 a separate brake system at various
button* (컄 page 269) or the vehicle level
(컄 page 343). trailer weights.
control system* (컄 page 270) when cou-
pling/decoupling the trailer. 앫 a break-away switch on trailers with a
separate brake system. Check with
your local state laws for specific
requirements.
The switch activates the trailer brakes
in the possible event that the trailer
might separate from the tow vehicle.
344
Operation
! Do not connect a trailer brake system (if 왘 Vehicles with air suspension package*: Towing a trailer
trailer is so equipped) directly to the vehicle’s Set the ADS* to AUTO or COMFORT
There are many different laws, including
hydraulic brake system, as your vehicle is (컄 page 269).
equipped with antilock brakes. If you do, neither speed limit restrictions, having to do with
the vehicle’s brakes nor the trailer’s brakes will 왘 Turn off the engine (컄 page 66). trailer towing. Make sure your rig will be le-
function properly. gal, not only for where you reside, but also
왘 Close all doors and the tailgate.
for where you will be driving. A good
i The provided vehicle electrical wiring 왘 Attach the trailer. source for this information can be the po-
harness for trailer towing has a brake signal wire
왘 Plug in all electrical connectors. lice or local authorities.
for hook-up to a brake controller.
Note the following points, when driving
You should consider using a trailer sway control i Vehicles with air suspension package*:
system. For further information, see an with the trailer:
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. When you are towing a trailer, the vehicle level
always remains in the Highway setting. 앫 In order to gain skill and an under-
왘 Make sure the automatic transmission The following applies additionally when towing a standing of the vehicle’s behavior, you
is set to P (컄 page 187). trailer: should practice turning, stopping and
왘 Set the parking brake for the vehicle 앫 The vehicle is lowered to the highway level backing up in an area which is free from
(컄 page 65). when it reaches a speed of 5 mph (8 km/h) traffic.
if not set to highway level. 앫 Before you start driving check the
앫 The high-speed level is not available.
앫 trailer hitch
왘 Vehicles with air suspension package*: The restrictions that apply to towing also apply
Set the vehicle level to Highway when using accessories that are connected to 앫 break-away switch
(컄 page 270). the trailer power socket, such as a bicycle rack.
앫 safety chains
앫 electrical connections
앫 lighting and tires
345
Operation
앫 Adjust the mirrors (컄 page 49) to 앫 The vehicle and trailer combination is 앫 On very steep inclines, not manageable
permit unobstructed view beyond rear heavier, and therefore is limited in ac- with automatic transmission in 1,
of trailer. celeration and climbing ability, and re- switch on off-road driving program
quires longer stopping distances. (컄 page 268).
앫 If the trailer has electric brakes, start
your vehicle and trailer moving slowly, It is more prone to reacting to cross 앫 When going down a long hill, shift into
and then apply only the trailer brake wind gusts, and requires more sensi- a lower gear and use the engine’s brak-
controller by hand to make sure the tive steering input. ing effect.
brakes are working properly.
앫 If possible, do not brake abruptly, but Avoid riding the brakes, thus overheat-
앫 Always secure items in the trailer to rather engage the brake slightly at first ing the vehicle and trailer brakes.
prevent load shifts while driving. to permit the trailer to activate its
앫 If the engine coolant rises to an ex-
brake. Then increase the braking force.
앫 When towing a trailer, check occasion- tremely high temperature (coolant tem-
ally to make sure the load is secure, ! If the trailer should begin to sway, reduce perature needle approaching the red
and that lighting and trailer brakes (if the vehicle’s speed immediately. zone) when the air conditioning is on,
so equipped) are functioning properly. In no case attempt to straighten out the tow turn off the air conditioning system.
앫 Take into consideration that when tow- vehicle and trailer by increasing the speed. Engine coolant heat can be additionally
ing a trailer, the handling characteris- 앫 If the transmission repeatedly shifts vented by opening the windows,
tics are different and less stable from between gears on inclines, manually switching the climate control fan speed
those when operating the vehicle with- shift to a lower gear (select 4, 3, 2 or 1) to high and setting the temperature
out a trailer. (컄 page 193). control to the maximum hot position.
It is important to avoid sudden maneu- A lower gear and reduction of speed re-
vers. duces the chance of engine overload-
ing and/or overheating.
346
Operation
앫 Extreme care must be exercised since Uncoupling the trailer 왘 Start the engine (컄 page 54).
your vehicle with a trailer will require
왘 Close all doors and the tailgate.
additional passing distance ahead than
when driving without a trailer.
Warning! G 왘 Set the parking brake for the trailer.
Because your vehicle and trailer is Vehicles with air suspension package*:
longer than your vehicle alone, you will While you are coupling or decoupling a trail-
Warning! G
also need to go much farther ahead of er, make sure that you do not
the passed vehicle before you can re- Vehicles with air suspension package*:
앫 lock or unlock
turn to your lane. As soon as you disconnect the electrical
앫 open or close connection between the trailer and the
a vehicle door or the tailgate. vehicle, the vehicle will lower. To help avoid
The vehicle’s level could change and you personal injury, make sure no one is near
could endanger yourself and/or others as a the wheel housing or underneath the vehicle
result. before the electrical connection is discon-
Make sure that you do not operate the ADS nected.
button* (컄 page 269) or the vehicle level When you uncouple the trailer, the vehicle is
control system* (컄 page 270) when cou- temporarily raised because the springs are
pling/decoupling the trailer. relieved of load. Be especially careful during
this process, as you could otherwise injure
왘 Make sure the automatic transmission yourself and/or others. Make sure that any
is set to P (컄 page 187). persons remaining in the vehicle do not
press the switches for vehicle level control
왘 Set the parking brake for the vehicle or the ADS*.
(컄 page 65).
347
Operation
왘 Disconnect all electrical plug connec- Control and operation of radio

The rear cargo compartment is the preferred
tors. transmitters
place to carry objects. Always use tie down
왘 Uncouple the trailer. rings, and if so equipped, always use parti-
왘 Make sure that the trailer coupling is tion net* when transporting cargo. The par- COMAND system, radio and telephone*
tition net* cannot secure hard or heavy
free of load.
왘 Turn off the engine (컄 page 66).
objects. Always fasten items being carried
as securely as possible using the cargo
Warning! G
tie-down rings in the cargo floor area and
Do not forget that your primary responsibili-
Passenger compartment fastening materials.
ty is to drive the vehicle. Only operate the
COMAND system, radio or telephone1 if
Driving abroad
Warning! G road, weather and traffic conditions permit.
Abroad, there is an extensive Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph

Always fasten items being carried as secure- (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
Mercedes-Benz service network at your
ly as possible. covering a distance of 44 feet (approximate-
disposal. If you plan to drive into areas
In an accident, during hard braking or sud- which are not listed in the index of your ly 14 m) every second.
den maneuvers, loose items will be thrown Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center 1 Observe all legal requirements.
around inside the vehicle, and cause injury directory, you should request pertinent
to vehicle occupants unless the items are information from an authorized
securely fastened in the vehicle. Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
348
Operation
Telephones and two-way radios Catalytic converter (gasoline engine)

Warning! G
Your Mercedes-Benz is equipped with
Warning! G monolithic-type catalytic converters, an As with any vehicle, do not idle, park or op-
important element in conjunction with the erate this vehicle in areas where combusti-
Never operate radio transmitters equipped
oxygen sensors to achieve substantial con- ble materials such as grass, hay or leaves
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. with-
trol of the pollutants in the exhaust emis- can come into contact with the hot exhaust
out being connected to an external antenna)
sions. Keep your vehicle in proper system, as these materials could be ignited
from inside the vehicle while the engine is
operating condition by following our rec- and cause a vehicle fire.
running. Doing so could lead to a malfunc-
ommended maintenance instructions as
tion of the vehicle’s electronic system,
outlined in your Maintenance Booklet. Oxidation catalyst (diesel engine)
possibly resulting in an accident and/or
personal injury. ! To prevent damage to the catalytic convert- Your vehicle is equipped with an oxidation
ers, use only premium unleaded gasoline in this
vehicle. catalyst, an important element in conjunc-
Radio transmitters, such as a portable tion with the oxygen sensors to achieve
telephone or a citizens band unit should Any noticeable irregularities in engine operation
should be repaired promptly. Otherwise, exces- substantial control of the pollutants in the
only be used inside the vehicle if they are exhaust emissions. Keep your vehicle in
sive unburned fuel may reach the catalytic con-
connected to an antenna that is installed verter, causing it to overheat and potentially proper operating condition by following
on the outside of the vehicle. start a fire. our recommended maintenance instruc-
Refer to the radio transmitter operation tions as outlined in your Maintenance
instructions regarding use of an external Booklet.
antenna.
349
Operation
Engine adjustments should not be altered Coolant temperature

Warning! G in any way. Moreover, the specified service
jobs must be carried out regularly accord- During severe operating conditions,
As with any vehicle, do not idle, park or op- ing to Mercedes-Benz servicing require- e.g. stop-and-go traffic, the coolant tem-
erate this vehicle in areas where combusti- ments. For details refer to the perature may rise close to approximately
ble materials such as grass, hay or leaves Maintenance Booklet. 248°F (120°C).
can come into contact with the hot exhaust
The engine should not be operated with
system, as these materials could be ignited
and cause a vehicle fire. Warning! G the coolant temperature above 248°F
(120°C). Doing so may cause serious en-
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to gine damage which is not covered by the
Emission control your health. All exhaust gas contains carbon Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause un-
Certain engine systems serve to keep the consciousness and possible death.
toxic components of the exhaust gases
within permissible limits required by law. Do not run the engine in confined areas
(such as a garage) which are not properly
These systems, of course, will function ventilated. If you think that exhaust gas
properly only when maintained strictly ac- fumes are entering the vehicle while driving,
cording to factory specifications. Any ad- have the cause determined and corrected
justments on the engine should, therefore, immediately. If you must drive under these
be carried out only by qualified conditions, drive only with at least one win-
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center autho- dow fully open at all times.
rized technicians.
350
Operation
Warning! G
앫 Driving when your engine is overheated
can cause some fluids, which may have
leaked into the engine compartment to
catch fire. You could be seriously
burned.
앫 Steam from an overheated engine can
cause serious burns which can occur
just by opening the engine hood. Stay
away from the engine if you see or hear
steam coming from it.
Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle
and do not stand near the vehicle until the
engine has cooled down.
351
Operation
At the gas station
Refueling
Warning! G
Warning! G Do not fill diesel tanks with gasoline. Do not
mix diesel fuel with gasoline. Otherwise the
Gasoline and diesel fuels are highly flamma- fuel system and engine could be damaged.
ble and poisonous. They burn violently and In addition, the vehicle could catch fire.
can cause serious injury.
Never allow sparks, flame or smoking mate- ! Damage resulting from mixing gasoline with
rials near gasoline or diesel fuel! diesel is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty. 왘 Turn off the engine
Turn off the engine before refueling.
The fuel filler flap is located on the 앫 by turning the SmartKey to
Whenever you are around gasoline or diesel
fuel, avoid inhaling fumes and skin or cloth-
right-hand side of the vehicle towards the position 0 (컄 page 40). Remove the
rear. Locking/unlocking the vehicle with SmartKey from the starter switch.
ing contact, extinguish all smoking materi-
the SmartKey or the SmartKey with
als. 앫 by pressing the KEYLESS-GO*
KEYLESS-GO* automatically
Direct skin contact with gasoline or diesel start/stop button (컄 page 41).
locks/unlocks the fuel filler flap.
fuels and the inhalation of gasoline or diesel Open the driver’s door (with the
fuel vapors can damage your health. ! Diesel engine: When filling the diesel fuel driver’s door open, starter switch is
tank using fuel containers, place a filling filter, a now in position 0, same as
suede cloth or a clean flannel cloth as a filter. SmartKey removed from starter
Otherwise, particles from the fuel container switch).
could clog the fuel lines and/or the diesel injec-
tion system. 왘 Briefly push on fuel filler flap at the po-
sition indicated by the arrow.
The fuel filler flap opens slightly.
352
Operation
At the gas station
왘 Open the fuel filler flap completely. 왘 Replace the fuel cap by turning it i Diesel engine: Only use commercially avail-
clockwise until it audibly engages. able vehicular diesel fuels No. 2 or No. 1 (ASTM
왘 Turn the fuel cap to the left and hold on
D975 No. 2-D or No. 1-D). Information on diesel
to it until possible pressure is released. 왘 Close the fuel filler flap. quality can normally be found on the fuel pump.
왘 Take off the fuel cap. You should hear the latch close shut. The sulfur content in diesel fuel should not
exceed 50 parts per million (ppm). When using
! The fuel filler cap is tethered to the fuel filler i Leaving the engine running and the fuel cap diesel fuel with a sulfur content of above
neck. Do not drop the cap. It could damage the open can cause the yellow fuel tank reserve 300 ppm, the engine oil interval should be
vehicle paint finish. warning lamp to flash and the ? malfunction shortened.
indicator lamp (USA only) or the ± malfunc-
왘 To prevent fuel vapors from escaping tion indicator lamp (Canada only) comes on. For more information on diesel fuels, refer to the
into open air, fully insert filler nozzle Factory Approved Service Products pamphlet or
For more information, see “Practical hints” contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
unit. (컄 page 417). Truck Center.
왘 Only fill your tank until the filler nozzle
unit cuts out – do not top up or over- i Gasoline engine: Only use premium unlead- ! Diesel engine:
ed gasoline with a minimum Posted Octane Rat-
fill. ing of 91 (average of 96 RON/86 MON). The engine is more susceptible to wear and
Information on gasoline quality can normally be damage if you use
Warning! G found on the fuel pump. 앫 marine diesel fuel
For more information on gasoline, see “Premium 앫 heating oil
Overfilling of the fuel tank may create pres- unleaded gasoline (gasoline engine)”
앫 additives
sure in the system which could cause a gas (컄 page 547), see “Fuel requirements”
(컄 page 548), and the Factory Approved Service The use of such non-approved fuels and/or
discharge. This could cause the gas to spray special additives is not covered by the
Products pamphlet.
back out when removing the fuel pump noz- Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
zle, which could cause personal injury.
353
Operation
At the gas station
Low outside temperatures Check regularly and before a long trip Brake fluid
(diesel engine)
왘 Open the hood (컄 page 356). ! If you find that the brake fluid in the brake
To prevent malfunctions, diesel fuel with fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or
improved cold flow characteristics is of- below, have the brake system checked for brake
fered in the winter months. Check with pad thickness and leaks immediately. Notify an
your fuel retailer. authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center
immediately. Do not add brake fluid as this will
! Do not fill the tank with gasoline. Do not not solve the problem. For more information, see
blend diesel fuel with gasoline or kerosine. The “Brake fluid” (컄 page 546).
fuel system and engine will otherwise be dam-
aged, which is not covered by the Coolant
For normal replenishing, use water (pota-
ble water quality).
Example ML 500
For more information, see “Coolant level”
1 Brake fluid (컄 page 362) and see “Fuels, coolants, lu-
2 Coolant level bricants” (컄 page 543).
3 Windshield washer system and
headlamp cleaning system*
Engine oil level

For more information on engine oil, see
“Engine oil” (컄 page 358).
354
Operation
At the gas station
Windshield/rear window washer

system and headlamp cleaning
system*
For more information on refilling the wash-
er reservoir, see “Windshield/rear window
system*” (컄 page 363).
Vehicle lighting
Check function and cleanliness. For infor-
mation on replacing light bulbs, see “Re-
placing bulbs” (컄 page 482).
For more information, see “Exterior lamp
switch” (컄 page 136).
Tire inflation pressure

For more information, see “Checking tire
inflation pressure” (컄 page 375).
355
Operation
Engine compartment
Hood
Warning! G You could be injured when the hood is open Vehicles with gasoline engine:
– even when the engine is turned off. The engine is equipped with a transistorized
Do not pull the release lever while the vehi- Parts of the engine can become very hot. To ignition system. Because of the high voltage
cle is in motion. Otherwise the hood could prevent burns, only touch owner serviceable it is dangerous to touch any components
be forced open by passing air flow. components described in the Operator’s (ignition coils, spark plug sockets, diagnos-
Manual and comply with all relevant safety tic socket) of the ignition system
This could cause the hood to come loose
and injure you and/or others. precautions. 앫 with the engine running
앫 while starting the engine
Opening 앫 if ignition is “on” and the engine is
Warning! G turned manually
Warning! G To help prevent personal injury, stay clear of
moving parts when the hood is open and the
If you see flames or smoke coming from the engine is running.
engine compartment, or if the coolant tem-
perature gauge indicates that the engine is The radiator fan may continue to run for ap-
overheated, do not open the hood. Move proximately 30 seconds or even restart af-
away from vehicle and do not open the hood ter the engine has been turned off. Stay
until the engine has cooled. If necessary, clear of fan blades.
call the fire department.
356
Operation
Engine compartment
The hood lock release lever is located in

Warning! G the driver’s footwell.
Vehicles with diesel engine:

The engine is equipped with a high-voltage
electronic control unit for the injection
system. Because of the high voltage it is
dangerous to touch any components of the
injection system (injectors, electrical wires)
앫 with the engine running
앫 while starting the engine 2 Handle for opening the hood
앫 when the ignition is switched on 왘 Press and hold handle 2.
1 Release lever
The hood is unlocked.
왘 Pull release lever 1 downwards.
왘 Pull up on the hood in direction of ar-
The hood is unlocked. Handle 2 pro-
row and then release it.
trudes slightly from the radiator grille.
If not, lift the hood slightly. The hood will be automatically held
open at shoulder height by gas-filled
! To avoid damage to the windshield wipers or struts.
hood, never open the hood if the wiper arms are
folded forward away from the windshield.
357
Operation
Engine compartment
Closing Engine oil Checking engine oil level with the

control system (ML 500 only)
The amount of oil your engine needs will
Warning! G depend on a number of factors, including
When checking the oil level
driving style. Increased oil consumption 앫 the vehicle must be parked on level
When closing the hood, use extreme caution
can occur when ground
not to catch hands or fingers. Be careful that
you do not close the hood on anyone. 앫 the vehicle is new 앫 with the engine at operating tempera-
ture, the vehicle must have been
Make sure that the hood is securely en- 앫 the vehicle is driven frequently at
stationary for at least 5 minutes with
gaged before driving off. Do not continue higher engine speeds
the engine turned off
driving if the hood can no longer engage af-
Engine oil consumption checks should only
ter an accident, for example. The hood could 앫 with the engine not at operating tem-
be made after the vehicle break-in period.
otherwise come loose while the vehicle is in perature yet, the vehicle must have
motion and injure you and/or others. i Do not use any special lubricant additives, been stationary for at least 30 minutes
as these may damage the drive assemblies. with the engine turned off
Using special additives not approved by
왘 Let the hood drop from a height of Mercedes-Benz may cause damage not covered To check the engine oil level via the
approximately 1 ft (30 cm). by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. multifunction display, do the following:
The hood will lock audibly. More information on this subject is available at 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 40).
any Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
왘 Check to make sure the hood is fully The standard display (컄 page 154)
closed. should appear in the multifunction
If you can raise the hood at a point display.
above the headlamps, then it is not
properly closed. Open it again and let it
drop with somewhat greater force.
358
Operation
Engine compartment
왘 Press button k or j on the i If you want to interrupt the checking proce- 왘 If the engine is at operating
multifunction steering wheel until the dure, press the k or j button on the temperature, wait 5 minutes before
following message appears in the mul- multifunction steering wheel. repeating check procedure.
tifunction display: 왘 If necessary, add engine oil 왘 If the engine is not at operating temper-
(컄 page 361). ature, wait 30 minutes before repeat-
For information on adding engine oil, see ing check procedure.
(컄 page 361). If you see the message:
For more information on engine oil, see Engine oil level
“Technical data” section (컄 page 543) and Not when engine on
One of the following messages will (컄 page 546).
subsequently appear in the
Other display messages 왘 If the engine is at operating tempera-
multifunction display:
ture, wait 5 minutes before checking
앫 Engine oil level OK If the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO*
oil.
start/stop button is not in position 2, the
앫 Add 1.0 qt. to reach max. oil following message will appear: 왘 If the engine is not at operating temper-
level ature yet, you must wait 30 minutes
Switch ignition on
(Canada: 1.0 liter) before checking oil.
to check engine oil level
앫 Add 1.5 qts. to reach max. oil If there is excess engine oil with the engine
level at operating temperature, the following
If you see the message: message will appear:
(Canada: 1.5 liters)
Observe waiting period Engine oil level
앫 Add 2.0 qts. to reach max. oil Reduce oil level
level
(Canada: 2.0 liters)
359
Operation
Engine compartment
왘 Have excess oil siphoned or drained 왘 Pull out oil dipstick 1 again after
off. Contact an authorized approximately 3 seconds to obtain
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. accurate reading.
! Excess oil must be siphoned or drained off. The oil level is correct when it is be-
It could cause damage to the engine and/or tween lower mark 3 (min.) and upper
catalytic converter (gasoline engine) or the oxi- mark 2 (max.) of the oil dipstick.
dation catalyst (diesel engine) not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. i All models (except ML 63 AMG):
The filling quantity between the upper and lower
For more information on messages in the marks on the oil dipstick is approximately
multifunction display concerning engine 2.1 US qt. (2.0 l).
oil, see “Practical hints” (컄 page 413). 1 Oil dipstick
2 Upper mark ML 63 AMG:
The filling quantity between the upper and lower
Checking engine oil level with the oil 3 Lower mark
marks on the oil dipstick is approximately
dipstick (except ML 500) 왘 Open the hood (컄 page 356). 1.6 US qt. (1.5 l).
When checking the oil level 왘 Pull out oil dipstick 1. 왘 If necessary, add engine oil
(컄 page 361).
앫 the vehicle must be parked on level 왘 Wipe oil dipstick 1 clean.
ground For more information on engine oil, see
왘 Fully insert oil dipstick 1 into the
“Technical data” section (컄 page 543) and
앫 the vehicle must have been stationary dipstick guide tube.
(컄 page 546).
for at least 5 minutes with the engine
turned off
360
Operation
Engine compartment
Adding engine oil 왘 Unscrew filler cap 1 from filler neck.

! Only use approved engine oils and oil filters 왘 Add engine oil as required. Never over-
required for vehicles with Maintenance System fill with oil.
(U.S. vehicles) or FSS PLUS (Canada vehicles).
For a listing of approved engine oils and oil Be careful not to spill any oil when adding.
filters, refer to the Factory Approved Service Avoid environmental damage caused by oil
Products pamphlet in your vehicle literature entering the ground or water.
portfolio, or contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. ! Excess oil must be siphoned or drained off.
It could cause damage to the engine and/or
Using engine oils and oil filters of specification catalytic converter (gasoline engine) or the oxi-
other than those expressly required for the Example ML 350 (ML 320 CDI similar) dation catalyst (diesel engine) not covered by
Maintenance System (U.S. vehicles) or the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
FSS PLUS (Canada vehicles), or changing of oil 1 Filler cap
and oil filter at change intervals longer than 왘 Screw filler cap 1 back on filler neck.
those called for by the Maintenance System
(U.S. vehicles) or FSS PLUS (Canada vehicles)
For more information on engine oil, see
will result in engine or emission control system “Technical data” section (컄 page 543) and
damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz (컄 page 546).
Limited Warranty.
Example ML 500 (ML 63 AMG similar)

1 Filler cap
361
Operation
Engine compartment
Transmission fluid level

앫 Do not remove pressure cap on coolant
reservoir if coolant temperature is
The transmission fluid level does not need above 158°F (70°C). Allow engine to
to be checked. If you notice transmission cool down before removing cap. The
fluid loss or gear shifting malfunctions, coolant reservoir contains hot fluid and
have an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light is under pressure.
Truck Center check the automatic trans- 앫 Using a rag, slowly open the cap approx-
mission. imately 1/2 turn to relieve excess pres-
sure. If opened immediately, scalding
Coolant level hot fluid and steam will be blown out un-
der pressure. 1 Cap
The engine coolant is a mixture of water 2 Coolant expansion tank
앫 Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine
and anticorrosion/antifreeze. To check parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene gly- 3 Indicator wall
the coolant level, the vehicle must be col which may burn if it comes into con- 4 Coolant level
parked on level ground. tact with hot engine parts.
왘 Using a rag, turn cap 1 slowly approx-
imately one half turn counterclockwise
Warning! G The coolant expansion tank is located on
to release any excess pressure.
the driver’s side of the engine compart-
In order to avoid potentially serious burns: ment.
앫 Use extreme caution when opening the
hood if there are any signs of steam or
coolant leaking from the cooling system,
or if the coolant temperature gauge indi-
cates that the coolant is overheated.
362
Operation
Engine compartment
왘 Continue turning cap 1 counterclock- Windshield/rear window washer During all seasons, add MB Windshield
wise and remove it. system and headlamp cleaning Washer Concentrate “MB SummerFit” to
system* water. Premix the windshield washer fluid
Coolant level 4 is correct if the level:
in a suitable container.
앫 for cold coolant: reaches the top of The windshield washer reservoir is located
indicator wall 3 visible through the in the engine compartment.
filling opening Warning! G
앫 for warm coolant: is approximately Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flamma-
0.6 in (1.5 cm) higher ble. Do not spill washer solvent/antifreeze
왘 Add coolant as required. on hot engine parts, because it may ignite
and burn. You could be seriously burned.
왘 Replace and tighten cap 1.
For more information on coolant, see 왘 Use the tab to pull cap 1 upwards. 컄컄
“Coolants” (컄 page 549).
1 Cap for windshield washer fluid

reservoir
Fluid for the windshield washer system and
the headlamp cleaning system* is supplied
from the windshield washer reservoir. It
has a capacity of 8.1 US qt (7.7 l).
363
Operation
Engine compartment
컄컄 왘 Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield

Washer Concentrate “MB SummerFit”
and water (or commercially available
premixed windshield washer sol-
vent/antifreeze, depending on ambient
temperatures).
! Always use washer solvent/antifreeze
where temperatures may fall below freezing
point. Failure to do so could result in damage to
the washer system/reservoir.
! Only use washer fluid which is suitable for

plastic lenses. Improper washer fluid can
damage the plastic lenses of the headlamps.
For more information, see “Windshield
washer and headlamp cleaning* system”
(컄 page 551).
364
Operation
Tires and wheels
왔 Tires and wheels
See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Important guidelines
Truck Center for information on tested and Warning! G
recommended rims and tires for summer 앫 Only use sets of tires and rims of the
and winter operation. They can also offer Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the same type and make.
advice concerning tire service and tire tread is badly worn, or if the tires have
앫 Tires must be of the correct size for the
purchase. sustained damage, replace them.
rim.
When replacing rims, only use genuine
앫 Break in new tires for approximately
Warning! G Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts specified for the
60 miles (100 km) at moderate
particular rim type. Failure to do so can
result in the bolts loosening and possibly an
speeds.
Replace rims or tires with the same designa-
tion, manufacturer and type as shown on the accident. 앫 Regularly check the tires and rims for
original part. See an authorized Retreaded tires are not tested or recom- damage. Dented or bent rims can
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for fur- mended by Mercedes-Benz, since previous cause tire inflation pressure loss or
ther information. If incorrectly sized rims damage cannot always be recognized on re- damage to the tire beads.
and tires are mounted: treads. The operating safety of the vehicle 앫 If vehicle is heavily loaded, check tire
앫 The wheel brakes or suspension cannot be assured when such tires are used. inflation pressure and correct as
components can be damaged. required.
앫 The operating clearance of the wheels 앫 Do not allow your tires to wear down
and the tires may no longer be correct. too far. Adhesion properties on wet
roads are sharply reduced at tread
depths under 1/8 in (3 mm).
앫 When replacing individual tires, you
should mount new tires on the front
wheels first (on vehicles with
same-sized wheels all around).
365
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire care and maintenance Tire inspection Life of tire

Every time you check your tire inflation The service life of a tire is dependent upon
Warning! G pressure, you should also inspect your
tires for the following:
varying factors including but not limited to:
앫 Driving style
Regularly check the tires for damage. Dam- 앫 excessive treadwear (컄 page 367)
앫 Tire inflation pressure
aged tires can cause tire inflation pressure
앫 cord or fabric showing through the
loss. As a result, you could lose control of 앫 Distance driven
tire’s rubber
your vehicle.
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the
앫 bumps, bulges, cuts, cracks or splits in
the tread or side of the tire
Warning! G
tire tread is badly worn, or if the tires have
sustained damage, replace them. Replace the tire if you find any of the above Tires and spare tire should be replaced after
conditions. 6 years, regardless of the remaining tread.
Regularly check your tire inflation pressure Make sure you also inspect the spare tire
at least once a month. For more informa- periodically for condition and inflation.
tion on checking tire inflation pressure, Spare tires will age and become worn over
see “Recommended tire inflation pres- time even if never used, and thus should be
sure” (컄 page 374). inspected and replaced when necessary.
366
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tread depth Storing tires

to wear down to that level. As tread depth
Do not allow your tires to wear down too approaches 1/8 in (3 mm), the adhesion ! Keep unmounted tires in a cool, dry place
far. Adhesion properties on wet roads are properties on a wet road are sharply re- with as little exposure to light as possible.
sharply reduced at tread depths under duced. Protect tires from contact with oil, grease and
1
/8 in (3 mm). gasoline.
Depending upon the weather and/or road
Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by surface (conditions), the tire traction varies
Cleaning tires
law. These indicators are located in six widely.
places on the tread circumference and ! Never use a round nozzle to power wash
become visible at a tread depth of approx- tires. The intense jet of water can result in
imately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), at which point the damage to the tire.
tire is considered worn and should be re- Always replace a damaged tire.
placed.
Recommended minimum tire tread depth:
앫 Summer tires 1/8 in (3 mm)
앫 Winter tires 1/6 in (4 mm)
Warning! G 1 TWI (Tread Wear Indicator)

Although the applicable federal motor safety The treadwear indicator appears as a solid
laws consider a tire to be worn when the band across the tread.
treadwear indicators (TWI) become visible at
approximately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), we recom-
mend that you do not allow your tires
367
Operation
Tires and wheels
Direction of rotation Loading the vehicle 앫 The certification label found on the
driver’s door B-pillar tells you about the
Unidirectional tires offer added advantag- Two labels on your vehicle show how much gross weight capacity of your vehicle,
es, such as better hydroplaning perfor- weight it may properly carry. called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
mance. To benefit, however, you must (GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight
앫 The Tire and Loading Information
make sure the tires rotate in the direction of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and
placard can be found on the driver’s
specified. cargo. The certification label also tells
door B-pillar. This placard tells you im-
An arrow on the sidewall indicates the portant information about the number you about the front and rear axle
intended direction of rotation (spinning) of of people that can be in the vehicle and weight capacity, called the Gross Axle
the tire. the total weight that can be carried in Weight Rating (GAWR). The GAWR is
the vehicle. It also contains information the total allowable weight that can be
i Spare wheels may be mounted against the on the proper size and recommended carried by a single axle (front or rear).
direction of rotation (spinning) even with a unidi- Never exceed the GVWR or GAWR for
rectional tire for temporary use only until the reg- tire inflation pressures for the original
equipment tires on your vehicle. either the front axle or rear axle.
ular drive wheel has been repaired or replaced.
Always observe and follow applicable temporary
use restrictions and speed limitations indicated
on the spare wheel.
368
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire and Loading Information Tire and Loading Information placard
Warning! G
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit indicated on the placard
on the driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the
tires can overheat them, possibly causing a
blowout. Overloading the tires can also
result in handling or steering problems, or
brake failure.
1 Load limit information on the Tire and
Loading Information placard
Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire and
Loading Information placard. The placard showing the load limit informa-
tion is located on the driver’s door B-pillar.
i Data shown on placard example are for
illustration purposes only. Load limit data are 왘 Locate the statement “The combined
specific to each vehicle and may vary from data weight of occupants and cargo should
shown in the illustration below. Refer to placard never exceed XXX kilograms or
on vehicle for actual data specific to your XXX lbs.” on this placard.
1 Driver’s door B-pillar vehicle.
The combined weight of all occupants,
Following is a discussion on how to work cargo/luggage and trailer tongue load
with the information contained on the (if applicable) should never exceed the
placard with regards to loading your weight referenced in that statement.
vehicle.
369
Operation
Tires and wheels
Seating capacity Step 1

The seating capacity gives you important 왘 Locate the statement “The combined
information on the number of occupants weight of occupants and cargo should
that can be in the vehicle. Observe front never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on
and rear seating capacity. The placard your vehicle’s placard.
showing the seating capacity is located on
Step 2
the driver’s door B-pillar (컄 page 369).
왘 Determine the combined weight of the
i Data shown on placard example are for driver and passengers that will be
illustration purposes only. Seating data are
riding in your vehicle.
specific to each vehicle and may vary from data 1 Seating capacity information on the
shown in the illustration below. Refer to placard Tire and Loading Information placard. Step 3
on vehicle for actual data specific to your
vehicle. 왘 Subtract the combined weight of the
Steps for determining correct load limit driver and passengers from
The following steps have been developed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs.
as required of all manufacturers under Title
49, Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part
575 pursuant to the “National Traffic and
Motor Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”.
370
Operation
Tires and wheels
Step 4 Step 6 (if applicable)

왘 The resulting figure equals the avail- 왘 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
able amount of cargo and luggage load load from your trailer will be trans-
capacity. For example, if the “XXX” ferred to your vehicle. Consult this
amount equals 1400 lbs and there will manual to determine how this reduces
be five 150 lbs passengers in your the available cargo and luggage load
vehicle, the amount of available cargo capacity of your vehicle (컄 page 373).
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs
The following table shows examples on
(1400-750 (5 x150) = 650 lbs).
how to calculate total and cargo load
Step 5 capacities with varying seating configura-
tions and number and size of occupants.
왘 Determine the combined weight of
The following examples use a load limit
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
of 1500 lbs. This is for illustration
vehicle. That weight may not safely
purposes only. Make sure you are using
exceed the available cargo and luggage
the actual load limit for your vehicle stated
load capacity calculated in step 4.
on the vehicle’s placard (컄 page 369).
371
Operation
Tires and wheels
Example Combined Number of Seating Occupants weight Combined Available cargo/luggage and trailer
weight limit occupants configura- weight of all tongue weight (total load limit from
of occu- (driver and tion occupants placard minus combined weight of
pants and passengers) all occupants)
cargo from
placard
1 1500 lbs 5 front: 2 Occupant 1: 150 lbs 750 lbs 1500 lbs - 750 lbs = 750 lbs
Occupant 2: 180 lbs
rear: 3 Occupant 3: 160 lbs
Occupant 4: 140 lbs
Occupant 5: 120 lbs
2 1500 lbs 3 front: 1 Occupant 1: 200 lbs 540 lbs 1500 lbs - 540 lbs = 960 lbs
rear: 2 Occupant 2: 190 lbs
Occupant 3: 150 lbs
3 1500 lbs 1 front:1 Occupant 1: 150 lbs 150 lbs 1500 lbs - 150 lbs = 1350 lbs
The higher the weight of all occupants, the

less cargo and luggage load capacity is
available.
For more information, see “Trailer tongue
load” (컄 page 373).
372
Operation
Tires and wheels
Certification label Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR): The Trailer tongue load
total weight of the vehicle, all occupants,
Even after careful determination of the The tongue load of any trailer is an impor-
all cargo, and the trailer tongue load
combined weight of all occupants, cargo tant weight to measure because it affects
(컄 page 373) must never exceed the
and the trailer tongue load (if applicable) the load you can carry in your vehicle. If a
GVWR.
(컄 page 373) as to not exceed the permis- trailer is towed, the tongue load must be
sible load limit, you must make sure that Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): The to- added to the weight of all occupants riding
your vehicle never exceeds the Gross tal allowable weight that can be carried by and any cargo you are carrying in the
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the a single axle (front or rear). vehicle. The tongue load typically is
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for ei- To assure that your vehicle does not ex-
between 10% and 15% of the trailer weight
ther the front or rear axle. You can obtain ceed the maximum permissible weight
and everything loaded in it.
the GVWR and GAWR from the certification limits (GVWR and GAWR for front and rear For more information on trailer tongue
label. The certification label can be found axle), have the loaded vehicle (including load, see “Loading a trailer” (컄 page 343).
on the driver’s door B-pillar, see “Technical driver, passengers and all cargo and, if ap-
data” (컄 page 527). plicable, trailer fully loaded) weighed on a
suitable commercial scale.
373
Operation
Tires and wheels
Recommended tire inflation pressure Your vehicle is equipped with the Tire and i Data shown on placard example are for
Loading Information placard located on illustration purposes only. Tire data are specific
the driver’s door B-pillar (컄 page 369). to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in
Warning! G The tire inflation pressure should be
the illustration below. Refer to placard on vehicle
for actual data specific to your vehicle.
checked regularly and should only be ad-
Follow recommended tire inflation
justed on cold tires. The tires can be con-
pressures.
sidered cold if the vehicle has been parked
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires for at least 3 hours or driven less than
wear excessively and/or unevenly, 1 mile (1.6 km).
adversely affect handling and fuel economy,
and are more likely to fail from being over- Follow recommended cold tire inflation
heated. pressures listed on placard.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires Keeping the tires properly inflated
can adversely affect handling and ride provides the best handling, tread life and
comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping riding comfort.
distance, and result in sudden deflation 1 Tire and Loading Information placard
In addition to the tire placard on the
(blowout) because they are more likely to with recommended cold tire inflation
driver’s door B-pillar, also consult the fuel
become punctured or damaged by road pressures
filler flap for any additional information
debris, potholes etc. pertaining to special driving situations. For The Tire and Loading Information placard
more information, see “Important notes on lists the recommended cold tire inflation
tire inflation pressure” (컄 page 375). pressures for maximum loaded vehicle
weight. The tire inflation pressures listed
apply to the tires installed as original
equipment.
374
Operation
Tires and wheels
Important notes on tire inflation Be sure to readjust the tire inflation Checking tire inflation pressure
pressure pressure for normal driving speeds. You
should wait until the tires are cold before Regularly check your tire inflation pressure
at least once a month.
Warning! G adjusting the tire inflation pressure.
i Driving comfort may be reduced when the Check and adjust the tire inflation
If the tire inflation pressure repeatedly tire inflation pressure is adjusted to the value for pressure when the tires are cold. The tires
drops: speeds above 100 mph (160 km/h) as specified can be considered cold if the vehicle has
on the placard located on the inside of the fuel been parked for at least 3 hours or driven
앫 Check the tires for punctures from filler flap. less than 1 mile (1.6 km).
foreign objects.
앫 Check to see whether air is leaking from Some vehicles may have supplemental tire If you check the tire inflation pressure
the valves or from around the rim. inflation pressure information for vehicle when the tires are warm (the vehicle has
loads less than the maximum loaded vehi- been driven for several miles or sitting less
cle condition. If such information is provid- than 3 hours), the reading will be
Tire temperature and tire inflation pressure ed, it can be found on the placard located
are also increased while driving, depending approximately 4 psi (0.3 bar) higher than
on the inside of the fuel filler flap. the cold reading. This is normal. Do not let
on the driving speed and the tire load.
Tire inflation pressure changes by approxi- air out to match the specified cold tire
If you will be driving your vehicle at high mately 1.5 psi (0.1 bar) per 18°F (10°C) of inflation pressure. Otherwise, the tire will
speeds of 100 mph (160 km/h) or higher, air temperature change. Keep this in mind be underinflated.
where it is legal and conditions allow, when checking tire inflation pressure
consult the placard on the inside of the fuel where the temperature is different from
filler flap on how to adjust the cold tire in- the outside temperature.
flation pressure. If you do not adjust the
tire inflation pressure, excessive heat can
build up and result in sudden tire failure.
375
Operation
Tires and wheels
Checking tire inflation pressure i If you have overfilled the tire, release tire in-
Warning! G manually flation pressure by pushing the metal stem of the
valve with e.g. a tip of a pen. Then recheck the
Follow recommended tire inflation Follow the steps below to achieve correct tire inflation pressure with the tire gauge.
pressures. tire inflation pressure:
왘 Install the valve cap.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires 왘 Remove the cap from the valve on one
tire. 왘 Repeat this procedure for each tire.
wear excessively and/or unevenly,
adversely affect handling and fuel economy, 왘 Firmly press a tire gauge onto the
and are more likely to fail from being over- valve.
heated.
왘 Read tire inflation pressure on tire
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires gauge and check against the recom-
can adversely affect handling and ride mended tire inflation pressure on the
comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping placard on the driver’s door B-pillar
distance, and result in sudden deflation (컄 page 369) or, if available, the inside
(blowout) because they are more likely to of the fuel filler flap. If necessary, add
become punctured or damaged by road air to achieve the recommended tire in-
debris, potholes etc. flation pressure.
specified load limit as indicated on the plac-
ard on the driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading
the tires can overheat them, possibly caus-
ing a blowout. Overloading the tires can also
result in handling or steering problems, or
brake failure.
376
Operation
Tires and wheels
Run Flat Indicator (Canada only)

While the vehicle is being driven, the Run
Flat Indicator monitors the set tire inflation When the multifunction display shows the The Run Flat Indicator does not provide a
pressures by evaluating each wheel’s rota- message Tire pressure Check tires, warning for wrongly selected tire inflation
tional speed. This allows the system to de- one or more of your tires is significantly un- pressures. Always adjust tire inflation pres-
tect a significant loss of pressure in a tire. derinflated. You should stop and check your sure according to the placard on the driver’s
If a wheel’s rotational speed changes due tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to door B-pillar or fuel filler flap.
to falling tire inflation pressure, you will the proper tire inflation pressure as indicat-
see a corresponding warning message in The Run Flat Indicator does not replace reg-
ed on the vehicle’s tire information placard. ular checks of the tire inflation pressures
the multifunction display. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire since a gradual pressure loss in all four tires
The Run Flat Indicator may function in a causes the tire to overheat and can lead to cannot be detected by the Run Flat
restricted manner or with a delay tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel Indicator.
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
앫 if snow chains are mounted to the The Run Flat Indicator is not able to issue a
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
vehicle warning due to a sudden dramatic loss of
Each tire, including the spare, should be
앫 in presence of ice and snow checked monthly when cold and set to the tire inflation pressure (e.g. tire blowout
recommended tire inflation pressure as caused by a foreign object). In this case
앫 if you are driving on a loose surface
specified on the Tire and Loading Informa- bring the vehicle to a halt by carefully apply-
(e.g. sand or gravel) ing the brakes and avoiding abrupt steering
tion placard (컄 page 369) or on the tire
앫 if you are driving in a very sporty man- inflation pressure label (컄 page 369). maneuvers.
ner (involving rapid acceleration or high
speeds in curves)
377
Operation
Tires and wheels
Reactivating the Run Flat Indicator 왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 40). If you wish to confirm activation:
The tire inflation pressure monitor must be Make sure the standard display menu 왘 Press button æ.
reactivated in the following situations: appears in the multifunction display
The following message will appear in
(컄 page 147).
앫 If you have changed the tire inflation the multifunction display:
pressure 왘 Press button k or j repeatedly Run Flat Indicator
until the following message appears in restarted
앫 If you have replaced the wheels or tires
the multifunction display:
After a certain “learning phase”, the Run
앫 If you have installed new wheels or
Flat Indicator checks the set pressure val-
tires
ues for all four tires.
왘 Using the tire placard on the driver’s
If you wish to cancel activation:
door B-pillar or, if available, the inside
of the fuel filler flap, make sure the tire 왘 Press button ç.
inflation pressure of all four tires is cor-
or
rect. 왘 Press the reset button on the instru-
왘 Wait until the message
ment cluster (컄 page 145).
Restart
Warning! G The following message will appear in Run Flat Indicator?
the multifunction display: Yes
The Run Flat Indicator can only warn you in Restart Cancel
a reliable manner if you have set the correct Run Flat Indicator? disappears.
tire inflation pressures for each tire. Yes
If an incorrect tire inflation pressure was Cancel
set, the system will monitor the pressure ac-
cording to the incorrect value.
378
Operation
Tires and wheels
Checking tire pressure electronically The TPMS only functions on wheels that
with the Tire Pressure Monitoring are equipped with the proper electronic Warning! G
System (TPMS), (USA only) sensors. It monitors the tire inflation pres-
sure, as selected by the driver, in all four Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
i The Tire Pressure Monitoring System tires. A warning is issued to alert you to a should be checked monthly when cold and
(TPMS) is equipped with a combination low tire inflated to the inflation pressure recom-
pressure/TPMS malfunction telltale in the decrease in pressure in one or more of the
tires. mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
instrument cluster (컄 page 27). Depending on
how the telltale illuminates, it indicates a low tire vehicle placard or the tire inflation pressure
label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different
pressure condition or a malfunction in the TPMS
system itself: Warning! G size than the size indicated on the vehicle
앫 If the telltale illuminates continuously, one placard or the tire inflation pressure label,
The TPMS does not indicate a warning for
or more of your tires is significantly underin- you should determine the proper tire infla-
wrongly selected inflation pressures. Always
flated. There is no malfunction in the TPMS. tion pressure for those tires).
adjust tire inflation pressure according to
앫 If the telltale flashes for 60 seconds and As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
the placard on the driver’s door B-pillar or, if
then stays illuminated, the TPMS system been equipped with a tire pressure monitor-
itself is not operating properly. available, the supplemental tire pressure in-
ing system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
formation on the inside of the fuel filler flap.
pressure telltale when one or more of your
The TPMS is not able to issue a warning due tires is significantly underinflated. Accord-
to a sudden dramatic loss of pressure (e.g. ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illu-
tire blowout caused by a foreign object). In minates, you should stop and check your
this case bring the vehicle to a halt by care- tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to
fully applying the brakes and avoiding the proper pressure. Driving on a significant-
abrupt steering maneuvers. ly underinflated tire causes the tire to over-
heat and can lead to tire failure. 컄컄
379
Operation
Tires and wheels
컄컄 Reactivating the TPMS

Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
and tire tread life, and may affect the vehi- of reasons, including the installation of in-
cle’s handling and stopping ability. Please compatible replacement or alternate tires or Warning! G
note that the TPMS is not a substitute for wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS
proper tire maintenance, and it is the from functioning properly. Always check the It is the driver’s responsibility to calibrate
driver’s responsibility to maintain correct TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing the TPMS on the recommended cold infla-
tire pressure, even if underinflation has not one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle tion pressure. Underinflated tires affect the
reached the level to trigger illumination of to ensure that the replacement or alternate ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue might lose control over the vehicle.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a to function properly.
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate The TPMS must be reactivated when you
when the system is not operating properly. i If a condition causing the TPMS to malfunc- have adjusted the tire inflation pressure to
The TPMS malfunction indicator is com- tion develops, it may take up to 10 minutes for a new level (e.g. because of different load
bined with the low tire pressure telltale. the system to signal a malfunction using the or driving conditions). The TPMS is then
TPMS telltale flashing and illumination se- recalibrated to the current tire inflation
When the system detects a malfunction, the
quence.
telltale will flash for approximately 1 minute pressures.
and then remain continuously illuminated. The telltale extinguishes after a few minutes driv-
ing if the malfunction has been corrected. 왘 Using the tire placard on the driver’s
This sequence will continue upon subse- door B-pillar (컄 page 369) or, if avail-
quent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal- i Operating radio transmission equipment able, the supplemental tire pressure
function exists. When the malfunction (e.g. wireless headsets, two-way radios) in or information on the inside of the fuel
indicator is illuminated, the system may not near the vehicle could cause the TPMS to mal-
filler flap (컄 page 374), make sure the
be able to detect or signal low tire pressure function.
tire inflation pressure of all four tires is
as intended. correct.
380
Operation
Tires and wheels
i Reactivate the TPMS after adjusting the tire 왘 Press the reset button (컄 page 145). Checking tire pressure electronically
inflation pressure to the inflation pressure rec- with the Advanced Tire Pressure Moni-
The following message will appear in
ommended for the vehicle operating condition. toring System (Advanced TPMS)*,
Tire pressure should only be adjusted on cold the multifunction display:
(Canada only)
tires. Observe the recommended tire inflation Restart tire
pressure on the placard on the driver’s door pressure monitor? The TPMS only functions on wheels that
B-pillar (컄 page 369). Some vehicles may have are equipped with the proper electronic
왘 Press the æ button.
supplemental tire pressure information for driv- sensors. It monitors the tire inflation pres-
ing at high speeds (컄 page 375) or for vehicle The following message will appear in sure, as selected by the driver, in all four
loads less than the maximum loaded vehicle con- the multifunction display: tires. A warning is issued to alert you to a
dition (컄 page 375). If such information is pro- Tire pressure monitor
vided, it can be found on the inside of the fuel decrease in pressure in one or more of the
restarted tires.
filler flap.
왘 Press button è or ÿ on the mul- After driving a few minutes the system Tire pressure inquiries are made using the
tifunction steering wheel repeatedly verifies that the current tire inflation multifunction display. The present inflation
until the standard display menu ap- pressures are within the system’s pressures are displayed only after a few
pears in the multifunction display specified range. Afterwards the current minutes’ travel time.
(컄 page 147). tire inflation pressures are accepted as
reference pressures and then moni- i Possible differences between the readings
왘 Press the j or k button repeat- of a tire pressure gauge of an air hose, e.g. gas
tored.
edly until you see the following station equipment, and the vehicle’s control
If you wish to cancel activation: system can occur. Usually the readings issued by
message: the control system are more precise.
Tire pressure monitor 왘 Press the ç button.
active
Menu: R-Button
381
Operation
Tires and wheels
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 40). i With a spare wheel without wheel sensor
왘 Press the j or k button on the mounted, the system may still indicate the tire Warning! G
inflation pressure of the removed wheel for some
multifunction steering wheel until the minutes. If this happens, keep in mind that the Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
current inflation pressures for each tire indicated value where the spare wheel is mount- should be checked monthly when cold and
appear in the multifunction display. ed does not reflect the actual spare tire inflation inflated to the inflation pressure recom-
pressure.
mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or the tire inflation pressure
Warning! G label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different
size than the size indicated on the vehicle
The TPMS does not indicate a warning for placard or the tire inflation pressure label,
wrongly selected inflation pressures. Always you should determine the proper tire infla-
i When the message Tire pressure adjust tire inflation pressure according to tion pressure for those tires).
displayed after driving for a few the placard on the driver’s door B-pillar or, if As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
minutes appears in the multifunction display, available, the supplemental tire pressure in- been equipped with a tire pressure monitor-
the individual inflation pressure values are formation on the inside of the fuel filler flap. ing system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
matched with the tires. The individual values are pressure telltale when one or more of your
displayed after a few minutes driving. The TPMS is not able to issue a warning due
to a sudden dramatic loss of pressure (e.g. tires are significantly underinflated. Accord-
tire blowout caused by a foreign object). In ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illu-
Warning! G this case bring the vehicle to a halt by care- minates, you should stop and check your
fully applying the brakes and avoiding tires as soon as possible. Driving on a signif-
It is the driver’s responsibility to calibrate abrupt steering maneuvers. icantly underinflated tire causes the tire to
the TPMS on the recommended cold infla- overheat and can lead to tire failure.
tion pressure. Underinflated tires affect the
ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
might lose control over the vehicle.
382
Operation
Tires and wheels
Reactivating Advanced TPMS* i Reactivate the TPMS after adjusting the tire
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency
inflation pressure to the inflation pressure rec-
and tire tread life, and may effect the vehi- The TPMS must be reactivated when you
ommended for the vehicle operating condition.
cle’s handling and stopping ability. Please have adjusted the tire inflation pressure to Tire pressure should only be adjusted on cold
note that the TPMS is not a substitute for a new level (e.g. because of different load tires. Observe the recommended tire inflation
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driv- or driving conditions). The TPMS is then pressure on the placard on the driver’s door
er’s responsibility to maintain correct tire recalibrated to the current tire inflation B-pillar (컄 page 369). Some vehicles may have
pressure, even if under-inflation has not pressures. supplemental tire pressure information for driv-
reached the level to trigger illumination of ing at high speeds (컄 page 375) or for vehicle
loads less than the maximum loaded vehicle con-
the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Warning! G dition (컄 page 375). If such information is pro-
vided, it can be found on the inside of the fuel
i Operating radio transmission equipment It is the driver’s responsibility to calibrate filler flap.
(e.g. wireless headsets, two-way radios) in or the TPMS on the recommended cold infla- 왘 Press button è or ÿ on the mul-
near the vehicle could cause the TPMS to mal- tion pressure. Underinflated tires affect the
function. tifunction steering wheel repeatedly
ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You until the standard display menu
might lose control over the vehicle. appears in the multifunction display
(컄 page 147).
왘 Using the tire placard on the driver’s 왘 Press the j or k button repeat-
door B-pillar (컄 page 369) or, if avail- edly until you see the current inflation
able, the supplemental tire pressure pressures for each tire appear in the
information on the inside of the fuel display or the following message ap-
filler flap (컄 page 374), make sure the pears in the display
tire inflation pressure of all four tires is
Tire pressure
correct.
displayed after
driving for
a few minutes 컄컄
383
Operation
Tires and wheels
컄컄 왘 Press the reset button (컄 page 145). Potential problems associated with Overinflated tires
underinflated and overinflated tires
The following message will appear in Overinflated tires can:
Underinflated tires 앫 adversely affect handling
Restart tire
characteristics
pressure monitor? Underinflated tires can:
앫 cause uneven tire wear
왘 Press the æ button. 앫 cause excessive and uneven tire wear
앫 be more prone to damage from road
The following message will appear in 앫 adversely affect fuel economy
hazards
앫 lead to tire failure from being
Tire pressure monitor 앫 adversely affect ride comfort
overheated
restarted 앫 increase stopping distance
앫 adversely affect handling
After a few minutes driving, the current characteristics
tire inflation pressure values are ac- Warning! G
cepted as reference values and then
monitored. Warning! G Follow recommended tire inflation
If you wish to cancel activation: pressures.
Follow recommended tire inflation
왘 Press the ç button. pressures. Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires
can adversely affect handling and ride
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
comfort, wear unevenly, increase stopping
wear excessively and/or unevenly,
distance, and result in sudden deflation
adversely affect handling and fuel economy,
(blowout) because they are more likely to
and are more likely to fail from being
become punctured or damaged by road
overheated.
debris, potholes etc.
384
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire labeling 1 Uniform Quality Grading Standards Tire size designation, load and speed
(컄 page 392) rating
Besides tire name (sales designation) and 2 DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)
manufacturer name, a number of markings (컄 page 389)
can be found on a tire. 3 Maximum tire load (컄 page 391)
Following are some explanations for the 4 Maximum tire inflation pressure
markings on your vehicle’s tires: (컄 page 391)
5 Manufacturer
6 Tire ply material (컄 page 394)
7 Tire size designation, load and speed
rating (컄 page 385)
8 Load identification (컄 page 389)
9 Tire name 1 Tire width
2 Aspect ratio in %
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data 3 Radial tire code
on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary
from data shown in above illustration. 4 Rim diameter
For more information, see “Rims and tires”
5 Tire load rating
(컄 page 536). 6 Tire speed rating
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
from data shown in above illustration.
385
Operation
Tires and wheels
General: Tire width Rim diameter

Depending on the design standards used, The tire width 1 (컄 page 385) indicates The rim diameter 4 (컄 page 385) is the
the tire size molded into the sidewall may the nominal tire width in mm. diameter of the bead seat, not the
have no letter or a letter preceding the tire diameter of the rim edge. Rim diameter is
size designation. Aspect ratio indicated in inches (in).
No letter preceding the size designation The aspect ratio 2 (컄 page 385) is the
(as illustrated above): Passenger car tire Tire load rating
dimensional relationship between tire
based on European design standards. section height and section width and is The tire load rating 5 (컄 page 385) is a
Letter “P” preceding the size designation: expressed in percentage. The aspect ratio numerical code associated with the
Passenger car tire based on U.S. design is arrived at by dividing section height by maximum load a tire can support.
standards. section width.
For example, a load rating of 91 corre-
sponds to a maximum load of 1356 lbs
Letter “LT” preceding the size designation: Tire code
(615 kg) the tire is designed to support.
Light Truck tire based on U.S. design
The tire code 3 (컄 page 385) indicates See also “Maximum tire load”
standards.
the tire construction type. The “R” stands (컄 page 391) where the maximum load as-
Letter “T” preceding the size designation: for radial tire type. Letter “D” means diag- sociated with the load index is indicated in
Temporary spare tires which are high onal or bias ply construction; letter “B” kilograms and lbs.
pressure compact spares designed for means belted-bias ply construction.
temporary emergency use only.
At the tire manufacturer’s option, any tire
with a speed capability above 149 mph
(240 km/h) can include a “ZR” in the size
designation (for example: 245/40 ZR 18).
For additional information, see “Tire speed
rating” (컄 page 387).
386
Operation
Tires and wheels
For additional information on tire load i Tire load rating 5 (컄 page 385) and Tire
Warning! G rating, see “Load identification” speed rating 6 (컄 page 385) are also referred
(컄 page 389). to as “service description”.
The tire load rating must always be at least
i Tire load rating 5 (컄 page 385) and Tire Summer tires
half of the GAWR (컄 page 395) of your vehi-
cle. Otherwise, tire failure may be the result speed rating 6 (컄 page 385) are also referred
to as “service description”.
Index Speed rating
which may cause an accident and/or seri-
Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
ous personal injury to you or others.
Tire speed rating R up to 106 mph (170 km/h)
Always replace rims and tires with the same
designation, manufacturer and type as The tire speed rating 6 (컄 page 385) S up to 112 mph (180 km/h)
shown on the original part. indicates the approved maximum speed
T up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
for the tire.
H up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
Warning! G Warning! G V up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

W up to 168 mph (270 km/h)
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the Even when permitted by law, never operate
Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
specified load limit as indicated on the plac- a vehicle at speeds greater than the
ard located on the driver’s door B-pillar. maximum speed rating of the tires. (Y) above 186 mph (300 km/h)
Overloading the tires can overheat them, Exceeding the maximum speed for which ZR above 149 mph (240 km/h)
possibly causing a blowout. Overloading the tires are rated can lead to sudden tire
tires can also result in handling or steering failure, causing loss of vehicle control and
problems, or brake failure. possibly resulting in an accident and/or
personal injury and possible death, for you
and for others.
387
Operation
Tires and wheels
앫 At the tire manufacturer’s option, any the speed rating and the speed capabil- All-season and winter tires
tire with a speed capability above ity of the tire is limited to 186 mph
149 mph (240 km/h) can include a (300 km/h). Index Speed rating
1
“ZR” in the size designation (for exam- Q M+S up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
앫 Any tire with a speed capability above
ple: 245/40 ZR18). To determine the T M+S1 up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
186 mph (300 km/h) must include a
maximum speed capability of the tire, 1
“ZR” in the size designation AND the H M+S up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
the service description for the tire must
service description must be placed in 1
be referred to. The service description V M+S up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
parenthesis. Example: 275/40 ZR 18
is comprised of the tire load rating 5 1 or M+S.for winter tires
(99Y). The “(Y)” speed rating in paren-
(컄 page 385) and the tire speed
thesis designates the maximum speed
rating 6 (컄 page 385).
capability of the tire as being above i Not all M+S rated tires provide special
If your tire includes “ZR” in the size 186 mph (300 km/h). Consult the tire winter performance. Make sure the tires you use
designation and no service manufacturer for the actual maximum show M+S and the
description 5 and 6 (컄 page 385) is permissible speed of the tire. mountain/snowflake.marking on the tire
sidewall. These tires meet specific snow traction
given, the tire manufacturer must be
performance requirements of the Rubber Manu-
consulted for the maximum speed ca- facturers Association (RMA) and the Rubber
pability. Association of Canada (RAC) and have been
If a service description 5 and 6 designed specifically for use in snow conditions.
(컄 page 385) is given, the speed capa-
bility is limited by the speed symbol in
the service description.
Example: 245/40 ZR18 97Y.
In this example, “97Y” is the service
description. The letter “Y” designates
388
Operation
Tires and wheels
Load identification In addition to tire load rating, special load DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)
information may be molded into the tire
sidewall following the letter designating U.S. tire regulations require each new tire
the tire speed rating 1 (컄 page 385). manufacturer or tire retreader to mold a
TIN into or onto a sidewall of each tire
No specification given: absence of any text
produced.
(like in above example) indicates a
standard load (SL) tire. The TIN is a unique identifier which facili-
tates efforts by tire manufactures to notify
XL or Extra Load: designates an extra load
purchasers in recall situations or other
(or reinforced) tire.
safety matters concerning tires and gives
Light Load: designates a light load tire. purchasers the means to easily identify
1 Load identification C, D, E: designates load range associated such tires.
with the maximum load a tire can carry at The TIN is comprised of “Manufacturer’s
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data a specified pressure.
on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary identification mark”, “Tire size”, “Tire type
from data shown in above illustration. code” and “Date of manufacture”.
389
Operation
Tires and wheels
DOT (Department of Transportation) Tire type code

A tire branding symbol 1 (컄 page 390) The code 4 (컄 page 390) may, at the
which denotes the tire meets require- option of the manufacturer, be used as a
ments of the U.S. Department of Transpor- descriptive code for identifying significant
tation. characteristics of the tire.
Manufacturer’s identification mark Date of manufacture

The manufacturer’s identification mark 2 The date of manufacture 5 (컄 page 390)
(컄 page 390) denotes the tire identifies the week and year of manufac-
1 DOT manufacturer. ture.
2 Manufacturer’s identification mark New tires have a mark with two symbols. The first two figures identify the week,
3 Tire size starting with “01” to represent the first full
4 Tire type code (at the option of the tire Retreaded tires have a mark with four sym-
week of the calendar year. The second two
manufacturer) bols. For more information on retreaded
figures represent the year.
5 Date of manufacture tires, see (컄 page 365).
For example, “3202” represents the 32nd
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data Tire size week of 2002.
from data shown in above illustration. The code 3 (컄 page 390) indicates the
tire size.
390
Operation
Tires and wheels
Maximum tire load Maximum tire inflation pressure

Warning! G
specified load limit as indicated on the plac-
ard located on the driver’s door B-pillar.
Overloading the tires can overheat them,
possibly causing a blowout. Overloading the
tires can also result in handling or steering
problems, or brake failure.
For more information on tire load rating

1 Maximum tire load rating 1 Maximum permissible tire inflation
(컄 page 386).
pressure
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data For information on calculating total and
cargo load capacities (컄 page 370). i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
from data shown in above illustration. on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary
The maximum tire load is the maximum
weight the tires are designed to support. This is the maximum permissible tire
inflation pressure for the tire.
391
Operation
Tires and wheels
Always follow the recommended tire Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards Quality grades can be found, where appli-
inflation pressure (컄 page 374) for proper (U.S. vehicles) cable, on the tire sidewall between tread
tire inflation. shoulder and maximum section width. For
Tire manufacturers are required to grade example:
tires based on three performance factors:
Warning! G treadwear, traction and Treadwear Traction Temperature
temperature resistance. 200 AA A
Never exceed the max. tire inflation
pressure. Follow recommended tire inflation
pressures. All passenger car tires must conform to
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires federal safety requirements in addition to
wear excessively and/or unevenly, adverse- these grades.
ly affect handling and fuel economy, and are
more likely to fail from being overheated.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires
can adversely affect handling and ride com-
fort, wear unevenly, increase stopping dis-
tance, and result in sudden deflation 1 Treadwear
(blowout) because they are more likely to 2 Traction
become punctured or damaged by road de- 3 Temperature resistance
bris, potholes etc.
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
392
Operation
Tires and wheels
Treadwear Traction Temperature

The treadwear grade is a comparative rat- The traction grades, from highest to low- The temperature grades are A (the high-
ing based on the wear rate of the tire when est, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades rep- est), B, and C, representing the tire’s resis-
tested under controlled conditions on a resent the tire’s ability to stop on wet tance to the generation of heat and its
specified government test course. For ex- pavement as measured under controlled ability to dissipate heat when tested under
ample, a tire graded 150 would wear one conditions on specified government test controlled conditions on a specified indoor
and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire laboratory test wheel. Sustained high tem-
government course as a tire graded 100. marked C may have poor traction perfor- perature can cause the material of the tire
The relative performance of tires depends mance. to degenerate and reduce tire life, and ex-
upon the actual conditions of their use, cessive temperature can lead to sudden
however, and may depart significantly
from the norm due to variations in driving
Warning! G tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all passenger
habits, service practices and differences in The traction grade assigned to this tire is car tires must meet under the Federal
road characteristics and climate. based on straight-ahead braking traction Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109.
tests, and does not include acceleration, Grades B and A represent higher levels of
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction performance on the laboratory test wheel
characteristics. than the minimum required by law.
393
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire ply material Tire and loading terminology

Warning! G
The temperature grade for this tire is estab- Accessory weight
lished for a tire that is properly inflated and The combined weight (in excess of those
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underin- standard items which may be replaced) of
flation, or excessive loading, either sepa- automatic transmission, power steering,
rately or in combination, can cause power brakes, power windows, power
excessive heat build-up and possible tire seats, radio, and heater, to the extent that
failure. these items are available as
factory-installed equipment (whether
installed or not).
1 Plies in sidewall
2 Plies under tread Air pressure
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data The amount of air inside the tire pressing
on tires are specific to each vehicle and may vary outward on each square inch of the tire.
Air pressure is expressed in pounds per
This marking tells you about the type of square inch (psi), or kilopascal (kPa) or
cord and number of plies in the sidewall bars.
and under the tread.
Aspect ratio
Dimensional relationship between tire
section height and section width
expressed in percentage.
394
Operation
Tires and wheels
Bar DOT (Department of Transportation) GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)

Another metric unit for air pressure. There A tire branding symbol which denotes the The GVW comprises the weight of the
are 14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) tire meets requirements of the vehicle including fuel, tools, spare wheel,
to 1 bar; there are 100 kilopascals (kPa) U.S. Department of Transportation. installed accessories, passengers and
to 1 bar. cargo and, if applicable, trailer tongue
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) load. The GVW must never exceed the
Bead GVWR indicated on the certification label
The GAWR is the maximum permissible
The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped located on the driver’s door B-pillar.
axle weight. The gross vehicle weight on
by steel cords that hold the tire onto the each axle must never exceed the GAWR for
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
rim. the front and rear axle indicated on the
certification label located on the driver’s This is the maximum permissible vehicle
Cold tire inflation pressure door B-pillar. weight of the fully loaded vehicle (weight of
Tire inflation pressure when your vehicle the vehicle including all options, passen-
has been sitting for at least 3 hours or GTW (Gross Trailer Weight) gers, fuel, and cargo and, if applicable,
driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km). trailer tongue load). It is indicated on
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus
certification label located on the driver’s
the weight of all cargo, equipment, luggage
Curb weight door B-pillar.
etc. loaded on the trailer.
The weight of a motor vehicle with stan- Kilopascal (kPa)
dard equipment including the maximum
The metric unit for air pressure. There are
capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, and, if so
6.9 kPa to 1 psi; another metric unit for air
equipped, air conditioning and additional
pressure is bars. There are 100 kilopascals
optional equipment, but without passen-
(kPa) to 1 bar.
gers and cargo.
395
Operation
Tires and wheels
Maximum load rating Production options weight Rim

The maximum load in kilograms and The combined weight of those installed A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube
pounds that can be carried by the tire. regular production options weighing over assembly upon which the tire beads are
5 lbs (2.3 kilograms) in excess of those seated.
Maximum loaded vehicle weight standard items which they replace, not
previously considered in curb weight or Sidewall
The sum of curb weight, accessory weight,
accessory weight, including heavy duty
total load limit, and production options The portion of a tire between the tread and
brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty
weight. the bead.
battery, and special trim.
Maximum tire inflation pressure TIN (Tire Identification Number)
PSI (Pounds per square inch)
This number is the greatest amount of air Unique identifier which facilitates efforts
pressure that should ever be put in the tire A standard unit of measure for air pressure by tire manufacturers to notify purchasers
under normal driving conditions. -> bar, kilopascal (kPa). in recall situations or other safety matters
concerning tires and gives purchases the
Normal occupant weight Recommended tire inflation pressure means to easily identify such tires. The TIN
Recommended tire inflation pressure is comprised of “Manufacturer’s identifica-
The number of occupants the vehicle is
listed on placard located on driver’s door tion mark”, “Tire size”, “Tire type code”
designed to seat, multiplied by
B-pillar for normal driving conditions. and “Date of manufacture”.
68 kilograms (150 lbs).
Provides best handling, tread life and
riding comfort. Tire load rating
Occupant distribution
The distribution of occupants in a vehicle Numerical code associated with the
at their designated seating positions. maximum load a tire can support.
396
Operation
Tires and wheels
Tire ply composition and material used Treadwear indicators Vehicle maximum load on the tire
This indicates the number of plies or the Narrow bands, sometimes called Load on an individual tire that is
number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in “wear bars” that show across the tread of determined by distributing to each axle its
the tire tread and sidewall. Tire manufac- a tire when only 1/16 in (1.6 mm) of tread share of the maximum loaded vehicle
turers also must indicate the ply materials remains. weight and dividing it by two.
in the tire and sidewall, which include
steel, nylon, polyester, and others. TWR (Tongue Weight Rating) Rotating tires
Maximum permissible weight on trailer
Tire speed rating
Part of tire designation; indicates the
tongue.
Warning! G
speed range for which a tire is approved. Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
Rotate front and rear wheels only if they are
A tire information system that provides of the same dimension.
Traction
consumers with ratings for a tire’s traction, If your vehicle is equipped with mixed-size
Force exerted by the vehicle on the road temperature and treadwear. Ratings are tires (different tire dimensions front vs.
via the tires. The amount of grip provided. determined by tire manufacturers using rear), tire rotation is not possible.
government testing procedures. The
Tread ratings are molded into the sidewall of the
tire. Tire rotation can be performed on vehicles
The portion of a tire that comes into with tires of the same dimension all
contact with the road. around. If your vehicle is equipped with
tires of the same dimension all around,
tires can be rotated, observing a
front-to-rear rotation pattern that will
maintain the intended rotation (spinning)
direction of the tire (컄 page 368).
397
Operation
Tires and wheels
In some cases, such as when your vehicle

is equipped with mixed-size tires (different Warning! G
tire dimension front vs. rear), tire rotation
is not possible. Have the tightening torque checked after
changing a wheel. Wheels could become
If applicable to your vehicle’s tire configu- loose if not tightened with a torque of
ration, tires can be rotated according to 110 lb-ft (150 Nm).
the tire manufacturer’s recommended in-
tervals in the tire manufacturer’s warranty Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel
pamphlet located in your vehicle literature bolts specified for your vehicle’s rims.
portfolio. If none is available, tires should
be rotated every 3000 to 6000 miles For information on wheel change, see the
(5000 to 10000 km), or sooner if neces- “Practical hints” section (컄 page 469) and
sary, according to the degree of tire wear. (컄 page 497).
The same rotation (spinning) direction
must be maintained (컄 page 368).
Rotate tires before the characteristic tire
wear pattern becomes visible (shoulder
wear on front tires and tread center wear
on rear tires).
Thoroughly clean the mounting face of
wheels and brake disks, i.e. the inner side
of the wheels/tires, during each rotation.
Check for and ensure proper tire inflation
pressure.
398
Operation
Winter driving
왔 Winter driving
Before the onset of winter, have your Winter tires
vehicle winterized at an authorized Warning! G
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. This Always use winter tires at temperatures
service includes: below 45°F (7°C) and whenever wintry Winter tires with a tread depth under 1/6 in
road conditions prevail. Not all M+S rated (4 mm) must be replaced. They are no long-
앫 Check of anticorrosion and antifreeze
tires provide special winter performance. er suitable for winter operation.
concentration.
Make sure the tires you use show the
앫 Addition of cleaning concentrate to the mountain/snowflake.marking on the Always observe the speed rating of the
water of the windshield and headlamp tire sidewall. These tires meet specific winter tires installed on your vehicle. If the
cleaning system. Add MB Concentrate snow traction performance requirements maximum speed for which your tires are
“MB SummerFit” to a premixed wind- of the Rubber Manufacturers Association rated is below the speed rating of your
shield washer solvent/antifreeze (RMA) and The Rubber Association of Can- vehicle, you must place a notice to this
which is formulated for temperatures ada (RAC) and have been designed specif- effect where it will be seen by the driver.
below freezing point (컄 page 551). ically for use in snow conditions. Use of Such notices are available from your tire
앫 Battery test. Battery capacity drops winter tires is the only way to achieve the dealer or from any authorized
with decreasing ambient temperature. maximum effectiveness of the ABS, ESP®, Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
A well charged battery helps to make 4-ETS, and EBP in winter operation.
sure that the engine can be started For safe handling, make sure all mounted
even at low ambient temperatures. winter tires are of the same make and have
앫 Tire change. Mercedes-Benz recom- the same tread design.
mends M+S rated radial-ply tires with a
minimum tread depth of approximately
1
/6 in (4 mm) on all four wheels for the
winter season.
399
Operation
Winter driving
Snow chains Please observe the following guidelines

Warning! G when using snow chains:
! Even on vehicles with all-wheel-drive use 앫 Use of snow chains is not permissible
If you use your spare tire when winter tires snow chains on rear tires only.
are fitted on the other wheels, be aware that with all wheel/tire combinations
Some tire sizes do not leave adequate clearance (컄 page 536).
the difference in tire characteristics may for snow chains. To help avoid serious damage to
very well impair turning stability and that your vehicle or tires, use of snow chains is not 앫 Snow chains should only be used on
overall driving stability may be reduced. permissible with the spare wheel. the rear wheels. Follow the manufac-
Adapt your driving style accordingly. turer’s mounting instructions.
! Vehicles with air suspension package*:
Have the spare tire replaced with a winter When driving with snow chains, do not select 앫 Only use snow chains that are
tire at the nearest authorized SPORT mode (컄 page 269). approved by Mercedes-Benz. Your
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
i When driving with snow chains, you may
wish to deactivate the ESP® (컄 page 99) before Center will be glad to advise you on this
Block heater (Canada only) setting the vehicle in motion. This will improve subject.
the vehicle’s traction.
앫 Use of snow chains may be prohibited
The engine is equipped with a block Snow chains should only be driven on depending on location. Always check
heater. snow-covered roads at speeds not to local and state laws before installing
The electrical cable may be installed at an exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). Remove chains snow chains.
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck as soon as possible when driving on roads 앫 Do not use snow chains on the spare
Center. without snow. wheel (컄 page 538).
400
Operation
Maintenance
왔 Maintenance
We strongly recommend that you have Starting approximately 1 month before
your vehicle serviced by an authorized your next maintenance service is due, one
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center, in of the following messages will appear in
accordance with the Maintenance Booklet the multifunction display while you are
at the times called for by the maintenance driving or when you switch on the ignition
service indicator display. (example service A):
Failure to have the vehicle maintained in Service A in XXXXX miles (km) Refer to Maintenance Booklet for a listing
accordance with the Maintenance Booklet Service A in XXX days of maintenance services and intervals they
and maintenance service indicator at the Service A in X day need to be performed at.
designated times/mileage will result in Service A due now
vehicle damage not covered by the i Vehicles equipped with Vehicle
The maintenance services will be indicated Maintenance System only (U.S. vehicles):
by showing a service type A through type H The Vehicle Maintenance System in your vehicle
in the multifunction display. Types A tracks distance driven and the time elapsed
Maintenance service indicator since your last maintenance service and calcu-
through H are classified based on estimat-
message ed time needed to perform the mainte- lates other maintenance service work required.
nance service, ranging:
The maintenance service indicator mes-
sage will notify you when your next mainte- from Service A
nance service is due. (approx. 1 hour)
to Service H
(approx. 8 hours)
401
Operation
Maintenance
i Vehicles equipped with FSS PLUS (Flexible You can also clear it yourself: Maintenance service term exceeded
Service System PLUS) only (Canada vehicles): If you have exceeded the suggested main-
앫 FSS PLUS evaluates engine temperature, oil tenance service term, you will see the fol-
level, vehicle speed, engine speed, distance lowing message in the multifunction
driven and the time elapsed since your last
display:
service and calculates other maintenance
service work required. Service A exceeded by XXXXX miles (km)
앫 The interval between maintenance services Service A exceeded by XXX days
depends on your driving habits. A gentle driv- Service A exceeded by X day
ing style, moderate engine speeds and the
avoidance of short-distance trips will length- In addition, a signal sounds when the
en the interval between services. message appears.
1 Reset button
Any authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Clearing the maintenance service 왘 Press reset button 1 on the instru- Center will reset the maintenance service
indicator message ment cluster. indicator following a completed mainte-
The maintenance service indicator mes- The maintenance service indicator nance service.
sage is automatically cleared message is cleared and the standard
앫 after approximately 10 seconds when display appears in the multifunction
you switch on the ignition or when display (컄 page 154).
reaching the maintenance service
threshold while driving
앫 after approximately 30 seconds, once
the suggested maintenance service
term has passed
402
Operation
Maintenance
Calling up the maintenance service To arrive at the true maintenance service dead- i If the maintenance service indicator was
indicator display line, you will need to subtract these days from inadvertently reset, have an authorized
the days shown in the maintenance service indi- Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center correct it.
You can call up the maintenance service in- cator message or maintenance service indicator
display. Only reset if the proper maintenance service has
dicator display at any time to check when been performed. Resetting the system without
the next maintenance service is due. Do not confuse the maintenance service indica- performing the proper service as called for by
tor with the engine oil level indicator N. the maintenance service indicator will result in
왘 Switch on the ignition (컄 page 40). engine damage and/or other vehicle damage not
왘 Press button è or ÿ on the mul- Resetting the maintenance service covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
tifunction steering wheel repeatedly indicator Warranty.
until the standard display appears in
In the event that the maintenance service
the multifunction display (컄 page 154).
on your vehicle is not carried out by an
왘 Press button k or j until the authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
maintenance service indicator display Center, you can have the maintenance
with the service symbol 9 and the service indicator reset. The automotive
service deadline appears in the multi- maintenance facility carrying out the
function display. maintenance service will find the informa-
tion for resetting the maintenance service
i If the battery is disconnected, the days of indicator in the maintenance-relevant
disconnection will not be included in the count
shown by the maintenance service indicator. information for your vehicle. Such informa-
tion is available from either your
Center or directly from Mercedes-Benz.
403
Operation
Vehicle care
Cleaning and care of the vehicle While in operation, even while parked, your Frequent washing reduces and/or
vehicle is subjected to varying external in- eliminates the aggressiveness and
Regular and proper care will help to fluences which, if gone unchecked, can at- potency of the above adverse influences.
maintain the value of your vehicle. The tack the paintwork as well as the
More frequent washings are necessary to
best way to protect your vehicle from underbody and cause lasting damage.
deal with unfavorable conditions:
harmful environmental influences is to
Such damage is caused not only by
wash it and use protective treatments 앫 near the ocean
extreme and varying climatic conditions,
regularly. 앫 in industrial areas (smoke, exhaust
but also by:
emissions)
앫
Warning! G Air pollution
앫 during winter operation
앫 Road salt
Many cleaning products can be hazardous. You should check your vehicle from time to
앫 Tar
Some are poisonous, others are flammable. time for stone chipping or other damage.
Always follow the instructions on the partic- 앫 Gravel and stone chipping Any damage should be repaired as soon as
ular container. Always open your vehicle’s possible to prevent corrosion.
To avoid paint damage, you should
doors or windows when cleaning the inside. immediately remove: In doing so, do not neglect the underbody
Never use fluids or solvents that are not de- of the vehicle. A prerequisite for a thor-
앫 Grease and oil
signed for cleaning your vehicle. ough check is a washing of the underbody
앫 Fuel followed by a thorough inspection. Dam-
Always lock away cleaning products and
앫 Coolant aged areas need to be re-undercoated.
keep them out of reach of children.
앫 Brake fluid
앫 Bird droppings
앫 Insects
앫 Tree resins, etc.
404
Operation
Vehicle care
Your vehicle has been treated at the facto- The following topics deal with the cleaning Tar stains
ry with a wax-base rustproofing in the body and care of your vehicle and give important
Quickly remove tar stains before they dry
cavities which will last for the lifetime of “how-to” information as well as references
and become more difficult to remove. A tar
the vehicle. Post-production treatment is to Mercedes-Benz approved car-care
remover is recommended.
neither necessary nor recommended by products.
Mercedes-Benz because of the possibility
Paintwork, painted body components
of incompatibility between materials used Power washer
in the production process and others ap- ! Affixing stickers, magnets, adhesive tape or
plied later. ! Follow the instructions provided by the similar materials to painted body components
power washer manufacturer on maintaining a may damage the paintwork.
We have selected car-care products and distance between the vehicle and the nozzle of
compiled recommendations which are the power washer. Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Care
specially matched to our vehicles and Never use a round nozzle to power-wash tires. should be applied when water drops on the
which always reflect the latest technology. The intense jet of water can result in damage to paint surface do not “bead up”. This should
You can obtain Mercedes-Benz approved the tire. normally be done every 3 to 5 months,
car-care products at an authorized Always replace a damaged tire. depending on the climate and washing
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. Always keep the jet of water moving across the
detergent used.
surface. Do not aim directly at electrical parts, Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Cleaner
Scratches, corrosive deposits, corrosion or
electrical connectors, seals, or other rubber should be applied if the paint surface
damage due to negligent or incorrect care parts.
cannot always be removed or repaired with shows signs of dirt embedding (i.e. loss of
the car-care products recommended here. i Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: gloss).
In such cases it is best to seek aid at an If a door handle is hit by a strong jet of water, and
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is in close
proximity, i.e. within approximately 3 ft (approxi-
Center.
mately 1 m), the vehicle could be inadvertently
locked or unlocked.
405
Operation
Vehicle care
Do not apply any of these products or wax Vehicle washing 왘 Thoroughly spray the vehicle with a dif-
if your vehicle is parked in the sun or if the fused jet of water.
In the winter, thoroughly remove all traces
hood is still hot.
of road salt as soon as possible. Direct only a very weak spray towards
왘 Use the appropriate MB-Touch-Up the ventilation intake.
When washing the vehicle underbody, do
Stick for quick and provisional repairs not forget to clean the inner sides of the 왘 Use plenty of water and rinse the
of minor paint damage (i.e. chips from wheels. sponge and chamois frequently.
stones, vehicle doors, etc.).
i Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: 왘 Rinse with clean water and thoroughly
Engine cleaning If a door handle is hit by a strong jet of water, and dry with a chamois.
a SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is in close
Prior to cleaning the engine compartment proximity, i.e. within approximately 3 ft (approxi- Do not allow cleaning agents to dry on
make sure to protect electrical compo- mately 1 m), the vehicle could be inadvertently the finish.
nents and connectors from the intrusion of locked or unlocked.
! Do not use scouring agents on these parts.
water and cleaning agents.
Hand-wash Never apply strong force and only use a soft,
Corrosion protection, such as non-sratching cloth when cleaning the vehicle.
MB Anticorrosion Wax, should be applied Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle Do not attempt to wipe the surface with a dry
to the engine compartment after every en- in direct sunlight. cloth or sponge.
gine cleaning. Before applying, all control 왘 Only use a mild car wash detergent, Otherwise you may scratch or damage the paint.
linkage bushings and joints should be lu- such as Mercedes-Benz approved Car
bricated. The poly-V-belt and all pulleys Shampoo.
should be protected from any wax.
406
Operation
Vehicle care
Automatic car wash ! If you want the gear position to remain in N i After running the vehicle through an auto-
(for example when the vehicle is pulled through matic car wash, wipe any wax off of the wind-
You can have your car washed in an auto-
a car wash) shield (컄 page 410). This will prevent smears
matic car wash from the start. Automatic and reduce wiping noise which can be caused by
car washes without brushes are prefera- 앫 do not remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch residual wax on the windshield.
ble.
or, when using KEYLESS-GO* When leaving the car wash, make sure that the
왘 To protect the filter system, switch the mirrors are folded out. Otherwise they may
앫 do not turn off the engine using the vibrate.
climate control (컄 page 208) or the au-
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button* and open
tomatic climate control (컄 page 222) the driver’s door.
to air recirculation mode. Ornamental moldings
Otherwise, the transmission will shift to P and
! Do not clean your vehicle in an automatic lock the wheels, preventing the vehicle from be- For regular cleaning and care of ornamen-
touchless car wash which use caustic spray. ing pulled through a car wash. tal moldings, use a damp cloth.
Otherwise the caustic spray will damage the
paint or ornamental moldings. ! Make sure that the windshield wiper switch ! Do not use chrome cleaner on ornamental
is set to 0 (컄 page 61). Otherwise, e.g. the rain moldings. Although ornamental moldings may
If the vehicle is very dirty, prewash it sensor could activate and cause the wipers to have chrome appearance, they could be made of
before running it through the automatic move unintentionally. This may lead to vehicle anodized aluminum that will be damaged when
car wash. damage. cleaned with chrome cleaner. Instead, use a
damp cloth to clean those ornamental moldings.
Due to the width of the vehicle, fold in exterior
rear view mirrors prior to running the vehicle For very dirty ornamental moldings of which you
through an automatic car wash to prevent are sure are chrome-plated, use a chrome clean-
damage to the mirrors. er. If in doubt whether an ornamental molding is
chrome-plated, contact an authorized
407
Operation
Vehicle care
Headlamps, brake lamps, tail lamps, Cleaning the Distronic* system sensor 왘 Restart the engine after cleaning sen-
side markers, turn signal lenses cover sor cover 1.
왘 Use a mild car wash detergent, such as
Cleaning the Parktronic* system
Mercedes-Benz approved Car Sham-
sensors
poo, with plenty of water.
! Only use window cleaning solutions that are
suitable for plastic lamp lenses. Window clean-
ing solutions which are not suitable may damage
the plastic lamp lenses of the headlamps. There-
fore, do not use abrasives, solvents or cleaners
that contain solvents.
Never apply strong force and only use a soft,
non-scratching cloth when cleaning the lenses. 1 Distronic* system sensor cover
Do not attempt to wipe dirty lenses with a dry 왘 Switch off the ignition (컄 page 40).
cloth or sponge.
왘 Use a mild car wash detergent, such as 1 Parktronic* system sensors in front
Otherwise you may scratch or damage the lens
surface. Mercedes-Benz approved Car Sham- bumper
poo, with plenty of water and a
왘 Use a mild car wash detergent, such as
non-scratching cloth to clean sensor
cover 1. Mercedes-Benz approved Car Sham-
poo, with plenty of water and a soft,
! To prevent scratches or damage, never non-scratching cloth to clean
apply strong force and only use a soft, sensors 1 on the bumpers.
non-scratchy cloth when cleaning the sensor
cover 1. Do not attempt to wipe dirty sensors
with a dry cloth or sponge.
408
Operation
Vehicle care
! Do not apply strong pressure to the sensor Cleaning the Rear View Camera lens* ! Do not clean the camera and the area
covers. Applying strong pressure may damage around the camera:
the sensor covers. 앫 with a high-pressure cleaner
Follow the instructions provided by the power 앫 with a dry cloth and high pressure
washer manufacturer on maintaining a distance
between the vehicle and the nozzle of the power 앫 with aggressive cleaning agents
washer. You could otherwise damage the camera.
! To prevent scratches, never apply strong
force and only use a soft, non-scratching cloth
when cleaning the sensors. Do not attempt to
wipe dirty sensors with a dry cloth or sponge.
1 Camera lens
왘 Only use clean water and a soft,
non-scratching cloth to clean the
camera lens 1.
Be careful not to apply wax to camera
lens 1 when waxing the vehicle. If
necessary, remove the wax using the
Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo
with plenty of water.
409
Operation
Vehicle care
Cleaning the windows and the wiper 왘 Use a soft, clean cloth and a mild win- Light alloy wheels
blades dow cleaning solution on all outside
If possible, clean wheels once a week.
and inside glass surfaces.
왘 Use Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel
Warning! G An automotive glass cleaner is recom-
Care, a soft bristle brush and a strong
mended.
spray of water for cleaning the light al-
For safety reasons, switch off wipers and re-
move SmartKey from starter switch ! Fold the windshield wiper arms back onto loy wheels.
the windshield before turning the SmartKey in
(vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: Make sure the the starter switch or pressing the KEYLESS-GO ! Only use acid-free cleaning materials. Acid
vehicle’s on-board electronics have start/stop button (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*). may cause corrosion or damage the clear coat.
status 0) before cleaning the windshield
and/or the wiper blades. Otherwise, the
Hold on to the wiper when folding the wiper arm ! The vehicle should not be parked for an ex-
back. If released, the force of the impact from tended period of time immediately after it has
wiper motor could suddenly turn on and the tensioning spring could crack the windshield. been cleaned, especially not after the wheel rims
cause injury. have been cleaned with wheel rim cleaner.
! To clean the window interior, do not use a Wheel rim cleaners can lead to increased
dry cloth, abrasives, solvents or cleaners con- corrosion of the brake disks and brake pads.
왘 Fold the wiper arms forward until they taining solvents. Do not touch the inside of the Non-approved wheel cleaners may also damage
engage. front, rear or side windows and the power the wheel paint if the car is not driven after
tilt/sliding sunroof* or rear panorama roof with cleaning. Therefore, the vehicle’s brake system
! Do not pull on the wiper blade inserts. They hard objects such as an ice scraper or ring. should always be warmed-up before it is parked
could tear. Doing so may damage the windows. after cleaning. To do so, please drive your vehicle
왘 Clean the wiper blade inserts with a for several minutes to allow the brakes to dry.
clean cloth and detergent solution. When applying Mercedes-Benz approved Tire
Care and Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care
products, take care not to spray them on the
brake disks.
410
Operation
Vehicle care
Plastic and rubber parts ! Do not use oil, wax or scouring agents on Steering wheel
these parts.
왘 Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or 왘 Wipe with a damp cloth and dry thor-
mild detergent for delicate fabrics as a Never apply strong force and only use a soft, oughly or clean with Mercedes-Benz
washing solution. non-scratching cloth when cleaning the surface. approved Leather Care.
Do not attempt to wipe the surface with a dry
왘 Wipe with a cloth moistened in a cloth or sponge.
Carpets
lukewarm solution. Otherwise you may scratch or damage the
surface. 왘 Use Mercedes-Benz approved Carpet
The surface may temporarily change
color. If this is the case, wait for it to and Fabric Care for cleaning the car-
dry. Hard plastic trim items pets.
왘 Use Mercedes-Benz approved Interior
Headliner
Warning! G Care, a soft, lint-free cloth and apply
왘 Use a soft bristle brush or a
with light pressure.
Do not use cleaners containing solvents or dry-shampoo cleaner in case of
! Never apply strong force and only use a soft, excessive dirt.
cockpit care sprays to clean the cockpit or non-scratching cloth when cleaning the surface.
the steering wheel. Cleaners containing sol- Do not attempt to wipe the surface with a dry
vents will make the surface porous and vehi- cloth or sponge.
cle occupants could suffer serious injuries Otherwise you may scratch or damage the
from plastic parts coming loose in the event surface.
of air bag deployment.
411
Operation
Vehicle care
Seat belts 왘 Wipe leather upholstery with a damp

왘 Only use clear, lukewarm water and
Warning! G cloth and dry thoroughly or clean with
Mercedes-Benz approved Leather
soap. Only use seat or head restraint covers which Care.
! The seat belts must not be treated with have been tested and approved by
chemical cleaning agents. Do not dry the seat Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle model. ! Wipe with light pressure to avoid damage to
belts at temperatures above 176°F (80°C) or in Using other seat or head restraint covers the upholstery.
direct sunlight. may interfere with or prevent the activation Exercise particular care when cleaning
of the active head restraints. Contact an perforated leather as its underside should
Warning! G authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck not become wet.
Center for availability.
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may MB Tex upholstery
severely weaken them. In a crash they may Leather upholstery* 왘 Use Mercedes-Benz approved Interior
not be able to provide adequate protection. Care onto a soft, lint-free cloth and
Please not that leather upholstery is a
natural product and is therefore subject to apply with light pressure for cleaning
Upholstery a natural aging process. Leather uphol- the upholstery.
Using aftermarket seat covers or wearing stery may also react to certain ambient
influences such as high humidity or high Wood trims
clothing that have the tendency to give off
coloring (e.g. when wet, etc.) may cause temperature by showing wrinkles for 왘 Dampen cloth using water and use
the upholstery to become permanently dis- example. damp cloth to clean wood trims in your
colored. By lining the seats with a proper vehicle.
intermediate cover, contact-discoloration
will be prevented. ! Do not use solvents like tar remover or
wheel cleaner nor polishes or waxes as these
may be abrasive.
412
Practical hints
What to do if …
Where will I find ...?
Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Opening/closing in an emergency
Resetting activated head restraints
Replacing SmartKey batteries
Replacing bulbs
Replacing wiper blades
Flat tire
Bleeding the fuel system
(diesel engine only)
Battery
Jump starting
Towing the vehicle
Fuses
413
Practical hints
What to do if …
Lamps in instrument cluster General information: bulb self-check when switching on the
If any of the following lamps in the instru- ignition, have the respective bulb checked
ment cluster fails to come on during the and replaced if necessary.
Problem Possible cause/consequence Suggested solution

- The yellow ABS indicator lamp ABS has detected a malfunction and has 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
comes on while the engine is switched off. The BAS, ESP®, EBP and 4-ETS Wheels may lock during hard braking,
running. are also switched off (see messages in multi- reducing steering capability.
function display).
왘 Read and observe messages in the
The brake system is still functioning normally multifunction display (컄 page 428).
but without the ABS available.
왘 Have the system checked at an
If the ABS control unit is malfunctioning, authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
other systems such as the navigation Truck Center as soon as possible.
system* or the automatic transmission may
Failure to follow these instructions
also be malfunctioning.
increases the risk of an accident.
The charging voltage has fallen below When the voltage is above this value
10 volts. The ABS has switched off. again, the ABS is operational again and
The battery might not be charged sufficiently. the ABS indicator lamp should go out.
If the ABS indicator lamp should go out:
왘 Have the generator (alternator) and
the battery checked.
414
Practical hints
What to do if …
Problem Possible cause/conse- Suggested solution

quence
; (USA only) The red brake warning lamp You are driving with the 왘 Release the parking brake
comes on while driving and parking brake set. (컄 page 57).
3 (Canada only)
you hear a warning sound.
There is insufficient brake fluid 왘 Risk of accident! Carefully stop the
in the reservoir. vehicle in a safe location or as soon it
is safe to do so.
왘 Apply the parking brake (컄 page 65).
Light Truck Center. Do not add brake
fluid! This will not solve the problem.
! If you find that the brake fluid in the brake

Warning! G Do not add brake fluid before checking the
brake system. Overfilling the brake fluid res-
fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or
below, have the brake system checked for brake
Driving with the brake warning lamp illumi- ervoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot pad thickness and leaks.
nated can result in an accident. Have your engine parts and the brake fluid catching
brake system checked immediately if the fire. You can be seriously burned.
brake warning lamp stays on.
415
Practical hints
What to do if …

quence
; (USA only) The red brake warning lamp A malfunction in the Electronic 왘 Have the system checked at an autho-
comes on while driving. In ad- Brake Proportioning rized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
3 (Canada only)
dition, the yellow ABS malfunc- (컄 page 101) was detected. Center as soon as possible.
- tion indicator lamp, and the
v yellow ESP® warning lamp
come on and a warning will
sound.
416
Practical hints
What to do if …

? (USA only) The yellow engine malfunc- There is a malfunction in: 왘 Have the vehicle checked as soon as
tion indicator lamp comes on possible by an authorized
± (Canada only) 앫 The fuel management system
while driving. Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
앫 The ignition system An on-board diagnostic connector is
앫 The emission control system used by the service station to link the
vehicle to the shop diagnostics
앫 Systems which affect
system. It allows the accurate identi-
emissions fication of system malfunctions
Such malfunctions may result in through the readout of diagnostic
excessive emissions values and trouble codes. It is located in the
may switch the engine to its front left area of the footwell next to
limp-home (emergency opera- the parking brake pedal.
tion) mode (컄 page 198).
i Some states may by law require you to visit

a workshop immediately as soon as the engine
malfunction indicator lamp comes on. Check
local requirements.
417
Practical hints
What to do if …

quence
? (USA only) The yellow engine malfunction A loss of pressure has been 왘 Check the fuel cap (컄 page 352).
indicator lamp comes on while detected in the fuel system.
± (Canada only) If it is not closed properly:
driving. The fuel cap may not be closed
properly. 왘 Close the fuel cap.
The fuel system may be leaky. If it is closed properly:
왘 Have the fuel system checked by an
Center.
Your fuel tank is empty. 왘 After refueling start, turn off and
restart the engine three or four times in
succession.
The limp-home mode is canceled. You do
not need to have your vehicle checked.
418
Practical hints
What to do if …

v ® ®
The yellow ABS/ESP warning The ESP has been switched off. 왘 Switch the ESP® back on (컄 page 100).
lamp comes on while driving. Risk of accident! Exceptions: (컄 page 99).
When the ESP® is switched off it will not sta- 왘 If leaving the ESP switched off, adapt
®
your speed and driving to the prevailing

bilize the vehicle if the system recognizes
road and weather conditions.
that the vehicle starts to skid or that a wheel
is spinning. If the ESP® cannot be switched on:
왘 Have the system checked at an autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
The ESP® is not operational due to a malfunc- 왘 Observe additional messages in the
tion. multifunction display.
Risk of accident! 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
왘 Adapt your speed and driving to the pre-
vailing road and weather conditions.
왘 Have the system checked at an autho-
419
Practical hints
What to do if …

v ®
The yellow ABS/ESP warning The ESP , ABS, or traction control has come 왘 When driving off, apply as little throt-
®
lamp flashes while driving. into operation because of detected traction tle as possible.
loss in at least one tire.
왘 While driving, ease up on the acceler-
The cruise control and the Distronic* system ator.
are deactivated.
왘 Adapt your speed and driving to the
prevailing road and weather condi-
tions.
왘 Do not deactivate the ESP®.
Exceptions: (컄 page 99).
The yellow fuel tank reserve The fuel level has gone below the reserve 왘 Refuel at the next gas station
warning lamp in the fuel gauge mark. (컄 page 352).
comes on while driving.
420
Practical hints
What to do if …

< The red seat belt telltale comes The seat belt telltale reminds you and your 왘 Fasten your seat belts.
on for a maximum of 6 seconds passengers to fasten your seat belts before Regardless of whether the seat belts
after starting the engine. driving off. are fastened or not, the seat belt tell-
tale always comes on and remains lit
for 6 seconds after starting the
engine.
< You hear a warning chime for a You have forgotten to fasten your seat belt. 왘 Fasten your seat belts.
maximum of 6 seconds after
The warning chime stops sounding.
starting the engine.
421
Practical hints
What to do if …

< The red seat belt telltale comes You and/or your front passenger have 왘 Fasten your seat belts.
on while the vehicle is standing forgotten to fasten your seat belts. The seat belt telltale goes out.
still and the engine is running or
during driving. There are items placed on the front passen- 왘 Remove the items from the front pas-
ger seat and therefore the system senses the senger seat and put them in a safe
front passenger seat as being occupied. place.
The seat belt telltale goes out.
< During driving the red seat belt The vehicle’s speed once exceeded 15 mph 왘 Fasten your seat belts.
telltale flashes and you addition- (25 km/h) and you and/or your front pas-
The seat belt telltale goes out and the
ally hear an intermittent warning senger have forgotten to fasten your seat
warning chime stops sounding.
chime with increasing intensity. belts.
There are items placed on the front passen- 왘 Remove the items from the front pas-
ger seat and therefore the system senses the senger seat and put them in a safe
front passenger seat as being occupied. place.
The seat belt telltale goes out and the
warning chime stops sounding.
i After 60 seconds with an unfastened seat The seat belt telltale will only go out if both, the
belt the warning chime stops sounding and the driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt are
seat belt telltale illuminates continuously. fastened, or the vehicle is standing still and a
front door is opened.
422
Practical hints
What to do if …

l The red distance warning lamp 앫 You are gaining too rapidly on the vehicle 왘 Apply the brakes immediately.
comes on while driving and you ahead of you.
왘 Carefully observe the traffic
hear a warning chime sound.
앫 The distance warning system has recog- situation. You may need to brake
nized a stationary obstacle on your probable or maneuver to avoid hitting an
line of travel. obstacle.
1 The red SRS indicator lamp comes There is a malfunction in the restraint systems. 왘 Drive with added caution to the
on while driving. The air bags or emergency tensioning device nearest authorized
(ETDs) could deploy unexpectedly or fail to Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
deploy unexpectedly in an accident. Center.
Warning! G the SRS may not be activated when needed

in an accident, which could result in serious
In the event a malfunction of the SRS is indi- or fatal injury, or it might deploy unexpect-
cated as outlined above, the SRS may not be edly and unnecessarily which could result in
operational. For your safety, we strongly an accident and/or injury to you or to
recommend that you visit an authorized others.
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center immedi-
ately to have the system checked, otherwise
423
Practical hints
What to do if …

H USA only: The TPMS (USA only) or Advanced TPMS* 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt,
Combination low tire pres- (Canada only) detects a loss of pressure in avoiding abrupt steering and braking
sure/TPMS malfunction telltale at least one tire. maneuvers. Observe the traffic situation
for the TPMS illuminates contin- around you.
uously.
왘 Read and observe messages in the
Canada only:
Low tire pressure telltale for the
Advanced TPMS* illuminates If the tire inflation pressure in the respec-
continuously. tive tire(s) has (have) been corrected, the
combination low tire pressure/TPMS mal-
function telltale goes out after few minutes
driving.
H USA only: There is a malfunction in the TPMS. 왘 Read and observe messages in the
Combination low tire pres-
sure/TPMS malfunction telltale 왘 Have the TPMS checked by an
for the TPMS flashes authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
60 seconds and then stays Center.
illuminated.
After the malfunction has been remedied
the combination low tire pressure/TPMS
malfunction telltale goes out after few
minutes driving.
424
Practical hints
What to do if …
Warning! G Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency

and tire tread life, and may affect the vehi-
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of in-
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), cle’s handling and stopping ability. Please compatible replacement or alternate tires or
should be checked monthly when cold and note that the TPMS is not a substitute for wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS
inflated to the inflation pressure recom- proper tire maintenance, and it is the driv- from functioning properly. Always check the
mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the er’s responsibility to maintain correct tire TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing
vehicle placard or the tire inflation pressure pressure, even if underinflation has not one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle
label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different reached the level to trigger illumination of to ensure that the replacement or alternate
size than the size indicated on the vehicle the TPMS low tire pressure telltale. tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue
placard or the tire inflation pressure label, USA only: to function properly.
you should determine the proper tire infla- Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
tion pressure for those tires). TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has when the system is not operating properly.
been equipped with a tire pressure monitor- The TPMS malfunction indicator is com-
ing system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire bined with the low tire pressure telltale.
pressure telltale when one or more of your When the system detects a malfunction, the
tires is significantly underinflated. Accord- telltale will flash for approximately 1 minute
ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illu- and then remain continuously illuminated.
minates, you should stop and check your This sequence will continue upon subse-
tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to quent vehicle start-ups as long as the mal-
the proper pressure. Driving on a significant- function exists. When the malfunction
ly underinflated tire causes the tire to over- indicator is illuminated, the system may not
heat and can lead to tire failure. be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended.
425
Practical hints
What to do if …
Lamp in center console

59The front passenger The system is malfunctioning. 왘 Have the system checked as soon as
front air bag off indicator possible by an authorized
lamp illuminates and re- Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
mains illuminated with
왘 Also read and observe messages in
the weight of a typical
the multifunction display and follow
adult or someone larger
corrective steps (컄 page 440).
than a small individual on
the front passenger seat.
Warning! G
If the 59 indicator lamp
illuminates and remains illuminated with the
weight of a typical adult or someone larger
than a small individual on the front passen-
ger seat, do not have any passenger use the
front passenger seat until the system has
been repaired.
426
Practical hints
What to do if …

quence
59The front passenger The system is malfunction- 왘 Make sure there is nothing between seat cushion and
front air bag off indicator ing. child seat and check installation of the child seat.
lamp does not illuminate
왘 Make sure no objects applying supplemental weight
and/or does not remain
onto the seat are present.
illuminated with the
weight of a typical 왘 Make sure no objects which apply forces to the seat are
12-month-old child in a present (e.g. objects such as books, briefcases etc.
standard child restraint or lodged behind or around the seat, head restraints push-
less on the front passen- ing against roof etc.). The system may recognize such
ger seat. forces as supplemental weight.
왘 If the front passenger front air bag off indicator lamp re-
mains out, have the system checked as soon as possible
by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. Do
not transport a child on the front passenger seat until
the system has been repaired.
왘 Also note any messages in the multifunction display and
follow corrective steps (컄 page 440).
Warning! G weight of a typical 12-month-old child in a

standard child restraint or less on the front
the front passenger seat until the system
has been repaired.
If the 59 indicator lamp does passenger seat, do not transport a child on
not illuminate or remains out with the
427
Practical hints
What to do if …
Vehicle status messages in the Certain messages of high priority cannot

multifunction display be cleared from the multifunction display Warning! G
using the reset button (컄 page 145) or
Warning and malfunction messages button j, k, ÿ, or è on the All categories of messages contain
appear in the multifunction display located multifunction steering wheel. important information which should be
in the instrument cluster. taken note of and, where a malfunction is
Other messages of high priority and mes- indicated, addressed as soon as possible at
Certain warning and malfunction messag- sages of less immediate priority can be an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
es are accompanied by an audible signal. cleared from the multifunction display Center.
Address these messages accordingly and using the reset button (컄 page 145) or
button j, k, ÿ, or è on the Failure to repair condition noted may cause
follow the additional instructions given in damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
this Operator’s Manual. multifunction steering wheel. They are
then stored in the vehicle status message Limited Warranty, or result in property dam-
Selecting the vehicle status message memory (컄 page 163). Remember that age or personal injury.
memory menu in the control system clearing a message will only make the mes-
(컄 page 163) displays both cleared and sage disappear. Clearing a message will
uncleared messages. not correct the condition that caused the
High-priority messages appear in the message to appear.
multifunction display in red color.
428
Practical hints
What to do if …
i Switching on the ignition causes all On the pages that follow, you will find a
Warning! G instrument cluster lamps (except high beam compilation of the most important warning
headlamp indicator lamp, and turn signal and malfunction messages that may
No messages will be displayed if either the indicator lamps unless activated) as well as the appear in the multifunction display.
instrument cluster or the multifunction multifunction display to come on. Make sure the
display is inoperative. lamps and multifunction display are in working For your convenience the messages are
order before starting your journey. divided into two sections:
As a result, you will not be able to see infor-
mation about your driving conditions, such 앫 Text messages (컄 page 430)
as speed or outside temperature, warn- 앫 Symbol messages (컄 page 446)
ing/indicator lamps, malfunction/warning
messages or the failure of any systems.
Driving characteristics may be impaired.
If you must continue to drive, please do so
with added caution. Visit an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center as soon
as possible.
429
Practical hints
What to do if …
Text messages
Display message Possible cause/consequence Possible solution

ABS inoperative The ABS has detected a malfunction 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
See Operator’s Manual and has switched off. Wheels may lock during hard braking,
® reducing steering capability.
The ESP and the BAS are also
deactivated. 왘 Have the system checked at an authorized
The brake system is still functioning Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center as soon
normally but without the ABS avail- as possible.
able. Failure to follow these instructions increases
the risk of accident.
unavailable The ABS was deactivated because of When the voltage is above this value again, the
See Operator’s Manual insufficient power supply. The charg- ABS is operational again and the message in
ing voltage has fallen below 10 volts. the multifunction display should disappear.
The brake system is still functioning If the message in the multifunction display
normally but without the ABS does not disappear:
available.
왘 Have the generator (alternator) and the
battery checked.
430
Practical hints
What to do if …

ABS unavailable ®
If the yellow ESP warning As soon as the brakes have cooled off,
See Operator’s Manual lamp v flashes while driving and the electronic traction system switches
this message appears, the electron- on again.
ic traction system has switched off The message in the multifunction dis-
to prevent overheating of the drive
play disappears and the ESP® warning
wheel brakes.
lamp v goes out.
The self-diagnosis has not yet been The display will clear after driving a
completed yet. short distance at a vehicle speed of
above 12 mph (20 km/h).
Cruise control and inoperative The cruise control is malfunctioning. 왘 Have cruise control checked by an
SPEEDTRONIC authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center.
Cruise control --- mph You have attempted to set a speed 왘 Accelerate to a speed exceeding
while driving below 20 mph 20 mph (30 km/h) and set the
(30 km/h). speed (컄 page 245).
The ESP® is switched off. 왘 Switch on the ESP® (컄 page 98).
The automatic transmission is set to 왘 Set the automatic transmission to
position P, R, or N. position D (컄 page 187).
The vehicle is secured with the 왘 Release the parking brake
parking brake. (컄 page 57).
431
Practical hints
What to do if …

DISTRONIC --- mph You have attempted to set a speed 왘 Accelerate to a speed exceeding 20 mph
while driving below 20 mph (30 km/h) and set the speed (컄 page 250).
(30 km/h).
The ESP® is switched off. 왘 Switch on the ESP® (컄 page 98).
The automatic transmission is set to 왘 Set the automatic transmission to
position P, R, or N. position D (컄 page 187).
The vehicle is secured with the 왘 Release the parking brake (컄 page 57).
parking brake.
inoperative The Distronic* or the Distronic* 왘 Have the system checked by an authorized
display are malfunctioning. Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
Override
You have accelerated. The 왘 Stop accelerating.
Distronic* has switched off.
432
Practical hints
What to do if …

DISTRONIC available again Distronic* had been deactivated and 왘 Activate Distronic* (컄 page 256).
is available again.
currently unavailable Distronic* is deactivated because 왘 Leave the area of the external interference.
See Operator’s Manual the functionality is impaired by
왘 Activate the Distronic* again (컄 page 256),
external interferences, e.g.
when the message DISTRONIC available
high-frequency sources such as toll
again appears.
stations, speed measuring systems
etc.
Distronic* is deactivated because 왘 Try to activate Distronic* again
the Distronic* sensor has not (컄 page 256), when the message
sensed any other vehicles or DISTRONIC available again appears.
objects, e.g. road sign or such, for a
long time.
433
Practical hints
What to do if …

DISTRONIC currently unavailable Distronic* is deactivated because 왘 Clean the Distronic* cover in the radiator
See Operator’s Manual grille (컄 page 408).
앫 the Distronic* cover in the
radiator grille is dirty 왘 Restart the vehicle.
앫 the functionality is impaired by Distronic* becomes operational again without
heavy precipitation or fog the engine being restarted when
앫 dirt on the radiator grille has fallen off while
driving (e.g. slush or snow)
앫 the system recognizes full sensor
availability due to lessening rain or because
the road is drying, for example
앫 the message in the multifunction display
disappears
You can then operate Distronic* as usual again.
434
Practical hints
What to do if …

Depress brake You have tried to shift the automatic 왘 Depress the brake pedal.
to shift out of transmission into position D, R or N
Park using the gear selector lever without
depressing the brake pedal.
Door Open You have opened the driver’s door 왘 Before you leave the vehicle, make sure
Vehicle not in Park and the transmission is still in that the automatic transmission is set to
position D, R or N. position P and that the parking brake is
engaged.
Drive to workshop The automatic transmission cannot If the automatic transmission is set to
without be shifted out of the set position be- position D:
shifting gears cause of a malfunction.
왘 Without changing the automatic transmis-
sion from position D, drive to an authorized
If the automatic transmission is set to
position N, R or P:
왘 Do not drive.
왘 Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center.
435
Practical hints
What to do if …

ESP inoperative In addition, the yellow ESP warning 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
®
See Operator’s Manual lamp v comes on.

왘 Have the system checked at an authorized
The ESP® has detected a malfunc- Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center as soon
tion and switched off. as possible.
The ABS may still be operational. Failure to follow these instructions increases
the risk of an accident.
In addition, the yellow ESP® warning 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
lamp v comes on.
왘 Have the system checked at an authorized
The ESP® or the ESP® display is Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center as soon
malfunctioning. as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions increases
In addition, the yellow ESP® warning 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
lamp v comes on.
왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
The ESP® is deactivated because of Truck Center as soon as possible.
a malfunction or interrupted power Failure to follow these instructions increases
supply. the risk of accident.
436
Practical hints
What to do if …

ESP unavailable ®
The ESP was deactivated because When the voltage is above this value again, the
See Operator’s Manual of insufficient power supply. The ABS is operational again and the message in the
charging voltage has fallen below multifunction display should disappear.
10 volts. If the message in the multifunction display does
The brake system is still functioning not disappear:
normally but without the ABS
왘 Have the generator (alternator) and the
available.
battery checked.
If the yellow ESP® warning As soon as the brakes have cooled off, the
lamp v flashes while driving and electronic traction system switches on again.
this message appears, the electron-
The message in the multifunction display disap-
ic traction system has switched off
pears and the ESP® warning lamp v goes
to prevent overheating of the drive
out.
wheel brakes.
The self-diagnosis has not been The display will clear after driving a short
completed yet. distance at a vehicle speed of above
12 mph (20 km/h).
437
Practical hints
What to do if …

P Shift to P You have started the engine or 왘 Set the automatic transmission to
switched on the ignition with position P.
KEYLESS-GO* and opened the or
driver’s door with the automatic
transmission not set to position P. 왘 Close the driver’s door.
Shift to P or N You have attempted to start the 왘 Set the automatic transmission to
to start engine engine with the KEYLESS-GO* position P or N.
start/stop button while the auto-
Make sure the brake pedal is depressed
matic transmission was set to
when attempting to start the engine
position R or D.
with the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop but-
ton.
Only shift to You have tried to shift the auto- 왘 Stop the vehicle.
Park when matic transmission into position P
vehicle is stationary using the gear selector lever
although the vehicle is still in mo-
tion.
438
Practical hints
What to do if …

SRS Restraint sys. malfunction The system is malfunctioning. 왘 Drive with added caution to the nearest
Visit workshop authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center.
Warning! G system checked; otherwise the SRS may not

be activated when needed in an accident,
In the event a malfunction of the SRS is indi- which could result in serious or fatal injury,
cated as outlined above, the SRS may not be or it might deploy unexpectedly and unnec-
operational. essarily which could also result in injury.
For your safety, we strongly recommend

that you visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center immediately to have the
439
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display message Possible Possible solution

cause/consequence
Front passenger airbag Front passenger front air bag Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible and check the front
enabled is activated while driving even passenger seat for the following:
See Operator’s Manual though a child, small
individual, or object below
the system’s weight thresh- 왘 Switch off the ignition (컄 page 40).
old is on the front passenger 왘 Remove child and child restraint from front passenger seat and properly
seat, or the front passenger secure the child in rear seat employing the child restraint if necessary.
seat is empty. Objects on the
seat or forces acting on the 왘 Remove any other items from on and around the front passenger seat
seat may make the system and make sure the storage bag on the back of the front passenger seat
sense supplemental weight. is empty.
왘 Make sure that no objects which apply forces to the seat are present
(e.g. objects such as books, briefcases etc. lodged behind or around the
seat, head restraints pushing against roof etc.). The system may recog-
nize such forces as supplemental weight and sense that an occupant on
the front passenger seat is of a greater weight than actually present.
왘 Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front passenger door and switch
on the ignition (컄 page 40).
(Continued on next page)
440
Practical hints
What to do if …

cause/conse-
quence
Monitor the 59 indicator lamp on the center console (컄 page 89) and
the multifunction display in the instrument cluster (컄 page 26) for the following:
With the seat unoccupied and the ignition turned on,
앫 the 59 indicator lamp on the center console should illuminate and
remain illuminated, indicating that the OCS (컄 page 85) has deactivated the air
bag.
앫 the message Front passenger airbag enabled See Operator’s Manual or the
message Front passenger airbag disabled See Operator’s Manual should not
appear in the multifunction display at any time the seat is unoccupied. Wait at last
60 seconds for the system to complete the necessary check cycles and to make
sure neither message appears in the multifunction display.
If above conditions are met, you can occupy the front passenger seat again.
Depending on the front passenger classification sensed by the OCS (컄 page 85),
the 59 indicator lamp will remain illuminated or go out.
If above conditions are not met, the system is not working properly. Have the system
checked as soon as possible by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
Warning! G remains out even after performing the above

corrective steps, do not have any children
individuals use the front passenger seat
until the system has been repaired.
If the 59 indicator lamp 12 years old and under and other small
441
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display message Possible cause/conse- Possible solution

quence
Front passenger airbag Front passenger front air bag is Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible and check the front
disabled deactivated while driving even passenger seat for the following:
See Operator’s Manual though an adult or someone
larger than a small individual is
occupying the front passenger 왘 Switch off the ignition (컄 page 40).
seat. Forces acting on the seat 왘 Have the front passenger vacate the seat and exit the vehicle.
may make the system sense a
왘 Adjust the seat in a height position (컄 page 44).
decrease in weight.
왘 Make sure that no objects which apply forces to the seat are present
(e.g. objects such as books, briefcases etc. lodged underneath, behind
or around the seat). Such forces may cause the system to sense that
an occupant of a lesser weight than actually present is on the front
passenger seat.
왘 Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front passenger door and switch
on the ignition (컄 page 40).
442
Practical hints
What to do if …

cause/conse-
quence
Monitor the 59 indicator lamp on the center console (컄 page 89) and
the multifunction display in the instrument cluster (컄 page 26) for the following:
With the seat unoccupied and the ignition turned on,
앫 the 59 indicator lamp on the center console should illuminate and
remain illuminated, indicating that the OCS (컄 page 85) has deactivated the air
bag.
앫 the message Front passenger airbag enabled See Operator’s Manual or the
message Front passenger airbag disabled See Operator’s Manual should not
appear in the multifunction display at any time the seat is unoccupied. Wait at last
60 seconds for the system to complete the necessary check cycles and to make
sure neither message appears in the multifunction display.
If above conditions are met, you can occupy the front passenger seat again.
Depending on the front passenger classification sensed by the OCS (컄 page 85),
the 59 indicator lamp will remain illuminated or go out.
If above conditions are not met, the system is not working properly. Have the system
checked as soon as possible by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
Warning! G remains illuminated with an adult occupant

on the front passenger seat even after per-
have any passenger use the front passenger
seat until the system has been repaired.
If the 59 indicator lamp forming the above corrective steps, do not
443
Practical hints
What to do if …

Check tires There was a warning message about 왘 Make sure that the correct tire inflation pressure is set
Then restart a loss in the tire inflation pressure for each tire.
Run Flat Indicator and the Run Flat Indicator has not
왘 Then reactivate the Run Flat Indicator (컄 page 378).
been reactivated yet.
Run Flat Indicator The Run Flat Indicator is malfunction- 왘 Have the Run Flat Indicator checked by an authorized
inoperative ing. Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
Tire pressure The Run Flat Indicator indicates that 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt
Check tires the pressure is too low in one or more steering and braking maneuvers. Observe the traffic sit-
tires. uation around you.
왘 Check and adjust tire inflation pressure as required
(컄 page 375).
왘 If necessary, replace the wheel (컄 page 497).
왘 Reactivate the Run Flat Indicator after adjusting the tire
inflation pressure values (컄 page 378).
Tire pressure Vehicles with Advanced TPMS*: 왘 Drive the vehicle for a few minutes.
displayed after
The tire inflation pressure is being
driving for
checked.
a few minutes
444
Practical hints
What to do if …

Tire pressure monitor The TPMS or Advanced TPMS* is 왘 Have the TPMS or Advanced TPMS* checked by an
inoperative malfunctioning. authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
Tire pressure monitor There are wheels without appropriate wheel 왘 Have the TPMS or Advanced TPMS* checked by an
inoperative sensors mounted (e.g. winter tires). authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
No wheel sensors
왘 Have the wheel sensors installed by an authorized
Tire pressure monitor One or more sensors defect (e.g. battery is 왘 Have the TPMS or Advanced TPMS* checked by an
Wheel sensor missing empty). authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
One or more wheels without appropriate 왘 Have the wheel sensors installed by an authorized
wheel sensors mounted (e.g. spare tire). Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
Vehicles with Advanced TPMS*:
The tire pressure for the respective tire is shown in
the multifunction display.
Tire pressure monitor The TPMS or Advanced TPMS* is unable to 왘 As soon as the causes of the malfunction have been
currently monitor the tire pressure due to removed, the TPMS or Advanced TPMS* automati-
unavailable cally becomes active again after a few minutes driv-
앫 a nearby radio interference source.
ing.
앫 excessive wheel sensor temperatures.
445
Practical hints
What to do if …
Symbol messages
Display symbol Display messages Possible cause/consequence Possible solution

# The battery is no longer charging. 왘 Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as
Possible causes: soon as it is safe to do so.
앫 alternator malfunctioning 왘 Apply the parking brake (컄 page 65).
앫 broken poly-V-belt 왘 Check the poly-V-belt.
Do not forget that the brake system If it is broken:
requires electrical energy and may be
왘 Do not continue to drive. Otherwise the
operating with restricted capability.
engine will overheat due to an inoperative
Considerably greater brake pedal
water pump which may result in damage
force is required and the stopping dis-
to the engine. Notify an authorized
tance is increased.
If it is intact:
왘 Drive immediately to the nearest
Center. Adjust driving to be consistent
with reduced braking responsiveness.
446
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol Display message Possible cause/consequence Possible solution

# Battery/Alternator The battery is defective. 왘 Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as
Stop vehicle soon as it is safe to do so.
왘 Do not continue to drive.
Light Truck Center.
y inoperative Downhill Speed Regulation is 왘 Have the Downhill Speed Regulation
malfunctioning. checked by an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center.
2 Brake wear The brake pads have reached 왘 Have the brake pads replaced as soon as
their wear limit. possible.
! Brake pad thickness must be visually in-

spected by a qualified technician at the intervals
specified in the Maintenance Booklet.
447
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol Display message Possible cause/consequence Possible solution

; (USA only) Release You are driving with the parking 왘 Release the parking brake (컄 page 57).
parking brake brake set.
! (Canada only)
; (USA only) EBV, ABS, ESP inoperative The EBP, the ABS, and the ESP® 왘 Continue driving with added caution.
See Operator’s Manual have switched off due to a mal- Wheels may lock during hard braking,
3 (Canada only)
function. The BAS is also reducing steering capability.
switched off.
왘 Have the system checked at an
The brake system is still func- authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
tional but without the EBP, the Center as soon as possible.
ABS, and the ESP® available.
Failure to follow these instructions increases
448
Practical hints
What to do if …

; (USA only) Check There is insufficient brake fluid 왘 Risk of accident! Stop the vehicle in a
brake fluid level in the reservoir. safe location or as soon at is safe to do
3 (Canada only)
so.
Light Truck Center. Do not add brake
fluid! This will not solve the problem.
? (USA only) Engine There may be a malfunction in 왘 Have the engine checked by an
Service the authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
± (Canada only)
Center.
앫 fuel injection system
앫 ignition system
앫 exhaust system
앫 fuel system
! If you find that the brake fluid in the brake

Warning! G checking the brake system. Overfilling the
brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling
fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark or
below, have the brake system checked for brake
Driving with the message Check brake brake fluid on hot engine parts and the pad thickness and leaks.
fluid level displayed can result in an ac- brake fluid catching fire. You could be seri-
cident. Have your brake system checked im- ously burned.
mediately. Do not add brake fluid before
449
Practical hints
What to do if …

Ï Coolant level The coolant is too hot. 왘 Stop the vehicle in safe location or as
Stop car, switch engine off
Among other possible causes soon as it safe to do so.
(the cooling fan could be 왘 Apply the parking brake (컄 page 65).
malfunctioning), the poly-V-belt
could be broken.
왘 Check the poly-V-belt.
If it is broken:
왘 Do not continue to drive. Otherwise, the
engine will overheat due to an inoperative
water pump which may result in damage
to the engine. Contact an authorized
If it is intact:
왘 Do not continue to drive the vehicle with
this message displayed. Doing so could
result in serious engine damage that is
not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limit-
ed Warranty.
450
Practical hints
What to do if …

왘 Observe the coolant temperature in the
multifunction display (컄 page 154).
If the temperature raises again:
왘 Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center immediately.
During severe operation conditions and

Warning! G stop-and-go city traffic, the coolant tem-
perature may rise close to 248°F (120°C).
Driving when your engine is overheated can
cause some fluids which may have leaked ! The engine should not be operated with the
into the engine compartment to catch fire. coolant temperature above 248°F (120°C).
Doing so may cause serious damage which is not
You could be seriously burned.
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Steam from an overheated engine can cause Warranty.
serious burns which can occur just by open-
ing the engine hood. Stay away from the en-
gine if you see or hear steam coming from it.
Turn off the engine, get out of the vehicle
and do not stand near the vehicle until the
engine has cooled down.
451
Practical hints
What to do if …

B Top up Coolant The coolant level is too low. 왘 Add coolant (컄 page 362).
See Oper. Manual
왘 If you have to add coolant frequently,
have the cooling system checked by an
Center.
! Do not ignore the low engine coolant level

Warning! G 앫 Do not remove pressure cap on coolant
reservoir if coolant temperature is warning. Extended driving with the message and
symbol displayed may cause serious engine
above 158°F (70°C). Allow engine to
Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts. damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
cool down before removing cap. The
Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which Limited Warranty.
coolant reservoir contains hot fluid and
may burn if it comes into contact with hot is under pressure. Do not drive without sufficient amount of coolant
engine parts. You could be seriously burned. in the cooling system. The engine will overheat
앫 Using a rag, slowly open the cap approx- causing major engine damage.
imately 1/2 turn to relieve excess pres-
sure. If opened immediately, scalding
Warning! G hot fluid and steam will be blown out un-
der pressure.
In order to avoid potentially serious burns: 앫 Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine
앫 Use extreme caution when opening the parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene gly-
hood if there are any signs of steam or col which may burn if it comes into con-
coolant leaking from the cooling system, tact with hot engine parts.
or if the coolant temperature gauge indi-
cates that the coolant is overheated.
452
Practical hints
What to do if …

N Check eng. oil level The engine oil level is too low. 왘 Check the engine oil level (컄 page 360)
at next refueling (except ML 500), or (컄 page 358)
(ML 500 only).
USA only: The engine oil level is too low. 왘 Add engine oil (컄 page 361) and check
Add 1 qt. engine oil the engine oil level (컄 page 360) (except
at next refueling ML 500), or (컄 page 358) (ML 500 only).
Canada only:
Add 1 liter engine oil
at next refueling
Engine oil level The measuring system is 왘 Have the measuring system checked by
cannot be measured malfunctioning. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Center.
When the message Add 1 qt. engine oil Visually check for oil leaks. If no obvious oil
at next refueling (Canada: 1 liter) leaks are noted, drive to the nearest
appears while the engine is running and at service station where the engine oil should
operating temperature, the engine oil level be topped to the required level with an ap-
has dropped to approximately the mini- proved oil specified in the Factory
mum level. Approved Service Products pamphlet.
When this occurs, the warning will first
come on intermittently and then stay on if
the oil level drops further.
453
Practical hints
What to do if …
Display symbol Display messages Possible cause/conse- Possible solution

quence
N Engine oil level There is no oil in the engine. 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt as soon as
Stop car, turn engine off There is a danger of engine it is safe to do so in a safe location.
damage.
왘 Add engine oil (컄 page 361) and check the en-
gine oil level (컄 page 360) (except ML 500), or
(컄 page 358) (ML 500 only).
Engine oil level You have added too much 왘 Have oil siphoned or drained off.
Reduce oil level engine oil. There is a risk of
Observe all legal requirements with respect to
damaging the engine and/or
its disposal.
the catalytic converter (gaso-
line engine) or the oxidation
catalyst (diesel engine).
Engine oil level The engine oil has dropped to 왘 Check the engine oil level (컄 page 360) (except
Visit workshop a critical level. ML 500), or (컄 page 358) (ML 500 only) and
add oil as required (컄 page 361).
왘 If you must add engine oil frequently, have the
engine checked for possible leaks.
! The engine oil level warnings should not be that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
ignored. Extended driving with the symbol dis- Limited Warranty.
played could result in serious engine damage
454
Practical hints
What to do if …

c You are driving with one or more 왘 Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as
doors open. soon as it is safe to do so.
왘 Close the door(s).
A Gas cap is open A loss of pressure has been 왘 Check the fuel cap (컄 page 352).
detected in the fuel system. The If it is not closed properly:
fuel cap may not be closed
properly or the fuel system may 왘 Close the fuel cap.
be leaky. If it is closed properly:
왘 Have the fuel system checked by an
Center.
a You are driving with the hood or 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt as
the tailgate open. soon as it is safe to do so in a safe
location.
왘 Close the hood (컄 page 356) or the
tailgate (컄 page 121).
You are trying to lock the vehicle 왘 Close all doors and/or the tailgate
with the KEYLESS-GO* function (컄 page 121).
with a door or the tailgate open.
455
Practical hints
What to do if …

F Key The SmartKey with 왘 Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as
not detected KEYLESS-GO* is not recognized soon as it is safe to do so.
while the engine is running
because
왘 Search for the SmartKey with
앫 the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO*.
KEYLESS-GO* is not in the
vehicle Otherwise the vehicle cannot be centrally
locked nor can the engine be started
앫 there is strong
again after the engine is stopped.
radio-frequency interference
The SmartKey with 왘 Change the position of the SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* is momentarily KEYLESS-GO* in the vehicle.
not recognized.
왘 Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in
the starter switch if necessary.
Key The SmartKey with 왘 Search for the SmartKey with
not detected KEYLESS-GO* is not recognized KEYLESS-GO*.
while the ignition is switched on
Otherwise the vehicle cannot be locked
(컄 page 40) and a door is
nor can the engine be started.
opened or closed and the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is 왘 Change the position of the SmartKey with
not in the vehicle. KEYLESS-GO* in the vehicle.
456
Practical hints
What to do if …

F Key detected A SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* 왘 Take the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
in vehicle left in the vehicle was detected out of the vehicle.
while trying to lock the vehicle
from the outside.
Remove key You have forgotten to remove 왘 Remove the SmartKey from the starter
the SmartKey. switch.
You need a new key There is no additional code avail- 왘 Visit an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
able for SmartKey or SmartKey Truck Center as soon as possible.
with KEYLESS-GO*.
Change The batteries in the SmartKey 왘 Replace the batteries (컄 page 480).
key batteries with KEYLESS-GO* are dis-
charged.
Don’t forget This message appears for a 왘 Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch
your key maximum of 60 seconds if the (컄 page 40).
driver’s door is opened with the
or
engine shut off and no SmartKey
in the starter switch. 왘 Take the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
This message is only a reminder. with you when leaving the vehicle.
457
Practical hints
What to do if …

. 3rd brake lamp The high mounted brake lamp is 왘 Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
malfunctioning. This message Light Truck Center as soon as possible.
will only appear if a number of
critical LEDs have stopped work-
ing.
Active headlamps The active Bi-Xenon* headlamps 왘 Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
inoperative system is malfunctioning. Light Truck Center as soon as possible.
Brake lamp The left brake lamp is malfunc- 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible
Left tioning. A substitute bulb is (컄 page 490).
being used.
Brake lamp The right brake lamp is malfunc- 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible
Right tioning. A substitute bulb is (컄 page 490).
being used.
Display malfunction The display for the lamps or the 왘 Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Visit workshop system is malfunctioning. Light Truck Center as soon as possible.
Front foglamp The left front fog lamp is 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible
Left malfunctioning. (컄 page 488).
Front foglamp The right front fog lamp is 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible
Right malfunctioning. (컄 page 488).
458
Practical hints
What to do if …

. Parking lamp The front left parking lamp is 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible
Front Left malfunctioning. A substitute (컄 page 487).
bulb is being used.
Parking lamp The right front parking lamp is 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible
Front Right malfunctioning. A substitute (컄 page 487).
bulb is being used.
High beam The left high beam lamp is Halogen headlamp:
Left malfunctioning.
왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible
(컄 page 486).
Bi-Xenon* headlamp:
Light Truck Center as soon as possible.
High beam The right high beam lamp is Halogen headlamp:
Right malfunctioning.
(컄 page 486).
Bi-Xenon* headlamp:
459
Practical hints
What to do if …

. License plate lamp The left license plate lamp is 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible
License plate lamp The right license plate lamp is 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible
AUTO Light The light sensor is malfunction- 왘 In the control system, set lamp operation
inoperative ing. The headlamps do not to manual mode (컄 page 137).
switch on automatically.
왘 Switch on headlamps using the exterior
lamp switch.
Low beam The left low beam lamp is Halogen headlamp:
Left malfunctioning.
(컄 page 485).
Bi-Xenon* headlamp:
460
Practical hints
What to do if …

. Low beam The right low beam lamp is Halogen headlamp:
Right malfunctioning.
(컄 page 485).
Bi-Xenon* headlamp:
Marker lamp The left front side marker lamp is 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible
Front Left malfunctioning. (컄 page 488).
Marker lamp The right front side marker lamp 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible
Front Right is malfunctioning. (컄 page 488).
Foglamp The left rear fog lamp is malfunc- 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible
Rear Left tioning. (컄 page 490).
Reverse lamp The left backup lamp is 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible
Reverse lamp The right backup lamp is 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible
461
Practical hints
What to do if …

. Switch off lights You have removed the SmartKey 왘 Switch off the headlamps (컄 page 66).
from the starter switch, opened
the driver’s door and left the
headlamps on or removed the
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*
from the vehicle and left the
headlamps on.
Switch off lights You have opened the driver’s 왘 Switch off the headlamps (컄 page 66).
or remove key door while the exterior lamp
or
switch is in position U and
the SmartKey is still in the start- 왘 Remove the SmartKey from the starter
er switch. switch.
The parking lamps are still on.
Tail lamp The left tail lamp is malfunction- 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible
Left ing. A substitute bulb is being (컄 page 490).
used.
Tail lamp The right tail lamp is malfunc- 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible
Right tioning. A substitute bulb is be- (컄 page 490).
ing used.
462
Practical hints
What to do if …

. Turn signal The left front turn signal lamp is 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible
Front Left malfunctioning. A substitute (컄 page 487).
bulb is being used.
Turn signal The right front turn signal lamp is 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible
Front Right malfunctioning. A substitute (컄 page 487).
bulb is being used.
Turn signal The left rear turn signal lamp is 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible
Rear Left malfunctioning. A substitute (컄 page 490).
bulb is being used.
Turn signal The right rear turn signal lamp is 왘 Replace the bulb as soon as possible
Rear Right malfunctioning. A substitute (컄 page 490).
bulb is being used.
Turn signal The turn signal in the left exteri- 왘 Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Left mirror or rear view mirror is malfunc- Light Truck Center as soon as possible.
tioning. This message will only
appear if a number of critical
LEDs have stopped working.
Turn signal The turn signal in the right exte- 왘 Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Right mirror rior rear view mirror is malfunc- Light Truck Center as soon as possible.
tioning. This message will only
appear if a number of critical
LEDs have stopped working.
463
Practical hints
What to do if …

L Tele Aid One or more main functions of the 왘 Have the Tele Aid* system checked
inoperative Tele Aid* system are malfunctioning. by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center.
Tele Aid The emergency power battery for the 왘 Have the Tele Aid* system checked
battery Tele Aid* system is malfunctioning. If the by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
vehicle battery is also malfunctioning or Truck Center.
drained, Tele Aid* will not be operational.
t Function This display appears if button t
unavailable or s on the multifunction steering
wheel is pressed and the vehicle is not
equipped with a telephone.
W Top up The fluid level has dropped to about 1/3 of 왘 Add washer fluid (컄 page 363).
washer fluid total reservoir capacity.
464
Practical hints
What to do if …

H Tire pressure The pressure is too low in one or 왘 Check and correct tire inflation pressure as
Check tires more tires. required.
Tire pressure One or more tires are deflating. 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding
Caution - tire defect abrupt steering and braking maneuvers.
왘 If necessary, change the wheel.
Caution - tire defect Vehicles with Advanced TPMS*: 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding
abrupt steering and braking maneuvers.
One or more tires are deflating.
The respective tire is shown in the 왘 If necessary, change the wheel.
Warning! G
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
may lose control of the vehicle. Continued
driving with a flat tire will cause excessive
heat build-up and possibly a fire.
465
Practical hints
What to do if …

H Tire pressure The tire pressure in one or more tires is 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt,
Check tires already below the minimum value. avoiding abrupt steering and braking
maneuvers.
왘 Check and adjust tire pressure as
required.
Check tires Vehicles with Advanced TPMS*: 왘 Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt,
avoiding abrupt steering and braking
The tire pressure in one or more tires is
maneuvers.
already below the minimum value.
왘 Check and adjust tire pressure as
The respective tire is shown in the
required.
Warning! G
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.
You may lose control of the vehicle. Contin-
ued driving with a flat tire will cause exces-
sive heat build-up and possibly a fire.
466
Practical hints
What to do if …

n Level selection You are driving too fast for the desired 왘 Reduce vehicle speed.
not permitted vehicle level*.
왘 Set the desired vehicle level again
(컄 page 271).
You are towing a trailer or using acces-
sories that are connected to the trailer
power socket, e.g. a bicycle rack.
Leveling cancelled You have selected another vehicle
level*.
p Reduce speed to You are driving too fast for the set vehi- 왘 Do not drive faster than 20 mph
under 20 mph cle level*. (30 km/h).
Visit workshop The air suspension* functional only to a 왘 Do not drive faster than 50 mph
limited extent. (80 km/h) depending on the set
vehicle level.
왘 Have the vehicle checked at an au-
thorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center.
467
Practical hints
What to do if …

Visit workshop The air suspension* is malfunctioning. 왘 Do not drive faster than 50 mph
(80 km/h) depending on the set vehi-
cle level.
왘 Have the vehicle checked at an autho-
Center.
Compressor You have selected a higher vehicle level*. 왘 Let the compressor cool until the
cooling down Due to frequent level changes within a message disappears.
short period, the compressor must first The selected level will be set once the
cool down. compressor has cooled.
! When the message Compressor cooling

down appears in the multifunction display,
driving is still possible. Keep in mind that the ride
height of the vehicle is not yet reached, so you
can damage the underbody of the vehicle. The
selected level will be set once the compressor
has cooled.
468
Practical hints
왔 Where will I find ...?
First aid kit Vehicle tool kit
i Check expiration dates and contents for The vehicle tool kit is stored under the
completeness at least once a year and replace cargo compartment floor.
missing/expired items.
The vehicle tool kit includes:
The first aid kit is located on the driver’s
앫 Towing eye bolt
side in the cargo compartment behind the
cover. 앫 Wheel wrench
앫 Alignment bolt
앫 Vehicle jack 1 Cargo compartment floor, lowered
앫 Fuse chart 2 Handle cover
앫 Spare fuses 왘 Open the tailgate (컄 page 119).
앫 Fuse extractor 왘 Push in handle cover 2 and pull han-

dle in direction of arrow.
앫 Collapsible wheel chock
왘 Lift cargo compartment floor 1. 컄컄
앫 Wheel bolts for spare wheel
1 Cover in left side trim panel
2 Lock
왘 Turn lock 2 90°.
왘 Fold down cover 1.
The first aid kit can be removed.
469
Practical hints
컄컄 ML 63 AMG:
왘 Remove the collapsible tire
(컄 page 474).
You can now access the vehicle tool kit.
3 Securing hook 3 Securing hook

4 Cargo compartment floor, raised
왘 Release securing hook 3 (located be- 5 Upper cargo compartment lip
low the floor handle) from holder.
왘 Engage securing hook 3 on upper
cargo compartment lip 5.
6 Wheel bolt wrench
! With the cargo compartment cover blind 7 Vehicle jack
installed behind the rear seats (컄 page 286), 8 Collapsible wheel chock
disengage cargo compartment cover blind and 9 Spare fuses, fuse chart, fuse extractor
flip it forward. Otherwise the strap of the
a Towing eye bolt
securing hook could damage the cargo compart-
ment cover blind. b Alignment bolt
c Spare wheel bolts
왘 Remove the Minispare wheel
(컄 page 473).
or
470
Practical hints
! Vehicles with factory-mounted Vehicle jack The vehicle jack is located underneath the
running-boards*: cargo compartment floor.
Your vehicle is equipped with a scissors-type
jack (located under the cargo compartment Warning! G
floor) designed for use with factory-mounted
running boards. Only use this jack when jacking The jack is designed exclusively for jacking
up vehicles with factory-mounted running boards up the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets
as otherwise the vehicle’s underbody can be built into both sides of the vehicle. To help
damaged. See separate instructions for scis- avoid personal injury, use the jack only to lift
sors-type jack. the vehicle during a wheel change. Never
! To prevent damage, always disengage the get beneath the vehicle while it is supported
strap of the securing hook and lower the cargo by the jack. Keep hands and feet away from
compartment floor (컄 page 469) before closing the area under the lifted vehicle. Always
the tailgate. firmly set parking brake and block wheels Storage position
before raising vehicle with jack. 왘 Remove vehicle jack from its storage
Do not disengage the parking brake while
compartment (컄 page 470).
the vehicle is raised. Be certain that the jack 왘 Turn crank handle in the direction of ar-
is always vertical (plumb line) when in use, row as far as it will go. 컄컄
especially on hills. Always try to use the jack
on a level surface.
Make sure that the jack arm is fully seated
in the jack take-up bracket. Always lower
the vehicle onto jackstands of sufficient
capacity before working under the vehicle.
471
Practical hints
컄컄 Setting up the collapsible wheel chock 왘 Tilt both plates upward 1.

The collapsible wheel chock serves to ad- 왘 Fold the lower plate outward 2.
ditionally secure the vehicle, e.g. while
왘 Guide the tabs of the lower plate all the
changing the wheel.
way into the openings of base plate 3.
For information on where to place wheel
chocks when changing a wheel, see “Lift-
ing the vehicle” (컄 page 498).
Operational position
왘 Turn crank handle clockwise.
Before storing the vehicle jack in its stor-
age compartment:
앫 The vehicle jack should be fully col-
lapsed.
앫 The handle must be folded in (storage
position).
1 Tilt the plate upward
2 Fold the lower plate outward
3 Insert the plate
472
Practical hints
Minispare wheel (except ML 63 AMG) The Minispare wheel is located underneath i Remove Minispare wheel to gain access to
the cargo compartment floor remaining tools in the vehicle tool kit
(컄 page 469). (컄 page 469).
Warning! G For access the minispare wheel, see “Vehi-
i For information on how to mount the
Minispare wheel, see “Mounting the spare cle tool kit” (컄 page 469).
The dimensions of the Minispare wheel are
wheel” (컄 page 498).
different from those of the road wheels. As 왘 Loosen retaining screw 2 by turning it
a result, the vehicle handling characteristics counterclockwise.
Removing Minispare wheel
change when driving with a Minispare wheel 왘 Remove Minispare wheel 1.
mounted. Adapt your driving style accord-
ingly.
The Minispare wheel is for temporary use
only. When driving with a Minispare wheel
mounted, ensure proper tire inflation
pressure and do not exceed a vehicle speed
Drive to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center as soon as possible to have the
Minispare wheel replaced with a regular 1 Minispare wheel
road wheel. 2 Towing eye bolt
Never operate the vehicle with more than
3 Alignment bolt
one spare wheel mounted.
4 Retaining screw
5 Wheel bolt wrench
Do not switch off the ESP® when a
Minispare wheel is mounted.
473
Practical hints
Collapsible tire (ML 63 AMG only) The collapsible tire is located underneath i Remove collapsible tire to gain access to
the cargo compartment floor remaining tools in the vehicle tool kit
(컄 page 469). (컄 page 469).
Warning! G For access the collapsible tire, see “Vehi-
i For information on how to mount the
collapsible tire, see “Mounting the spare wheel” cle tool kit” (컄 page 469).
The dimensions of the collapsible tire are
(컄 page 498).
different from those of the road wheels. As 왘 Remove the vehicle tool kit storage
a result, the vehicle handling characteristics well casing 3.
Removing the collapsible tire
change when driving with a collapsible tire
mounted. Adapt your driving style accord-
ingly.
The collapsible tire is for temporary use
only. When driving with a collapsible tire
mounted, ensure proper tire inflation
pressure and do not exceed a vehicle speed
Drive to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center as soon as possible to have the 7 Retaining screw
collapsible tire replaced with a regular road 1 Electric air pump
wheel. 2 Collapsible tire 왘 Loosen retaining screw 7 by turning it
3 Vehicle tool kit storage well casing counterclockwise.
one collapsible tire mounted.
4 Alignment bolt 왘 Remove collapsible tire 2.
5 Towing eye bolt
Do not switch off the ESP® when a 6 Wheel bolt wrench
collapsible tire is mounted.
474
Practical hints
왔 Unlocking/locking in an emergency
Unlocking the vehicle Removing the mechanical key Unlocking the driver’s door
If you cannot unlock the vehicle with the

SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO*, open the driv-
er’s door using the mechanical key.
i Unlocking the driver’s door with the
mechanical key will trigger the anti-theft alarm
system.
To cancel the alarm:
앫 Press button Œ or ‹ on the
SmartKey.
1 Mechanical key locking tab 1 Unlocking
앫 Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch.
2 Mechanical key 2 Mechanical key
왘 Move locking tab 1 in direction of 왘 Insert mechanical key 2 into the
앫 Grasp an outside door handle.
arrow. driver’s door lock until it stops.
within 3 ft (1 m) of the vehicle. The mechanical key 2 comes out. 왘 Turn mechanical key 2 counterclock-
wise to position 1 and hold it there.
앫 Press the KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button 왘 Slide mechanical key 2 out of the
(컄 page 41). housing. 왘 Pull the door handle until the locking
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be knob moves up (컄 page 118).
inside the vehicle.
The driver’s door is unlocked.
왘 Pull the door handle once more to open
the driver’s door.
475
Practical hints
Locking the vehicle 왘 Exit the vehicle. If the tailgate can no longer be unlocked
and opened using the Œ button on the
왘 Close the driver’s door.
If you cannot lock the vehicle with the SmartKey or the KEYLESS-GO* function,
SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO*, lock the vehi- 왘 Enter the vehicle through the rear left use the manual release to unlock and open
cle carrying out the following steps. door. the tailgate.
왘 Close the front passenger door, the 왘 Press down the locking knob of the The manual release is located on the inside
rear right door and the tailgate. driver’s door. of the tailgate.
왘 Open the driver’s door and the rear left ! To prevent inadvertent lockout, make sure
door. to have the SmartKey or SmartKey with
KEYLESS-GO* with you before proceeding with
왘 Press the central locking switch on the the next step. The next step will lock the vehicle.
driver’s door (컄 page 126).
왘 Exit the vehicle.
The locking knobs of the front passen-
ger door and the rear doors move 왘 Close the rear left door.
down. The vehicle is locked.
If the vehicle battery is disconnected or i This procedure does not arm the anti-theft
drained: alarm system, nor does it lock the fuel filler flap.
1 Release lever
왘 Press down the locking knobs of 2 Cover
the front passenger door and the Unlocking and opening the tailgate
왘 Remove cover 2 from the trim on the
rear doors manually.
A minimum height clearance of 7.2 ft tailgate.
(2.20 m) is required to open the tailgate. 왘 Push release lever 1 all the way to the
left.
왘 Lift the tailgate.
476
Practical hints
! Always make sure there is sufficient over- Fuel filler flap

head clearance.
왘 Open the tailgate (컄 page 119).
i If the vehicle has previously been locked
from the outside using the SmartKey or The fuel filler flap release is located behind
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*, opening the tail- a cover in the right side trim panel of the
gate from the inside will trigger the anti-theft cargo compartment.
alarm system.
To cancel the alarm, do one of the following:
With the SmartKey:
앫 Press button Œ or ‹ on the
3 Fuel filler flap release
SmartKey.
앫 Insert the SmartKey in the starter switch. 왘 Pull red fuel filler flap release 3 in
direction of arrow.
With KEYLESS-GO*:
앫 Grasp an outside door handle. The fuel filler flap is unlocked.
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be 왘 Open the fuel filler flap (컄 page 352).
within 3 ft (1 m) of the vehicle.
1 Lock
or 2 Cover
앫 Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button.
왘 Insert a suitable object such as a coin
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be in-
side the vehicle. into the slot of lock 1.
왘 Turn lock 1 counterclockwise by 90°
in direction of arrow.
왘 Remove cover 2.
477
Practical hints
Opening/closing in an emergency
Power tilt/sliding sunroof* Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: 왘 Take crank 2 out of the Operator’s
Manual pouch.
왘 Turn off the engine by pressing the
You can open or close the tilt/sliding
KEYLESS-GO* start/stop button 왘 Insert crank 2 into hole.
sunroof manually should an electrical
(컄 page 67).
malfunction occur. 왘 Turn crank 2 clockwise to
왘 Open the driver’s door (this puts
The tilt/sliding sunroof drive is located 앫 slide sunroof closed
the starter switch in position 0, same
behind a cover on the overhead control 앫 raise sunroof at the rear
as with the SmartKey removed from
panel.
the starter switch). The driver’s door 왘 Turn crank 2 counterclockwise to
can then be closed again.
앫 slide sunroof open
왘 Press on cover 1 at the position indi-
cated by the arrow. 앫 lower sunroof at the rear
왘 Take off cover 1. i Turn crank 2 slowly and smoothly.

The tilt/sliding sunroof must be synchronized if
it has been operated manually (컄 page 244).
1 Cover
switch.
2 Crank
478
Practical hints
Resetting activated head restraints
왔 Resetting activated head restraints
If the active head restraints have been trig- 왘 Guide reset tool 1 into the rectangu-
gered in a rear-end collision, the active Warning! G lar opening of the active head
head restraints must be reset. Otherwise, restraint 2.
the active head restraints cannot offer any When pushing back the head restraint cush-
왘 Press reset tool 1 downward in direc-
additional protection in the event of anoth- ion, take care that your fingers do not be-
come caught between the head restraint tion of arrow until you hear the head re-
er rear-end collision.
cushion and the cover. Failing to do so may straint release mechanism audibly
You can tell that the head restraints have lead to injury. disengage.
been activated when they have been
왘 Pull out reset tool 1.
moved forward and cannot be adjusted.
! Be careful not to damage upholstery. 왘 Firmly press the active head restraint
i For your convenience, we recommend that cushion backward towards the head re-
you have this work carried out by an authorized
straint cover in direction of arrow until
it engages.
You will find the reset tool for manually operating
the active head restraints in the Mercedes-Benz 왘 Repeat this procedure on the active
vehicle literature pouch. head restraint for the second front
seat.
Warning! G 왘 After resetting the active head
restraints store the reset tool 1 in the
For safety reasons, have the active head re- Mercedes-Benz vehicle literature
straints checked by an authorized pouch.
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center after a 1 Reset tool
2 Active head restraint For information on active head restraints,
rear-end collision.
see “Active head restraint” (컄 page 80).
왘 Take the reset tool 1 out of the
Mercedes-Benz vehicle literature For information on head restraint adjust-
pouch. ment, see “Seats” (컄 page 43).
479
Practical hints
If the batteries in the SmartKey or the i When inserting the batteries, make sure
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* are dis- they are clean and free of lint.
charged, the vehicle can no longer be
locked or unlocked. It is recommended to i When replacing batteries, always replace
both batteries.
have the batteries replaced at an autho-
rized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. The required replacement batteries are available
at any Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
Warning! G Replacement batteries: Lithium, type

CR 2025 or equivalent.
Keep the batteries out of reach of children. 왘 Remove mechanical key 1 from the
1 Mechanical key
If a battery is swallowed, seek medical help SmartKey or SmartKey with
2 Battery compartment
immediately. KEYLESS-GO* (컄 page 475).
왘 Insert mechanical key 1 into opening.
Batteries contain materials that can harm 왘 Press mechanical key 1 in direction of
the environment if disposed of improperly. arrow.
Recycling of batteries is the preferred The battery compartment 2 is
method of disposal. Many states require unlatched.
sellers of batteries to accept old batteries
왘 Pull battery compartment 2 out of the
for recycling.
SmartKey housing.
480
Practical hints
왘 Pull out batteries 3.

왘 Using a line-free cloth, insert new
batteries 3 under contact springs 4
with the positive terminal (+) side
facing up.
왘 Return battery compartment 2 into
housing until it locks into place.
왘 Slide mechanical key 1 back into the
SmartKey or SmartKey with
3 Batteries KEYLESS-GO*.
4 Contact spring
왘 Check the operation of the SmartKey
or SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO*.
481
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Bulbs i If the headlamps or front fog lamps are i Substitute bulbs will be brought into use
fogged up on the inside as a result of high humid- when the following lamps malfunction:
Safe vehicle operation depends on proper ity, driving the vehicle a distance with the lights 앫 Turn signal lamps
exterior lighting and signaling. It is there- on should clear up the fogging.
앫 Brake lamps
fore essential that all bulbs and lamp as-
semblies are in good working order at all 앫 Parking lamps
times. 앫 Tail lamps
Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely Read and observe the messages in the multi-
important. Have headlamps checked and function display (컄 page 458).
readjusted at regular intervals and when a
bulb has been replaced. See an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for
headlamp adjustment.
482
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Front lamps Lamp Type

Lamp Type 6 Turn signal lamp 3457 AK
S-8
1 Parking and standing W5W
(30/2.2 cp
lamp
bulb)
2 Headlamps: 7 Front fog lamp H11 (55 W)
High beam/high beam
flasher H7 (55 W) Corner-illuminating
front fog lamp* H11 (55 W)
Bi-Xenon headlamps*:
High beam/high beam
Rear lamps
flasher spot lamp H7 (55 W)
3 Headlamps: Lamp Type
Low beam H7 (55 W)
8 High mounted brake
Bi-Xenon headlamps*: lamp LED
Low beam1 D2S-35 W
9 Brake lamp P 21 W
4 Additional turn signal LED
a Backup lamp P 21 W
lamp
b Turn signal lamp PY 21 W
5 Side marker lamp WY 5 W
1 c Side marker lamp P 21/4 W
Vehicles with Bi-Xenon* headlamps: Do not re-
place the Bi-Xenon bulbs yourself. Contact an d Tail, parking, standing P 21/4 W
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. lamp, rear fog lamp
(only driver’s side)
e License plate lamps C5W
483
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Notes on bulb replacement Have the LEDs and bulbs for the following
Warning! G 앫 Only use 12-volt bulbs of the same type
lamps replaced by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center:
Bulbs and bulb sockets can be very hot. and with the specified watt rating.
앫 the additional turn signal lamps in the
Allow the lamp to cool down before chang- 앫 Switch lights off before changing a bulb
ing a bulb. to prevent short circuits. exterior rear view mirrors
Keep bulbs out of reach of children. 앫 the high mounted brake lamp
앫 Always use a clean lint-free cloth when
Halogen lamps contain pressurized gas. handling bulbs. 앫 the Bi-Xenon* low beam lamps
A bulb can explode if you: 앫 Your hands should be dry and free of oil 앫 the Bi-Xenon high beam flasher spot-
앫 touch or move it when hot and grease. light*
앫 drop the bulb 앫 If the newly installed bulb does not ! Do not replace the LEDs yourself. You could
앫 scratch the bulb come on, visit an authorized otherwise damage the LEDs or parts of the vehi-
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. cle. Only have the LEDs replaced by a qualified
Wear eye and hand protection. specialist workshop having the necessary skills
Because of high voltage in Xenon lamps, it is and tools for carrying out the work required.
dangerous to replace the bulb or repair the
lamp and its components. We recommend
i Replacing the bulbs for the front lamps is a
technically complex process. For your conve-
that you have such work done by a qualified nience, we recommend that you have this work
technician. carried out by an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center.
Have the headlamp adjustment checked
regularly.
484
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Replacing bulbs for front lamps Low beam bulb (halogen headlamp)
i ML 500 only:
Before replacing a bulb in the right headlamp,
the fusebox in the engine compartment must be
removed. This should be performed by a quali-
fied specialist workshop, for instance by an
Before you start to replace a bulb for a
front lamp, do the following first:
1 Housing cover for low beam halogen
왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to headlamp 1 Low beam headlamp cover
position M (컄 page 136). 2 Housing cover for high beam halogen
왘 Open the hood (컄 page 356). bulb (high beam and high beam flasher)
3 Bulb socket for parking and standing
lamp bulb
4 Bulb socket for turn signal lamp bulb
5 Bulb socket for side marker lamp bulb
2 Bulb socket for low beam headlamp
485
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
왘 Turn cover 1 counterclockwise. Bi-Xenon* low beam/high beam High beam bulb (halogen headlamp)
headlamp
왘 Remove cover 1.
왘 Turn bulb socket 2 counterclockwise.
Warning! G
왘 Pull bulb socket 2 out of the
headlamp housing. Do not remove the low beam/high beam
왘 Pull the low beam bulb out of bulb cover for the Bi-Xenon* headlamp. Because
socket 2. of high voltage in Xenon* lamps, it is danger-
ous to replace the bulb or repair the lamp
왘 Insert the new low beam bulb into bulb and its components. We recommend that
socket 2. you have such work done by a qualified
왘 Insert bulb socket 2 into the technician. 1 High beam headlamp cover
headlamp housing.
왘 Turn bulb socket 2 clockwise until it
engages.
왘 Place cover 1 on the opening in the
headlamp housing.
왘 Turn cover 1 clockwise until it engag-
es.
2 Bulb socket for high beam headlamp
486
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
왘 Turn cover 1 counterclockwise. Turn signal lamp bulb Parking and standing lamp bulb
왘 Remove cover 1. 왘 Turn bulb socket 3 (컄 page 485)
counterclockwise.
headlamp housing. headlamp housing.
왘 Pull the bulb out of bulb socket 3.
왘 Pull the high beam bulb out of bulb
socket 2. 왘 Insert the new bulb into bulb
socket 3.
왘 Insert the new high beam bulb into bulb
socket 2. 왘 Insert bulb socket 3 into the
왘 Insert bulb socket 2 into the 1 Bulb socket for turn signal lamp headlamp housing.
headlamp housing. 왘 Turn bulb socket 1 counterclockwise. 왘 Turn bulb socket 3 clockwise until it
engages.
왘 Turn bulb socket 2 clockwise until it 왘 Pull bulb socket 1 out of the
engages. headlamp housing.
왘 Place cover 1 on the opening in the 왘 Pull the turn signal bulb out of bulb
headlamp housing. socket 1.
왘 Turn cover 1 clockwise until it engag- 왘 Insert the new turn signal bulb into bulb
es. socket 1.
왘 Insert bulb socket 1 into the
headlamp housing.
engages.
487
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Side marker lamp bulb Front fog lamp bulbs 왘 Insert a suitable object (e.g. screwdriv-
er) at point indicated by the arrow and
왘 Turn bulb socket 5 (컄 page 485) ! If not done carefully and properly, damage pry out cover 1.
counterclockwise. to the bumper can result. We therefore recom-
mend that you have this work carried out by an Cover 1 is released.
왘 Pull bulb socket 5 out of the authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
headlamp housing. 왘 Swing cover 1 outwards and take it
Removing front fog lamp cover: off.
왘 Pull the side marker bulb out of bulb
socket 5. Removing front fog lamp cover (Vehicles
with AMG Sport Package* or ML 63 AMG):
왘 Insert the new side marker bulb into
bulb socket 5.
왘 Insert bulb socket 5 into the
headlamp housing.
engages.
1 Cover
2 Front fog lamp or corner-illuminating
front fog lamp*
1 Cover
2 Front fog lamp
왘 Use a suitable object (e.g. hook or a
screwdriver) and place the hook or
screwdriver carefully between lower
end of cover and bumper.
488
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
왘 Turn the hook or screwdriver 90°. 왘 Turn bulb socket 4 clockwise until it
engages.
왘 Hold the cover 1 and pull the hook or
screwdriver outwards. 왘 Plug in the electrical connector.
You can now access the front fog lamp. 왘 Insert front fog lamp 2 back into
bumper.
왘 Fasten retaining screws 3.
왘 Reinsert cover 1 and press it in until it
engages.
4 Bulb socket of front fog lamp bulb
Additional turn signal lamps bulbs
The additional turn signal lamps in the
왘 Pull bulb socket 4 out of the housing. exterior rear view mirrors have LEDs.
왘 Pull the front fog lamp bulb out of bulb If a malfunction occurs or LEDs fail to func-
Example ML 350, ML 500 without Sport socket 4.
Package; Sport Package similar tion, the entire turn signal unit must be re-
왘 Insert the new front fog lamp bulb into placed. Have the turn signal unit replaced
3 Retaining screws
bulb socket 4. by an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
왘 Turn retaining screws 3 counterclock- Truck Center.
왘 Insert bulb socket 4 into the housing.
wise.
왘 Remove front fog lamp 2 out of the
bumper.
왘 Pull electrical connector off.
489
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Replacing bulbs for rear lamps Opening the side trim panels Vehicles without sound system*:
Opening the driver’s side trim panel: 왘 Remove the storage compartment on
Before you start to replace a bulb for a rear
the driver’s side.
lamp, do the following first:
왘 Turn the exterior lamp switch to
position M (컄 page 136).
Tail lamp unit

i To access the bulb socket, you have to
remove the cover in the corresponding side trim
panel of the cargo compartment.
왘 Open the tailgate (컄 page 119).
1 Cover in left side trim panel
2 Lock 1 Lock
2 Storage compartment
왘 Turn lock 2 90°.
왘 Insert a suitable object such as a coin
왘 Fold down the cover 1.
into the slot of lock 1.
왘 Turn lock 1 counterclockwise by 90°.
왘 Remove storage compartment 2.
490
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
Opening the passenger side trim panel: Replacing bulbs 왘 Press gently onto the respective bulb
and turn counterclockwise out of its
bulb socket.
왘 Press the new bulb gently into its bulb
socket and turn clockwise until it en-
gages.
왘 Align the respective bulb
socket 1 - 5 and turn it clockwise.
왘 Make sure bulb socket is attached
properly.
1 Lock Example rear lamp passenger-side
왘 Close the respective cover in the cargo
2 Cover in right side trim panel 1 Brake lamp compartment.
왘 Insert a suitable object such as a coin 2 Backup lamp
3 Rear fog lamp (only driver’s side), tail 왘 Close the tailgate (컄 page 121).
into the slot of lock 1.
lamp, parking and standing lamp
왘 Turn lock 1 counterclockwise by 90°.
4 Side marker lamp
왘 Remove cover 2. 5 Turn signal lamp
왘 Depending on which bulb needs to be
replaced, turn the respective bulb
socket 1 - 5 counterclockwise.
491
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
License plate lamp Adjusting headlamp aim Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely
important. To check and readjust a head-
lamp, follow the steps described:
왘 Park the vehicle on a level surface
25 feet (7.6 m) from a vertical test
screen or wall.
왘 Switch the headlamps on
(컄 page 136).
If the beam does not show a beam pattern
as indicated in the figure left, then follow
1 License plate lamp cover the steps below:
V Vertical centerline
2 Screws
H Headlamp mounting high, measured 왘 Open hood (컄 page 356).
왘 Loosen screws 2. from the center
왘 Remove license plate lamp cover 1. i High beam adjustments simultaneously aim
왘 Replace the tubular bulb. the low beam.
Vehicle should have a normal tailgate load.
왘 Reinstall license plate lamp cover 1.
왘 Retighten screws 2.
492
Practical hints
Replacing bulbs
왘 Always turn adjustment screws 2

and 3 simultaneously for vertical ad-
justment until the headlamp is adjust-
ed as shown 1 (컄 page 492). Turn
clockwise for upward movement and
counterclockwise for downward move-
ment.
Graduations:
screw 2: 0.50° pitch
Example headlamp, driver’s side screw 3: 0.67° pitch
2 Headlamp vertical adjustment screw
The left and right headlamps must be ad-
3 Headlamp vertical adjustment screw
justed individually.
i If it is not possible to obtain a proper head-
lamp adjustment, have the system checked at an
493
Practical hints
Front wiper blades ! Never open the hood when the wiper arms 왘 Fold the wiper arms forward until they
are folded forward. engage.
Hold on to the wiper when folding the wiper arm
Warning! G back. If released, the force of the impact from
the tensioning spring could crack the windshield.
For safety reasons, switch off wipers and Do not allow the wiper arms to contact the wind-
remove SmartKey from starter switch (vehi- shield glass without a wiper blade inserted.
cles with KEYLESS-GO*: Make sure the
Make sure the wiper blades are properly
vehicle’s on-board electronics have installed. Improperly installed wiper blades may
status 0) before replacing a wiper blade. cause windshield damage.
Otherwise the motor could suddenly turn on
For your convenience, we recommend that you
and cause injury. have this work carried out by an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. 1 Wiper blade
2 Cover
Warning! G Removing 3 Attachment
왘 Remove the SmartKey from the starter 4 Tab
Wiper blades are components that are sub- 5 Removing
switch.
ject to wear and tear. Change the wiper
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: 왘 Press tabs 4 together and tilt wiper
blades twice a year, preferably in the spring
and fall. Otherwise the windows will not be
blade 1 to detach tabs 4 on both
왘 Make sure the vehicle’s on-board recesses of attachment 3.
properly wiped. As a result, you may not be electronics have status 0
able to observe surrounding traffic condi- (컄 page 42). Wiper blade 1 is released on one end.
tions and could cause an accident.
왘 Maintaining its tilted position, slide
! Do not pull on the wiper blade inserts. They
could tear. wiper blade 1 out of attachment 3 in
494
Practical hints
Installing 왘 Check if the wiper blade is securely ! Hold on to the wiper when folding the wiper
fastened. arm back. If released, the force of the impact
from the tensioning spring could crack the rear
왘 Fold the wiper arm backward to rest on window.
the windshield.
Do not allow the wiper arm to contact the rear
Make sure you hold on to the wiper arm window glass without a wiper blade inserted.
when folding it back. Make sure the wiper blade is properly installed.
Improperly installed wiper blades may cause
Rear wiper blade rear window damage.
For your convenience, we recommend that you
have this work carried out by an authorized
1 Installing Warning! G Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
2 Tab
For safety reasons, switch off wipers and
3 Attachment
remove SmartKey from starter switch
4 Guide tab
(vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: Make sure the
5 Cover
vehicle’s on-board electronics have
왘 Slide the wiper blade into status 0) before replacing a wiper blade.
attachment 3 in direction of Otherwise the motor could suddenly turn on
arrow 1. and cause injury.
왘 Make sure guide tab 4 will be placed
under cover 5 when fully inserting the
wiper blade into attachment.
왘 Let tab 2 latch into both recesses of
attachment 3.
495
Practical hints
Removing 왘 Turn wiper blade 2 to form a right 왘 Hold wiper arm 1 and engage wiper
angle with wiper arm 1 as shown. blade 2 by pushing it in direction of
arrow until it locks into place.
switch. 왘 Hold wiper arm 1 and disengage wip-
er blade 2 by carefully sliding it in 왘 Check whether the wiper blade is
direction of arrow. securely fastened.
왘 Make sure the vehicle’s on-board
왘 Remove wiper blade 2. 왘 Fold the wiper arm to rest on the rear
electronics have status 0
(컄 page 42). window.
Installing
Make sure to hold on to the wiper when
! Do not pull on the wiper blade insert. It folding the wiper arm back.
could tear.
왘 Fold wiper arm 1 away from the rear
window until it engages.
1 Wiper arm
2 Wiper blade
왘 Insert wiper blade 2 into wiper
arm 1.
1 Wiper arm
2 Wiper blade
496
Practical hints
Flat tire
왔 Flat tire
Preparing the vehicle 왘 Set the automatic transmission to park
Warning! G position P (컄 page 187).
The dimensions of the spare wheel Warning! G
(Minispare wheel or collapsible tire) are dif- 왘 Remove the SmartKey from the starter
ferent from those of the road wheels. As a Vehicles with air suspension package*: switch.
result, the vehicle handling characteristics
Do not open or close any doors or the Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
change when driving with a spare wheel
tailgate while mounting a spare wheel. The
mounted. Adapt your driving style accord- 왘 Turn off the engine by pressing the
vehicle could rise or lower to a previously
ingly. KEYLESS-GO* button once
selected level. You or others could be
(컄 page 67).
The spare wheel is for temporary use only. injured as a result.
When driving with a spare wheel mounted, 왘 Open the driver’s door (this puts
ensure proper tire pressure and do not ex- 왘 Park the vehicle in a safe distance from the starter switch in position 0,
ceed a vehicle speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). moving traffic on a hard, flat surface same as with the SmartKey re-
Drive to the nearest Mercedes-Benz Light when possible. moved from the starter switch). The
Truck Center as soon as possible to have the driver’s door then can be closed
왘 Turn on the hazard warning flasher again.
spare wheel replaced with a regular road
(컄 page 142).
wheel. 왘 Have any passenger exit the vehicle at
왘 Turn the steering wheel so that the a safe distance from the roadway.
front wheels are in a straight-ahead
one spare wheel mounted. i Open door only when conditions are safe to
position.
Do not switch off the ESP® when a do so. 컄컄
왘 Set the parking brake (컄 page 57).
Minispare wheel is mounted.
497
Practical hints
Flat tire
컄컄 i Vehicles with collapsible tire: Vehicles with Minispare wheel: Lifting the vehicle
You can use the power outlet in the cargo com- 왘 Take the wheel wrench, the collapsible
partment or in the front of the rear seats to oper- wheel chock, and the vehicle jack out Warning! G
ate the electric air pump even when the ignition of the cargo compartment
is switched off, e.g. in order to inflate the col-
(컄 page 469). The jack is designed exclusively for jacking
lapsible emergency spare tire.
up the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets
An emergency shut-off feature ensures that the 왘 Take the Minispare wheel out of the
built into both sides of the vehicle. To help
vehicle’s electrical voltage does not fall below a cargo compartment (컄 page 473).
avoid personal injury, use the jack only to lift
minimum level. If the voltage drops to this mini-
Vehicles with collapsible tire the vehicle during a wheel change. Never
mum level, the power outlets are automatically
switched off. This ensures that enough power re- (ML 63 AMG only): get beneath the vehicle while it is supported
mains to start the engine. 왘 Take the collapsible tire, wheel wrench, by the jack. Keep hands and feet away from
wheel bolts, jack, and electric air pump the area under the lifted vehicle. Always
Mounting the spare wheel out of the cargo compartment firmly set parking brake and block wheels
(컄 page 474). before raising vehicle with jack.
Preparing the vehicle Do not disengage parking brake while the

! Vehicles with factory-mounted vehicle is raised. Be certain that the jack is
왘 Prepare the vehicle as described running-boards*:
Your vehicle is equipped with a scissors-type always vertical (plumb line) when in use,
(컄 page 497). especially on hills. Always try to use the jack
jack (located under the cargo compartment
floor) designed for use with factory-mounted on level surface. Make sure that the jack
running boards. Only use this jack when jacking arm is fully seated in the jack take-up brack-
up vehicles with factory-mounted running boards et. Always lower the vehicle onto sufficient
as otherwise the vehicle’s underbody can be capacity jackstands before working under
damaged. See separate instructions for
the vehicle.
scissors-type jack.
498
Practical hints
Flat tire
왘 Prevent the vehicle from rolling away

by blocking wheels with wheel chocks
or other sizable objects.
One collapsible wheel chock is includ-
ed with the vehicle tool kit
(컄 page 469). For information on set-
ting up the collapsible wheel chock,
see (컄 page 472).
When changing wheel on a level surface:
왘 Place one wheel chock in front of and 1 Wheel wrench 2 Take-up bracket
another sizeable object behind the 3 Jack
왘 On wheel to be changed, loosen but do
wheel that is diagonally opposite to the 4 Crank
not yet remove the wheel bolts
wheel being changed. (approximately one full turn with wheel ! Vehicles with factory-mounted
Always try lifting the vehicle using the jack wrench 1). running-boards*:
Your vehicle is equipped with a scissors-type
on a level surface. However, should The jack take-up brackets are located di- jack (located under the cargo compartment
circumstances require you to do so on a rectly behind the front wheel housings and floor) designed for use with factory-mounted
hill, place the wheel chock and another in front of the rear wheel housings. running boards. Only use this jack when jacking
sizeable object as follows: up vehicles with factory-mounted running boards
! Do not position the jack on the body of the as otherwise the vehicle’s underbody can be
왘 Place the wheel chock and another vehicle, as this may cause damage to the damaged. See separate instructions for
sizable object on the downhill side vehicle. scissors-type jack.
blocking both wheels of the axle not
being worked on. 왘 Place jack 3 on firm ground. 컄컄
499
Practical hints
Flat tire
컄컄 왘 Position jack 3 under the take-up 왘 Unscrew upper-most wheel bolt and
bracket 2 so that it is always vertical Warning! G remove it.
(plumb-line) as seen from the side,
왘 Replace this wheel bolt with alignment
even if the vehicle is parked on an in- The jack is intended only for lifting the
vehicle briefly for wheel changes. It is not bolt 1 supplied with the tool kit
cline.
suited for performing maintenance work (컄 page 469).
under the vehicle. 왘 Remove the remaining bolts.
앫 Never start the engine when the vehicle ! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt. This
is raised. could result in damage to the bolts and wheel
앫 Never lie down under the raised vehicle. hub threads.
왘 Remove the wheel.
Removing the wheel
왘 Turn crank 4 clockwise until jack 3

is fully seated in take-up bracket 2
and the jack base evenly meets the
ground.
왘 Continue to turn crank 4 until the
wheel is a maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm)
from the ground.
1 Alignment bolt
500
Practical hints
Flat tire
Mounting the new wheel ! To avoid paint damage, place wheel flat
against hub and hold it there while installing first
wheel bolt.
Warning! G
Always replace wheel bolts that are
damaged or rusted.
Never apply oil or grease to wheel bolts.
Damaged wheel hub threads should be 왘 Guide spare wheel onto the alignment
1 Wheel bolt for 18", 19" and 20" light repaired immediately. Do not continue to bolt and push it on the wheel hub.
alloy wheels and collapsible tire (AMG drive under these circumstances! Contact
왘 Insert wheel bolts and tighten them
vehicles) an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
slightly.
2 Wheel bolt for 17" light alloy wheels or Center or call Roadside Assistance.
Minispare wheel (located in vehicle tool 왘 Unscrew the alignment bolt.
Incorrect wheel bolts or improperly tight-
kit (컄 page 469)) ened wheel bolts can cause the wheel to 왘 Insert the remaining wheel bolt and
come off. This could cause an accident. tighten it slightly.
! Wheel bolts 2 must be used when mount-
ing 17" light alloy rims or the Minispare wheel. Make sure to use the correct wheel bolts.
The use of any wheel bolts other than wheel
bolts 2 for 17" light alloy rims or the Minispare
wheel will damage the vehicle’s brakes.
왘 Clean contact surfaces of wheel and
wheel hub.
501
Practical hints
Flat tire
Inflating the collapsible tire

Warning! G (ML 63 AMG only)
Only use genuine equipment

Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts. Other wheel Warning! G
bolts may come loose.
Vehicles with collapsible tire
Do not tighten the wheel bolts when the (ML 63 AMG only):
vehicle is raised. Otherwise the vehicle
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is
could fall off the jack.
properly mounted.
Inflate the collapsible tire using the electric Electric air pump
pump (컄 page 502) before lowering the 1 Flap
vehicle. 2 On/off switch
3 Electrical plug
4 Air hose with pressure gauge and vent
Warning! G screw
5 Union nut
Observe instructions on air pump label.
왘 Open flap 1 on electric air pump.
왘 Pull out electrical plug 3 and air hose
! Do not lower the vehicle before inflating the with pressure gauge 4.
collapsible tire. Otherwise the rim may be dam-
aged. 왘 Remove the valve cap from the
왘 Take the electric air pump out of the collapsible tire valve.
cargo compartment (컄 page 474).
502
Practical hints
Flat tire
왘 Screw union nut 5 onto the collaps- 왘 Inflate the collapsible tire to the recom- ! Please compare the recommended tire
ible tire valve. mended tire inflation pressure given in inflation pressure for your vehicle with the tire
the “Technical data” section inflation pressure on the yellow label located on
왘 Insert electrical plug 3 into a power
(컄 page 536). the spare wheel rim.
outlet (컄 page 302).
If the tire inflation pressure on the yellow label
This takes about 5 minutes for the col-
! The cigarette lighter* (컄 page 300) or the lapsible tire.
on the spare wheel rim differs from the values
power outlet in the front center console given in this Operator’s Manual, inflate the tire to
(컄 page 302) is not designed for use with the the recommended tire inflation pressure given
electric air pump. Use the power outlet in the Warning! G on the yellow label on the spare wheel rim.
rear center console or in the cargo compartment
왘 Press 0 on electric air pump switch 2.
(컄 page 303) for electric air pump operation.
Air hose 4 and union nut 5 can become
왘 Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch hot during inflation. Exercise proper caution
to position 0.
to position 1. to avoid burning yourself when using the
equipment. or
or
왘 Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
왘 Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop ! Do not operate the electric air pump longer Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
than 8 minutes without interruption. Otherwise it button twice without depressing the
button once without depressing the may overheat. brake pedal.
brake pedal.
You may operate the electric air pump again
왘 If the tire inflation pressure is above
왘 Press I on electric air pump switch 2. after it has cooled off.
the recommended tire inflation pres-
The electric air pump should now sure given in this Operator’s Manual,
switch on and inflate the collapsible release excess tire inflation pressure
tire. using the vent screw. 컄컄
503
Practical hints
Flat tire
컄컄 Lowering the vehicle

Warning! G
Follow recommend inflation pressures. Warning! G
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires Vehicles with collapsible tire
can result in sudden deflation (blowout) be- (ML 63 AMG only):
cause they are more likely to become punc-
Inflate collapsible tire only after the wheel is
tured or damaged by road debris, potholes,
properly mounted.
etc.
Inflate the collapsible tire using the electric
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
pump (컄 page 502) before lowering the 1-5 Wheel bolts
wear unevenly, adversely affect handling
vehicle.
and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail 왘 Tighten the five wheel bolts evenly, fol-
from being overheated. lowing the diagonal sequence illustrat-
왘 Lower vehicle by turning crank coun- ed (1 to 5), until all bolts are tight.
terclockwise until vehicle is resting ful- Observe a tightening torque of
왘 Detach the electric air pump.
ly on its own weight. 110 lb-ft (150 Nm).
왘 Store the electrical plug and the air
왘 Remove the jack.
hose behind the flap and place the
electric air pump back in the cargo Warning! G
compartment.
Have the tightening torque checked after
changing a wheel. The wheels could come
loose if they are not tightened to a torque of
110 lb-ft (150 Nm).
504
Practical hints
Flat tire
왘 Store jack and all other vehicle tool kit

items back into the storage well.
i The removed road wheel cannot be stored in
the spare wheel well under the cargo compart-
ment floor, but should be transported in the car-
go compartment wrapped in a protective cover.
Vehicles with TPMS or Advanced TPMS*:
Do not activate the tire inflation pressure moni-
tor until a full size wheel/tire with functioning
sensor has been placed back into service on the
vehicle.
505
Practical hints
Bleeding the fuel system (diesel engine only)
Driving the vehicle until the fuel tank is 왘 Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
empty is not recommended. Otherwise, air to position 3 (컄 page 40) and hold it
may be sucked into the fuel system. If this there for a maximum of 40 seconds or
happens, the ? malfunction indicator until the engine runs surge-free.
lamp (USA only) or the ± malfunction
If the engine does not start:
indicator lamp (Canada only) comes on
and the engine may not start immediately 왘 Wait for approximately 2 minutes.
after refueling the vehicle. 왘 Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
After refueling: to position 3 (컄 page 40) and hold it
there for a maximum of 40 seconds or
왘 Make sure the automatic transmission until the engine runs surge-free.
is set to P.
If the engine still does not start, do not
The gear position indicator in the multi-
make any further attempts to start the
function display should be on P.
engine. Contact an authorized
왘 Do not depress the accelerator. Mercedes-Benz Light truck Center or call
Roadside Assistance (컄 page 312).
i Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*: If necessary,
remove the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button from i When the ? malfunction indicator lamp
the starter switch (컄 page 40). (USA only) or the ± malfunction indicator
lamp (Canada only) has been illuminated for the
above condition, it will remain illuminated until
to position 2 for at least 10 seconds the engine was cycled on and off four times in a
(컄 page 40). row.
왘 Return the SmartKey in the starter
switch to position 0 (컄 page 40).
506
Practical hints
Battery
왔 Battery
The battery is located under the front
passenger seat. Warning! G Wear eye protection.
i Mercedes-Benz recommends to have the Observe all safety instructions and precau- Rinse any acid spills immediate-
battery replaced at an authorized tions when handling automotive batteries. ly with clear water. Contact a
physician if necessary.
The battery should always be sufficiently Risk of explosion.
charged in order to achieve its rated ser- Keep children away.
vice life.
If you use your vehicle mostly for Fire, open flames and smoking
short-distance trips, you will need to have are prohibited when handling Follow the instructions in this
the battery charge checked more batteries. Avoid creating sparks. Operator’s Manual.
frequently.
When replacing the battery, always use Battery acid is caustic. Do not Batteries contain materials that can harm
batteries approved by Mercedes-Benz. allow it to come into contact the environment if disposed of improperly.
with skin, eyes or clothing. Recycling of batteries is the preferred
If you do not intend to operate your vehicle
method of disposal. Many states require
for an extended period of time, consult an Wear suitable protective cloth-
sellers of batteries to accept old batteries
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck ing, especially gloves, apron and
for recycling.
Center about steps you need to observe. faceguard.
507
Practical hints
Battery
! The battery is a valve-regulated lead acid ! The factory-equipped VRLA battery is

(VRLA) battery, also referred to as “fleece” bat- leak-proofed. Only use a battery as replacement Warning! G
tery. Such batteries do not require topping-up of that has the same security features and is of
the electrolyte level. VRLA batteries therefore do identical size, voltage, and capacity as the Failure to follow these instructions can re-
not have cell caps and the battery cover is factory-equipped battery. sult in severe injury or death.
non-removable. Do not attempt to open the bat- The battery, the battery ventilation hose
tery as otherwise the battery will be damaged. Observe all safety instructions and precau-
(컄 page 513) and the lateral plug (컄 page 513)
tions when handling automotive batteries
Even though VRLA batteries do not require top- must always be securely installed when the
ping-up of the electrolyte level and cannot be vehicle is in operation. (컄 page 507).
opened to check the electrolyte level, the bat- Never lean over batteries while connecting,
tery condition must be checked periodically by
performing a battery conductance test. Refer to Warning! G you might get injured.
Maintenance Booklet for battery condition test- Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not
ing intervals. Jump starting must only be done using the allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes,
As with any other battery, the battery may dis- jump-start contacts located in the engine skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately
charge if the vehicle is not operated for an ex- compartment (컄 page 515). flush affected area with water and seek
tended period of time. You can connect a battery medical help if necessary.
maintenance charge unit tested and approved
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas,
for use on your vehicle model or disconnect the
battery to prevent battery discharge. Contact an which is flammable and explosive. Keep
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center flames or sparks away from battery, avoid
for more information. improper connection of jumper cables,
smoking etc.
508
Practical hints
Battery
! Never loosen or detach battery terminal Disconnecting, removing, reinstalling i With a disconnected battery you will no
clamps while the engine is running or the and reconnecting the battery longer be able to turn the SmartKey in the starter
SmartKey is in the starter switch. Otherwise the switch and pressing the KEYLESS-GO*
alternator and other electronic components start/stop button will have no effect.
could be severely damaged. Warning! G
Have the battery checked regularly by an Step 1 (Disconnecting)
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. Disconnecting, removing, reinstalling and
reconnecting the battery is a complicated
i If your battery is discharged, the vehicle
Contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light must be jump started (컄 page 515) using the
Truck Center for further information. and technically demanding procedure that jump start contacts in the engine compartment,
also requires safety precautions to avoid the or an accessory battery charge unit* approved
Warning! G risk of injury. We strongly recommend that it
be performed by a qualified technician or an
by Mercedes-Benz must be connected using the
jump start contacts in the engine compartment
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck (see separate instructions for the accessory bat-
Do not place metal objects on the battery as tery charge unit*) before any of the following
this could result in a short circuit. Center only. Please read the instructions
steps can be performed. If the battery cannot be
fully before beginning operation and only
Use leak-proof battery only to avoid the risk jumped or charged, please contact an
undertake it if you feel fully capable of authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
of acid burns in the event of an accident. performing all of the tasks involved as de-
scribed in these instructions. Observe all 왘 Set the automatic transmission to
safety instructions and precautions when position P (컄 page 187).
handling automotive batteries 왘 Firmly depress the parking brake
(컄 page 507). Performing the tasks involved (컄 page 65).
incorrectly can cause damage to the vehicle
and impair the operating safety of the
vehicle, and/or cause severe injury to you 왘 Leave the ignition switched on
or others. (컄 page 40). 컄컄
509
Practical hints
Battery
컄컄 i If the vehicle battery is discharged and you Step 2 (Disconnecting) Step 3 (Disconnecting)
had the vehicle jump started:
앫 Leave the engine running.
앫 Complete step 1, starting with switching off
all electrical consumers.
앫 Continue with step 2.
앫 When the front passenger seat is in the most
forward position, turn off the engine.
왘 Switch off all electrical consumers.
왘 Read and observe safety instructions
and precautions (컄 page 507). 1 Battery cover 2 Perforated floor carpet
왘 Enter the rear passenger compartment 왘 Cut the floor carpet 2 along the
왘 Open the front passenger door.
and remove main battery cover 1. dotted white line (see illustration) until
i Open doors only when conditions are safe to you reach the perforated part. Start
do so. cutting at the point indicated by the
왘 Move the front passenger seat to the arrows. Cut carpet using a sharp object
most forward position (컄 page 44). (knife etc.).
왘 Enter the front passenger compart-
ment.
왘 Move the front passenger seat to the
most rearward position (컄 page 44).
510
Practical hints
Battery
i If the vehicle battery is discharged and you Step 4 (Disconnecting)

had the vehicle jump started, turn off the engine.
왘 Remove SmartKey from starter switch.
electronics have status 0 (Turn off
the engine or all electrical systems
using the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button. Open the driver’s door. With
2 Perforated floor carpet, unfolded the driver’s door open, the vehicle’s
왘 Fold the floor carpet piece 2 in on-board electronics have status 0, 3 Air channel
direction of the arrow. same as with the SmartKey 4 Clip with pin insert
removed from the starter switch). 왘 Pull pin out of clip 4 in direction of
왘 Move the front passenger seat to the
most forward and upward position 왘 Enter the rear passenger compartment arrow.
again (컄 page 44). again. 왘 Pull clip with pin 4 outwards.
왘 Switch off the ignition (컄 page 40). 왘 Remove air channel 3 by pulling it out
in direction of arrow.
511
Practical hints
Battery
Step 5 (Disconnecting) Step 6 (Disconnecting) Step 7 (Removing)
5 Protection cover 7 Positive terminal 9 Battery ventilation hose

6 Battery 8 Negative terminal a Attachment nut
b Mounting
왘 Unclip protection cover 5 from 왘 Disconnect battery negative lead 8
battery 6 and remove it. from negative terminal. 왘 Remove the battery ventilation
hose 9 by pulling it out.
왘 Remove positive terminal cover.
왘 Unfasten and remove attachment
왘 Disconnect the battery positive
nuts a.
lead 7.
왘 Remove mounting b.
512
Practical hints
Battery
Step 8 (Removing) Step 9 (Reinstalling) 왘 Carry out step 10 to reconnect the

battery (컄 page 513).
왘 Carry out step 8 in reverse order
(컄 page 513). 왘 Follow steps 5 to 1 in reverse order to
completely reinstall the battery
! The battery, the battery ventilation hose 9 (컄 page 512) to (컄 page 509).
and the lateral plug d (컄 page 513) must
always be securely installed when the vehicle is
in operation. Step 10 (Reconnecting)
왘 If the battery has been removed, first
carry out step 8 in reverse order
(컄 page 513).
c Battery 왘 Open the driver’s door.
왘 Tilt the battery c with the negative 왘 Make sure all electrical consumers are
terminal side upwards. turned off.
왘 Take out the battery maintaining its 왘 Make sure the SmartKey is removed
tilted position in the direction of the from the starter switch.
arrow.
Battery, shown removed for illustration
9 Battery ventilation hose
electronics have status 0 (Open the
d Vent plug
driver’s door. With the driver’s door
open, the vehicle’s on-board elec-
tronics have status 0, same as with
the SmartKey removed from the
starter switch (컄 page 39)). 컄컄
513
Practical hints
Battery
컄컄 왘 Connect the positive lead to the posi- Charging the battery 왘 Charge the battery in accordance with
tive terminal and fasten it’s cover the instructions of the battery charger
(컄 page 512). If the battery is discharged, the battery can manufacturer.
be charged using the jump-start contacts
왘 Connect the negative lead to the nega- Batteries contain materials that can harm
located in the engine compartment
tive terminal (컄 page 512). the environment if disposed of improperly.
(컄 page 516).
Large 12-volt storage batteries contain
! Never invert the terminal connections! lead. Recycling of batteries is the preferred
i The following procedures must be carried Warning! G method of disposal. Many states require
out following any interruption of battery power sellers of batteries to accept old batteries
(e.g. due to reconnection): Never charge a battery while still installed in for recycling.
앫 Set the clock (컄 page 169). the vehicle unless the accessory battery
charge unit approved by Mercedes-Benz is
Vehicles with COMAND system with naviga-
tion module*: Time and date are set auto- being used. Gases may escape during charg-
matically. ing and cause explosions that may result in
paint damage, corrosion or personal injury.
앫 Synchronize the door windows
(컄 page 238). An accessory battery charge unit specially
앫 Synchronize the power tilt/sliding sunroof* adapted for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and
(컄 page 244). tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz is
앫 Synchronize the power folding exterior rear available, permitting the charging of the
view mirrors* (컄 page 202). battery in its installed position. Contact an
Center for information and availability.
Charge battery in accordance with the
separate instructions for the accessory
battery charger.
514
Practical hints
Jump starting
왔 Jump starting
If the battery is discharged, the engine can 앫 Always make sure the jumper cables
Warning! G be started with jumper cables and the bat- are not on or near pulleys, fans or other
tery of another vehicle. Observe the follow- parts that move when the engine is
Failure to follow these directions will cause ing: started or running.
damage to the electronic components, and
앫 Jump starting should only be performed ! Do not tow-start the vehicle.
can lead to a battery explosion and severe
injury or death. using the jump-start contacts located
in the engine compartment ! Avoid repeated and lengthy starting
Never lean over batteries while connecting attempts.
(컄 page 516).
or jump starting, you might get injured. Do not attempt to start the engine using a
앫 Jump starting should only be performed battery quick charge unit.
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not
when the engine and catalytic
allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes, If the engine does not run after several unsuc-
converter1 are cold. cessful starting attempts, have it checked at the
skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately
앫 Do not start the engine if the battery is nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
flush affected area with water, and seek
frozen. Let the battery thaw out first. Center.
medical help if necessary.
Excessive unburned fuel generated by repeated
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas, 앫 Only jump start from batteries with the failed starting attempts may damage the catalyt-
which is flammable and very explosive. Keep same voltage rating (12 V). Jump start- ic converter1.
flames or sparks away from battery, avoid ing with a more powerful battery could
Make sure the jumper cables do not have loose
improper connection of jumper cables, damage the vehicle’s electrical system, or missing insulation.
smoking, etc. which will not be covered by the
Make sure the cable clamps do not touch any
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. other metal part while the other end is still at-
Attempting to jump start a frozen battery
can result in it exploding, causing personal 앫 Only use jumper cables with sufficient tached to a battery.
injury. cross-section and insulated terminal
Read all instructions before proceeding. clamps.
1
Vehicles with gasoline engine only.
515
Practical hints
Jump starting
Warning! G
Keep flames or sparks away from battery.
Do not smoke.
Observe all safety instructions and precau-
tions when handling automotive batteries
(컄 page 507).
The jump-start contacts are located in the

1 Negative (-) terminal 1 Positive terminal of charged battery
engine compartment.
2 Positive (+) terminal 2 Positive terminal of discharged battery
왘 Make sure the two vehicles do not 3 Negative terminal of charged battery
touch. 4 Negative terminal of discharged
battery
왘 Turn off all electrical consumers.
왘 Apply parking brake.
왘 Set automatic transmission to
position P.
왘 Open the hood (컄 page 356).
왘 Open cover of positive terminal 2.
516
Practical hints
Jump starting
왘 Connect positive terminal 1 and 2 You can now turn on the electrical con-
with the jumper cable. Clamp cable to sumers. Do not switch on the headlamps
charged battery 1 first. under any circumstances.
왘 Start engine of the vehicle with the 왘 Remove the jumper cables first from
charged battery and run at idle speed. negative terminals 4 and 3 and then
from positive terminals 2 and 1.
왘 Connect negative terminals 3 and 4
of the batteries with the second jumper You can now switch on the headlamps.
cable. Clamp the cable to negative
왘 Have the battery checked at the near-
terminal 3 of the charged battery
est authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
first.
Truck Center.
! Never invert the terminal connections!
왘 Start the engine of the disabled vehi-
cle.
517
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
Mercedes-Benz recommends that the When circumstances do not permit the ! When towing the vehicle with all wheels on
vehicle be transported with all wheels off recommended towing methods, the the ground, the automatic transmission must be
the ground using flatbed or appropriate vehicle may be towed with all wheels on in position N and the starter switch must be in
wheel lift/dolly equipment. This method is the ground only so far as necessary to have position 2 (컄 page 40).
preferable to other types of towing. the vehicle moved to a safe location where When towing the vehicle with all wheels on the
the recommended towing methods can be ground, the vehicle may be towed only for
! Use flatbed or wheel lift/dolly equipment, employed. distances up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a speed
with the SmartKey in starter switch turned to not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h).
position 0. ! Do not tow with one axle raised. Doing so Keep in mind that it is important for the
Do not tow with sling-type equipment. Towing could damage the transfer case, which is not SmartKey to be in the respective starter switch
with sling-type equipment over bumpy roads will covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited positions as described above. As soon as the
damage radiator and supports. Warranty. SmartKey is removed from the starter switch or
To prevent damage during transport, do not tie All wheels must be on or off the ground. Observe the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* is removed
down vehicle by its chassis or suspension parts. instructions for towing the vehicle with all from the vehicle, the automatic transmission will
Use the towing eyes. wheels on the ground. shift to park position P see “Starter switch posi-
tions” (컄 page 39).
Switch off the ESP® (컄 page 99) and the auto-
matic central locking (컄 page 126).
! Do not tow-start the vehicle.
518
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
i To signal turns while being towed with ! When towing the vehicle with all wheels on
Warning! G hazard warning flasher in use, set the starter the ground, note the following:
switch to position 2 and activate combination With the automatic central locking activated and
If circumstances require towing the vehicle switch for left or right turn signal in usual manner the ignition in position 2 (컄 page 40), the vehicle
with all wheels on the ground, always tow – only the selected turn signal will operate. doors lock if the left front wheel is turning at a
with a tow bar if: Upon canceling the turn signal, the hazard speed of approximately 9 mph (15 km/h) or
warning flasher will operate again. above.
앫 the engine will not run
To prevent the vehicle doors from locking,
앫 there is a malfunction in the power i If the battery is disconnected or discharged, deactivate the automatic central locking
supply or in the vehicle’s electrical sys- the automatic transmission will remain locked in
(컄 page 126).
tem position P and the SmartKey will not turn in the
starter switch. For more information, see “Bat- Towing of the vehicle should only be done using
Prior to towing the vehicle with all wheels on tery” (컄 page 507) and “Jump starting” the towing eye bolt. Never attach tow cable, tow
the ground, make sure the starter switch is (컄 page 515). rope or tow rod to vehicle chassis, frame or sus-
in position 2 (컄 page 40). pension parts.
Warning! G
With the engine not running, there is no
power assistance for the brake and steering
systems. In this case, it is important to keep
in mind that a considerably higher degree of
effort is necessary to brake and steer the
vehicle. Adapt your driving accordingly.
519
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
Installing towing eye bolt

Warning! G
Depending on whether you are towing a
vehicle or you are being towed, the towing In order to avoid possible serious burns or
eye bolt can be screwed into threaded injury, use extreme caution when removing
holes which are located behind covers on the rear cover, because the rear exhaust
the right-hand side of each bumper. pipe is extremely hot.
Removing cover
1 Cover i The cover 1 is secured to the bumper by a

plastic cord.
왘 Press mark on cover 1 as indicated by
the arrow.
Vehicles with Sport Package*:
왘 Pry cover 1 with a screwdriver or
1 Cover similar tool at point indicated by the
arrow.
왘 Lift off cover 1 to reveal the threaded
hole for towing eye bolt.
Vehicles with Sport Package*
1 Cover
520
Practical hints
Towing the vehicle
Installing towing eye bolt Stranded vehicle

왘 Take the towing eye bolt and wheel bolt
Freeing a stranded vehicle, on which the
wrench from the vehicle tool kit
wheels are dug into sand or mud, should
(컄 page 469).
be done with the greatest of care, especial-
왘 Screw towing eye bolt in clockwise to ly if the vehicle is heavily loaded.
its stop and tighten with wheel wrench.
Avoid pulling the vehicle abruptly or diago-
nally, since it could result in damage to the
Removing towing eye bolt
chassis alignment.
왘 Loosen towing eye bolt counterclock-
Never try to free a vehicle that is still cou-
wise with wheel wrench.
pled to a trailer.
왘 Unscrew towing eye bolt.
If possible, a vehicle equipped with trailer
왘 Store the towing eye bolt and wheel hitch receiver should be pulled backward
bolt wrench back into the vehicle tool in its own previously made tracks.
kit (컄 page 469).
Installing cover
왘 Engage cover 1 at top and press at
bottom.
521
Practical hints
Fuses
The electrical fuses in your vehicle serve to If a newly inserted fuse blows again, have Before replacing fuses:
switch off malfunctioning power circuits. the cause determined and rectified by an
왘 Apply parking brake (컄 page 65).
If a fuse is blown, the components and sys-
Center. 왘 Make sure the automatic transmission
tems secured by that fuse will stop operat-
is set to P (컄 page 187).
ing. The following aids are available to help you
replace fuses. They are included with the The gear position indicator in the multi-
function display should be on P.
Warning! G vehicle tool kit (컄 page 469):
앫 Fuse chart 왘 Turn off all electrical consumers.
Only use fuses approved by Mercedes-Benz 왘 Turn off the engine (컄 page 40).
The fuse chart explains the fuse alloca-
with the specified amperage for the system
tion and fuse amperages. 왘 Remove the SmartKey from the starter
in question and do not attempt to repair or
bridge a blown fuse. Using other than ap- 앫 Spare fuses switch.
proved fuses or using repaired or bridged 앫 Fuse extractor Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO*:
fuses may cause an overload leading to a
The electrical fuses are located in different 왘 Open the driver’s door (this puts
fire, and/or cause damage to electrical
fuse boxes: the starter switch in position 0,
components and/or systems. Have the
same as with the SmartKey re-
cause determined and remedied by an au- 앫 Fuse box in engine compartment moved from the starter switch). The
thorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. (컄 page 523) driver’s door then can be closed
앫 Fuse box in cargo compartment again.
i A blown fuse must be replaced by an appro- (컄 page 523)
priate spare fuse (recognizable by its color or the
fuse rating given on the fuse) of the amperage 앫 Fuse box in passenger compartment
recommended in the fuse chart. Any (컄 page 524)
Mercedes-Light Truck Center will be glad to
advise you on this subject.
522
Practical hints
Fuses
Fuse box in engine compartment Fuse box in cargo compartment
The fuse box is located on the passenger The fuse box is located in the cargo com-
side of the engine compartment. partment behind the passenger side trim
panel.
왘 Open the hood (컄 page 356).
Fuse box ML 500

1 Clamp
2 Fuse box cover
왘 Pull clamp 1 in direction of arrow.
Example fuse box ML 350 (ML 320 CDI, 왘 Lift fuse box cover 2 up. 1 Lock
ML 63 AMG similar) 2 Cover
왘 Install fuse box cover in reverse order.
1 Clamp
2 Fuse box cover ! The fuse box cover must be installed
properly to prevent moisture and/or dirt from
entering the fuse box and possibly impairing fuse
operation.
왘 Close the hood after checking or
replacing fuses (컄 page 358).
523
Practical hints
Fuses
Removing/installing cover Fuse box in passenger compartment Opening

왘 Open the tailgate (컄 page 119). 왘 Open the front passenger door.
The fuse box is located behind a cover in
왘 Insert a suitable object such as a coin the dashboard on the front passenger side. 왘 Open the glove box (컄 page 294).
into the slot of lock 1 (컄 page 523).
왘 Insert flat, blunt object as a lever into
왘 Turn lock 1 counterclockwise by 90° the edge of the cover 1 at the position
in direction of arrow. indicated by the arrow.
왘 Remove cover 2. 왘 Loosen cover 1 from dashboard using
lever.
왘 Install cover 2 in reverse order.
왘 Using your hands, pull cover 1 out
and remove.
Closing
1 Cover
왘 Hook cover 1 into the opening at the
! Do not use sharp objects such as a screw- front.
driver to open the fuse box cover 1 in the dash-
왘 Press cover 1 back on until it engag-
board, as this could damage the fuse box cover
or the dashboard. es.
524
Practical hints
Fuses
Emergency engine shut-down
If the engine cannot be turned off as de-

scribed in the “Getting started” section
(컄 page 66), you may use the following
emergency procedure.
왘 Take the fuse chart from the vehicle
tool kit (컄 page 470).
왘 Open the fuse box in engine compart-
ment (컄 page 523).
왘 Use the fuse extractor to remove
fuse 120. Find its location in the fuse
chart.
i ML 500: Remove fuse 114 to shut-down the
engine. Find its location in the fuse chart.
525
526
Technical data
Parts service
Warranty coverage
Identification labels
Layout of poly-V-belt drive
Engine
Rims and tires
Electrical system
Main Dimensions
Weights
Fuels, coolants, lubricants
527
Technical data
Parts service
The “Technical data” section provides the All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers ! The use of non-genuine Mercedes-Benz
necessary technical data for your vehicle. maintain a stock of Genuine parts and accessories not authorized by
Mercedes-Benz parts required for mainte- Mercedes-Benz could damage the vehicle, which
nance and repair work. In addition, strate- is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
gically located parts distribution centers Warranty, or could compromise the vehicle’s
durability or safety.
provide quick and reliable parts service.
More than 300000 different parts for
Mercedes-Benz models are available.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject-
ed to stringent quality inspections. Each
part has been specifically developed, man-
ufactured or selected for and adapted to
Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
Therefore, Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
should be installed.
528
Technical data
Warranty coverage
왔 Warranty coverage
Your vehicle is covered under the terms of Replacement parts and accessories are Loss of Service and Warranty
the warranties printed in the Service and covered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and Information Booklet
Warranty Information booklet. Your Accessories warranties, copies of which
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck are available at any authorized Should you lose your Service and Warranty
Center will exchange or repair any defec- Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. Information booklet, have an authorized
tive parts originally installed on the vehicle Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center arrange
in accordance with the terms of the follow- for a replacement. It will be mailed to you.
ing warranties:
앫 New Vehicle Limited Warranty
앫 Emission System Warranty
앫 Emission Performance Warranty
앫 California, Maine, Massachusetts, and
Vermont Emission Control Systems
Warranty
529
Technical data
1 Certification label (on driver’s B-pillar) Example certification label (U.S. vehicles) Example certification label
(Canada vehicles)
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) 2 Paintwork code
3 VIN 2 Paintwork code
can be found in the following locations:
3 VIN
앫 on the certification label
i Data shown on certification label are for
앫 embossed underneath the illustration purpose only. These data are specific
passenger-side rear seat (컄 page 531) to each vehicle and may vary from data shown in
the illustration. Refer to certification label on
앫 on the lower edge of the windshield vehicle for actual data specific to your vehicle.
(컄 page 531)
530
Technical data
4 Seat cushion 7 Emission control information label,

5 Floor cover includes both federal and California
6 VIN certification exhaust emission
standards
왘 Fold the seat cushion 4 forward
8 Engine number (engraved on engine)
(컄 page 285).
9 Vacuum line routing diagram label
왘 Fold floor cover 5 in direction of the a VIN (lower edge of windshield)
arrow.
The VIN 6 is now visible.
i When ordering parts, please specify vehicle
identification and engine numbers.
531
Technical data
ML 350 ML 320 CDI ML 500
1 Idler pulley 1 Coolant pump 1 Automatic belt tensioner

2 Idler pulley 2 Idler pulley 2 Power steering pump
3 Automatic belt tensioner 3 Automatic belt tensioner 3 Air conditioning compressor
4 Power steering pump 4 Power steering pump 4 Crankshaft
5 Air conditioning compressor 5 Air conditioning compressor 5 Coolant pump
6 Crankshaft 6 Crankshaft 6 Generator (alternator)
7 Coolant pump 7 Idler pulley 7 Idler pulley
8 Generator (alternator) 8 Generator (alternator)
532
Technical data
ML 63 AMG
1 Idler pulley
2 Idler pulley
3 Idler pulley
4 Automatic belt tensioner
5 Power steering pump
6 Air conditioning compressor
7 Crankshaft
8 Coolant pump
9 Generator (alternator)
533
Technical data
Engine
Model ML 320 CDI (164.1221) ML 350 (164.1861)

Engine 642 272
Mode of operation Diesel 4-stroke engine 4-stroke engine, gasoline injection
No. of cylinders 6 6
Bore 3.27 in (83.00 mm) 3.66 in (92.90 mm)
Stroke 3.62 in (92.00 mm) 3.38 in (86.00 mm)
3
Total piston displacement 182 cu in (2987 cm ) 213 cu in (3498 cm3)
Compression ratio 16.5:1 10.7:1
Output acc. to SAE J 1349 221 hp/3800 rpm 268 hp/6000 rpm2
(165 kW/3800 rpm) (200 kW/6000 rpm)
Maximum torque acc. to SAE J 1349 398 lb-ft/1600-2400 rpm 258 lb-ft/2400-5000 rpm
(540 Nm/1600-2400 rpm) (350 Nm/2400-5000 rpm)
Maximum engine speed 4500 rpm 6500 rpm
Firing order 1-4-2-5-3-6 1-4-3-6-2-5
Poly-V-belt 2035 mm 2404 mm
1 The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle. See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for the corresponding data of all special bodies and
special equipment.
2
Premium fuel required. Performance may vary with fuel octane rating.
534
Technical data
Engine
Model ML 500 (164.1751) ML 63 AMG (164.1771)

Engine 113 156
Mode of operation 4-stroke engine, gasoline injection 4-stroke engine, gasoline injection
No. of cylinders 8 8
Bore 3.82 in (97.00 mm) 4.02 in (102.20 mm)
Stroke 3.31 in (84.00 mm) 3.72 in (94.60 mm)
3
Total piston displacement 303 cu in (4966 cm ) 378.8 cu in (6208 cm3)
Compression ratio 10:1 11.3:1
Output acc. to SAE J 1349 302 hp/5600 rpm 2 503 hp/6800 rpm 2
(225 kW/5600 rpm) (375 kW/6800 rpm)
Maximum torque acc. to SAE J 1349 339 lb-ft/2700-4750 rpm 465 lb-ft/5200 rpm
(460 Nm/2700-4750 rpm) (630 Nm/5200 rpm)
Maximum engine speed 6300 rpm 7200 rpm
Firing order 1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8 1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8
Poly-V-belt 2370 mm 2369 mm
1 The quoted data apply only to the standard vehicle. See an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for the corresponding data of all special bodies and special
equipment.
2
Premium fuel required. Performance may vary with fuel octane rating.
535
Technical data
Rims and tires
! Only use tires which have been tested and ! Using tires other than those approved by The tire inflation pressure should be checked
approved by Mercedes-Benz. Tires approved by Mercedes-Benz can have detrimental effects, regularly and should only be adjusted on cold
Mercedes-Benz are developed to provide best such as tires. Follow tire manufacturer’s maintenance
possible performance in conjunction with the recommendation included with vehicle.
앫 poor handling characteristics
driving safety systems on your vehicle such as
ABS or ESP®. Tires specially developed for your 앫 increased noise i The following pages also list the approved
wheel rim and tire sizes for equipping your
vehicle and tested and approved by 앫 increased fuel consumption vehicles with winter tires. Winter tires are not
Mercedes-Benz can be identified by finding the available as standard or optional factory equip-
Moreover, tires and rims not approved by
following on the tire’s sidewall: ment, but can be purchased from an authorized
Mercedes-Benz may, under load, exhibit dimen-
앫 MO = Mercedes-Benz Original equipment sional variations and different tire deformation Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
tires characteristics that could cause them to come Depending on vehicle model and the standard or
AMG vehicles: into contact with the vehicle body or axle parts. optional factory-equipped wheel rim/tire
Does not apply to all approved tires on AMG Damage to the tires or the vehicle may be the configuration on your vehicle (Appearance
vehicles. For information on tested and result. Package, Sport Package etc.), equipping your
approved tires for AMG vehicles, contact an vehicle with winter tires approved for your
authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck i Further information on tires and rims is vehicle model may also require the purchase of
available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Center. two or four wheel rims of the recommended size
Truck Center. A placard with the recommended
Using tires other than those approved by for use with these winter tires. See an authorized
tire inflation pressure is located on the driver’s
Mercedes-Benz may result in damage that is not Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center for more
door B-pillar (컄 page 530). Some vehicles may
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited information.
have supplemental tire inflation pressure infor-
Warranty. mation for driving at high speeds (컄 page 375)
or for vehicle loads less than the maximum
loaded vehicle condition (컄 page 375). If such
information is provided, it can be found on the
placard located on the inside of the fuel filler
flap.
536
Technical data
Rims and tires
Same size tires
ML 320 CDI ML 320 CDI* ML 320 CDI (Sport Package*)

ML 350 ML 350* ML 350 (Sport Package*)
ML 500 ML 500 (Sport Package*)
Rims (light alloy) 7.5 J x 17 H2 8 J x 18 H2 8 J x 19 H2
Wheel offset 2.20 in (56 mm) 2.36 in (60 mm) 2.36 in (60 mm)
1
All-season tires 235/65 R17 104H M+S 255/55 R18 105H M+S 255/50 R19 107H XL (Extra Load) M+S
Winter tires1,3 235/65 R17 104H M+S. 255/55 R18 105H M+S. 255/50 R19 107H XL (Extra Load) M+S.
ML 63 AMG ML 63 AMG* ML 320 CDI (Sport Package*)

ML 350 (Sport Package*)
ML 500 (Sport Package*)
AMG rims (light alloy) 9.5 J x 19 H2 10 J x 20 H2 8.5 J x 19 H2
Wheel offset 1.81 in (46 mm) 1.81 in (46 mm) 2.28 in (58 mm)
All-season tires1 – – 255/50 R19 107H XL (Extra Load) M+S
1,2
Summer tires 295/45 ZR19 109Y 295/40 ZR20 106Y –
1,3
Winter tires 285/45 R19 107V M+S. – 255/50 R19 107H XL (Extra Load) M+S.
1 Radial-ply tires
2
Must not be used with snow chains.
3 Not available as factory equipment.
537
Technical data
Rims and tires
Spare wheel
Minispare wheel
ML 320 CDI
ML 350
ML 500
Rim 4.0B x 18 H2
Wheel offset 1.58 in (40 mm)
Minispare tire 1 T 155/90-18 113M
Recommended tire inflation pressure 61 psi (4.2 bar)
1
Spare wheel with collapsible tire
ML 63 AMG
Rim 5.5 B x 19 H2
Wheel offset 0.51 in (13 mm)
1
Collapsible tire 185/65-19 104P
Recommended tire inflation pressure 51 psi (3.5 bar)
1
538
Technical data
Rims and tires
! Please compare the recommended tire in- i Please note that the tire inflation pressure of
flation pressure for your vehicle with the tire in- the collapsible tire differs from the tire inflation
flation pressure on the yellow label located on pressure of the road tires.
the spare wheel rim.
If the tire inflation pressure on the yellow label
on the spare wheel rim differs from the values
given in this Operator’s Manual, inflate the col-
lapsible tire to the recommended tire inflation
pressure given on the yellow label on the spare
wheel rim.
539
Technical data
Electrical system
Model ML 350 ML 500 ML 63 AMG

Generator (alternator) 14 V/180 A 14 V/180 A 14 V/180 A
Starter motor 12 V/1.4 kW 12 V/1.7 kW 12 V/2.2 kW
Battery 12 V/70 Ah 12 V/95 Ah 12 V/95 Ah
Spark plugs NGK PLKR 6A NGK PFR 5R-11 NGK T200 36N
Electrode gap 0.031 in (0.8 mm) 0.039 in (1.0 mm) 0.039 in (1.0 mm)
Tightening torque 15 – 22 lb-ft (20 – 30 Nm) 15 – 22 lb-ft (20 – 30 Nm) 15 – 22 lb-ft (20 – 30 Nm)
Model ML 320 CDI

Generator (alternator) 14 V/220 A
Starter motor 12 V/2.2 kW
Battery 12 V/95 Ah
540
Technical data
Main Dimensions
왔 Main Dimensions
Model ML 320 CDI, ML 350, ML 500 ML 63 AMG
Overall vehicle length 188.5 in (4788 mm) 189.5 in (4812 mm)
Vehicle width (exterior rear view mirrors folded out) 83.7 in (2127 mm) 83.7 in (2127 mm)
Vehicle width (exterior rear view mirrors folded in) 76.0 in (1930 mm) 76.8 in (1951 mm)
Overall vehicle height (vehicles with steel suspen- 71.5 in (1815 mm) -
sion)
Overall vehicle height, depending on set vehicle level 69.8 in-73.0 in 69.5 in-72.6 in
(vehicles with air suspension package*) (1774 mm-1854 mm) (1764 mm-1844 mm)
Wheelbase 114.8 in (2915 mm) 114.8 in (2915 mm)
Ground clearance (vehicles with steel suspension) 8.3 in (210 mm) -
Ground clearance, depending on set vehicle level 7.1 in-10.3 in (181 mm-261 mm) 6.7 in-9.5 in (169 mm-242 mm)
(vehicles with air suspension package*)
Turning circle 39 ft (11.6 m) 39 ft (11.6 m)
Track, front 64.0 in (1627 mm) 64.8 in-65.5 in
(1647 mm-1664 mm)
Track, rear 64.1 in (1629 mm) 64.9 in-65.3 in
(1649 mm-1667 mm)
541
Technical data
Weights
Roof load max. 220 lb (100 kg)
542
Technical data
왔 Fuels, coolants, lubricants
Capacities
Warning! G If a service fluid is swallowed, contact a
physician immediately.
Vehicle components and their respective
lubricants must match. Therefore only use Comply with all valid regulations with re-
products tested and approved by spect to handling, storing and disposing of
Mercerdes-Benz. service fluids. Otherwise you could
endanger persons or the environment.
Please refer to the Factory Approved
Service Products pamphlet, or inquire at Keep service fluids out of the reach of
your Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center. children.
Model Capacity Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.

Engine with oil filter ML 320 CDI 9.5 US qt (9.0 l) Approved engine oils
ML 350 8.5 US qt (8.0 l) Approved engine oils
ML 500 9.0 US qt (8.5 l) Approved engine oils
ML 63 AMG 10.3 US qt (9.7 l) Approved engine oils
Automatic transmission All models 9.5 US qt (9.0 l) MB Automatic Transmission Fluid
Transfer case single speed All models 0.53 US qt (0.5 l) MB Automatic Transmission Fluid
543
Technical data
Model Capacity Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.

Front axle All models 1.2 US qt (1.1 l) Hypoid gear oil
Rear axle All models 1.2 US qt (1.1 l) Hypoid gear oil
Power steering All models approx. 1.3 US qt (1.2 l) MB Power Steering Fluid
Front wheel hubs All models approx. 1.5 oz (43 g) each High temperature roller bearing grease
Brake system All models - MB Brake Fluid (DOT 4+)
Cooling system ML 320 CDI, approx. 10.0 US qt (9.5 l) MB Anticorrosion/Antifreeze
ML 350
ML 500 approx. 10.6 US qt (10.0 l) MB Anticorrosion/Antifreeze
ML 63 AMG approx. 12.2 US qt (11.5 l) MB Anticorrosion/Antifreeze
544
Technical data
Model Capacity Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.

Fuel tank All models 25.1 US gal (95.0 l) Gasoline engines:
including a reserve of All except approx. 3.5 US gal (13.0 l) Premium unleaded gasoline
ML 63 AMG Minimum Posted Octane 91
(Avg. of 96 RON/86 MON)
including a reserve of ML 63 AMG approx. 4.0 US gal (15.3 l)
Diesel engines:
Diesel fuels according to ASTM D 975 grades
No. 2-D or No. 1-D
Air conditioning system R-134a refrigerant and special PAG lubricant
oil (never R-12)
Windshield washer and head- All models 8.1 US qt (7.7 l) MB Windshield Washer Concentrate1
lamp cleaning* system
1
Use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “MB SummerFit” and water for temperatures above freezing or MB Windshield Washer Concentrate “MB SummerFit” and
commercially available premixed windshield washer solvent/antifreeze for temperatures below freezing point. Follow suggested mixing ratios (컄 page 551).
545
Technical data
Engine oils Please follow Maintenance System Brake fluid

(U.S. vehicles) or FSS PLUS (Canada vehicles)
Engine oils are specifically tested for their recommendations for scheduled oil changes.
suitability in our engines and durability for Failure to do so could result in engine or
emission control system damage not covered by
Warning! G
our service intervals. Therefore, only use
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
approved engine oils and oil filters re- During vehicle operation, the boiling point of
quired for vehicles with Maintenance Engine oil additives the brake fluid is continuously reduced
System (U.S. vehicles) or FSS PLUS (Cana- through the absorption of moisture from the
da vehicles). For a listing of approved en- Do not blend oil additives with engine oil. atmosphere. Under extremely strenuous op-
gine oils and oil filters, refer to the Factory They may damage the engine. erating conditions, this moisture content
Approved Service Products pamphlet, or can lead to the formation of bubbles in the
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Damage or malfunctions resulting from system, thus reducing the system’s efficien-
Light Truck Center. blending oil additives are not covered by cy.
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
! Using engine oils and oil filters of Therefore, the brake fluid must be replaced
specification other than those expressly Air conditioning refrigerant regularly. Refer to your vehicle’s
required for the Maintenance System Maintenance Booklet for replacement inter-
(U.S. vehicles) or FSS PLUS (Canada vehicles), R-134a (HFC) refrigerant and special PAG val.
or changing of oil and oil filter at change intervals
lubricating oil are used in the air condition-
longer than those called for by the Maintenance
System (U.S. vehicles) or FSS PLUS (Canada ve- ing system. Only brake fluid approved by
hicles) will result in engine or emission control Never use R-12 (CFC) or mineral-based lu- Mercedes-Benz is recommended. Your
system damage not covered by the bricating oil. Otherwise damage to the authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Center will provide you with additional in-
system will occur.
formation.
546
Technical data
Premium unleaded gasoline ! To maintain the engine’s durability and per- Gasoline additives (gasoline engine)
(gasoline engine) formance, premium unleaded gasoline must be
used. If premium unleaded is not available and A major concern among engine manufac-
low octane fuel is used, follow these precau- turers is carbon build-up caused by gaso-
Warning! G tions: line. Mercedes-Benz recommends only the
앫 Have the fuel tank only partially filled with use of quality gasoline containing additives
Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous. unleaded regular and fill up with premium that prevent the build-up of carbon depos-
It burns violently and can cause serious unleaded as soon as possible. its.
injury. 앫 Avoid full throttle driving and abrupt acceler-
ation.
After an extended period of using fuels
Never allow sparks, flame or smoking mate- without such additives carbon deposits
rials near gasoline! 앫 Do not exceed an engine speed of 3000 rpm
can build up, especially on the intake
if the vehicle is loaded with a light load such
Turn off the engine before refueling. as two persons and no luggage. valves and in the combustion area, leading
to engine performance problems such as:
Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid in- 앫 Do not exceed 2/3 of maximum accelerator
haling fumes and skin or clothing contact, pedal position if the vehicle is fully loaded or 앫 Warm-up hesitation
extinguish all smoking materials. operating in mountainous terrain.
앫 Unstable idle
Direct skin contact with fuels and the inha-
앫 Knocking/pinging
lation of fuel vapors can damage your
health. 앫 Misfire
앫 Power loss
547
Technical data
In areas where carbon deposits may be Fuel requirements These blends must also meet all other fuel
encountered due to lack of availability of requirements, such as resistance to spark
gasolines which contain these additives, knock, boiling range, vapor pressure, etc.
Gasoline engine
Mercedes-Benz recommends the use of
additives approved by us for use on Only use premium unleaded fuel. Diesel engine
Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Refer to Factory 앫 The octane number (posted at the Only use commercially available vehicular
Approved Service Products pamphlet for a pump) must be 91 min. It is an average diesel fuels No. 2 or No. 1 (ASTM D975 No.
listing of approved product(s). Follow of both the Research (R) octane num- 2-D or No. 1-D).
directions on product label. ber and the Motor (M) octane number:
To prevent malfunctions, diesel fuel with
Do not blend other fuel additives with fuel. (R+M)/2). This is also known as the
improved cold flow characteristics is of-
This only results in unnecessary costs and ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.
fered in the winter months. Check with
may be harmful to the engine operation. Unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates your fuel retailer.
Damage or malfunction resulting from such as ethanol, IPA, IBA and TBA can be
poor fuel quality or from blending addition- used provided the ratio of any one of these ! Do not fill the tank with gasoline. Do not
blend diesel fuel with gasoline or kerosine. The
al fuel additives other than those tested oxygenates to gasoline does not
fuel system and engine will otherwise be dam-
and approved by us for use on exceed 10%; MTBE must not exceed 15%. aged, which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz vehicles listed in the The ratio of methanol to gasoline must not Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Factory Approved Service Products exceed 3% plus additional cosolvents.
pamphlet are not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Using mixtures of ethanol and methanol is
not allowed. Gasohol, which contains
10% ethanol and 90% unleaded gasoline,
can be used.
548
Technical data
Coolants If the antifreeze mixture is effective to To provide important corrosion protection,

-22°F (-30°C), the boiling point of the cool- the solution must be at least 45% anticor-
The engine coolant is a mixture of water ant in the pressurized cooling system is rosion/antifreeze (equivalent to freeze
and anticorrosion/antifreeze, which reached at approximately 266°F (130°C). protection to approx. - 22°F [-30°C]). If
provides: you use a solution that is more than 55%
The coolant solution must be used year
앫 Corrosion protection anticorrosion/antifreeze (freeze protec-
round to provide the necessary corrosion
tion to approx. - 49°F [-45°C]), the engine
앫 Freeze protection protection and increase boil-over protec-
temperature will increase due to the lower
tion. Refer to Maintenance Booklet for
앫 Boiling protection (by increasing the heat transfer capability of the solution.
replacement interval.
boiling point) Therefore, do not use more than this
Coolant system design and coolant used amount of anticorrosion/antifreeze.
The cooling system was filled at the factory determine the replacement interval. The
with a coolant providing freeze protection If the coolant level is low, water and
replacement interval published in the
to approximately -35°F (-37°C) and corro- MB 325.0 anticorrosion/antifreeze should
Maintenance booklet is only applicable if
sion protection. be used to bring it up to the proper level
MB 325.0 anticorrosion/antifreeze solu-
(have cooling system checked for signs of
! Add premixed coolant solution only. Adding tion or other Mercedes-Benz approved
leakage). Please make sure the mixture is
water and MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze products of equal specification (see
in accordance with label instructions.
separately from each other, could cause engine Factory Approved Service Products
damage not covered by the pamphlet) are used to renew the coolant The water in the cooling system must meet
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. concentration or bring it back up to the minimum requirements, which are usually
proper level. satisfied by normal drinking water. If you
are not sure about the water quality, con-
sult an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light
Truck Center.
549
Technical data
Anticorrosion/antifreeze
Your vehicle contains a number of aluminum parts. (Failure to use such anti- Before the start of the winter season (or
aluminum parts. The use of aluminum corrosion/antifreeze coolant will result in once a year in hot southern regions), you
components in motor vehicle engines ne- a significantly shortened service life.) should have the anticorrosion/antifreeze
cessitates that anticorrosion/antifreeze Therefore, the following product is strongly
concentration checked. The coolant is also
coolant used in such engines be recommended for use in your vehicle:
regularly checked each time you bring your
specifically formulated to protect the Mercedes-Benz 325.0 anticorrosion/anti-
vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Light Truck Center for service.
freeze agent.
Anticorrosion/antifreeze quantity
Model Approx. freeze protection

– 35°F (– 37°C) – 49°F (– 45°C)
ML 320 CDI 5.1 US qt (4.75 l) 5.5 US qt (5.2 l)
ML 350 5.1 US qt (4.75 l) 5.5 US qt (5.2 l)
ML 500 5.4 US qt (5.0 l) 5.8 US qt (5.5 l)
ML 63 AMG 6.0 US qt (5.75 l) 6.7 US qt (6.3 l)
550
Technical data
Windshield washer and headlamp Windshield and headlamp washer fluid

cleaning* system mixing ration
For temperatures above freezing point, use
Both the windshield washer and headlamp
MB Windshield Washer Concentrate
cleaning* system are supplied from the
“MB SummerFit” and water:
windshield washer fluid reservoir.
앫 1 part “MB SummerFit” to 100 parts
The windshield and headlamp washer fluid
water
reservoir has a capacity of approximately
8.1 US qt (7.7 l). (1.34 fl oz [40 ml] “MB SummerFit” to
1 gal [4.0 l] water)
왘 Refill the reservoir with MB Windshield
Washer Concentrate and water (or con- For temperatures below freezing point, use
centrate and commercially available MB Windshield Washer Concentrate
premixed windshield washer sol- “MB SummerFit ” and commercially avail-
vent/antifreeze, depending on ambient able premixed windshield washer
temperatures). solvent/antifreeze:
앫 1 part “MB SummerFit” to 100 parts
Warning! G solvent
(1.34 fl oz [40 ml]“MB SummerFit” to
Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly flamma-
1 gal [4.0 l] solvent)
ble. Do not spill washer solvent/antifreeze
on hot engine parts, because it may ignite
and burn. You could be seriously burned.
551
552
Index
A Air conditioning refrigerant 546 Alarm system see Anti-theft systems

ABS 96 Air conditioning system see Alignment bolt (vehicle tool kit) 470, 500
Indicator lamp 414 Climate control or Automatic climate Anticorrosion/antifreeze 550
Messages in the multifunction control (3-zone)* Antiglare, Interior rear view mirror 200
display 430 Air conditioning, Cooling 216, 230 Antiglare, Rear view mirrors* 201
Off-road - ABS 97 Air distribution, Front 212, 226 Antilock Brake System see ABS
Accelerator position, automatic Air distribution, Rear 219, 234 Anti-theft systems 104
transmission 191 Air pressure see Tire inflation pressure Anti-theft alarm system 103, 104
Accessory weight 394 Air pump, electric (ML 63 AMG) 502 Immobilizer 103
Accident 64 Air recirculation mode 214, 228 Aquaplaning see Hydroplaning
Active head restraint 80, 128, 479 Air suspension package* 269 Armrest storage compartments
Adaptive Damping System (ADS)* 269 Adaptive Damping System Front 296
Air bags 71 (ADS)* 269 Ashtrays* 300
Children 73, 82 Messages in the multifunction Aspect ratio 394
Front passenger front air bag off display 467 ATF 362
indicator lamp 31, 89, 426 Vehicle level control* 270 Attaching a trailer 344
Front, Driver 75 Air vents 219 Audio menu 159
Front, Passenger 75 Air vents, Front 212, 226 CD operation 161
Occupant Classification System Air vents, Rear 235 Radio operation 160
(OCS) 85 Air volume 212, 227 Satellite radio* operation
Safety guidelines 73 (USA only) 160
Side impact (front and rear*) 76 Auto-dimming*, Rear view mirrors 201
Window curtain 76 Automatic central locking,
Control system 176
553
Index
Automatic climate control (3-zone)* 220 Automatic transmission 54 B

Air conditioning, Cooling 230, 231 Accelerator position 191 Backrest
Air distribution, Front 226 Automatic shift program Seat 44
Air distribution, Rear 234 (ML 63 AMG only) 196 Seat, Lumbar support 130
Air recirculation mode 228 Emergency operation Seat, Multicontour* 130
Air vents, Front 226 (Limp-Home Mode) 198 Backup lamps
Air volume 227 Gear ranges 193 Messages in the
Control panel, Front 222 Gear selector lever 54, 185 multifunction display 458
Control panel, Rear 232 Gear shifting malfunctions 198 Replacing bulbs 490
Deactivating system 224 Hill start assist system 192 Bar 395
Defogging 227 Kickdown 191 BAS 97
Defrosting 227 Kickdown, manual shift program Lamps in instrument cluster 414
Maximum cooling, MAX COOL 228 (ML 63 AMG only) 198 Messages in the
Rear passenger compartment 232 Manual shift progam multifunction display 430
Rear window defroster 205 (ML 63 AMG only) 196 Basic carrier bars* 281
Residual engine heat (REST) 232 Program mode selector switch Batteries, SmartKey
Using driver-side settings for (ML 63 AMG only) 195 Check lamp 108, 112
all temperature zones 231 Shift program (ML 63 AMG only) 195 Checking battery condition 111
Automatic headlamp mode 137 Shifting procedure 188 Messages in the
Automatic lighting control, Interior Starting the engine 54 multifunction display 446
lighting 143 Steering wheel gearshift control 194 Replacing 480
Automatic locking when driving 126 Towing a trailer 192 Battery, Vehicle 507
Automatic shift program Transmission fluid level 362 Charging 514
(ML 63 AMG only) 196 Transmission positions 189 Disconnecting and connecting 509
Automatic Transmission Fluid see ATF Jump starting 515
Removing and installing 509
554
Index
Bead 395 C CHECK ENGINE malfunction

Belt reel 291 California retail buyers and lessees, indicator lamp 417, 418
Beverage holder see Cup holder Important notice for 11 Checking tire pressure electronically with
Block heater (Canada only) 400 Camera see Rear view camera* the Advanced Tire Pressure Monitoring
Bolts, Collapsible tire Can holder see Cup holder System (Advanced TPMS)*,
(ML 63 AMG only) 474 Capacities and recommended (Canada only) 381
Bolts, Minispare wheel fuel/lubricants 543 Checking tire pressure electronically with
(except ML 63 AMG) 473 Card holder 32, 35, 299 the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Brake fluid 546 Cargo compartment cover blind 286 (TPMS), (USA only) 379
Checking 354 Cargo tie-down rings 283 Checklist
Messages in the Carpets, Cleaning 411 Off-road driving 336
multifunction display 449 Catalytic converter Returning from off-road driving 341
Brake lamp (gasoline engine) 349 Children in the vehicle 82
Cleaning lenses 408 CD changer* 161, 294 Air bags 73, 82
Messages in the CD player 161 Blocking rear door window
multifunction display 458 Center console operation 93
Replacing bulbs 490 Lower part 32 Indicator lamp, Front passenger front
Brake pads 326 Upper part 31 air bag 89
Messages in the Central locking Infant and child restraint systems 77,
multifunction display 447 Automatic 126 82
Brakes 326 Locking/unlocking from LATCH-type child seat anchors 91
Warning lamp 415 the inside 126 Occupant Classification System
Break-in period 324 Switch 126 (OCS) 85
Bulbs, replacing see Replacing bulbs Certification label 530 Cigarette lighter* 301
Button for Voice control*
system 30, 148
555
Index
Climate control 206 COMAND system see separate operating Control system submenus 151, 153, 166
Air conditioning, Cooling 216 instructions Comfort* 177
Air distribution, Front 212 Combination switch 59, 60, 62, 140 Instrument cluster 167, 168
Air distribution, Rear 219 Compass 321 Lighting 171
Air recirculation mode 214 Adjustment 174 Time/Date 169
Air vents, Front 212 Calibration 175 Vehicle 174
Air volume 212 Calling up the compass 321 Coolant 362, 549
Control panel*, Rear 217 Control and operation of radio Anticorrosion/antifreeze
Control panel, Front 208 transmitters 348 mixing ratio and quantity 550
Deactivating system 210 Control system 147 Capacities 543
Defogging 213 Multifunction display 147 Checking coolant level 354, 362
Defrosting 213 Multifunction steering wheel 148 Messages in the multifunction
Rear window defroster 205 Resetting to factory default 165 display 450, 452
Residual engine heat (REST) 216 Control system menus 147 Temperature 350
Clock 27, 169 AIRMATIC*/Compass 162 Temperature display 154
Setting time 169 AMG menu 156 Corner-illuminating front fog lamps* 140
Cloth upholstery, Audio 159 Messages in the
Cleaning and care of 412 Distronic* 162 multifunction display 458
Cockpit 24 Nav* 161 Replacing bulbs 488
Cockpit Management and Data System Settings 164 Crossing obstacles 339
see COMAND system Standard display 154 Cruise control 245
Cold tire inflation pressure 395 Tel* 182 Activating 247
Collapsible tire 538 Trip computer 180 Messages in the
Collapsible tire (ML 63 AMG only) 474 Vehicle configuration 178 multifunction display 431
Collapsible wheel chock 472 Vehicle status message memory 163
556
Index
Cup holders 298 Difficulties Distronic* 250

Cleaning 299 While driving 63 Activating 256
Front center console 299 While starting 57 Cleaning system sensor 408
Front center console, Digital clock see Clock Control system 255
Removing/Installing 299 Digital speedometer 147, 155 Deactivating 259
Rear armrest 299 Dimensions, Vehicle 541 Distance warning function* 179, 263
Curb weight 395 Direction of rotation (tires) 368 Driving hints 261
Current transmission program Displays Messages in the
mode (AMG vehicles only) 147 Digital speedometer 147, 155 multifunction display 432
Distronic* 253 Sensor cover 408
D
Maintenance service indicator 401 Warning and indicator lamps 253
Date display, Setting 169, 170
Messages in the Door
Daytime running lamp mode 138
multifunction display 428 Entry lamps 144
Setting 171
Multifunction display 147 Locking, In an emergency 476
Deep water see Standing water
Outside temperature 147, 155 Locking/unlocking,
Defogging windshield 213, 227
Selecting 168 KEYLESS-GO* 39, 68
Defrosting, Front 213, 227
Symbol messages 446 Locking/unlocking, SmartKey 38, 68
Defrosting, Rear 205
Text messages 430 Messages in the
Delayed shut-off
Vehicle status message 163, 428 multifunction display 455
Exterior lamps 172
Vehicle system settings, Opening from inside/outside 109,
Interior lighting 173
Control system 151, 153, 164 118
Department of Transportation see DOT
Distance to empty (range), Trip Remote door unlock (Tele Aid*) 315
Diesel engine
Computer 180 Unlocking, Mechanical key 475
Preglow indicator lamp 29
557
Index
Door control panel 36 Driving safety systems E

Door handle 36 4-ETS 102 Easy-entry/exit feature
Door windows see Power windows ABS 96 Activating (driver’s seat)* 177
DOT 389, 395 BAS 97 Easy-entry/exit feature* 46
Downhill driving EBP 101 EBP 101
Cruise control 247 ESP® 98 Indicator and warning lamps 416,
Downhill Speed Regulation (DSR) 264 Driving systems 245 448
Messages in the Adaptive Damping System Electrical connections
multifunction display 447 (ADS)* 269 Trailer 343
Drinking and driving 325 Air suspension package* 269 Electrical fuses see Fuses
Driving 51, 325 Cruise control 245 Electrical system, Technical data 540
Abroad 348 Distronic* 250 Electronic Brake Proportioning see EBP
Hydroplaning 330 Downhill Speed Regulation Electronic Stability Program see ESP®
In winter 332, 399 (DSR) 264 Electronic Traction System see 4-ETS
Instructions 51, 325 Off-road driving program 268 Emergency calls
Problems 63 Parktronic system* 274 Tele Aid* 310
Safety systems 96 Rear view camera* 279 Emergency operation
Systems 245 Vehicle level control* 270 Fuel filler flap 477
Through standing water 333 Driving tips 191 Locking/unlocking
Through water 338 Accelerator position 191 the vehicle 475, 476
With Distronic* 261 Kickdown 191 Power tilt/sliding sunroof*,
Driving off 58 Manual operation 478
Emergency operation
(Limp-Home Mode) 198
558
Index
Emergency operations Engine Engine coolant see Coolant

Remote door unlock, Tele Aid* 315 Belt layout (ML 320 CDI) 532 Engine oil 358, 546
Unlocking/opening the tailgate 476 Belt layout (ML 350) 532 Adding 361, 546
Emergency Tensioning Device see ETD Belt layout (ML 500) 532 Additives 546
Emergency, In case of Belt layout (ML 63 AMG) 533 Changing 361, 546
Battery, Jump starting 515 Block heater (Canada only) 400 Checking level 358
Engine shut-down 525 Break-in recommendations 358 Checking level with the
First aid kit 469 Cleaning 406 control system (ML 500 only) 358
Flat tire 497 Compartment 356 Checking with the oil dipstick
Fuses 522 Emergency engine shut-down 525 (except ML 500) 360
Hazard warning flasher 142 Malfunction indicator lamp 29, 449 Consumption 358
Instrument cluster, Indicator Maximum engine speed 146, 534, Filler neck (ML 350, ML 320 CDI) 361
lamps 414, 415, 416, 417, 418, 535 Filler neck (ML 500, ML 63 AMG) 361
419, 420, 421, 422, 423, 424 Messages in the Messages in display 359, 453
Roadside Assistance 12, 312 multifunction display 449 Messages in the
Towing the vehicle 518 Number 531 multifunction display 453
Emission control 350 Starting 54 Recommended engine oils
Information label 531 Starting with KEYLESS-GO* 55 and oil filters 546
System warranties 10 Starting with the SmartKey 55 Engine oil level 358
Vacuum line routing diagram Tachometer 29, 146 ESP® 27, 98
label 531 Technical data 534 Four wheel electronic traction system
Turning off with KEYLESS-GO* 67 with ESP® 98
Turning off with the SmartKey 67 Messages in the
multifunction display 436, 437
Off-road-ESP® 101
Warning lamp 27, 419, 420
559
Index
ETD 80, 423 Flexible Service System PLUS see FSS Front air bags 75
Safety guidelines 73 PLUS Front defroster 213, 227
Expanding cargo compartment 284 Floormats* 303 Front lamps see Headlamps
Exterior rear view mirrors 49, 201 Fluids Front passenger front air bag 70, 75
Folding 202 Automatic transmission fluid 362 Messages in the multifunction
Power folding* 202 Brake fluid 354, 544, 546 display 440, 441, 442, 443
Synchronizing 202 Capacities 543 Front passenger front air bag off indicator
Engine coolant 354, 362, 549 lamp 31, 89, 426, 427
F
Engine oil 358, 546 Front seat heat restraints see
Fastening the seat belts 51
Power steering fluid 544 Head restraints
Filler neck, Engine oil
Windshield washer and Front towing eye 520
(ML 350, ML 320 CDI) 361
headlamp cleaning system* 355, FSS PLUS (Canada vehicles) 361, 402
Filler neck, Engine oil
545, 551 Fuel 353
(ML 500, ML 63 AMG) 361
Fog lamps 139 Additives 547
First aid kit 469
Corner-illuminating front fog Capacities, Fuel tank 545
Flat tire 497
lamps* 140 Consumption statistics 180, 181
Collapsible tire
Messages in the Diesel fuel 545
(ML 63 AMG only) 474, 538
multifunction display 458 Filling the tank 352
Lifting the vehicle 498
Rear fog lamp 139 Fuel filler flap and cap 352, 477
Lowering the vehicle 504
Replacing bulbs 488 Fuel gauge 29
Minispare wheel
4-ETS 102 Fuel tank reserve warning lamp 29,
(except ML 63 AMG) 473
Off-road - 4-ETS 102 420
Mounting the spare wheel 498
Premium unleaded gasoline 353,
Preparing the vehicle 498
547, 548
Spare wheel 538
Requirements, Octane rating 548
560
Index
Fuel cap G Gross Vehicle Weight see GVW

Messages in the multifunction Garage door opener* 316 GTW 395
display 455 Gasoline see Fuel GVW 395
Fuel consumption statistics GAWR 395 GVWR 395
After start 180 Gear range
H
Since last reset 181 Automatic transmission 193
Halogen headlamp see Headlamps
Fuel filler flap 352 Limiting 193
Hands-free microphone 33
Locking/unlocking 352 Shifting into optimal 195
Hard plastic trim items, cleaning 411
Opening 352 Gear selector lever 25, 54, 185
Hazard warning flasher 142
Opening in an emergency 477 Cleaning 411
Head restraints 44, 128
Fuel tank Gearshift pattern 185
Active head restraint 80, 128
Capacity 545 Messages in the
Front seats, Adjusting 44
Filler flap 352 multifunction display 438
Rear seats 81
Fuel, Premium unleaded gasoline 545 Position 188
Rear seats, Adjusting 129
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. 543 Shifting procedure 188
Rear seats, Removing and
Fuses 522 Transmission position 189
installing 129
Fuse box in cargo compartment 523 Global locking/unlocking see Key,
Headlamp aim
Fuse box in engine compartment 523 SmartKey
Adjusting 492
Fuse box in passenger Glove box 294
Headlamp cleaning system* 200, 363
compartment 524 Good visibility 200
Headlamp shut-off delay see Delayed
Fuse chart 469, 522 Gross Axle Weight Rating see GAWR
shut-off, Exterior lamps
Fuse extractor 469, 522 Gross Trailer Weight see GTW
Replacing 522 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating see GVWR
Spare fuses 469, 522
561
Index
Headlamps High beam flasher 59, 140 I

Automatic headlamp mode 137 High beam headlamps Identification labels see Labels
Bi-Xenon* 458, 486 Indicator lamp 29 Ignition 40, 42, 55
Cleaning lenses 408 Messages in the Immobilizer 103
Cleaning system* 200, 363 multifunction display 459 Indicator lamps see Lamps, Indicator and
Halogen 485 Replacing bulbs 483, 485, 486 warning
High beam see High beam flasher Switching on 59, 140 Infant and child restraint systems see
High beam see High beam headlamps High mounted brake lamp 483 Children in the vehicle
Light sensor, Messages in the Hood 356 Inflation pressure see Tires,
multifunction display 460 Messages in the Inflation pressures
Low beam see Low beam headlamps multifunction display 455 Information button see Tele Aid*
Manual headlamp mode 137 Opening 356 Infrared reflecting windshield* 322
Messages in the Hooks Inside door handle 118
multifunction display 458, 459, Loading 284 Instrument cluster 26, 28, 145
460, 461, 462, 463 Horn 25 Illumination brightness 145
Replacing bulbs 482, 483 HVAC see Climate control or Lamps 414
Switch 59, 136 automatic climate control (3-zone)* Messages in display see
Heated seats see Seat heating* Hydroplaning 330 Multifunction display messages
Heated steering wheel* 304 Multifunction display 147
Height adjustment Outside temperature indicator 146
Vehicle level control (Vehicles with Selecting language 167
Air suspension package*) 271 Instrument lighting see Instrument cluster,
Illumination brightness 145
Instrument panel see Instrument cluster
Instruments and controls see Cockpit
562
Index
Interior lighting 142 Locking/unlocking 38, 68, 108 Closing, Power tailgate* 124
Delayed shut-off 173 Locking/unlocking, Global Closing/locking, Power
Interior rear view mirror 49 setting 109 tailgate* 125
Antiglare positions 200 Loss of 111 Factory setting 115
Auto-dimming mirrors* 201 Messages in the Important notes 113
Interior storage spaces see multifunction display 457 Locking/unlocking 39, 68, 112
Storage compartments Opening the power windows Locking/unlocking, Global
Intermittent wiping (Summer opening feature) 239 setting 115
Windshield wipers 61 Opening the tilt/sliding sunroof* Loss of 117
(Summer opening feature) 239 Messages in the
J
Remote control 108 multifunction display 456, 457
Jack 471
Replacing batteries 480 Opening the power windows
Lifting the vehicle 498
Selective setting 110 (Summer opening feature) 239
Jump starting 515
Starter switch positions 40 Opening the tilt/sliding sunroof*
K Starting the engine 54 (Summer opening feature) 239
Key, Mechanical 475 Turning off the engine 67 Remote control 112
Key, SmartKey 108 Unlocking and opening, Replacing batteries 480
Batteries 111, 480 Power tailgate* 111 Selective setting 115
Battery check lamp 108 Key, SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* Start/stop button 41
Checking battery condition 111 Batteries 116, 480 Starter switch positions 40, 41
Closing the power windows Battery check lamp 112 Starting the engine 55
(Convenience closing feature) 239 Checking battery condition 116 Turning off the engine 67
Closing the tilt/sliding sunroof* Closing the power windows Unlocking and opening,
(Convenience closing feature) 239 (Convenience closing feature) 239 Power tailgate* 117
Closing, Power tailgate* 123 Closing the tilt/sliding sunroof*
Factory setting 109 (Convenience closing feature) 239
563
Index
Kickdown 191 Lamps, indicator and warning Preglow indicator, Diesel engine 29
Kilopascal 395 ABS 27, 414 Seat belt telltale 29, 79, 421
Adaptive Damping System Seat belts 422
L
(ADS)* 269 Seat heating* 131
Labels 530
Alarm system 104 Seat ventilation* 132
Certification 530
Battery (SmartKey with SRS 29, 70, 80, 423
Emission control information 531
KEYLESS-GO*) 115 Turn signals 27
Engine number 531
Battery (SmartKey) 110 Vehicle level control* 271
Paintwork code 530
Brakes 27, 415, 416 Language, Setting 167
Vacuum line routing diagram 531
Center console 31, 426 LATCH-type child seat anchors see
Vehicle Identification Number
CHECK ENGINE 29, 417, 418 Children in the vehicle
(VIN) 530
Distance warning lamp* 254 Layout of poly-V-belt drive
Lamp sensor see Light sensor
Downhill Speed Regulation 265 (ML 320 CDI) 532
Lamps, exterior 483
Engine diagnostics 29, 417, 418 Layout of poly-V-belt drive (ML 350) 532
Front 483
ESP® 27, 419, 420 Layout of poly-V-belt drive (ML 500) 532
Light sensor, Messages in the
Fog lamps, Front/rear 136 Layout of poly-V-belt drive
multifunction display 460
Front passenger front air bag off 31, (ML 63 AMG) 533
Messages in display 458
75, 426, 427 Leather upholstery*, Cleaning and
Messages in the multifunction
Fuel reserve 29, 420 care of 412
display 458, 460, 462
High beam headlamps 29 Lever for cruise control 245
Rear 483
Instrument cluster 26, 28, 414, 415, License plate lamps 492
Switch 136
416, 417, 418, 419, 420, 421, 422, Messages in the
423, 424 multifunction display 460
Off-road driving program 268 Replacing bulbs 483, 492
Parktronic* 276 Light alloy wheels, Cleaning 410
564
Index
Light sensor M Maximum load rating, Tires 396

Messages in the Main dimensions 541 Maximum loaded vehicle weight,
multifunction display 460 Maintenance 12, 401 Tires 396
Lighter see Cigarette lighter* Calling up service indicator MB Tex upholstery, Cleaning and
Lighting, Exterior and interior 136 display 403 care of 412
Limp-Home Mode 198, 417, 418 Clearing service indicator Mechanical key 475
Loading see Vehicle loading message 402 Memory function* see Seats
Locator lighting 139, 172 FSS PLUS (Canada vehicles) 402 Menus see Control system menus
Lock buttons, KEYLESS-GO* Maintenance System Messages in display see
Outside door handle 68 (U.S. vehicles) 401 Multifunction display messages
Locking the vehicle see Key Resetting service indicator 403 Microphone, Hands-free 33
Loss of keys, Mechanical key 111 Service indicator message 401 Minispare wheel see Spare wheel
Loss of keys, SmartKey 111 Service term exceeded 402 Mirrors
Loss of keys, SmartKey with Vehicle Maintenance System Adjusting 49
KEYLESS-GO* 117 (U.S. vehicles) 401 Auto-dimming rear view
Loss of Service and Warranty Information Manual headlamp mode see Headlamps mirrors* 201
Booklet 529 Manual shift progam Exterior rear view mirror 49
Low beam headlamps (ML 63 AMG only) 196 Interior rear view mirror 49, 200
Messages in the Manual shift program (ML 63 AMG)
multifunction display 460 Activating 196
Replacing bulbs 483 Deactivating 198
Switching on 59, 136 Maximum cooling, MAX COOL* see
Lubricants 543 Automatic climate control
Lumbar support 130 (3-zone)* 228
565
Index
MON 353, 548 Fog lamps, Front 458 N

Multicontour seat* 130 Fog lamps, Rear 461 Navigation system* 161
Multifunction display 147 Front passenger front air bag 440, See separate COMAND system
Changing settings see Control 441, 442, 443 operating instructions
system menus and Control system Fuel cap 455 Net, Parcel 297
submenus Gear selector lever 438 Net, Partition* 287
Selecting display 168 Headlamps 458, 460, 461, 463 Neutral gear position, Automatic
Selecting language 167 Hood 455 transmission 185, 189
Multifunction display messages 428 Key, SmartKey 457 New vehicle, Break-in period 324
ABS 430 Key, SmartKey with Night security illumination 139, 172
Air suspension package* 467 KEYLESS-GO* 456, 457 Normal occupant weight 396
Brake fluid 449 Lamps 458, 460, 461, 463 Number, Vehicle Identification (VIN) 530
Brake lamps 458 Low tire pressure 444, 465, 466
O
Brake pads 447 Parking brake 438, 448
Occupant distribution 396
Check engine 449 Parking lamps 459
Occupant safety 70
Coolant 452 Tele Aid* 464
Active head restraint 80
Cruise control 431 Telephone* 464
Air bags 71
Distronic* 432 Turn signals 463
Children and air bags 73, 82, 84
Doors 455 Vehicle battery 446
Children in the vehicle 82
Downhill Speed Regulation 447 Windshield washer fluid 464
Fastening the seat belt 51
EBP 448 Multifunction steering wheel 30, 148
Front passenger front air bag off
Engine coolant 450, 452 Button operation 148
indicator lamp 86, 89, 90
Engine oil 453
Infant and child restraint systems 82
ESP® 419
566
Index
LATCH-type child seat anchors 91 Ornamental moldings, Cleaning 407 Parking position*
OCS 85 Outside temperature see Displays Exterior rear view mirrors 178, 202
OCS, Messages in the multifunction Overdue maintenance service term 402 Parktronic* 31, 274
display 440, 441, 442, 443 Overhead control panel 33 Cleaning system sensors 408
Seat belts 51, 73 Oxidation catalyst (diesel engine) 349 Minimum distance 276
OCS 85 Range 275
P
Self-test 90 Switching on/off 277
Paintwork code 530
Odometer 146, 147, 154 System malfunction 278
Paintwork, Cleaning 405
Off-road - 4-ETS 102 System sensors 275
Panic alarm 95
Off-road - ABS 97 System sensors, Cleaning 408
Parcel net
Off-road - ESP® 101 Warning indicators 25, 276
Front passenger footwell 298
Off-road driving Partition net* 287
Front seat backrests 298
Checklist 336, 341 Parts service 528
Parking 65, 329
Crossing obstacles 339 PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp see
On hills 65
Driving instructions for Front passenger front air bag off
Over things that burn, Potential
off-road driving 333 indicator lamp
consequences 65, 349
Driving through water 338 Passenger compartment 348
Parking brake 57, 65
Returning 341 Fuse box 524
Lamps, Indicator and warning 415
Rules 335 Interior lighting 142
Messages in the
Special driving features 334 Interior rear view mirror 33
Steep terrain 336 Parcel net in front passenger
Releasing 57
Off-road driving program 268 footwell 298
Parking lamps
Oil level see Engine oil, Checking level Passenger safety see Occupant safety
Messages in the
One-touch gearshifting 194 Pedals 325
Operating safety 17 Phone see Telephone*
Replacing bulbs 487
Operator’s Manual 10 Plastic and rubber parts, cleaning 411
567
Index
Poly-V-belt drive Power windows 236 R

Layout (ML 320 CDI) 532 Cleaning 410 Radio
Layout (ML 350) 532 Convenience closing feature 239 Audio menu, Control system 159
Layout (ML 500) 532 Door windows 236 Selecting station 160
Layout (ML 63 AMG) 533 Opening/closing 236 Selecting station (satellite*) 160
Positions (Memory function*) see Seats Rear door windows, Blocking Radio transmitters 348
Pounds per square inch see PSI operation 93 Range (distance to empty) 181
Power assistance 326 Summer opening feature 239 Range of the sensors
Power outlets 302 Synchronizing, Door windows 238 Parktronic* 275
Power seat see Seats, Power Practical hints 469 Reading lamp, front 142
Power tilt/sliding sunroof* 241 Premium unleaded gasoline 547 Reading lamp, rear interior 144
Convenience closing feature 239 Problems Rear automatic climate control 232, 235
Opening/closing 241 While driving 63 Rear center console ashtray see Ashtray*
Opening/closing in an With starting see Starting difficulties Rear climate control* 217
emergency 478 With the vehicle 18 Rear door windows
Stopping 239 Product information 9 Blocking operation 93
Summer opening feature 239 Production options weight 396 Rear fog lamp see Fog lamps
Synchronizing 244 Program mode selector switch Rear lamps see Tail lamps
Power washer 405 (ML 63 AMG only) 195 Rear seat head restraints see
PSI 396 Head restraints
Push-starting see Tow-starting Rear towing eye 520
568
Index
Rear towing eye, Vehicles with Sport Replacing bulbs 482 Reset tool
Package* 520 Additional turn signals, Exterior rear Active head restraints,
Rear view camera* 279 view mirrors 489 Depository 479
Rear view mirrors see Mirrors Backup lamps 482, 490 Residual heat and ventilation 216, 232
Rear window defroster 205 Brake lamps 482, 490 Reverse gear position, Automatic
Rear window wiper/washer 62 Corner-illuminating front fog transmission 185, 189
Rear windows see Power windows lamps* 482, 483, 488 Rims 396, 536
Rear wiper blade 495 Fog lamp, Rear 482, 490 Roadside Assistance 12
Recommended tire inflation Fog lamps, Front 482, 483, 488 Roadside Assistance button see Tele Aid*
pressure 396 High beam headlamps 482, 483, 486 RON 353, 548
Recovery services, Stolen vehicle License plate lamps 482, 492 Roof rails 281
(Tele Aid*) 315 Low beam headlamps 482, 483, 485 Rubber parts, Cleaning 411
Refrigerant, Air conditioning 546 Parking/standing lamps 482, 487, Run Flat Indicator (Canada only) 377
Refueling 352 490, 491
S
Regular checks 354 Side marker lamps, Front 482, 483,
Safety
Reminder, Seat belt see Seat belts, Telltale 485, 488
Driving safety systems 96
Remote control Side marker lamps, Rear 482, 490
Occupant safety 70
SmartKey 108 Tail lamps 482, 483, 490, 491
Reporting safety defects 19
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* 112 Turn signal lamps, Front 482, 483,
Safety belts see Seat belts
Remote door unlock, Tele Aid* 315 487
Satellite radio* 160
Removing rear seat cushions (Vehicles Turn signal lamps, Rear 482, 490
Seat belt force limiter 80
with cargo management system*) 292 Reporting safety defects 19
Reset button, In instrument cluster 165
569
Index
Seat belts 77 Ventilation* 132 Settings

Children in the vehicle 82 Securing cargo 283 Adaptive Damping System
Cleaning 412 Cargo tie-down rings 283 (ADS)* 269
Fastening 51 Hooks 284 Air suspension* 269
Height adjustment 53 Selector lever see Gear selector lever Clock 169
Messages in the Self-test Comfort functions* 177
multifunction display 421, 422 Lamps in the instrument cluster 414 Control system menus 150, 152
Proper use of 53, 78 OCS 90 Control system submenus 151, 153,
Safety guidelines 73 Tele Aid* 309 166
Telltale 29, 77, 421 Vehicle battery 507 Date 153, 166, 169
Warning lamp 422 Service and warranty information 10 Daytime running lamp mode 171
Seat cushion depth see Seats Service intervals see Maintenance, Service Factory, SmartKey 109
Seat heating* see Seats indicator Factory, SmartKey with
Seat ventilation* see Seats Service life KEYLESS-GO* 115
Seating capacity 370 Tires 366 Individual, Vehicle 164
Seats 43, 128 Service see Maintenance Instrument cluster 167
Adjusting 43 Service system see FSS PLUS Language, multifunction display 167,
Cushion depth, Multicontour (Canada vehicles) or 168
seat* 130 Maintenance System (US vehicles) Lighting 171
Folding the backrest forward 284 Service, Parts 528 Memory function* 135
Heating* 131 Resetting all, Control system 165
Lumbar support 130 Selective, SmartKey 110
Memory function* 134 Selective, SmartKey with
Multicontour seat* 130 KEYLESS-GO* 115
Returning seat backrest to original Time 169
position 286 Vehicle configuration 178
570
Index
Vehicle level control* 270 Speed settings Steering wheel gearshift control
Shift program (ML 63 AMG only) 195 Cruise control 247 Automatic transmission 194
Shifting Distronic* 256 Stolen Vehicle Recovery services 315
Automatic transmission 54 Speedometer 27, 253 Storage compartments 34, 294
Shifting, Automatic transmission 185 Spinning see Tires, Direction of rotation Armrest, Front 296
Side impact air bags 76 SRS 78 Cup holder 299
Side marker lamps Indicator lamp 29, 423 Cup holders 299
Cleaning lenses 408 Messages in the Door pockets 34
Messages in the multifunction display 423 Front center console 296
multifunction display 461 Standing lamps 136 Glove box 294
Replacing bulbs 483, 488, 491 Replacing bulbs 482, 483, 487, 490 Parcel net, Front passenger
Side windows see Power windows Standing water, Driving through 338 footwell 298
Sidewall 396 Starter switch 25, 40 Parcel nets, Front seat backrest 298
SmartKey see Key, SmartKey Positions 40 Rear seats, In front of 297
SmartKey see Key, SmartKey with Starting difficulties, Engine 57 Storing tires 367
KEYLESS-GO* Starting, Engine 54 Stranded vehicle 521
Snow chains 400 Steep terrain, Driving 336 Submenus see Control system submenus
Snow tires see Winter tires Steering column 47, 48 Sun visors 203
Spare fuses 469 Steering wheel 46 Sunroof see Power tilt/sliding sunroof*
Spare wheel 538 Adjustment, Electrically* 48 Suspension tuning see Air suspension
Bolts 470 Adjustment, Manually 47 package*
Mounting 498 Buttons 30, 148 Symbols used in this Operator’s
Wheel bolts 501 Cleaning 411 Manual 16
Spare wheel (except ML 63 AMG) 473
571
Index
T Tar stains 405 Tele Aid* 308

Tachometer 29, 146 Technical data 527 Call priority 314
Overspeed range 146 Air conditioning refrigerant 546 Emergency calls 310
Tail lamps 490 Brake fluid 544, 546 Hands-free microphone 33
Cleaning lenses 408 Capacities fuels, coolants, lubricants Information 313
Messages in the etc. 543, 544 Initiating an emergency call
multifunction display 462 Coolant 549 manually 311
Replacing bulbs 483, 491 Dimensions, Vehicle 541 Messages in the
Tailgate Electrical system 540 multifunction display 464
Closing 121 Engine 534 Remote door unlock 315
Closing from the inside, Engine oil 546 Roadside Assistance 312
Electrically* 121 Engine oil additives 546 SOS button 311
Closing from the outside Fuel requirements 548 Stolen Vehicle Recovery
(vehicles without Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. 543 services 315
KEYLESS-GO*) 123 Gasoline additives 547 System self-check 309
Opening 119 Main dimensions 541 Telephone cradle*
Opening from the inside, Premium unleaded gasoline 547 Changing 307
Electrically* 119 Rims 536
Opening from the outside 119 Tires 536
Unlocking and opening the tailgate in Weights 542
an emergency 476 Windshield washer and headlamp
Unlocking and opening with cleaning system* 545
KEYLESS-GO*, Power Windshield washer and headlamp
tailgate* 117 cleaning* system 551
Unlocking and opening with SmartKey,
Power tailgate* 111
572
Index
Telephone* 305 Temperature Tire and Loading Information

Answering/ending a call 183 Coolant 154 Placard 369
Changing mobile phone cradle 307 Display mode, Status indicator 168 Terminology 394
Dialing a number from the phone Interior temperature 211 Tire Identification Number see TIN
book 183 Interior temperature, setting see Tire inflation pressure
Ending a call 183 Climate control or Automatic climate Checking manually 375
Hands-free microphone 33 control (3-zone)* Checking tire pressure electronically
Inserting in cradle 306 Outside temperature 155 with the Advanced Tire Pressure
Installing a different mobile phone Sensor, Interior temperature 208, Monitoring System (Advanced
cradle 308 222 TPMS)*, (Canada only) 381
Messages in the Sensor, Outside temperature 146 Checking tire pressure electronically
multifunction display 464 Setting display unit 155 with the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Operation 182 Tether attachment points, see Children in System (TPMS), (USA only) 379
Phone book 183 the vehicle Recommended tire inflation
Redialing 184 Three-zone Automatic climate control see pressure 374
Removing from cradle 307 Automatic climate control (3-zone) *
Telescoping rod 292 Ticket holder 299
Tie-down rings 283
Tightening torque
Wheel bolts 504
Tilt/sliding sunroof* see Power tilt/sliding
sunroof*
Time 169
TIN 389, 396
573
Index
Tires 365, 536 Loading terminology 394 Temperature 375, 393

Advanced Tire Pressure Monitoring Loading the vehicle 368 Terminology 394
System (Advanced TPMS)*, Low tire pressure telltale 424 TIN 389, 396
(Canada only) 381 Low tire pressure telltale, Canada Tire Identification Number see TIN
Air pressure 394 only 27 Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Care and maintenance 366 Maximum load 397 (TPMS), (USA only) 379
Chains 400 Messages in the TPMS malfunction telltale 424
Cleaning 367 multifunction display 424 Traction 330, 393, 397
Collapsible tire Minispare wheel (except ML 63 Tread 397
(ML 63 AMG only) 474 AMG) 473 Tread depth 367, 399
Collapsible tire, Spare wheel 538 Ply composition and material Treadwear indicators 397
Combination low tire pressure/TPMS used 397 Vehicle maximum load on 397
malfunction telltale, USA only 27 Problems under-/overinflation 384 Wear pattern 398
Direction of rotation, Spinning 368 Retreads 365 Winter tires 399
Driving instructions 329 Rims and tires 536 Tongue Weight Rating see TWR
Hydroplaning 330 Rotating 368 Tools 469
Important guidelines 365 Run Flat Indicator (Canada only) 377 Top tether
Important notes, Tire inflation Service life 366 Children in the vehicle 92
pressure 375 Sizes 385 Towing
Inflation pressure 355, 374, 375 Snow chains 400 Trailer 192, 342, 345
Information placard 369 Spare wheel 498 Towing eye bolt 520
Inspection 366 Spare wheel, Collapsible tire 538
Load rating 385, 386, 396 Speed rating 331, 387, 397
Loading Information 369 Storing 367
574
Index
Towing the vehicle 520, 521 Trip odometer, resetting 146 V

Tow-starting 515, 518 Turn signal lamps Vacuum line routing diagram label 531
Traction 393, 397 Cleaning lenses 408 Vehicle
4-ETS, Driving safety systems 96, Messages in the Battery 507
102 multifunction display 463 Break-in period 324
Trailer Replacing bulbs 483 Care 404
Attaching 344 Turn signals 60 Control system, Settings menu 164
Checking weights 344 Additional in mirrors 483 Dimensions 541
Electrical connections 343 Bulbs 483, 491 Locking/unlocking 38, 65, 108
Hitch* 342 Cleaning lenses 408 Locking/unlocking in an
Loading 343 Indicator lamps 27 emergency 475
Towing 342, 345 Turning off the engine 67 Modifications and alterations,
Weights and ratings 343 TWR (Tongue Weight Rating) 397 Operating safety 17
Transfer case 199 Proper use of 17
U
Transmission position indicator 147 Towing 518
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Transmission see Automatic transmission Washing 404
Standards 397
Traveling abroad 348 Weights 542
Units, Settings
Tread 397 Vehicle and trailer weights and
Speedometer 168
Tread depth 367, 399 ratings 343
Temperature 168
Treadwear indicators 397 Vehicle care 404
Unlocking the vehicle see Key
Trip computer 180
Uphill driving
Cruise control 247
Upholstery
Cleaning and care of 412
Useful features 294
575
Index
Vehicle Identification Number see VIN Vehicle status message memory Washer reservoir level 551
Vehicle jack 470, 471 menu 163 Washing the vehicle 404
Vehicle level control* 270 Vehicle tool kit 469 Wear pattern, Tires 398
Messages in the Vehicle washing 406 Weights, Vehicle 542
multifunction display 467 VIN 531 Wheel
Vehicle lighting 355 Voice control system* Bolts 470
Vehicle loading Button on multifunction steering Change 498
Cargo compartment cover blind 286 wheel 30, 148 Removing 500
Cargo tie-down rings 283 Hands-free microphone 33 Spare 498, 538
Expanding cargo compartment 284 Tightening torque 504
W
Hooks 284 Wheel, Tires and 365
Warning indicators
Load limit 370 Window curtain air bags 76
Parktronic* 276
Loading instructions 281 Windows see Power windows
Warning lamps see Lamps, Indicator and
Loading terminology 394 Windows, cleaning 410
warning
Parcel nets 297 Windshield
Warning sounds
Partition net* 287 Cleaning 410
Distance warning function* 263
Roof rails 281 Cleaning wiper blades 410
Distronic* 254
Terminology 394 Cleaning, Windshield washer fluid 62
Exterior lamps 136
Vehicle Maintenance System Defogging 213, 228
Parking brake 58
(U.S. vehicles) 401 Infrared reflecting* 322
Parktronic* 278
Vehicle maximum load on the tire 397 Washer fluid 363, 551
Seat belt telltale 77
Vehicle Recovery services, Stolen
Warranty coverage 10, 529
(Tele Aid*) 315
Washer fluid see Windshield washer fluid
576
Index
Windshield washer fluid Winter driving 399

Messages in the Block heater (Canada only) 400
multifunction display 464 Snow chains 400
Mixing ratio 551 Tires 399
Refilling 363 Winter driving instructions 332
Reservoir level 363 Winter tires 399
Wiping with 62 Wood trims, cleaning 412
Windshield washer system 363, 551
Windshield wipers 60
Cleaning wiper blades 410
Fast continuous wiping 61
Fast intermittent wiping 61
Rear window wiper/washer 62
Replacing wiper blades 494
Slow continuous wiping 61
Slow intermittent wiping 61
577
578
Service and Literature
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center has trained technicians and original Mercedes-Benz parts to service your vehicle
properly. For expert advice and quality service, contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
If you are interested in obtaining service literature for your vehicle, please contact your authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
We consider this the best way for you to obtain accurate information for your vehicle.
For further information you can find us on the Mercedes-Benz web-site www.mbusa.com or www.mercedes-benz.ca.
Warning! G
To help avoid personal injury, be extremely careful when performing any service work or repairs. Improper or incomplete service or the use of
incorrect or inappropriate parts or materials may damage the vehicle or its equipment, which may in turn result in personal injury.
If you have questions about carrying out any type of service, turn to the advice of an authorized Mercedes-Benz Light Truck Center.
We reserve the right to make changes in design and equipment. Therefore, information, illustrations and descriptions in this
Operator’s Manual might differ from your vehicle. Reprinting, translation and copying, even of excerpts, is not permitted without our
prior authorization in writing.
Press time March 24, 2006
GSP/TIP
Printed in Germany


Ml320 Cdi Operators Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Ml320 Cdi Operators Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Sommer\ Corporate\ Media\ AG

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Introduction .......................................... 9 At a glance .......................................... 21 Getting started................................... 37

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Memory function* ............................. 134

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Driving systems ................................. 245 Useful features .................................. 294

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Oxidation catalyst DOT, Tire Identification Number

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Maintenance Roadside Assistance Additional charges may be applicable for a

Change of address or ownership Operating your vehicle outside the USA

Trademarks: 컄 Page This symbol tells you where to

Reporting safety defects

Information regarding electronic

(Including notice pursuant to California Code § 9951)

Item Page Item Page Item Page

Item Page Item Page Item Page

Item Page Item Page Item Page

Item Page Item Page Item Page

Item Page Item Page

Lower part Item Page

Item Page Item Page

3 Door pocket c Depending on vehicle con-

9 Door pocket f Rear storage compartments 297

The “Getting started” section provides an Unlocking with the SmartKey

Warning! G For more information, see “SmartKey with

SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO* i The KEYLESS-GO start/stop button does

Warning! G Your seat must be adjusted so that you can

Seat cushion tilt Vehicles without memory function*:

Head restraint fore and aft adjustment Steering wheel

i The last set steering wheel position is stored

Mirrors Interior rear view mirror

Warning! G Exterior rear view mirrors

In case of an accident, liquid electrolyte may Warning! G

Warning! G Failure to wear and properly fasten and po-

1 Seat belt outlet

Starting the engine Automatic transmission

Starting with the SmartKey Diesel engine Starting with KEYLESS-GO*

Gasoline engine Diesel engine

Starting difficulties 왘 Get a jump start (컄 page 515).

Driving off ! If you hear a warning signal and the

! Shift the automatic transmission to Switching on headlamps High beam

Wiping with windshield washer fluid Rear window wiper/washer

1 Parking brake pedal

왘 Step firmly on parking brake pedal 1. Turning off the engine

Warning! G i If you hear a warning signal you have

Warning! G 앫 Adjust the driver’s seat as far as possi-

Warning! G Warning! G certain rollovers (window curtain air

Enhanced seat belt reminder system intensity for a maximum of 60 seconds

You cannot remove the active head Rear head restraints

Children in the vehicle Infant and child restraint systems

Infants and small children should be seat-

Occupant Classification System

Furthermore, the occupant weight may ap-

When the OCS senses that the front passen-

컄컄 Self-test Occupant Classification

The override switch is located on the Disabling

Emergency brake maneuver BAS

! Because the ESP® operates automatically, Switching off the ESP®

The ESP® cannot prevent the natural laws of